210000 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM - BidNet K. 09 8415 - Acoustic Stretched-Fabric Wall Panels L. 09 9123 - Interior Painting 2.10DIVISION 10 -- SPECIALTIES A. 10 2601 - Wall and Corner

J-284

STUDENTSERVICESRENOVATIONPHASE IIprepared for

Darton State College

Albany, Georgia

PROJECTMANUAL

0 . .16,ISSUED FOR BID 10.14.16

1 5 1 5

......

J-284

STUDENTSERVICESRENOVATIONPHASE IIprepared for


Albany, Georgia

PROJECTMANUAL

08.29.16,ISSUED FOR BID 10.14.16

1 5 1 5

......

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 00 0110 - 11515 08.29.2016 TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 00 0110TABLE OF CONTENTS

PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS1.01 DIVISION 00 -- PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

00 0110 - Table of ContentsProject DirectoryBid Requirements- Invitation to Bid

Request for ClarificationRequest for Substitution

Design-Bid-Build Construction Contract between Contractor and OwnerBid Requirements

Invitation to BidInstruction to BiddersBid FormStatement of Bidder's QualificationsBid Security Form

General Conditions Table of ContentsTable of ContentsConstruction Contract

Section 7 - FormsPerformance BondPayment BondContractor Affidavit and Certificate of ComplianceSubcontractor Affidavit and Certificate of ComplianceNon Influence AffidavitStatutory AffidavitFive Year Bond on Roofs and WallsSpecimen Certificate of ManufacturerCertificate of InsuranceBond to Discharge ClaimChange Order FormatApplication for Payment FormSubcontractor Retainage Release CertificateFinal Certification of Costs for Capital Asset Accounting

Supplementary General Conditions00 6110 - Contractor Warranty Form00 6120 - Subcontractor Warranty Form

SPECIFICATIONS2.01 DIVISION 01 -- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. 01 1000 - SummaryB. 01 2100 - AllowancesC. 01 2300 - Alternates

......


D. 01 3000 - Administrative RequirementsE. 01 4000 - Quality RequirementsF. 01 4216 - DefinitionsG. 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and ControlsH. 01 5721 - Indoor Air Quality ControlsI. 01 6000 - Product RequirementsJ. 01 6116 - VOC Content RestrictionsK. 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout RequirementsL. 01 7419 - Waste Management and DisposalM. 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals

2.02 DIVISION 02 -- EXISTING CONDITIONS (NOT USED)2.03 DIVISION 03 -- CONCRETE

A. 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete2.04 DIVISION 04 -- MASONRY (NOT USED)2.05 DIVISION 05 -- METALS

A. 05 1200 - Structural Steel FramingB. 05 3100 - Steel DeckingC. 05 5214 - Ornamental Railings

2.06 DIVISION 06 -- WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES A. 06 1000 - Rough CarpentryB. 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework

2.07 DIVISION 07 -- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION A. 07 2100 - Thermal InsulationB. 07 8400 - FirestoppingC. 07 9005 - Joint Sealers

2.08 DIVISION 08 -- OPENINGS A. 08 1213 - Hollow Metal FramesB. 08 1416 - Flush Wood DoorsC. 08 1433 - Stile and Rail Wood DoorsD. 08 3326 - Side Sliding GrillesE. 08 3513.23 - Folding Fire DoorsF. 08 4313 - Aluminum-Framed StorefrontsG. 08 4413 - Glazed Aluminum Curtain WallsH. 08 4600 - Glazed Interior Wall and Door AssembliesI. 08 7100 - Door HardwareJ. 08 8000 - Glazing

2.09 DIVISION 09 -- FINISHES A. 09 2116 - Gypsum Board AssembliesB. 09 2236.23 - Metal LathC. 09 2300 - Gypsum PlasteringD. 09 2400.00 - Cement Plastering

......


E. 09 3000 - TilingF. 09 5100 - Acoustical CeilingsG. 09 5416 - Translucent Ceiling FabricationsH. 09 6500 - Resilient FlooringI. 09 6813 - Tile CarpetingJ. 09 8100 - Acoustical Space Units: Baffles & CloudsK. 09 8415 - Acoustic Stretched-Fabric Wall PanelsL. 09 9123 - Interior Painting

2.10 DIVISION 10 -- SPECIALTIES A. 10 2601 - Wall and Corner GuardsB. 10 2800 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry AccessoriesC. 10 4400 - Fire Protection Specialties

2.11 DIVISION 11 -- EQUIPMENT A. 11 3100 - Residential Appliances

2.12 DIVISION 12 -- FURNISHINGS A. 12 2113 - Horizontal Louver BlindsB. 12 3600 - Countertops

2.13 DIVISION 13 -- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED)2.14 DIVISION 14 -- CONVEYING EQUIPMENT (NOT USED)2.15 DIVISION 15 -- RESERVED (NOT USED) (FOR MECHANICAL, SEE DIVISIONS 21, 22, AND 23)2.16 DIVISION 16 -- RESERVED (NOT USED) (FOR ELECTRICAL, SEE DIVISIONS 25, 26, 27, 28,

AND 29)2.17 DIVISION 17 -- RESERVED (NOT USED)2.18 DIVISION 18 -- RESERVED (NOT USED)2.19 DIVISION 19 -- RESERVED (NOT USED)2.20 DIVISION 20 -- RESERVED (NOT USED)2.21 DIVISION 21 -- FIRE SUPPRESSION

A. 21 0000 - Automatic Sprinkler System2.22 DIVISION 22 -- PLUMBING

A. 22 0000 - Plumbing2.23 DIVISION 23 -- HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)

A. 23 0000 - Mechanical GeneralB. 23 0140 - Schedule of Submittal DataC. 23 0513 - Starters and Disconnect SwitchesD. 23 0515 - Variable Frequency Speed ControllerE. 23 0523 - ValvesF. 23 0529 - Pipe Hangers and SupportsG. 23 0548 - Vibration IsolatorsH. 23 0553 - Identification of Piping SystemsI. 23 0593 - Test and BalanceJ. 23 0700 - Thermal Insulation for Mechanical Systems

......


K. 23 0923 - Building Automation SystemL. 23 2113 - Chilled and Hot Water Piping SystemsM. 23 2120 - Piping AccessoriesN. 23 2300 - Refrigerant and Condensate Drain Piping SystemsO. 23 3100 - Ductwork and AccessoriesP. 23 3600 - Terminal UnitsQ. 23 3700 - Grilles, Registers and DiffusersR. 23 7313 - Modular Air Handling UnitS. 21 8133 - Ductless Split Systems

2.24 DIVISION 24 -- RESERVED (NOT USED)2.25 DIVISION 25 -- INTEGRATED AUTOMATION (NOT USED)2.26 DIVISION 26 -- ELECTRICAL

A. 26 0000 - General Electrical RequirementsB. 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and CablesC. 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical SystemsD. 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical SystemsE. 26 0533 - Raceways and Boxes for Electrical SystemsF. 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical SystemsG. 26 0923 - Lighting Control DevicesH. 26 2200 - Low-Voltage TransformersI. 26 2416 - PanelboardsJ. 26 2726 - Wiring DevicesK. 26 5119 - LED Interior LightingL. 26 5219 - Emergency and Exit Lighting

2.27 DIVISION 27 -- COMMUNICATIONS A. 27 0528 - Pathways for Communications Systems

2.28 DIVISION 28 -- ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY A. 28 3111 - Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System

2.29 DIVISION 29 -- RESERVED (NOT USED)2.30 DIVISION 30 -- RESERVED (NOT USED)2.31 DIVISION 31 -- EARTHWORK (NOT USED)2.32 DIVISION 32 -- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS (NOT USED)2.33 DIVISION 33 -- UTILITIES (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION 00 0110

......

J-284 Darton Student Services II


PROJECT DIRECTORY

Phone: 770/980-0550

Architect

Flynn Finderup Architects

Lars Finderup3330 Cumberland Boulevard, Suite 500,Atlanta, GA 30339

[email protected]

......

PFF, INC. �� REGISTRATIONS: GEORGE M. FLYNN, GA, TN, WI; LARS M. FINDERUP, DENMARK

1355 Terrell Mill Road, Building 1468, Suite 250, Marietta, GA 30067

TELEFAX: 770/234-5881 TELEPHONE: 770/859-0029

REQUEST FOR CLARIFICATION 1515

Project Number: 1515

Project Name: J-284 Darton Student Services II

Project Location: Darton State College

Albany, Georgia

All requests for clarification of the Bid Documents must be submitted by completing the form below

and returning it to Lee Howell via email: [email protected] who in turn will forward these to the

architect for review. Please limit each request to a single issue and reference the related drawing or

specification section in the space provided. Attach additional information as needed. Each question

will be evaluated and clarification, if deemed necessary, will be issued by addendum and distributed

to all known plan holders. Requests for clarification submitted less than 7 calendar days before the

Bid Date will not be considered.

Company Name: ______________________________________________

Contact Name: ______________________________________________

Contact Phone Number: ______________________________________________

Contact Email: ______________________________________________

Related Drawing: ______________________________________________

Related Specification Section: ______________________________________________

Question: ______________________________________________

______________________________________________

______________________________________________

______________________________________________

______________________________________________

......

PFF, INC. �� REGISTRATIONS: GEORGE M. FLYNN, GA, TN, WI; LARS M. FINDERUP, DENMARK

1355 Terrell Mill Road, Building 1468, Suite 250, Marietta, GA 30067

TELEFAX: 770/234-5881 TELEPHONE: 770/859-0029

REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION 1515

Project Number: 1515

Project Name: J-284 Darton Student Services II

Project Location: Darton State College

Albany, Georgia

All requests for substitution must be submitted by completing the form below and returning it to Lee

Howell via email: [email protected] who will then forward the request to the architect for review.

Please limit each request to a single product and reference the related drawing or specification section

in the space provided. Indicate compliance with specified requirements by checking the applicable

boxes. Specifically explain all deviations from specified requirements. Attach additional information

as needed. Do not submit manufacturer's standard brochures. Each request will be evaluated and

approval, if deemed appropriate, will be issued by addendum and distributed to all known plan holders.

Requests for substitution that are insufficiently supported or are submitted less than 7 calendar days

before the Bid Date will not be considered.

Company Name: ______________________________________________

Contact Name: ______________________________________________

Contact Phone Number: ______________________________________________

Contact Email: ______________________________________________

Related Drawing: ______________________________________________

Related Specification Section: ______________________________________________

Product: ______________________________________________

______________________________________________

Warranty Test Results Certifications Performance Criteria

Characteristics Dimensions Colors/Finishes Accessories/Options

......

DBB CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT VERSION 07/06/16

DESIGN-BID-BUILD CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

BETWEEN CONTRACTOR AND OWNER

TO BE USED WITH BOARD OF REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY SYSTEM OF GEORGIA’S

DESIGN PROFESSIONAL (ARCHITECTURAL) CONTRACT

BETWEEN

LEGAL GC FIRM NAME (CONTRACTOR)

AND

BOARD OF REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY SYSTEM OF GEORGIA (OWNER)

For the Use and Benefit of:

DARTON STATE COLLEGE USING AGENCY (INSTITUTION)

PROJECT NO. J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II INCLUDES: Executive Summary of Contents Preface Form of Contract Contract 1 to Contract 3 Bid Requirements pp 1 - 13 Table of Contents pp i to iv General Conditions pp 1 to 73 Forms Forms 1 to Forms 29 Supplementary General Conditions

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY OF CONTENTS

BOARD OF REGENTS DESIGN-BID-BUILD CONTRACT GENERAL CONDITIONS VERSION 07/06/2016

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY OF CONTENTS

FORM OF CONTRACT BID REQUIREMENTS GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION 1 – GENERAL Part 1 - General Part 2 - Contractor’s General Responsibilities and Duties. Part 3 - Owner’s General Responsibilities and Rights. Part 4 - Protection of Persons and Property Part 5 - Bonds, Indemnity, and Insurance Part 6 - Hazardous Conditions and Materials Part 7 - Miscellaneous Provisions. SECTION 2 – PRE-COMMENCEMENT PHASE Part 1 - Pre-commencement Phase Services Part 2 - Construction Documents and Site Plan SECTION 3 – CONSTRUCTION PHASE Part 1 - Construction Phase Services Part 2 - Changes to the Work Part 3 - Time. Part 4 - Correcting the Work, Inspections, Covering and Uncovering Work Part 5 - Subcontractors, Trade Contractors, and Suppliers SECTION 4 – COMPENSATION Part 1 - General. Part 2 - Payments Withheld Part 3 - Liens SECTION 5 - CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS, DISPUTES, AND TERMINATION Part 1 - Owner’s Right to Suspend Work Part 2 - Contract Adjustments and Disputes Part 3 - Termination SECTION 6 – PROJECT COMPLETION Part 1 - Material Completion Part 2 - Final Completion Part 3 - Inspections for Completion of the Work Part 4 - Final Documents Part 5 – Payment for Material Completion and Final Payment Part 6 - Correction of the Work after Final Completion

SECTION 7 – FORMS Performance Bond Payment Bond Georgia Security and Immigration Compliance Act Affidavit(s) Non-Influence Affidavit Statutory Affidavit Five Year Bond on Roofs and Walls Specimen Certificate of Manufacturer Certificate of Insurance Bond to Discharge Claim Change Order Forms Application for Payment Form Subcontractor Retainage Release Certificate Final Certification of Costs

SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

CONTRACT 1 DBB FORM OF CONTRACT PROJECT NUMBER J-284 VERSION 07/06/16 XX/XX/XXXX


BETWEEN CONTRACTOR AND OWNER THIS CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (hereinafter the “Contract”) made this Date day of Month, Year (hereinafter

the “Effective Date”), by and between the BOARD OF REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY SYSTEM OF GEORGIA (hereinafter the

“Owner”), for the use and benefit of DARTON STATE COLLEGE (hereinafter the “Using Agency” or “Institution”) LEGAL

GC Firm Name , (hereinafter the “General Contractor” / “Contractor”), whose address is MUST be a physical address.

NO P.O. Boxes.; Phone: XXX-XXX-XXXX; Fax XXX-XXX-XXXX

(a) Contractor’s FEIN or Tax Identification Number:

(b) Contractor’s Georgia License Type and Number:

(c) Contractor’s Federal Employment Verification Certification: The Contractor is registered with, authorized to use, is using and will continue to use, the federal work authorization

program throughout the term of the contract, and holds the following authorization:

User Identification Number: Date of Authorization: Date

WITNESSETH, that the Contractor and the Owner, for the consideration set forth herein, the adequacy and

sufficiency of which is hereby acknowledged by each party, agree as follows:

Project No. J-284 Project Name and Description: J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II CONSISTING OF THE ALTERATION OF MOSTLY

INTERIOR SPACE WITHIN THE STUDENT SERVICES BUILDING (hereinafter the “Project.”) 1. Existing Documents. The Contractor has reviewed and taken into consideration the Bidding Documents in preparing his bid. 2. The Contract Sum: The Owner shall pay the Contractor for the performance of the contract, subject to additions and deductions provided by approved change orders, in current funds, the Contract Sum as follows, base bid less Deductive Alternate 1: AND /100 DOLLARS ($ ) 3. The Material Completion and Occupancy Date shall be achieved within Days consecutive calendar days beginning the date specified in the Proceed Order. (Or by a date certain – be specific as to what was represented in the Bid Documents – REMOVE THIS STATEMENT PRIOR TO FINALIZING THE CONTRACT!) 4. The agreed daily amount for Liquidated Damages is: $ per day.



5. The agreed daily amount for Time Dependent Overhead Costs is: $ per day.

6. Notice. All notices in accordance with Section 1.1.5 shall be given to the following addresses:

CONTRACTOR: LEGAL GC Firm Name Physical Address, NO P.O. Boxes City, State Zip Attention: CM-POC, Title Phone Number: CM-POC Phone Facsimile Number: CM-POC Fax Email: CM-POC Email address

OWNER: Board of Regents of the University System of Georgia 270 Washington Street, SW, 6th Floor Atlanta, Georgia 30334 Attention: Jim James, Vice Chancellor for Facilities Phone Number: 404-962-3155 Facsimile Number: 404-962-3188

OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE: Board of Regents of the University System of Georgia 270 Washington Street, SW, 6th Floor Atlanta, Georgia 30334 Attention: Kelly Wilson Phone Number: 404-962-3174 Facsimile Number: 404-962-3188 Email: [email protected]

USING AGENCY (Institution): Darton State College 2400 Gillionville Road Albany, Georgia 31707 Attention: Lee Howell, Interim Director of Plant Operations Phone Number: 229-317-6920 Email: [email protected]

DESIGN PROFESSIONAL: Flynn Finderup Architects 3300 Cumberland Boulevard, Suite 500 Atlanta, Georgia 30339 Attention: Lars Finderup, Project Manager Phone Number: 770-980-0550 Email: [email protected]

7. Scope Of The Work: The Contractor shall furnish all the materials, perform all of the Work, and do all things requiredby the Contract Documents.

8. Schedule and Completion: The Pre-commencement Phase Services to be performed under this Contract shallcommence upon the Effective Date of the Contract and be completed within 60 days thereafter. Activities on the Site shall commence on the date specified in the Proceed Order and shall be materially complete in accordance with established Milestones, and not later than the Material Completion and Occupancy Date.

9. Periodic Progress Payments: The Owner shall make progress payments, less retainage, as set forth in Section 4 ofthe General Conditions.

10. Payment for Material Completion: The Contractor may request payment of the remaining contract balance, includingretainage, less amounts credited the Owner or incurred as liquidated damages, and less amounts withheld for the Punchlist by reason of Minor Items or Permitted Incomplete Work (See Paragraph 6.5.3.2). Payment for Material Completion shall be made by a check payable jointly to the Contractor and Surety and shall be mailed to the Surety.



11. Final Payment: Final Payment shall be made within ten days of receipt of the final payment application as set forth inSection 6, Part 2 of the General Conditions, provided that all other requirements of the Contract shall have been met in full.

12. The Contract Documents: This Contract, together with the Bidding Documents and the Bid, shall constitutethe Contract Documents for the Project.

13. Bonds: The Contractor shall furnish both a performance bond and a payment bond and shall pay the premiumsthereon as a Cost of the Work. The Performance Bond shall guarantee the full performance of the Contract.

14. Full Performance: The Owner and the Contractor hereby agree to the full performance of the Contract Documents.

15. Applicable Law: This Contract and all rights, privileges and responsibilities shall be interpreted and construedaccording to the laws of the State of Georgia.

16. No Conflict Of Interest: The Contractor covenants that it presently has no interest and shall not acquire any interest,direct or indirect, that would conflict in any manner or degree with the performance required under this Contract. The Contractor further covenants that, in the performance of this Contract, it shall neither contract with nor employ any person having any such interest.

17. Transactions With State Officials, Ethics: The parties hereto certify that the provisions of law contained in the Actprohibiting full-time appointive officials and employees of the State from engaging in certain transactions affecting the State as defined in O.C.G.A. §§45-10-20–26 and the Governor’s Executive Orders governing ethics, have not and will not be violated in any respect in regard to this contract and further certifies that registration and all disclosures required thereby have been complied with.

18. No Assignment: This Contract and the proceeds of this Contract may not be assigned or sublet as a whole, nor maythe performance thereunder be assigned, without the prior written consent of the Owner.

19. No Waiver: The failure of the Owner at any time to require performance by the Contractor of any provision hereof,shall in no way affect the right of the Owner thereafter to enforce any provision or any part of the Contract, nor shall the failure of the Owner to enforce any breach of any provision hereof to be taken or held to be a waiver of such provision, or as a waiver, modification or rescission of the Contract itself.

20. Boycott of Israel. The Contractor certifies that it is not currently, nor will it engage in during the duration of this contract,a boycott of Israel as defined in the Official Code of Georgia (O.C.G.A. 50-5-85).

21. Full Agreement. The Contract Documents supersede all prior negotiations, discussion, statements, and agreementsbetween Owner and Contractor and constitute the full, complete, and entire agreement between Owner and Contractor. There can be no changes to this Contract by oral means, nor by course of conduct of the parties, nor by custom of the trade. No changes to this Contract will be binding on either party hereto unless such change is properly authorized, in writing, in accordance with Section 3, Part 2 of the General Conditions.

[Remainder of Page Intentionally Left Blank]

[Signatures Begin on Next Page]



IN WITNESS WHEREOF the parties hereto have executed this Contract the day and year first written above.

LEGAL GC FIRM NAME Contractor

ATTEST:

_ (L.S.) BY: ______________________________ (L.S.)

, SECRETARY , PRESIDENT

(SEAL, OVER SIGNATURE) (If not a corporation, signature must be notarized.)

APPROVED: USING AGENCY

BY: PRINT NAME AND TITLE DARTON STATE COLLEGE

WITNESS:

(PRINT NAME / TITLE)

BOARD OF REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY SYSTEM OF GEORGIA, OWNER

BY: (L.S.) SHARON FERGUSON POPE ASSISTANT VICE CHANCELLOR FOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

WITNESS:TERESA CORSO DIRECTOR OF CONTRACTS & SERVICES

Attachments: 1. General Conditions and Forms2. Supplementary General Conditions

BID REQUIREMENTS INVITATION TO BID

BID REQUIREMENTS–1 DBB CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT BID REQUIREMENTS VERSION 07/06/2016

BID REQUIREMENTS

INVITATION TO BID

The Owner will receive sealed bids from Contractors in the Student Center, Building C, Room C-252, 2400 Gillionville Road, Albany, Georgia 31707. Bids must be physically on the table in the Bid Room by 2:00PM, at the time legally prevailing in Atlanta, Georgia on November 17, 2016, for the construction of J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II CONSISTING OF THE ALTERATION OF MOSTLY INTERIOR SPACE WITHIN THE STUDENT SERVICES BUILDING, located in DARTON STATE COLLEGE- ALBANY, Georgia. At the time and place noted above, the bids will be publicly opened and announced.

Digital copies of the Bid Documents can be downloaded from the Georgia Procurement Website, there is no charge for electronic documents.

Bidders are cautioned that acquisition of Bidding Documents through any source other than the Georgia Procurement Website is not advisable. Acquisition of Bidding Documents from unauthorized sources places the bidder at risk of receiving incomplete or inaccurate information upon which to base a bid. Further, all addenda and notices during bid will be posted to the Georgia Procurement Website. It is the bidder's sole responsibility to monitor the site for new postings. There will be a pre-bid conference held on November 1, 2016, at 10:00AM, in the Student Center, Building C, Room C-252, 2400 Gillionville Road, Albany, Georgia 31707. Attendance at this conference is MANDATORY for any Contractor intending to bid on this project. Others may attend if they so desire.

Bidders' attention is called to the Supplementary General Conditions, which establishes minimum qualifications for Contractors bidding this project. The Statement of Qualifications specified shall be submitted in writing to the Owner as required in the Supplementary General Conditions. Bids will not be accepted from Contractors failing to meet the qualifications established or from Contractors failing to submit the required documentation of qualifications.

Contract, if awarded, will be on a lump sum basis. No bid may be withdrawn for a period of thirty-five days after time has been called on the date of opening except in accordance with the provisions of Georgia law. Bids must be accompanied by a Bid Bond made payable to the Owner in an amount equal to not less than five percent of the Bid. Both a performance bond and a payment bond will be required, each in an amount equal to 100 percent of the Contract Sum prior to execution of contract.

The Owner reserves the right in its sole and complete discretion to waive technicalities and informalities. The Owner further reserves the rights in its sole and complete discretion to reject all bids and any bid that is not responsive or that is over the budget. The Owner anticipates that the contract will be awarded to the responsive and responsible bidder who provides the lowest bid within the budget. In judging whether the bidder is responsible, the Owner will consider, but is not limited to, the following:

• Whether the bidder or its principals are currently ineligible, debarred, suspended, or otherwise excluded frombidding or contracting by any state or federal agency, department, or authority;

• Whether the bidder or its principals have been terminated for cause or are currently in default on a public workscontract;

• Whether the bidder can demonstrate sufficient cash flow to undertake the project as evidenced by a Current Ratioof 1.0 or higher;

• Whether the bidder can demonstrate a commitment to safety with regard to Workers' Compensation by having anExperience Modification Rate (EMR) over the past three years not having exceeded an average of 1.2; and

• Whether the bidder’s past work provides evidence of an ability to successfully complete public works projects withinthe established time, quality, or cost, or to comply with the bidder’s contract obligations.

In the event all responsive and responsible bids are in excess of the budget, the Owner, in its sole and absolute discretion and in addition to rejecting all bids, reserves the right either to supplement the budget or to negotiate with the lowest responsive and responsible bidder (after all deductive alternates are taken) but only for the purpose of making changes to the project that will result in a cost to the Owner that is within the budget, as it may be supplemented.

BID REQUIREMENTS INVITATION TO BID


BOARD OF REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY SYSTEM OF GEORGIA

BY: JIM JAMES, VICE CHANCELLOR FOR FACILITIES

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

BID REQUIREMENTS–3

DBB CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT BID REQUIREMENTS VERSION 07/06/2016

BID REQUIREMENTS


1. Basis of Contract. Contract, if awarded, will be on a lump sum basis and will be substantially in accordance with the Contract shown on pages Contract – 1 to Contract – 4. 2. Examination of Site. In undertaking the work under this Contract, the Contractor acknowledges that he has visited the Project Site and has taken into consideration all observed conditions that might affect his work. 3. Surety and Insurance Companies. The Contract provides that the surety and insurance companies must be acceptable to the Owner. Only those sureties listed in the Department of Treasury’s Listing of Approved Sureties (Department Circular 570) are acceptable to the Owner. At the time of issuance, all insurance and bonds must be issued by a company licensed by the Georgia Insurance Commissioner to transact the business of insurance in the State of Georgia for the applicable line of insurance. Such company shall be an insurer (or, for qualified self insurers or group self insureds, a specific excess insurer providing statutory limits) with an A.M. Best Financial Strength Rating of "A-" or better and with an A.M. Best Financial Size Category of Class V or larger. 4. Bidding Documents. The Bidding Documents comprise the Construction Documents, the Invitation to Bid, the Instructions to Bidders, the Bid Form, and all Addenda, upon which the bidder submits a bid. 5. Addenda. All Addenda issued prior to bid date adjust, modify, or change the drawings and specifications as set forth in the Addenda. No Addenda will be issued within five days of the date set for opening bids without an extension of the bid date. All such Addenda are part of the contract. 6. Interpretations. No oral interpretation will be made to bidders as to the meaning of the drawings and specifications. Requests for interpretation of drawings and specifications must be made in writing to the Design Professional not later than six days prior to the date set for receipt of the bids. Failure on the part of the successful bidder to request clarification shall not relieve him as Contractor of the obligation to execute such work in accordance with a later interpretation by the Design Professional. All interpretations made to bidders will be issued in the form of Addenda to the plans and specifications and will be sent to all plan holders of record. Acknowledgement of receipt of such Addenda shall be listed in the Bid Form by the Contractor. 7. Alternates. Unless otherwise stipulated, all alternate bids are deductive. It is in the best interest of the public, and the intent of the Owner is, that the entire Project be constructed within the funds allocated in the Project budget. The acceptance of any deductive alternate will be utilized as a last resort to accomplish the Project without requiring a redesign and rebidding of the Project. Any alternate, or alternates, if taken, will be taken in numerical sequence to the extent necessary. 8. Sales Tax. Unless otherwise provided for in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall include in his bid all sales taxes, consumer taxes, use taxes, and all other applicable taxes that are legally in effect at the time bids are received. 9. Trade Names, Specifications.

(a) No Restriction of Competition. When reference is made in the Contract Documents to trade names, brand names, or to the names of manufacturers, such references are made solely to indicate that products of that description may be furnished and are not intended to restrict competitive bidding. If it is desired to use products of trade or brand names or of manufacturers’ names that are different from those mentioned in the Bidding Documents, application for the approval of the use of such products must reach the hands of the Design Professional at least ten days prior to the date set for the opening of bids (see 9(b) below). This provision applies only to the party making a submittal prior to bid. If approved by Design Professional, the Design Professional will issue an addendum to all bidders. This provision does not prevent the Owner from initiating the addition of trade names, brand names, or names of manufacturers by addendum prior to bid. (b) Request for Approval of Substitute Product. All requests for approval of substitution of a product that is not listed in the Bidding Documents must be made to the Design Professional in writing. For the Design Professional to prepare an addendum properly, an application for approval of a substitute product must be accompanied by a copy of the published recommendations of the manufacturer for the installation of the product together with a complete schedule of changes in the drawings and specifications, if any, that must be made in other work in order to permit the use and installation of the proposed product in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the product. The application to the Design Professional for approval of a proposed substitute product must be accompanied by a




schedule setting forth in which respects the materials or equipment submitted for consideration differ from the materials or equipment designated in the Bidding Documents. (c) Burden of Proof. The burden of proving acceptability of a proposed product rests on the party making the submission. Therefore, the application for approval must be accompanied by technical data that the party requesting approval desires to submit in support of its application. The Design Professional will consider reports from reputable independent testing laboratories, verified experience records showing the reputation of the proposed product with previous users, evidence of reputation of the manufacturer for prompt delivery, evidence of reputation of the manufacturer for efficiency in servicing its products, or any other written information that is helpful in the circumstances. The degree of proof required for approval of a proposed product as acceptable for use in place of a named product or named products is that amount of proof necessary to convince a reasonable person beyond all doubt. To be approved, a proposed product must also meet or exceed all express requirements of the Contract Documents. (d) Issuance of Addenda. If the Design Professional approves the submittal, an addendum will be issued to all prospective bidders indicating the approval of the additional product(s). Issuance of an addendum is a representation to all bidders that the Design Professional in the exercise of his professional discretion established that the product submitted for approval is acceptable and meets or exceeds all express requirements. If a submittal is initially rejected by the Design Professional, but determined to be acceptable to Design Professional after a conference with the Owner, an addendum covering the said submittal will be issued prior to the opening of bids. The successful bidder may furnish no products of any trade names, brand names, or manufacturers' names except those designated in the Contract Documents unless approvals have been published by addendum in accordance with the above procedure. Oral approvals of products are not valid. (e) Conference with the Owner. Any party who alleges that rejection of a submittal is the result of bias, prejudice, caprice, or error on the part of the Design Professional may request a conference with a representative of the Owner, provided: that the request for said conference, submitted in writing, shall have reached the Owner at least six days prior to the date set for the opening of bids, time being of the essence.

10. Employment of Georgia Citizens and Use of Georgia Products. The work provided for in this Contract is to be performed in Georgia. It is the desire of the Owner that materials and equipment manufactured or produced in Georgia shall be used in the work and that Georgia citizens shall be employed in the work at wages consistent with those being paid in the general area in which the work is to be performed. This desire on the part of the Owner is not intended to restrict or limit competitive bidding or to increase the cost of the work; nor shall the fulfillment of this desire be asserted by the Contractor as an excuse for any noncompliance or omission to fulfill any obligation under the contract. 11. Trading with the State Statutes, Ethics. By submitting a bid, the bidder certifies that the provisions of law contained in O.C.G.A. Sections 45-10-20 to 45-10-71, which prohibit officials and employees of the state from engaging in certain transactions with the state and state agencies, and the Governor’s Executive Orders governing ethics, have not and will not be violated in any respect in regard to this contract and further certifies that registration and all disclosures required thereby have been complied with. 12. Georgia Security and Immigration Compliance Act Requirements. No bid will be considered unless the Contractor certifies its compliance with the Immigration reform and Control Act of 1986 (IRCA), D.L. 99-603 and the Georgia Security Immigration Compliance Act OCGA 13-10-91 et seq. The Contractor shall execute the Georgia Security and Immigration Compliance Act Affidavit, as found in Section 7 of the Construction Contract. Contractor also agrees that it will execute any affidavits required by the rules and regulations issued by the Georgia Department of Audits and Accounts. If the Contractor is the successful bidder, contractor warrants that it will include a similar provision in all written agreements with any subcontractors engaged to perform services under the Contract. 13. Owner’s Policy Statement. The policy of the Owner is that minority business enterprises shall have the maximum opportunity to participate in the Owner’s purchasing process. The Owner encourages all minority business enterprises to compete for, win, and receive contracts for goods, services, and construction. In addition, Georgia law provides a state income tax credit available to any business that subcontracts with a minority-owned business. [See O.C.G.A. §48-7-38 and O.C.G.A. §50-5-130. See also Executive Order of the Governor No. A-11-0002-1992.] For more information, please contact the Board of Regents’ Office of Business Development by e-mail at [email protected]. Any questions regarding statements contained hereunder should be directed to {Name, Address, and Telephone Number of Designee, as described in the box below}.




14. Bids.

(a) Bid Opening. Bids will be opened and announced as stated in the Invitation to Bid. (b) Bid Submission. All bids must be submitted on the Bid Form as attached hereto and must be signed, notarized, and sealed by a notary public. All blanks for information entry in bid forms submitted to Owner should be filled. Blanks left unfilled constitute irregularities in the bid and place the bidder at risk of having the bid rejected unless the Owner rules the irregularity to be an informality or technicality that the director can waive, as is made clear in Paragraph 16 of these “Instructions to Bidders” and on the Bid Form. Numbers shall be written in English words and in Arabic numerals. The inclusion of any condition, alternate, qualification, limitation, or provision not called for shall render the bid nonresponsive and shall be sufficient cause for rejection of a bid. (c) Bid Security. Bids must be accompanied by a Bid Bond made payable to the Owner in an amount not less than five percent of the Bid. Bid Bonds should be furnished on forms accepted as standard by the insurance industry, but shall be substantially in accordance with the Bid Security Form attached hereto. (d) Delivery of Bids. Bids are to be addressed to the Owner, at the address and room number shown in the Invitation to Bid. Bids must be enclosed in an opaque, sealed envelope; marked with the Bid Date, Bid Time, Bid Number, Name of Project; and identified with the words "Bid for Construction.” Bids must be placed in the hands of the Owner at the specified location by not later than the hour and date named in the Invitation to Bid. After that time, no bids may be received. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to ensure the delivery of the bids to the required address. (e) Alternates. A bid must be submitted for all alternates. Failure to so may render the bid nonresponsive and be sufficient cause for rejection of a bid. (f) Withdrawal of Bids. Bids may be withdrawn by bidders prior to the time set for official opening. After time has been called, no bid may be withdrawn for a period of thirty-five days after the time and date of opening except as provided in O.C.G.A Section 13-10-22 (appreciable error in calculation of bid). Negligence or error on the part of any bidder in preparing his bid confers no right of withdrawal or modification of his bid after time has been called except as provided by Georgia law.

15. Contract Award. Award shall be made on a lump sum basis to the lowest responsive and responsible bidder. The lowest bid will be the bid whose price, after incorporating all accepted alternates, is the lowest responsive bid that was received from a responsible bidder. No bid may be withdrawn for a period of thirty-five days after time has been called on the date of opening except in accordance with the provisions of law. 16. Owner’s Rights Concerning Award. The Owner reserves the right in its sole and complete discretion to waive technicalities and informalities. The Owner further reserves the right in its sole and complete discretion to reject all bids and any bid that is not responsive or that is over the budget, as amended. In judging whether the bidder is responsible, the Owner will consider, but is not limited to consideration of, the following:

(a) Whether the bidder or its principals are currently ineligible, debarred, suspended, or otherwise excluded from bidding or contracting by any state or federal agency, department, or authority; (b) Whether the bidder or its principals have been terminated for cause or are currently in default on a public works contract; (c) Whether the bidder can demonstrate sufficient cash flow to undertake the project as evidenced by a Current Ratio of 1.0 or higher; (d) Whether the bidder can demonstrate a commitment to safety with regard to Workers' Compensation by having an Experience Modification Rate (EMR) over the past three years not having exceeded an average of 1.2; and (e) Whether the bidder’s past work provides evidence of an ability to successfully complete public works projects within the established time, quality, or cost, or to comply with the bidder’s contract obligations.

17. Owner’s Right to Negotiate with the Lowest Bidder. In the event all responsive and responsible bids are in excess of the budget, the Owner, in its sole and absolute discretion and in addition to the rights set forth above, reserves the right either to (i) supplement the budget with additional funds to permit award to the lowest responsive and responsible bid, or (ii) to negotiate with the lowest responsive and responsible bidder (after taking all deductive alternates) only for the purpose of making changes to the Project that will result in a cost to the Owner that is within the budget, as it may be amended.




18. Contract Forms. The contract forms, including the payment and performance bonds, shall be as set forth in the General Conditions, Section 7 – Forms.

[Remainder of Page Intentionally Left Blank]

BID FORM


BID REQUIREMENTS

BID FORM

To: OWNER _______________________________ _______________________________

_______________________________ _______________________________

Re: Project Name and No. J-284 Darton Student Services II______________________________________

Bid Date:

THE BID:

Bid. Having carefully examined the Specifications entitled J-284 Darton Student Services II the Bidding Documents, Drawings: See Cover Sheet A000 dated 08.29.2016, issued for Bid 10.14.2016 for a full list of drawings and the Project Manual dated 08.29.2016, issued for Bid 10.14.2016 for a full list of Specification sections and Addendum No.(s): ___________ as well as the Site and conditions affecting the Work, bidder hereby proposes to furnish all services, labor, materials, and equipment called for by them for the entire Work, in accordance with the aforesaid documents, for the sum of:

______________________________________________________________ Dollars ($ ___________________________)

which sum is hereinafter called the Bid. The Bid shall be the amount of the Contract Sum executed between the Owner and the Contractor unless Alternates are accepted.

Alternates. We further propose that, should any of the following alternates be accepted and be incorporated in the Contract, the Bid will be altered in each case as follows:

Alternate No. 1 – Reference Architectural Drawings, Sheet A211, and related Details. Omit curved drywall ceiling feature and raised accent ceiling at Lounge 231, Corridor 232, and Lounge 233; instead, provide typical 2x2 acoustical ceiling tile, type AC-1 throughout this space. Lighting and HVAC diffusers shall be modified accordingly. See Detail 2/A211. Deduct the sum of _________________________ Dollars ($ ______________ )

Alternate No. 2 – Reference Architectural Drawings, Sheets A110 and A201. In Break 133, omit demolition of existing brick pier and aluminum storefront. The existing exterior wall configuration shall remain. Lighting and HVAC diffusers shall be modified accordingly. See Detail 6/A502.

Deduct the sum of _________________________ Dollars ($ ______________ )

Alternate No. 3 – Reference Architectural Drawings, Sheets A110, A111, A201, A202, A410, and related Details. Omit demolition of existing brick kneewalls on stair and balcony railing at Lounge 135; omit installation of Ornamental Railings specified in Section 05 5214. Existing guards and handrails are to remain intact.

Deduct the sum of _________________________ Dollars ($ ______________ )

Errors or Revisions. Prior to the bid opening date and hour, errors may be stricken or revisions may be made and corrections entered on this proposal form or on the bid envelope with sufficient clarity to be easily understood. All such annotations shall be binding on the bidder.

No Withdrawal. For and in consideration of the sum of $10.00, the receipt of which is hereby acknowledged, bidder and Owner agree that this bid may not be revoked or withdrawn after the time set for the opening of bids, except as provided in Georgia law, but is an irrevocable offer that shall remain open for acceptance for a period of thirty-five days following the time set for the opening of bids.

Alternate No. 4 - Reference Architectural Drawings, Sheet A201. In Transaction 130, omit custom fabricated millwork transaction counters. Counter will be provided as an FFE item under another contract. Do not omit installation of electrical and data wiring and devices; coordinate this work with Owner’s furniture vendor.

Deduct the sum of _________________________ Dollars ($______________)

BID FORM


Execution of the Contract. If bidder is notified in writing by statutory mail of the acceptance of this bid within thirty-five days after time set for the opening of bids, bidder agrees to execute within ten days the Contract for the Work for the above stated Bid, as adjusted by the accepted Alternates, and at the same time to furnish and deliver to the Owner a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond on forms shown in Section 7 of the General Conditions of the Contract, both in an amount of equal to 100 percent of the Contract Sum.

Commencement and Completion of Work. Upon the Effective Date of the Contract, bidder agrees to commence all Preconstruction Activities. Upon issuance of a Proceed Order, bidder agrees to commence physical activities on the Site with adequate forces and equipment and to complete to Material Completion all work in 240 consecutive calendar days beginning the day after the date of the Proceed Order.

Bid Bond. Enclosed herewith is a Bid Bond (NO OTHER FORM ACCEPTABLE) in the amount of _________________________________________ Dollars ($ _____________________ ) (being not less than five percent of the Bid). Bidder agrees that the above stated amount is the proper measure of liquidated damages that the Owner will sustain by bidder’s failure to execute the Contract or to furnish the Performance and Payment Bonds should bidder’s bid be accepted.

Obligation of Bid Bond. If this bid is accepted within thirty-five days after the date set for the opening of bids and bidder fails to execute the Contract within ten days after Notice of Successful Bid, or if bidder fails to furnish both Performance and Payment Bonds, the obligation of the Bid Bond will remain in full force and effect and the money payable thereon shall be paid into the funds of the Owner as liquidated damages for such failure; otherwise, the obligations of the Bid Bond will be null and void.

Bidder Certification

Certification under Oath. Under oath I certify that I am a principal or other representative of the bidder, and that I am authorized by it to execute the foregoing bid on its behalf; and further, that I am a principal person of the bidder with management responsibility for the construction for the bidder, and as such I am personally knowledgeable of all its pertinent matters. I further certify that this bid is made without prior understanding, agreement, or connection with any corporation, firm, or person submitting a bid for the same services, materials, labor, supplies, or equipment and is in all respects fair and without collusion or fraud. Bidder and its principals understand that collusive bidding is a violation of state and federal law and can result in fines, prison sentences, and civil damage awards. Bidder agrees to abide by all conditions of this bid.

BY: __________________________________________ Authorized Signature (BLUE INK)

___________________________________________ Printed Name Title

Sworn to and subscribed before me this Day of , 20 .

________________________________________ Notary Public

My commission expires: ______________

(SEAL)

NOTE: THE NOTARY SEAL MUST BE APPLIED UNDER GEORGIA LAW, WHETHER OR NOT THE LAW OF THE STATE WHERE EXECUTED PERMITS OTHERWISE.

STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS



STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS: (To be subscribed and sworn to before a notary public.)

The bidder submits the following statement of bidder’s qualifications for consideration by the Owner. Bidder’s Name: _________________________________________________________ LEGAL NAME OF BUSINESS Bidder’s Address: __________________________________________________________

LEGAL BUSINESS ADDRESS (NO P.O. BOX, MUST BE PHYSICAL ADDRESS)

__________________________________________________________

CITY STATE ZIP

__________________________________________________________

MAILING ADDRESS IF DIFFERENT FROM ABOVE

Telephone Number: ___________ ______________________

AREA CODE NUMBER

The full names of persons and firms interested in the foregoing bid as principals are as follows:

(1)____________________________________________________________________ Circle One: President Partner Owner Other

(2)____________________________________________________________________ Circle One: Vice President Secretary Partner Other

(3)____________________________________________________________________ Circle One: Vice President Secretary Partner Other

Note: If incorporated: The names of both the President and Corporate Secretary must be indicated. If a partnership, all partners must be indicated.

Social Security Number or FEIN: _____________________________________

Contractor’s Georgia License Type and Number: Contractor’s Federal Employment Verification Certification: (Must include completed Contractor Affidavit as found in Section 7 of the Contract)

The Contractor is registered with, authorized to use, is using and will continue to use, the federal work authorization

program throughout the term of the contract, and holds the following authorization:

User Identification Number: Date of Authorization:

State Where Organized or Incorporated: ______________________________ Plan of Organization: (Circle One) Proprietorship Corporation Partnership Joint Venture Other (Describe) Years Engaged in Construction Contracting in Present Firm Organization: ____________ years.




Bidder Hereby Certifies that bidder: a. Has never refused to sign a contract at the original bid on a public works contract except as allowed under Georgia law. b. Has never been terminated for cause on a public works contract. c. Has had no (criminal or felony) convictions, suspensions, or debarments of the bidder, its officers, or its principals for building code violations, bid rigging, or bribery in the last ten years. d. Is not and its organization or its principals are not debarred, suspended, declared ineligible, or otherwise excluded by any Federal or State department or agency from doing business with the Federal Government or a State. e. Has insurance required by the Contract Documents in place or has arranged to obtain it from an insurer authorized to do business in the State of Georgia. f. Has sufficient bonding capacity to obtain a payment and performance bond from a surety meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents and authorized to do business in the State of Georgia. g. Has sufficient cash flow to perform this Project. Remarks or explanations of the above paragraphs a through g: ______________________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________________________

Bidder Certification Certification under Oath. Under oath I certify that I am a principal or other representative of the bidder, and that I am authorized by it to execute the foregoing Statement of Bidder’s Qualifications is true and correct, including any explanation above and submitted under oath.

BY: __________________________________________ Authorized Signature (BLUE INK PLEASE)

___________________________________________ Printed Name Title

Sworn to and subscribed before me this Day of , 20 . ________________________________________ Notary Public My commission expires: ______________ (SEAL) NOTE: THE NOTARY SEAL MUST BE APPLIED UNDER GEORGIA LAW, WHETHER OR

NOT THE LAW OF THE STATE WHERE EXECUTED PERMITS OTHERWISE.




Statistical Information. This request is made for statistical purposes only. PLEASE INDICATE BELOW WHICH OF THE FOLLOWING DESCRIPTIONS APPLY TO YOUR COMPANY: ____ MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (MBE) – One of the following statements describes this business: a) Owned by a member of a minority race; or b) a partnership of which a majority of interest is owned by one or more members of a minority race; or c) a public corporation of which a majority of the common stock is owned by one or more members of a minority race. A member of a minority race is defined as a person who is a member of a race that comprises less than fifty percent of the total population of the State of Georgia. For recordkeeping purposes, this includes, but is not limited to, persons who are Black, Hispanic, Asian-Pacific American, Native American, or Asian-Indian American. ____ GEORGIA MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (GMBE) – Business meets the definition of a minority-owned business and, in addition, meets the following criteria: a) was organized in the State of Georgia; or b) reports income from the business for Georgia Income Tax purposes; or c) minority stockholders report earnings for Georgia Minority Business Enterprise. For more information, please contact the Board of Regents’ Office of Business Development by e-mail at [email protected]. ____ NEITHER DESCRIPTION APPLIES TO YOUR COMPANY.



BID REQUIREMENTS BID SECURITY FORM

KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS, That we, {Insert Contractor’s Legal Name and Address} as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal, and {Insert Legal Name and Address of Surety}, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of {Insert State of Corporate Organization}, as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto:

OWNER:

Attention:

Phone Number:

Facsimile Number: as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee in the sum of ______________________________________________ (Not less than five percent of the Bid) Dollars ($ _______________________ ), for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a Bid for ________________________________________________________;

{Insert Owner’s Project Number and Project Description} NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the Bid of the Principal and (1) the Principal shall enter into a Contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such Bid, and the Principal shall execute the Contract and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the Bidding or Contract Documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof; or (2) in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such Contract and give such bond or bonds, and the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the difference hereof between the amount specified in said Bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another party to perform the Work covered by said Bid; then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. Signed and sealed this _______ Day of _______________, 20___

Name of Contractor: Principal ____________________________________ Witness

By: (Seal)

Title

Name of Surety: Surety ____________________________________ Witness

By: (Seal) (*) (*) Attach Power of Attorney

NOTE TO CONTRACTOR: Use of Surety’s standard Bid Bond form is acceptable as long as it substantially complies with the following:

GENERAL CONDITIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS


I


SECTION 1 – GENERAL Part 1 – General Provisions

1.1.1 – General Matters 1.1.2 – Project Team, Cooperation, Partnering 1.1.3 – Constitutional Principles Applicable to State Public Works Projects. 1.1.4 – Third Party Beneficiary 1.1.5 – Notice 1.1.6 – Liquidated Damages 1.1.7 – Documents 1.1.8 – Defined Terms 1.1.9 – Basic Definitions

Part 2 – Contractor’s General Responsibilities and Duties. 1.2.1 – Contractor’s General Responsibilities 1.2.2 – Contractor’s General Duties 1.2.3 – Audit 1.2.4 - Employment of Georgia Citizens and Use of Georgia Products and Georgia Forest Products

Part 3 – Owner’s General Responsibilities and Rights. 1.3.1 – Owner’s Representative 1.3.2 – Design Professional 1.3.3 – Permits, Licenses, and Inspections 1.3.4 – Testing 1.3.5 – No Partial Occupancy 1.3.6 – Disqualification of Potential “Pre-Qualified” Subcontractors 1.3.7 – Owner’s Right to Perform Work

Part 4 – Protection of Persons and Property 1.4.1 – Reasonable Precautions 1.4.2 – Duty to Protect Property 1.4.3 – Safety Precautions 1.4.4 – Emergencies 1.4.5 – Fire Protection 1.4.6 – Remedy Damages 1.4.7 – Written Program

Part 5 – Bonds, Indemnity, and Insurance 1.5.1 – Bonds 1.5.2 – Liability and Indemnification 1.5.3 – Insurance Requirements

Part 6 – Hazardous Conditions and Materials

1.6.1 – Hazardous Materials 1.6.2 – Responsibility and Warranty of Subcontractors, Trade Contractors, and Suppliers 1.6.3 – Hazardous Materials and Substances Used on the Job Site 1.6.4 – Hazardous Conditions

Part 7 – Miscellaneous Provisions 1.7.1 – Legal Compliance 1.7.2 – Surveys, Permits and Regulations 1.7.3 – Open Records Act 1.7.4 – Use of Project Site 1.7.5 – Office for Contract Compliance Specialist (CCS) 1.7.6 – Utilities 1.7.7 – Royalties and Patents 1.7.8 – Separate Contracts 1.7.9 – Minority, Women and Disadvantaged Business Participation 1.7.10 – Assignment 1.7.11 – Interpretation of Contract Documents. 1.7.12 – Counterparts 1.7.13 – Forms and Specimens 1.7.14 – Entire Agreement

SECTION 2 – PRE-COMMENCEMENT PHASE Part 1 – Pre-commencement Phase Services

2.1.1 – Pre-commencement Coordination



II

2.1.2 – Construction Preparation Period 2.1.3 – Construction Management Plan 2.1.4 – Quality Control Program 2.1.5 – Construction Progress Schedule, Overall Project Schedule 2.1.6 – Progress Reports and Information 2.1.7 – Rental Rates and Wage Rates for Change Orders 2.1.8 – Unit Prices 2.1.9 – Building Commissioning Services

Part 2 – Construction Documents and Site Plan 2.2.1 – Contract Documents 2.2.2 – Documents at the Project Site 2.2.3 – Submittals 2.2.4 – Manufacturer’s Recommendations 2.2.5 – Site Plan 2.2.6 – Geological and Archaeological Specimens

SECTION 3 – CONSTRUCTION PHASE Part 1 – Construction Phase Services

3.1.1 – Basic Construction Services 3.1.2 – Measurements and Dimensions 3.1.3 – Rain Water, Surface Water, and Back-up 3.1.4 – Dust Control 3.1.5 – Cutting, Patching and Fitting 3.1.6 – Space Conditions 3.1.7 – Cleaning Up 3.1.8 – Duty of Contractor to Report Defects 3.1.9 – Duty of Contractor to Report Conflicts

Part 2 – Changes to the Work 3.2.1 – Acknowledgement of Existing physical Conditions 3.2.2 – Owner’s Right to Make Changes 3.2.3 – Changes Forbidden without Consent of Owner 3.2.4 – Form and Execution of Change Orders 3.2.5 – All Cost and Time Impacts to be Included 3.2.6 – Changes in Contract Time 3.2.7 – Determining the Cost to Owner for Changes 3.2.8 – Cost Allowable for Changes to the Work, Allowances for Contractor, and Permissible Expenditures 3.2.9 – Allowable Costs for Changes to the Work 3.2.10 – Costs Not Allowable for Changes in the Work 3.2.11 – Change Order Formats (Lump Sum, Force Accounts, Indeterminate Unit Pricing) 3.2.12 – Changes Due to Subsurface or Other Unforeseen Conditions 3.2.13 – Compensable Rock 3.2.14 – Claims for Extended General Conditions Costs 3.2.15 – Release of Claims 3.2.16 – Sole Source Designation

Part 3 – Time. 3.3.1 – Time is of the Essence 3.3.2 – Competent Management of Time 3.3.3 – Contract Time 3.3.4 – Commencement, Prosecution, and Completion 3.3.5 – Construction Progress Schedule (Overall Project Schedule) 3.3.6 – Completion Date 3.3.7 – General Rule – No Damages for Delay 3.3.8 – Exception to General Rule – Compensable Delay 3.3.9 – Non Compensable Delay 3.3.10 – Submission of Claims for Compensable Delay and to Extend the Material Completion and Occupancy Date 3.3.11 – Recovery of Schedule Delays

Part 4 – Correcting the Work, Inspections, Covering and Uncovering Work

3.4.1 – Correcting the Work 3.4.2 – Inspections 3.4.3 – Covering and Uncovering Work



III

3.4.4 – Inspection Does Not Relieve Contractor Part 5 – Subcontractors, Trade Contractors, and Suppliers

3.5.1 – Subcontractors, Trade Contractors, and Suppliers 3.5.2 – Representation of Contractor 3.5.3 – Contractor Responsible for Acts and Omissions 3.5.4 – No Contract between Owner and Subcontractors, Trade Contractors, and Suppliers. 3.5.5 – Relationship of Contractor and Subcontractors, Trade Contractors, and Suppliers

SECTION 4 - COMPENSATION Part 1 – General.

4.1.1 – Payments 4.1.2 – Application for Payments 4.1.3 – Processing of Application for Payment (Periodical Estimates) 4.1.4 – Effect of Design Professional’s Certificate an Application for Payment. 4.1.5 – Payment Due 4.1.6 – Payment Due Dates and Interest 4.1.7 – Payments for Change Order Work

Part 2 – Payments Withheld 4.2.1 – Payments Withheld

Part 3 – Liens 4.3.1 – Public Property Not Subject to Lien 4.3.2 – Notice of Commencement 4.3.3 – Release of Liens

SECTION 5 – CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS, DISPUTES, AND TERMINATION Part 1 - Owner’s Right to Suspend or Stop Work

5.1.1 – Owner’s Right to Suspend Work 5.1.2 – Owner’s Right to Stop Work 5.1.3 – Owner’s Rights Independent from Rights and Duty of the Design Professional

Part 2 – Contract Adjustments and Disputes 5.2.1 – General Provisions 5.2.2 – General Claims for Contract Adjustments and Disputes 5.2.3 – Dispute Resolution 5.2.4 – Certain Claims Excluded From General Claims

Part 3 – Termination 5.3.1 – Owner’s Right to Terminate Contract for Convenience 5.3.2 – Owner’s Right to Declare Default and/or Terminate Contract for Cause 5.3.3 – Contractor’s Right to Terminate 5.3.4 – Limitation of Payments 5.3.5 – Termination by Owner for Abandonment by Contractor 5.3.6 – Notices of Termination

SECTION 6 – PROJECT COMPLETION Part 1 – Material Completion

6.1.1 – Material Completion 6.1.2 – Effect of Achieving Material Completion 6.1.3 – Effect of Failure to Achieve Material Completion

Part 2 – Final Completion 6.2.1 – Final Completion 6.2.2 – Effect of Achieving Final Completion 6.2.3 – Effect of Failure to Achieve Final Completion

Part 3 – Inspections for Completion of the Work 6.3.1 – General Responsibility of the Contractor for Inspection 6.3.2 – Notice of Readiness for Inspection for Material Completion 6.3.3 – Conducting the Inspection for Material Completion 6.3.4 – Notification of Using Agency of Site Visits by the Contractor or Subcontractors 6.3.5 – Notification of Readiness for Interim Inspection for Punchlist Completion 6.3.6 – Conducting the Interim Inspection for Punchlist Completion 6.3.7 – Conducting the Inspection for Final Completion

Part 4 – Final Documents 6.4.1 – Final Documents 6.4.2 – Presentation of Final Documents



IV

6.4.3 – Keys Part 5 – Payment for Material Completion and for Final Payment

6.5.1 – Payment for Material Completion 6.5.2 – Application for Payment for Material Completion 6.5.3 – Release of Contractor’s Retainage 6.5.4 – Effect of Payment for Material Completion and Release of Claims 6.5.5 – Final Payment 6.5.6 – Effect of Final Payment and Release of Claims

Part 6 – Correction of the Work after Final Payment 6.6.1 – Non-Compliant or Defective Work 6.6.2 – Warranty and Guaranty 6.6.3 – Warranty Complaint Item Procedure

SECTION 7 – FORMS

Performance Bond Payment Bond Georgia Security and Immigration Compliance Act Affidavit(s) Sub-Subcontractor Affidavit Non-Influence Affidavit Statutory Affidavit Five Year Bond on Roofs and Walls Specimen Certificate of Manufacturer Certificate of Insurance Bond to Discharge Claim Change Order Forms Application for Payment Form Subcontractor Retainage Release Certificate Final Certification of Costs

SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS

SECTION 1 – GENERAL PART 1 – GENERAL PROVISIONS

DBB CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT GENERAL CONDITIONS VERSION 07/01/2011

1

GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

SECTION 1 – GENERAL

PART 1 – GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1.1 General Matters.

1.1.1.1 This Contract and Affiliated Agreements – Requirement for Written Agreements. This Contract and all Affiliated Agreements, including any subsequent modifications, must be in writing, dated, and executed by the parties. Affiliated Agreements, including financial arrangements with respect to this Project, must be promptly and fully disclosed to the Owner upon their execution or modification.

1.1.1.2 Basic Statement of Owner Objectives. The Owner’s basic objectives are the construction of the Project within the limits of the funds available to Owner for construction of the Project, and in accordance with the approved Construction Documents.

1.1.1.3 Project Team. To accomplish Owner’s objectives, Owner intends to employ a team concept in connection with the construction of the Project. The basic roles and general responsibilities of team members are set forth in general terms below but are more fully set forth in the Design Professional Contract with respect to the Design Professional, in the Program Management Agreement with any Program Manager, and in this Contract with respect to the Contractor.

1.1.1.3.1 Relationship of Parties. The Owner and the Contractor agree to proceed with the Project on the basis of trust, good faith, and fair dealing and to cooperate fully with each other. The Owner and the Contractor shall do all things reasonably necessary to perform this Contract in an economical and timely manner, including without limitation, consideration of design modifications to enhance constructability and alternative materials or equipment, if considered necessary or convenient by the Owner. The Contractor agrees to procure or furnish, as permitted by the laws of Georgia, all Pre-Commencement phase services and construction phase services as set forth herein. The Owner shall endeavor to promote harmony and cooperation among the Owner, Program Manager, Design Professional, the Using Agency, Contractor and other persons or entities employed by the Owner for the Project.

1.1.1.3.2 Design Professional. The Design Professional is retained in accordance with the Design Professional Contract (i) for the design and preparation of Construction Documents that are necessary to implement the Program governing the construction of the Project or Components thereof, and the design and preparation of any necessary documents antecedent to preparation of such Construction Documents, or (ii) for construction contract administration of the Work under Contract Documents, or (iii) for both. The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that the Contract Documents are addressed to skilled tradesmen in the construction profession who shall be required to use their special skills and experience, through submittals and shop drawings, to translate the Design Professional’s design intent as expressed in the Contract Documents into a completed structure. The Contract Documents shall specify when shop drawings or submittals require the seal of a specialty consultant.

1.1.1.3.2.1 The basis of the Owner's engagement of the Design Professional is the "Design

Professional Contract.” The Contractor is advised that both the Owner and the Design Professional have on file, at their respective places of business, copies of that executed agreement. The Design Professional is not the agent of the Owner, except to the extent so specified in writing, but is employed as a consultant to the Owner to assist the Owner in determining if the conditions of the contract have been met. All decisions of the Design Professional on matters of aesthetics are final, conclusive, and binding on all parties if consistent with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.1.1.3.2.2 The Contractor promptly shall request and review a copy of the Design Professional

Contract during the Pre-commencement Phase and shall become familiar with the respective services, authorities, obligations, and responsibilities of the parties therein. Contractor agrees to develop a working relationship with the Design Professional to effectuate the purposes of the Project in accordance with the terms of this Contract and with consideration of the Design Professional’s responsibilities under the Design Professional Contract.



2

1.1.1.3.2.3 The Contractor acknowledges that the respective contracts require the Owner and the Design Professional to proceed with the Project on the basis of trust, good faith, and fair dealing, and they will take all actions reasonably necessary to ensure the Project proceeds to completion within the Owner's time and budgeting constraints. The Contractor also acknowledges that the Design Professional is to perform all tasks and services required of it under the Design Professional Contract. The Contractor further acknowledges that, in order for the Design Professional to perform its obligations, the Design Professional requires certain materials, information, or other submissions pursuant to the Contract Documents from the Contractor. The Contractor agrees to provide the Design Professional with the submittals required by the Contract Documents. The Contractor further agrees to cooperate with the Design Professional to ensure timely completion of all obligations under this Contract to complete the entire Project.

1.1.1.3.2.4 Contractor agrees that the services provided by the Design Professional under the

Design Professional Contract are intended to coordinate and complement, but not to diminish, alter or substitute for, any of the services, authority, obligations, or responsibilities of the Contractor under this Contract. Contractor further agrees that the performance of services by the Design Professional in connection with the Project shall in no way relieve Contractor from any of its services, authority, obligations, or responsibilities under this Contract, and shall not alter or diminish those services, authority, obligations, or responsibilities in any way whatsoever.

1.1.1.3.3 Program Manager. Owner may designate a Program Manager to administer the Project and this Contract. In lieu of a Program Manager, Design Professional may be designated to perform the role of Program Manager. The Program Manager may also be designated as the Owner’s Representative, and if no Owner’s Representative is designated, the Program Manager shall be the Owner’s Representative.

1.1.1.3.4 Owner's Representative. Owner shall from time to time in writing designate one person as Owner's Representative under this Contract. Owner may designate the Program Manager, if any, as the Owner’s Representative. Owner's Representative so designated in writing shall serve as Owner's Representative under this Contract unless or until Owner gives notice in writing of the appointment of his successor. Owner or Owner's Representative may designate in writing assistants to serve as Owner's Representative with respect to the Project governed by this Contract or in different phases or in specific areas of responsibility with respect to the Project. All requests for consents and approvals required of Owner in connection with the Project, whether by Program Manager, Design Professional, or Contractor, shall be submitted to Owner's Representative, or if the matter is within the written designation of authority of his assistant, to his designated assistant. Design Professional and Contractor may rely upon written consents and approvals signed by the Owner's Representative, or his designated assistant acting within the scope of his written designation, as the consent and approval of Owner.

1.1.1.3.5 Using Agency, Using Agency’s Representative. The Project is intended for the benefit of the Using Agency. A copy of all matters submitted to Owner shall also be submitted to Using Agency for Using Agency’s information. The Using Agency may designate one or more representatives to participate with Owner in Owner’s activities under this Contract. Neither the Using Agency nor any representative of Using Agency shall have any authority to act for or in the name of the Owner. Participation in the Project by Using Agency or its representative(s) shall be solely advisory to the Owner. The Program Manager, Design Professional, Contractor, or any Separate Contractor must not act or rely solely upon any directive, interpretation, decision, act, or omission of Using Agency or the Using Agency’s Representative.

1.1.1.3.6 Owner’s Construction Inspector. Owner may from time to time in writing designate a person or firm as Owner's Construction Inspector under this Contract. The Owner’s Construction Inspector may be hired by Owner or hired under the Program Manager’s Contract or the Design Professional’s Contract and shall provide inspection services of the Work on behalf of the Owner. The presence of an Owner’s Construction Inspector does not relieve the Contractor of any of its responsibilities for quality control and independent testing set forth in the General Requirements. The Owner’s Construction Inspector has the authority to report any deviations from the Contract Documents directly to the Contractor’s superintendent at the job site for immediate action, and also to report same to the Program Manager or Design Professional, and Owner.



3

1.1.1.3.7 Representatives. The designated representatives of the Contractor and the Owner shall have full authority to act (other than for the receipt of notices that must be given as specified in Paragraph 1.1.5) in matters relating to this Contract until notice is given that such authority has been revoked. Contractor and the Owner may each rely upon the written certification of the other as to the appointment of a designated representative or the revocation of his authority. The Contractor shall designate, in writing, a representative authorized to act on the Contractor's behalf with respect to the Project. The Contractor's initial authorized representative shall be the Project Superintendent of the Contractor as identified by the Contractor. Contractor shall employ the Project Superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Site during the progress of the Work. The Contractor’s designee shall represent Contractor: All written communications given to the Contractor’s designee shall be binding upon Contractor.

1.1.1.3.8 Separate Contractor. Owner may select one or more Separate Contractors to perform work with respect to the Project or Components thereof. The Contractor shall afford the Owner's Separate Contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities and shall coordinate the Separate Contractors’ schedules with those of the Contractor. The Owner's Separate Contractors shall adhere to the Contractor's work rules, schedule, laydown areas, and safety requirements. 1.1.1.3.9 Commissioning Authority. Owner may select and employ a Commissioning Authority to perform building commissioning activities and monitor testing activities. The Commissioning Authority shall perform and coordinate and accomplish its work as set forth in Articles 1.3.4 and 2.1.9.

1.1.2 Project Team, Cooperation, Partnering.

1.1.2.1 Concept. It is the Owner's expectation that the Program Manager, Design Professional, Owner, Using Agency, Contractor, and any Separate Contractor, shall work as a Project Team to effect the commencement of and completion of construction in accordance with the Project Schedule, and to achieve Final Completion of the Project. Each team member shall communicate with all other team members to assure overall coordination, cooperation, and efficiency. Each team member shall cooperate fully with and coordinate fully with each other team member in order to achieve Project completion in an expeditious and economical manner. The Contractor shall schedule regular meetings of the key principals of the Project Team in an effort to solve problems in a partnering atmosphere to facilitate the ability of each team member to meet its business objectives, so long as its business objectives are consistent with the successful completion of the Project. It is the Owner’s intent that all consensus decisions of the Project Team, where differing from the Contract Documents, be reduced to writing in an appropriate Change Order.

1.1.2.2 Conference. Promptly after the execution of this Contract, Contractor shall confer with the Program Manager, Design Professional, Owner, and Using Agency to identify personnel and relevant organizational charts of each team member, and to establish working relationships with each team member.

1.1.2.3 Authority of Contractor. Contractor is, and at all times during the term of this Contract shall be, an independent contractor in the performance of its duties and obligations under this Contract. Contractor shall have no authority to bind or otherwise obligate Owner, orally, in writing or by any acts, unless specifically authorized by Owner in writing. Nothing contained in this Contract shall constitute or be deemed or construed to create a partnership or joint venture, or any agency relationship, between Owner and Contractor.

1.1.2.4 Team Evaluation Process, Covenant not to Sue. If Team Evaluation is elected as part of this Contract, all team members agree to participate in good faith in the State of Georgia’s formal Team Evaluation Process [copies of which will be made available to any bidder on request]. By executing this agreement for construction services with the Owner, the Contractor waives any and all legal rights for defamation, libel or slander and covenants not to sue the Board of Regents, the Owner, the Design Professional, the Using Agency, other team members, and their respective representatives and agents for comments, rankings, and results related to the Contractor's performance posted in good faith as a part of, and in accordance with, said Team Evaluation Process. The Design Professional and other team members, in their agreements with the Owner, have executed, or will execute, a similar agreement.

1.1.3 Constitutional Principles Applicable to State Public Works Projects.

1.1.3.1 Title to Project Site. Title to the Site is vested in the Board of Regents of the University System of Georgia as public property of the State of Georgia, and is not subject to levy or lien. 1.1.3.2 Title to Improvements and Delivered Materials. Title to all improvements constructed at the Site vests instanter in the Board of Regents. Title to all materials vests in the Board of Regents upon their delivery without rejection by the



4

Contractor at the Site, regardless of the status of payment or nonpayment of the costs thereto. Protection of laborers and Suppliers (regarding payment for services and materials) is effected through the provision of payment and performance bonds by the State. 1.1.3.3 Limited Waiver of Sovereign Immunity Ex Contractu. Contractor acknowledges and agrees that Owner is an agency or instrumentality of the State of Georgia, and as such is entitled to the protection of sovereign immunity. As set forth in Article I, Section II, Paragraph IX of the 1983 Georgia Constitution, sovereign immunity is waived “as to any action ex contractu for the breach of any written contract.” Contractor specifically acknowledges the constitutional and contractual requirements that written changes, modifications, and waivers to this Contract must be specifically executed by the Owner as set forth in the Contract Documents. Accordingly, Contractor specifically acknowledges the constitutional prohibitions against claims against Owner based solely upon oral statement, course of conduct, customs of the trade, quasi-contract, quantum meruit, or O.C.G.A § 13-4-4 (mutual departure from contract terms). 1.1.3.4 Limitations upon Authority of Agents. Contractor further acknowledges that Owner is an agency or instrumentality of the State of Georgia, and as such acts through specific public officials. The legal concepts of agency applicable to the Owner are solely as set forth in O.C.G.A. §45-6-5 and as further specified in the Contract Documents. Contractor specifically acknowledges the statutory and contractual requirements that written changes, modifications, and waivers to this contract must be executed only by the identified representatives of Owner as set forth in the Contract Documents. Accordingly, Contractor specifically acknowledges that any claims against Owner based upon the act of any non-authorized employee or official are invalid. 1.1.3.5 U.C.C. Not Generally Applicable. Contractor further acknowledges and agrees that Owner, as set forth in subsection (3) above, has granted only a limited waiver of sovereign immunity, such that the provisions of the Uniform Commercial Code (O.C.G.A §11-1-101 through §11-2-725) governing sales of goods do not apply to this Contract. Contractor specifically acknowledges the contractual requirements that written changes, modifications, and waivers to this contract must be specifically executed by the Owner as set forth in the Contract Documents. Accordingly, Contractor specifically waives and covenants not to make against Owner any claims based upon the Uniform Commercial Code. Contractor understands, however, that Contractor’s subcontracts with Suppliers and Subcontractors may in fact include sales of goods and therefore be properly governed by the Uniform Commercial Code; nonetheless Contractor covenants that any such application shall in no way be construed to have any legal effect upon this contract between Owner and Contractor.

1.1.4 Third Party Beneficiary. Contractor acknowledges, stipulates, and agrees that the Owner is a public department, agency, or commission of the executive branch of government of the State of Georgia performing an essential public and governmental function by means of the Contract. Contractor acknowledges, stipulates, and agrees that the Using Agency is an express third party beneficiary of this Contract. There are no individual or personal third party beneficiaries of this Contract. 1.1.5 Notice.

1.1.5.1 General Requirement. Any notice, election, demand, request, consent, approval, or other communication required or permitted to be given under this Contract shall be in writing signed by an officer or duly authorized representative of the party making same and shall be delivered personally or shall be sent by certified or statutory mail, postage prepaid, return receipt requested, shall be effective as of the date on which it is received or would have been received but for the refusal of the addressee to accept delivery, and shall be addressed as shown in the Contract. The persons and addresses to which notices should be given may be changed by notice given in accordance with this Article.

1.1.5.2 Copies of Notices to Owner. Wherever the Contract Documents provide that a copy of any notice, request, or demand filed with the Design Professional by the Contractor shall be furnished to the Owner, such notice, request, or demand shall not become effective until the Owner has received his copy. No notice in writing or given orally to the Design Professional or to the Contract Compliance Specialist is notice to the Owner unless copy of the aforesaid notice in writing shall have been properly served upon the Owner at the address shown in the Contract.

1.1.6 Liquidated Damages.

1.1.6.1 Time of the Essence. Time being of the essence of this Contract, and a material consideration thereof, it is mutually agreed by the parties hereto in case of the Contractor’s failure to complete the construction within the time specified, the Owner will be damaged thereby. The Contractor shall commence performance of the Work on the Site under this Contract as of the Proceed Order Date. The Contractor shall complete construction, except for Minor Items and Permitted Incomplete Work (see Article 6.1.1), not later than the Material Completion and Occupancy Date, as adjusted by Change Order.

1.1.6.2 Liquidated Damages. Because it is difficult to definitely ascertain and prove the amount of said damages, inclusive of, but not limited to, expenses for inspection, superintendence, loss of use, and necessary traveling expenses, the Owner, Contractor, and Using Agency hereby agree that the amount of such damages shall be the daily

DBB CGENER

VERSIO

1.1.7

1.1.8indicaspeciparag

CONSTRUCTION CRAL CONDITIONS ON 07/01/2011

rate specifending on Damages amount reor interrup

1.LiM

1.acbaCfoO

1.1.6.3 LiOwner and1.1.6 shalreasons ot

Documen

1.1.7.1 PSupplemechange toimprimatu

The Desigimplication

1.1.7.2 Cshall furnreproduciread-only ContractoProfessio

1.1.7.3 MMarked-UDocumentinstructionand other

1.1.7.4 Crelated co

. Defined Tated that are ifically definedgraphs, and th

1.1.8.1 Mthe contraand commsubject butechnical o

CONTRACT

fied in the Conthe date that are not estab

easonably estimption in view of

.1.6.2.1 Coniquidated Dam

Material Compl

.1.6.2.2 Dedccrue and sucalance of any

Contractor or itsor Liquidated D

Owner's deman

imitation on Od Using Agencl be construether than dela

nts.

recedence of ntary Conditio

o the Contracr of the Owner

“By orde

gn Professionan.

Copies of Connish to the Cble and electelectronic fo

or deems necnal.

Marked-Up (“Asp Documentsts annotated a

ns, answers tohidden eleme

Copies to the Orrespondence

Terms. Whereapplicable to

d, terms with ihe titles of othe

Meaning of Woary, words usemon meaningsusiness, tradeor trade mean

ntract, beginnthe Certificate

blished as a pmated in advaf the uncertain

ntractor Agreemages set foretion and Occ

ducted as Thech deduction sy Liquidated Ds Surety. If thDamages as hnd, the amoun

Owner’s Damacy for delay shd to limit Owny.

Documents aons, and the ct Documentsr as follows:

er of the Board

al has no auth

tract DocumeContractor uptronic backgroormat. The cessary and

s-Built”) Docus to the Desand changed o RFI’s, clarificnts.

Owner. Upon, letters of tran

ever used in thboth the singnitial capital leer documents

ords and Phraed in the Contrs; words havie, or professioing shall be he

ing upon the ce of Material Cpenalty but a

ance to cover nty and imposs

es to Pay. Therth in the Cocupancy Date

ey Accrue. Liqshall be in adDamages sha

he unpaid balaherein above

nt by which suc

ages. Except hall be limited ner’s right to

and ChangesSupplementa

is effective

d of Regents o

hority to amen

ents to Contrap to five setound floor anContractor mshall pay th

ments. Prior tsign Professio

to reflect the cations, sketc

n Owner’s reqnsmittal, etc.

he Contract Dular and pluraetters in the Cor forms.

ses. Unless tract Documenng technical on. Materialseld to refer to

5

contractually rCompletion is re calculated losses to be insibility of asce

e Contractor aontract by theand the date t

quidated Damaddition to the rall be deducteance of the Co

provided, the ch sum excee

as otherwise to the Liquidapursue dama

. In the evenary Conditionsunless notice

of the Universi

d the Contrac

actor. Withous of comple

nd reflected cmay obtain suhe cost of re

to Final Componal. The M

as-built condches, delegate

quest, the Con

Documents, theal, and to the

Contract Docum

the context ornts that have uor trade mea

s or work dessuch recogniz

required Mateissued. The pand agreed u

ncurred by theertaining actua

agrees to pay e number of dthat the Certifi

ages shall be retainage proved from the

ontract Sum is Contractor sh

ds the unpaid

set forth in tated Damagesages or remed

nt of conflict,s take precede shall have

ity System of

ct Documents,

ut charge to tted Contract

ceiling plan duch additionaeproduction o

pletion, the CoMarked-Up Dodition of the Ped contractor

ntractor shall

e terms definemasculine an

ments may in

r the Contractusual and comanings shall bscribed in wozed meaning.

erial Completioparties agree tupon in advae Owner and Ual damages tha

the amount, days betweenicate of Mater

deducted fromvided for in thPayment for less than the

hall promptly balance of th

he Contract Ds as defined hdies for claims

the Contract dence over thbeen issued

Georgia, Own

orally or in w

the Contractot Documentsdrawings and,al sets of Coof such addi

ontractor shall ocuments sha

Project, includidesign drawin

furnish the O

ed in this Connd feminine thclude referenc

t Documents tmmon meaningbe given their rds that, so a

SECT

PART 1 – GEN

on and Occupathat the specifnce as a fair Using Agency at would be inc

computed by n the contractial Completion

m periodic payhe Contract. Material Comtotal amount tpay to the Owe Contract Su

Documents, daerein. Nothings against the

takes precedhe General Co

by the Owne

ner.”

writing, either e

or the Design in hardcopy, if requested

ontract Documitional sets t

provide one call consist ofing all Changengs and locat

Owner with cop

tract will havehereof. In adces to identifie

taken as a whgs shall be givcustomary m

applied, have

TION 1 – GENERA

NERAL PROVISION

ancy Date andfied Liquidatedand equitablefor such dela

curred.

multiplying thetually required

n is issued.

yments as theThe remaining

mpletion to theto be deductedwner, upon theum.

amages of theg in this ArticleContractor fo

dence over theonditions. Noer bearing the

expressly or b

n Professionay, one set od, one copy inments, as theto the Design

complete set of the Contrace Orders, fieldions of utilitie

pies of Projec

e the meaningdition to termed articles and

hole indicate toven their usua

meaning in the a well-know

AL S

d d e y

e d

y g e d e

e e

or

e o e

y

al of n e n

of ct d s

ct

s s d

o al e n



6

1.1.8.2 Cross-References, Headings, and Citations to the Contract. Cross-references, headings, and citations to the Contract, if any, are for the convenience of the Contractor and the Owner and are not intended to be plenary or exhaustive nor are they to be considered in interpreting the Contract Documents or any part of the Contract Documents.

1.1.8.3 Install, Deliver, Furnish, Supply, Provide and Other Such Words. Install, deliver, furnish, supply, provide, and other such words mean that the Work in question shall be put in place by the Contractor ready for use unless expressly provided to the contrary.

1.1.8.4 Articles Not Plenary. This Article and Article 1.1.9 are not entire, plenary, or exhaustive of all terms used in the Contract and General Conditions that require definition. There may be definitions of other terms under articles to which the terms are related.

1.1.9 Basic Definitions.

1.1.9.1 Addenda. Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of bids that clarify, correct, or change any of the component parts of the Bidding documents.

1.1.9.2 Affiliate. With respect to Contractor, any firm, partnership, corporation or other legal entity that is owned by, under common ownership or control with, or having a common principal or shareholder with, the Contractor, whether such relationship is direct or indirect. In addition, unless the consequences of such relationship for the purposes of this Contract are expressly waived in writing by the Owner after full disclosure by the Contractor, the term “Affiliate” also includes any entity currently affiliated with Contractor as a partner or joint venturer with respect to any commercial

venture, whether or not such venture includes the Project. See O.C.G.A. §13-10-23. 1.1.9.3 Affiliated Agreement. Any agreement concerning the Project between the Contractor and an Affiliate, including all modifications and amendments thereto. 1.1.9.4 Application for Payment. The form acceptable to Owner that is to be used by the Contractor during the course of the Work in requesting payment from the Owner and that is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. 1.1.9.5 Asbestos. Any material that contains more than one percent asbestos and is friable or is releasing asbestos fibers into the air above current action levels established by the United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration. 1.1.9.6 Authorization for Using Agency to Enter. The Notice from Owner to the Contractor and the Using Agency, upon issuance of a Certificate of Material Completion, that the Using Agency is authorized to take possession of the Project. 1.1.9.7 Bid. The offer of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the Contract Sum for all activities required by the Bidding Documents.

1.1.9.8 Bid Bond. A bond, required by law, with a surety in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders, substantially in the form and substance specified in the Bidding Documents, with the Owner as obligee, and intended to secure the execution of the Contract by the Bidder.

1.1.9.9 Bidding Documents. The Construction Documents, the Invitation to Bid, the Instructions to Bidders, the Bid Form, and all Addenda, upon which the Bidder submits a Bid. 1.1.9.10 Bulletin Written or graphic material issued after the award of the contract that clarifies, corrects, or proposes a change in any of the component parts of the Contract Documents. 1.1.9.11 Business Day. A business day is each calendar day other than Saturday, Sunday, and any holiday observed by Owner. 1.1.9.12 Change Order. A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract, signed by the Contractor and the Owner and ordinarily certified by the Design Professional, which may authorize a change or changes, including but not limited to a change to the Contract Sum, the Contract Time, or the Contract Documents 1.1.9.13 Claim. A demand or assertion by the Owner or the Contractor seeking an adjustment of the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and the Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. The



7

responsibility to substantiate a Claim shall rest with the party making the Claim. A demand for money or services by a third party, including a Trade Contractor, Supplier, or subcontractor to the Contractor, is ipso facto not a Claim against the Owner. 1.1.9.14 Construction Documents. The architectural and engineering documents setting forth the design for the Project prepared by the Design Professional. Construction Documents include, but are not limited to, the Specifications, the Drawings, the Supplementary Conditions, the General Conditions, and all Addenda. 1.1.9.15 Construction Progress Schedule. A schedule indicating proposed activity sequences and durations, milestone dates for receipt and approval of pertinent information, preparation, submittal, and processing of Shop Drawings and Samples, delivery of materials or equipment requiring long-lead time procurement, and proposed date(s) of Material Completion and Occupancy and Final Completion. The schedule will be developed to represent the sixteen or seventeen CSI Specification Divisions. It shall have a minimum number of activities as required to adequately represent to Owner the complete scope of work and define the Project’s critical path and associated activities. If the Project is to be phased, then each individual Phase should be identified from start through completion of the overall Project and should be individually scheduled and described, including any Owner’s occupancy requirements and showing portions of the Project having occupancy priority. The format of the schedule will have dependencies indicated on a monthly grid identifying milestone dates such as construction start, phase construction, structural top out, dry-in, rough-in completion, metal stud and drywall completion, equipment installation, systems operational, Material Completion and Occupancy Date, final inspection dates, Punchlist, and Final Completion date. 1.1.9.16 Contract. The written document that is the evidence of the Contract between the Owner and the Contractor. 1.1.9.17 Contract Compliance Specialist. A person, if so designated by the Owner, to record daily events at the Site, including deliveries of equipment and supplies, and the progress of the Work. The Contract Compliance Specialist is not an inspector, and has no authority or power to act as agent for the Owner or to approve or disapprove any action of the Contractor. The Contract Compliance Specialist has no authority to and shall not be requested to sign or initial documents such as delivery receipts, drayage or hauling receipts, or time and materials tickets, or other similar documents evidencing transactions among the Contractor and Subcontractors. 1.1.9.18 Contract Documents. The Contract Documents include the executed Contract, the Bid, the Bidding Documents, and all Change Orders.

1.1.9.19 Contract Sum. The amount of money payable by the Owner to the Contractor for completion of the Pre-Commencement Services and the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.1.9.20 Contract Time. The period of time established for completion of the Project by the Contract Documents. Contract Time commences upon the date specified in the Proceed Order and ends upon the Material Completion and Occupancy Date, as it may be amended. 1.1.9.21 Contractor. The person or entity responsible for the proper completion of the activities described in the Contract Documents and who executes the Contract. 1.1.9.22 Cost of the Work. The sum of all allowable costs necessarily incurred and paid by Contractor in the proper performance of the Work. 1.1.9.23 Day. Unless otherwise stated, reference to the terms "day," "days," "month," or "months" mean calendar day, calendar days, calendar month, and calendar months, respectively. 1.1.9.24 Defective Work. Work that, for any reason, is not in compliance with the Contract Documents. Defective Work is usually identified in a Notice of Non-Compliant Work. 1.1.9.25 Design Professional Contract. The Contract between the Owner and the Design Professional for the design of the Project. 1.1.9.26 Design Professional. The architect or engineer or architectural or engineering firm selected by Owner (i) for the design and preparation of Contract Documents governing the construction of a Project, or (ii) for construction contract administration under the Contract Documents, or (iii) for both, all such services and the scope thereof to be set forth in the Design Professional Contract. The Design Professional is not an employee of the Owner but is engaged or retained by it for the purpose of performing design and construction administration services for the project. The term “Design Professional” includes architects, engineers, surveyors, designers, and other consultants retained by the Design Professional.



8

1.1.9.27 Drawings. That part of the Contract Documents prepared or approved by the Design Professional that graphically show the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by Contractor. Shop Drawings and other Contractor submittals are not Drawings as so defined.

1.1.9.28 Effective Date of the Contract. The date indicated on the Contract or as otherwise specified therein. 1.1.9.29 Final Certificate, Design Professional’s Certificate of Final Completion. The Certificate issued by the Design Professional stating that all work has been completed in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents. See Section 6, Project Completion. 1.1.9.30 Final Completion. The full and final completion of all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.1.9.31 Final Notice of Non-Compliant Work. The Final Notice of Non-Compliant Work issued as a result of the Inspection for Material Completion, also known as the Final Punch List. Upon the completion or correction of this Non-Compliant Work (“punch list” work) the Design Professional will issue the Final Certificate. 1.1.9.32 Hazardous Substances. See Section 1 Part 6. 1.1.9.33 Material Completion and “Material Completion and Occupancy Date”. See Section 6 Part 1. 1.1.9.34 Milestone. A principal event specified in the Contract Documents including the Material Completion and Occupancy Date and other events relating to an intermediate completion date or time. 1.1.9.35 Notice. Written notice. See Article 1.1.5. 1.1.9.36 Notice of Apparent Successful Bid. The written notice by the Owner to the Successful Bidder stating that upon timely compliance by the Successful Bidder with the conditions precedent listed therein, the Owner will sign and deliver the Contract. The Construction Preparation Period begins on the Effective Date of the Contract. (See Section 2, Part 1.) 1.1.9.37 Notice of Non-Compliant Work. A Notice of Non-Compliant Work shall be in writing, shall be dated, shall be signed by the Design Professional, and shall be addressed to the Contractor with a copy to the Owner, as set forth in Section 3, Part 4 (Correcting the Work) and Section 6, Part 6 (Correcting the Work after Final Payment). 1.1.9.38 Owner. The Board of Regents, by and through a State Agency, identified as such in this Contract with whom Contractor has entered into the Contract and for whom the Work is to be completed. 1.1.9.39 Overall Project Schedule. The Construction Progress Schedule that is approved by the Owner. 1.1.9.40 Pre-Commencement Phase Services. The services required to be provided by the Contractor for the Pre-Commencement Phase of the Project in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.1.9.41 Proceed Order. The Proceed Order is a written notice from the Owner that includes a specified date (i.e. the Proceed Order Date) upon which the Contractor is authorized to commence physical work on the Site. Unless the Proceed Order states otherwise, the Proceed Order Date shall be the date upon which the Proceed Order is actually signed and dated by the Owner’s authorized representative. A Proceed Order is a condition precedent to the execution of any Work on the site by the Contractor. The Proceed Order was formerly referred to as the “Notice to Proceed.” 1.1.9.42 Project. The total and complete undertaking for the public works facility to be constructed under this Contract. 1.1.9.43 Project Manual. A bound manual prepared by the Design Professional. It includes the Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, the Bid Form, the Specifications, the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions. 1.1.9.44 Resident Engineer Inspector. Synonymous with Contract Compliance Specialist. See Paragraph 1.1.9.16. 1.1.9.45 Samples. Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative of some portion of the Work and that establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be judged. The Contractor shall furnish for approval all samples required by the Contract Documents. The Work shall be in accordance with approved samples.



9

1.1.9.46 Separate Contractor. Any person or entity other than Contractor that enters into an agreement with Owner to perform the construction of all or any portion of the construction on a Project. 1.1.9.47 Site. Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by the Owner upon which the Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way and easements for access thereto, and such other lands furnished by the Owner that are designated for the use of the Contractor. Also referred to as Project Site, Job Site and Premises. 1.1.9.48 Specifications. That part of the Contract Documents consisting of written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable thereto. The term "Specifications" shall also include all written matter in the Project Manual or on the drawings and any Addenda or Change Orders thereto. 1.1.9.49 Subcontractor. The generic term subcontractor as employed herein includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor. 1.1.9.50 Submittals. Shop Drawings, schedules, data, catalogue cuts, manufacturers' published recommendations, charts, bulletins, brochures, illustrations, circulars, roughing drawings or formulae, etc., that are specifically prepared, distributed, or assembled by or for Contractor or by Subcontractors, manufacturers, or Suppliers and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work or for use in installing the Work. The Contract Documents shall specify when shop drawings or submittals require the seal of a specialty consultant. 1.1.9.51 Successful Bidder. The responsible Bidder submitting the lowest responsive Bid. 1.1.9.52 Supplier. A manufacturer, fabricator, distributor, supplier, or vendor of goods or equipment in connection with the Work, or any other party having a Contract or Purchase Order with the Contractor or with a Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor. 1.1.9.53 Trade Contractor. A Subcontractor who furnishes and installs materials according to the plans and specifications of this Project but does not include one who merely furnishes materials. See 1.1.9.49. 1.1.9.54 Underground Facilities. All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities, including without limitation those that convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. 1.1.9.55 Unit Price Work. Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices as defined and described in the Contract Documents. A percentage markup for overhead or profit shall be included in all unit prices. 1.1.9.56 Using Agency. The State entity for which the Project is being constructed. The term may include an institution (e.g., University of Georgia) that is a part of the Board of Regents of the University System of Georgia. 1.1.9.57 Using Agency’s Representative. The Using Agency may designate from time to time a Using Agency’s Representative, who shall work with the Design Professional and the Owner’s Representative as a liaison with the Using Agency. 1.1.9.58 Work. All labor, materials, and services necessary to produce the construction of the Project in accordance with the Contract Documents, including the entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof. Work includes and is the result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction, and furnishing, installing, and incorporating all equipment, fixtures, and supplies into such construction, all as required by the Contract Documents.

SECTION 1 – GENERAL PART 2 – CONTRACTOR’S GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIES


10

PART 2 – CONTRACTOR’S GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIES

1.2.1 Contractor’s General Responsibilities.

1.2.1.1 Representations of Contractor.

1.2.1.1.1 Independent Contractor. The Contractor represents that it is an independent contractor, competent, knowledgeable, and familiar with the type of work contemplated by this Contract. The Contractor agrees and understands that neither it nor any of its agents or employees may act in the name of the Owner except and unless specifically authorized in writing by the Owner to do so. The Contractor shall furnish construction administration and management services and use the Contractor's best efforts to perform the Project in an expeditious and economical manner consistent with the interests of the Owner.

1.2.1.1.2 Familiarity with Project. Contractor represents that it has: (a) visited and examined the Site(s), (b)

taken into account local conditions and observed conditions that affect the Project, the Work, or the cost thereof, (c) investigated the labor situation related to the Project, (d) examined the superintendence of the Project, the Work, the time of completion, and other relevant matters, and (e) has taken these into consideration in submitting his bid.

1.2.1.2 Responsibility to Coordinate. Contractor acknowledges its responsibility to coordinate the Work with that of Separate Contractors to be selected for the installation of other work within the Project, or in the proximity of the Project. Contractor expressly agrees to schedule and, with the assistance of Owner, coordinate the Work with such Separate Contractors and to permit each phase of the Project to be completed on schedule.

1.2.1.3 Project Delivery. Contractor shall construct the Project in accordance with the Contract Documents, and Contractor shall deliver the Project completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, substantially free from defects, and within the Contract Time.

1.2.1.4 Contractor's Warranty as to Performance. The Contractor warrants that he is familiar with the codes applicable to the Work and that he has the skill, knowledge, competence, organization, and plant to execute the Work promptly and efficiently in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor has the obligation to keep a competent superintendent on the Work during its progress, to employ only skilled workers, and to enforce strict discipline and good order among his employees. The Contractor is responsible for seeing that the Work is installed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Failure or omission on the part of the Owner, representatives of the Owner, agents of the Owner, the Contract Compliance Specialist, engineers employed by the Design Professional, representatives of the Design Professional, or the Design Professional either to discover or to bring to the attention of the Contractor any deviation from, omission from, or noncompliance with the Contract Documents shall not be used by the Contractor or its surety as a defense for failure on his part to install the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or for any other neglect to fulfill requirements of the Contract; neither shall the presence of any one, or all, or any of the foregoing at the Site or the fact that any one, or all, or any of the foregoing may have examined the Work or any part of the Work be used as a defense by the Contractor against a claim for failure on his part to install the Work in accordance with the Contact Documents or for any neglect to fulfill requirements of the Contract. No requirement of this Contract may be altered or waived except by Change Order.

1.2.2 Contractor’s General Duties.

1.2.2.1 Construction Staging and Construction Services. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, materials, equipment, transportation, construction, resources, work, and services necessary or incidental to completing the Work for each phase of the Project in a proper and timely manner in accordance with the Contract Documents and applicable laws.

1.2.2.2 Supervision and Direction. Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work using diligent skill and attention. Contractor shall be responsible for and shall coordinate all construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures. (See Article 3.1.1 et seq.)

1.2.2.3 Enforce Discipline. Contractor shall at all times enforce strict discipline and good order among its employees, Subcontractors, and others performing the Work, and shall not employ or permit the employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in the task assigned to them.

SECTION 1 – GENERAL PART 2 – CONTRACTOR’S GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIES


11

1.2.2.4 Security Clearances. Where work is required within a specially secured controlled access environment, work shall be performed by personnel who have passed a security screening.

1.2.2.5 Maintain Records. Contractor shall keep Owner informed of the progress of the Work. Contractor shall maintain records of the cost for the Work pursuant to and in compliance with GASB 34 accounting requirements and such other methods as Owner may require, including complete backup documentation for all pay applications.

1.2.2.6 Answer Questions. Contractor, with reasonable promptness and in accordance with time limits set by Owner, shall answer Owner's questions and provide Owner with requested Project information.

1.2.2.7 Acts and Omissions. Employees of or Subcontractors to the Contractor shall perform the Work required by this Contract. The Contractor is responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons.

1.2.2.8 Contractor. Contractor shall, in coordination with the Design Professional, accomplish the construction of the Project, including all required submittals, and such Change Orders as may be issued.

1.2.2.9 Meetings with the Owner. Contractor shall schedule and conduct meetings with the Owner, Design Professional, Separate Contractors, and appropriate Subcontractors, not less than biweekly, for the purpose of discussing the status and progress of the Work. Such meetings shall be held as often as Owner determines. 1.2.2.10 Schedule and Coordination Meetings. Contractor shall schedule and conduct meetings as necessary with Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other appropriate Project Team Members to coordinate and schedule the Work.

1.2.3 Audit. At the request of the Owner, the Contractor shall allow the Owner the opportunity to select an auditor to examine and inspect the Project and the Contractor's books, records, and any and all accounts and similar data related to the Project. The Owner shall bear the cost of such audit. The auditor may sign a confidentiality agreement before conducting any such audit. Notwithstanding such agreement, Contractor understands and agrees that all project records are subject to the Georgia Open Records Act. 1.2.4 Employment of Georgia Citizens and Use of Georgia Products and Georgia Forest Products. Given that the Work provided for in this Contract is to be performed in Georgia, it is the wish of the Owner that materials and equipment manufactured or produced in Georgia shall be used in the Work and that Georgia citizens shall be employed in the Work at wages consistent with those being paid in the general area in which the Work is to be performed. This desire on the part of the Owner is not intended to restrict or limit competitive bidding nor to increase the cost of the Work; nor shall the fulfillment of this desire be asserted by the Contractor as an excuse for any noncompliance or omission to fulfill any obligation under the Contract. O.C.G.A. §§50-5-60 to 63 are further incorporated into the General Conditions of the Contract as expressed below:

(a) No contract for the construction of, addition to, or repair of any facility, the cost of which is borne by the State, or any department, agency, commission, authority, or political subdivision thereof shall be let, unless said contract contains a stipulation therein providing that the Contractor, Construction Manager or Subcontractor shall use exclusively Georgia forest products in construction thereof, when forest products are to be used in such construction, addition or repair, and if Georgia forest products are available.

(b) These provisions shall not apply when in conflict with Federal law, rules, and regulations concerning interstate commerce or construction.

SECTION 1 – GENERAL PART 3 – OWNER’S GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS


12

PART 3 – OWNER’S GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS 1.3.1 Owner’s Representative.

1.3.1.1 Written Designation. The Owner shall designate, in writing, a representative authorized to act on the Owner's behalf with respect to the Project. The Owner hereby designates the party identified in the Contract as its initial authorized representative and reserves the right to designate additional or replacement representatives by written notice to the Contractor.

1.3.1.2 Accessibility. The Owner's Representative shall be readily accessible (either on site or by computer, phone, fax or otherwise), shall be well acquainted with the Project, and shall have authority promptly to render decisions and to furnish information required of, or to be provided by, the Owner hereunder.

1.3.1.3 Independent Review and Inspection. The Owner may undertake independent inspection of the installation of the Work. Such independent inspector shall operate on behalf of the Owner and shall act to protect the best interests of the Owner.

1.3.2 Design Professional.

1.3.2.1 Design Professional to Design Work. The Design Professional Contract requires the Design Professional to design and to prepare the Contract Documents, a copy of which shall be furnished to the Contractor upon request. The Design Professional Contract requires the Design Professional to designate a readily accessible representative (either on Site or by computer, phone or fax or otherwise) who shall have authority promptly to render decisions and to furnish information required of the Design Professional.

1.3.2.2 Copies of Contract Documents to Contractor. The Design Professional Contract requires that the Contractor be furnished, free of charge, up to ten sets of completed Contract Documents in hard copy, one full set of reproducible drawings and electronic background floor and reflected ceiling plan drawings and, if requested, one complete copy in read-only electronic format. The Contractor may obtain such additional sets of Contract Documents as the Contractor deems necessary and shall pay the cost of reproduction of such additional sets to the Design Professional.

1.3.2.3 Contract Administration. The Design Professional shall provide periodic review of the Work to assess compliance with the Contract Documents. The Design Professional shall not review any Work in respect to safety. The Design Professional is not the agent of the Owner, but is engaged as a consultant to the Owner to assist the Owner in determining if the conditions of the contract have been met. He is the agent of the Owner only when in special instances he is authorized in writing by the Owner so to act, and in such instances he shall, upon request, show the Contractor written authority. He has authority to stop the Work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to enforce the proper execution of the Contract.

1.3.2.4 Impartial Decisions. The Design Professional is the interpreter of the conditions of the Construction Contract and the judge of its performance, in the first instance. The Design Professional shall side neither with the Owner nor with the Contractor, but shall use its powers to enforce performance by both.

1.3.2.5 Design Professional Decisions. Design Professional’s decisions must be in writing and signed by the Design Professional of Record.

1.3.2.5.1 Promptness. The Design Professional shall make decisions within fourteen calendar days after proper presentation of evidence on (1) any issue, claim, or dispute of the Owner or Contractor, or (2) a demand of the Owner or Contractor for a decision on any matter relating to the execution or progress of the Work.

1.3.2.5.2 Additional Time. If because of events beyond the Design Professional’s reasonable control, it is not able to meet the specified time period, then it should be entitled to ask the Owner for additional time, which request shall not be unreasonably denied.

1.3.2.5.3 Protests of Design Professional’s Decisions. All decisions of the Design Professional on any claim, dispute, or demand shall be final and binding on the Contractor in the absence of written notice of protest from the Contractor received by the Owner within fourteen calendar days of the date of the decision of the Design Professional is received by the contractor. See Section 5 Part 2.

SECTION 1 – GENERAL PART 3 – OWNER’S GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS


13

1.3.2.6 Aesthetics. All decisions of the Design Professional on matters of aesthetics are final, conclusive, and binding on all parties if consistent with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.3.2.7 Succession. In case of the termination of the employment of the Design Professional, the Owner shall appoint a capable and reputable Design Professional against whom the Contractor makes no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract shall be that of the former Design Professional.

1.3.3 Permits, Licenses, and Inspections. The Owner shall cooperate with the Contractor in obtaining building and other permits, licenses, and inspections. See also Subparagraph 2.1.2.2.3 and Article 2.1.5. 1.3.4 Testing. The Owner shall provide and pay for initial and subsequent independent construction testing as required by the Contract Documents. Laboratories for testing services shall be selected by, engaged by, and responsible to the Design Professional. In the case of tests (a) prescribed in the Contract Documents or any part thereof, or (b) requested by the Design Professional, the Contractor must give notice to the selected testing agency stating the date and the hour when he will be ready for the test to be made. In the event the test fails or the Contractor is not ready for the test, the expense of the services of the testing laboratory shall be deducted from the Contract Sum, upon notice to the Contractor by the Owner accompanied by a copy of the invoice for the testing services for the test that failed or for which the Contractor was not ready. The notice and readiness provisions of this article do not apply to verification of design mix on concrete. 1.3.5 No Partial Occupancy. There shall be no partial occupancy by the Using Agency of the Project prior to the achievement of Material Completion. This provision may be modified in the Supplementary General Conditions only for phased construction projects with stand-alone components, or may be modified by Change Order. 1.3.6 Disqualification of Potential “Pre-Qualified” Subcontractors. The Owner may disqualify for just cause any pre-qualified potential subcontractors identified in the Bidding Documents. Owner shall pay any difference in the cost of the Work resulting from such disqualification. 1.3.7 Owner’s Right to Perform Work. The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with Separate Contractors on the Site. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is because of such action by the Owner, the Contractor shall assert such claims as provided in Section 5, Part 2 of the General Conditions.

SECTION 1 – GENERAL PART 4 – PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY


14

PART 4 – PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 1.4.1 Reasonable Precautions. The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for the safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (a) employees performing the Work and other persons, including without limitation the General Public, who may be affected thereby; (b) the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Site, under care, custody, or control of the Contractor or the Contractor's Subcontractors; or (c) other property at or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation, replacement or other rearrangement in the course of construction. 1.4.2 Duty to Protect Property. The Contractor shall continuously maintain adequate protection of the Work from damage and shall protect all other property on the Site from damage, injury, or loss regardless of who may be the owner of said property. He shall make good any such damage, injury, or loss. 1.4.3 Safety Precautions. The Contractor shall comply with the rules and regulations of OSHA and the Department of Labor (O.C.G.A. Section §34-2-6), and, where not inconsistent with the foregoing, the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" issued by the Associated General Contractors of America, Inc., for safety and prevention of accidents, and shall maintain an accurate record of all cases of death, occupational disease, and injury requiring medical attention or causing loss of time from work arising out of and in the course of employment on work under the Contract. The Contractor alone shall be responsible for the safety, efficiency, and adequacy of his plant, appliances, and methods, and for any damage that may result from their improper construction, maintenance, or operations. He shall erect and properly maintain at all times, as required by the conditions and progress of the Work, proper safeguards for the protection of workers and the public and shall post danger warnings against any hazards created by the construction operations. The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of his organization, normally the superintendent, whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. 1.4.4 Emergencies. In an emergency affecting the safety of persons or property or the Work or of adjoining property, the Contractor shall take reasonable precautions to prevent imminent damage, injury, or loss. 1.4.5 Fire Protection. Contractor shall take adequate and reasonable precautions to protect the Work against damage by fire and smoke. For example, without limitation, Contractor shall do the following:

(a) Provide fire extinguishers or fire hoses in readily accessible locations; (b) Periodically inspect fire extinguishers, remove discharged extinguishers immediately, and replace with new or recharged extinguishers; (c) Keep fire extinguishers or fire hoses within five (5) feet of any welding or open flame operations; (d) Remove oil-soaked and paint-soaked materials, including paper and rags, from the Site daily, and more frequently as necessary, to eliminate danger of fire. (e) Prohibit workers from smoking during operations involving combustible adhesives, solvents, mastics, or other fire hazard materials.

1.4.6 Remedy Damages. The Contractor shall promptly remedy damages and loss to property at the Site caused by the Contractor, by any Subcontractor, by anyone directly or indirectly employed by the Contractor or any such Subcontractor, or by anyone for whose acts the Contractor or any such Subcontractor may be liable. Should the Contractor cause damage to any Separate Contractor‘s work, the Contractor agrees, upon due notice, to settle with the Separate Contractor. 1.4.7 Written Programs. Contractor shall have written environmental, quality control, crisis/emergency management, health and safety programs in place with a designated (qualified) coordinator as the point of contact during the project. Such plans shall be on the Site and the superintendent and the project management team shall be familiar with and utilize such programs.

SECTION 1 – GENERAL PART 5 – BONDS, INDEMNITY, AND INSURANCE


15

PART 5 – BONDS, INDEMNITY, AND INSURANCE 1.5.1 Bonds

1.5.1.1 Performance Bond and Payment Bond. The Contractor shall furnish both a performance bond and a payment bond in the exact form set forth in Section 7, (Forms) of these General Conditions. 1.5.1.2 Required Qualifications for Surety. The Contract provides that the surety and insurance companies must be acceptable to the Owner. Only those sureties listed in the Department of Treasury’s Listing of Approved Sureties (Department Circular 570) are acceptable to the Owner. All bonds at the time of issuance must be issued by a company authorized by the Insurance Commissioner to transact the business of suretyship in the State of Georgia, and shall have a Best Policyholders Rating of "A-" or better and with a financial size rating of Class V or larger.

1.5.1.3 Penal Amount of Bonds, State Law. The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that, pursuant to O.C.G.A. §§13-10-2, 13-10-20, 13-10-40 and 13-10-60, the performance bond and the payment bond must be in a penal amount equal to at least 100% of the Contract Sum. Accordingly, the Contractor warrants and agrees that, for any Change Order increasing the Contract Sum by five percent or more or when the total cost of the work has increased by five percent or more, it shall obtain a written amendment to the payment bond and the performance bond increasing the penal amounts of both bonds to 100% of the Contract Sum, effective as of the date of the Change Order. The premium increase, if any, may be properly included in the cost of the Change Order. The Design Professional shall approve no payment for the work provided by the Change Order until the Contractor has provided the written amendment to the Owner.

1.5.2 Liability and Indemnification.

1.5.2.1 General Liability. The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner from the time of the signing of the agreement or the beginning of the first work, whichever shall be earlier, for all injury or damage of any kind resulting from any negligent act or omission or breach, failure or other default regarding the Work by the Contractor, or any of its Subcontractors, its agents, employees or others working at the direction of the Contractor or on its behalf, regardless of who may be the owner of the property.

1.5.2.2 Indemnification Agreement. Contractor hereby agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, the State of Georgia and its departments, agencies and instrumentalities and all of their respective officers, members, employees and directors (hereinafter collectively referred to as the "Indemnitees") from and against any and all claims, demands, liabilities, losses, costs or expenses, including attorneys' fees, due to liability to a third party or parties, for any loss due to bodily injury (including death), personal injury, and property damage arising out of or resulting from the performance of this Contract or any act or omission on the part of the Contractor, its agents, employees or others working at the direction of Contractor or on its behalf., or due to any breach of this Contract by the Contractor, or due to the application or violation of any pertinent Federal, State or local law, rule or regulation. This indemnification extends to the successors and assigns of the Contractor. This indemnification obligation survives the termination of the Contract and the dissolution or, to the extent allowed by law, the bankruptcy of the Contractor. If and to the extent such damage or loss (including costs and expenses) as covered by this indemnification is paid by the State Tort Claims Trust Fund, the State Authority Liability Trust Fund, the State Employee Broad Form Liability Fund, the State Insurance and Hazard Reserve Fund, and other self-insured funds (all such funds hereinafter collectively referred to as the "Funds") established and maintained by the State of Georgia Department of Administrative Services Risk Management Division (hereinafter "DOAS") the Contractor agrees to reimburse the Funds for such monies paid out by the Funds.

1.5.2.2.1 This indemnification does not extend beyond the scope of this Contract and the work undertaken thereunder. Nor does this indemnification extend to claims for loses or injuries or damages incurred directly by the Indemnitees due to breach, negligence or default by the Indemnitor under the terms and conditions of this Contract. 1.5.2.2.2 This indemnification does not extend to claims for loses or injuries or damages incurred by the Indemnitees due to any negligent act, error, or omission of a design professional in the performance of professional services that fails to meet the applicable professional standard of care, skill and ability as employed by others in their profession.

1.5.2.3. DOAS. Risk Management will endeavor to notify affected insurers of claims made against the State that fall within this indemnity. In the event of litigation, the Attorney General will endeavor to keep the Contractor and its general liability insurer as named on the insurance certificate informed regarding the claims and settlement.

1.5.3 Insurance Requirements.



16

1.5.3.1 Insurance Certificates. The Contractor shall, in accordance with 2.1.2.2, procure the insurance coverages identified below at the Contractor’s expense (e.g. within the bid price and Contract Sum) and shall furnish the Owner an insurance certificate listing the Owner as the certificate holder and as an additional insured. Evidence of insurance coverages shall be provided on the form shown in Section 7 or on a form acceptable to the Owner. The insurance certificate must provide the following:

(a) Name and address of authorized agent (b) Name and address of insured (c) Name of insurance company(ies) (d) Description of policies (e) Policy Number(s) (f) Policy Period(s) (g) Limits of liability (h) Name and address of Owner as certificate holder (i) Project Name and Number (j) Signature of authorized agent (k) Telephone number of authorized agent (l) Mandatory thirty day notice of cancellation or non-renewal (except ten days for non payment).

1.5.3.2 Insurer Qualifications, Insurance Requirements. Each of the insurance coverages required below (i) shall be issued by a company licensed by the Insurance Commissioner to transact the business of insurance in the State of Georgia for the applicable line of insurance, and (ii) shall be an insurer (or, for qualified self-insureds or group self insureds, a specific excess insurer providing statutory limits) with a Best Policyholders Rating of "A-" or better and with a financial size rating of Class V or larger. Each such policy shall contain the following provisions:

1.5.3.2.1 The insurance company agrees that the policy shall not be canceled, changed, allowed to lapse or allowed to expire until thirty days after the Owner has received written notice thereof, as evidenced by return receipt of certified mail or statutory mail, or until such time as other insurance coverage providing protection equal to protection called for in this Contract shall have been received, accepted and acknowledged by the Owner. Such notice shall be valid only as to the Project as shall have been designated by Project Number and Name in said notice.

1.5.3.2.2 The policy shall not be subject to invalidation as to any insured by reason of any act or omission of another insured or any of its officers, employees, agents or other representatives ("Separation of Insureds").

1.5.3.2.3 Each Insurer is hereby notified that the statutory requirement that the Attorney General of Georgia shall represent and defend the Indemnities remains in full force and effect and is not waived by issuance of any policy of insurance. In the event of litigation, any settlement on behalf of the indemnities must be expressly approved by the Attorney General. The Contractor and its insurance carrier may retain, but are not obligated to retain, counsel to assist with the defense of the Indemnities, in which case there will be mutual cooperation between the Attorney General and such counsel. See O.C.G.A. § 45-15-12.

1.5.3.2.4 All deductibles shall be paid for by the Contractor.

1.5.3.2.5 Self-insured retention, except for qualified self-insurers or group self-insurers, in any policy shall not exceed $100,000.00.

1.5.3.3 Required Insurance Coverages. The Contractor also agrees to purchase insurance and have the authorized agent state on the insurance certificate that the Contractor has purchased the following types of insurance coverages, consistent with the policies and requirements of O.C.G.A. §50-21-37. The minimum required coverages and liability limits are as follows:

1.5.3.3.1 Workers' Compensation Insurance. The Contractor agrees to provide at a minimum Workers' Compensation coverage in accordance with the statutory limits as established by the General Assembly of the State of Georgia. A group insurer must submit a certificate of authority from the Insurance Commissioner approving the group insurance plan. A self-insurer must submit a certificate from the Georgia Board of Workers’ Compensation stating the Contractor qualifies to pay its own workers’ compensation claims. The Contractor shall require all Subcontractors performing work under this Contract to obtain an insurance certificate showing proof of Workers' Compensation Coverage and shall submit a certificate on the letterhead of the Contractor in the following language:



17

This is to certify that all subcontractors performing work on this Project are covered by their own workers' compensation insurance or are covered by the Contractor’s workers’ compensation insurance.

1.5.3.3.2 Employers' Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall also maintain Employer's Liability Insurance Coverage with limits of at least:

(i) Bodily Injury by Accident $1,000,000 each accident; (ii) Bodily Injury by Disease $1,000,000 each employee; and (iii) Bodily Injury/Disease Aggregate $1,000,000 each accident.

The Contractor shall require all Subcontractors performing work under this Contract to obtain an insurance certificate showing proof of Employers Liability Insurance Coverage and shall submit a certificate on the letterhead of the Contractor in the following language:

This is to certify that all subcontractors performing work on this Project are covered by their own Employers Liability Insurance Coverage or are covered by the Contractor’s Employers Liability Insurance Coverage.

1.5.3.3.3 Commercial General Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall provide Commercial General Liability Insurance (2001 ISO Occurrence Form or equivalent) that shall include, but need not be limited to, coverage for bodily injury and property damage arising from premises and operations liability, products and completed operations liability, blasting and explosion, collapse of structures, underground damage, personal injury liability and contractual liability. The CGL policy must include separate aggregate limits per Project and shall provide at a minimum the following limits:

Coverage Limit 1. Premises and Operations $ 1,000,000.00 per Occurrence 2. Products and Completed Operations $ 1,000,000.00 per Occurrence 3. Personal Injury $ 1,000,000.00 per Occurrence 4. Contractual $ 1,000,000.00 per Occurrence 5. General Aggregate $ 2,000,000.00 per Project

Additional Requirements for Commercial General Liability Insurance are shown below at Paragraph 1.5.3.3.6.

1.5.3.3.4 Commercial Business Automobile Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall provide Commercial Business Automobile Liability Insurance that shall include coverage for bodily injury and property damage arising from the operation of any owned, non-owned, or hired automobile. The Commercial Business Automobile Liability Insurance Policy shall provide not less than $1,000,000 Combined Single Limits for each accident. Additional Requirements for Commercial Business Automobile Liability Insurance are shown below at Paragraph 1.5.3.3.6.

1.5.3.3.5 Commercial Umbrella Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall provide a Commercial Umbrella Liability Insurance to provide excess coverage above the Commercial General Liability, Commercial Business Automobile Liability and the Workers' Compensation and Employers' Liability to satisfy the minimum limits set forth herein. The umbrella coverage shall follow form with the Umbrella limits required as follows:

For Contract Amounts Less For Contract Amounts Equal to or Than $5,000,000.00: Greater than $5,000,000:

$ 2,000,000 per Occurrence $2,000,000 per Occurrence $ 4,000,000 Aggregate $10,000,000 Aggregate

Additional Requirements for Commercial Umbrella Liability Insurance are shown below at Paragraph 1.5.3.3.6.

1.5.3.3.6 Additional Requirements for Commercial Policies in Paragraphs 1.5.3.3.3 through 1.5.3.3.5

(a) The policy shall name as additional Insureds the officers, members, and employees of the Owner and the Using Agency. (b) The policy must be on an "occurrence” basis.

1.5.3.3.7 Builders Risk Insurance. Contractor shall provide a Builder’s Risk Policy to be made payable to the Owner and Contractor, as their interests may appear. The policy amount should be equal to 100% of the Contract Sum, written on a Builder’s Risk “All Risk”, or its equivalent. The policy shall be endorsed as follows:



18

The following may occur without diminishing, changing, altering or otherwise affecting the coverage and protection afforded the insured under this policy:

(i) Furniture and equipment may be delivered to the insured premises and installed in place ready for use; and (ii) Partial or complete occupancy by Owner; and (iii) Performance of work in connection with construction operations insured by the Owner, by agents or lessees or other Contractors of the Owner or Using Agency

In the event that the Contract is for renovation, addition or modification of an existing structure and Builders Risk Insurance is not available, the Owner will accept an Installation Floater Insurance Policy with the above endorsements in lieu of the Builders' Risk Insurance Policy. Such floater must insure loss to materials and equipment prior to acceptance by Owner and must be on an ALL RISK BASIS with the policy written on a specific job site.

1.5.3.3.8 Disposition of Insurance Documents. One original certificate of insurance with all endorsements

attached must be deposited with Owner for each insurance policy required.

1.5.3.4 Termination of Obligation to Insure. Unless otherwise expressly provided to the contrary, the obligation to insure as provided herein shall not terminate until the Design Professional shall have executed the Certificate of Material Completion. 1.5.3.5 Failure of Insurers. The Contractor is responsible for any delay resulting from the failure of his insurance carriers to furnish proof of proper coverage in the prescribed form.

SECTION 1 – GENERAL PART 6 – HAZARDOUS CONDITIONS AND MATERIALS


19

PART 6 – HAZARDOUS CONDITIONS AND MATERIALS 1.6.1 Hazardous Materials.

1.6.1.1 Definition.

1.6.1.1.1 The term "Hazardous Materials shall mean any material or substance within the meaning and definition for “Hazardous Substance” and/or “Hazardous Waste” as those terms are employed and set forth in the Georgia Hazardous Site Response Act and the Comprehensive Environmental Response Compensation and Liability Act as amended, 42 USC § 6901 et seq., and regulations promulgated thereunder (collectively "CERCLA") and any corresponding state or local law or regulation, and shall also include: (a) any Pollutant or Contaminant as those terms are defined in CERCLA; (b) any Solid Waste or Hazardous Constituent as those terms are defined by, or are otherwise identified by, the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act as amended, 42 USC § 6901 et seq., and regulations promulgated thereunder (collectively "RCRA") and any corresponding state or local law or regulation; (c) crude oil, petroleum and fractions of distillates thereof and petroleum releases ; (d) any other material, substance or chemical defined, characterized or regulated as toxic or hazardous under any applicable law, regulation, ordinance, directive or ruling, including, but not limited to, Asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB),and, (e) any infectious or medical waste or environmental contamination as defined by any applicable federal or state laws or regulations. 1.6.1.1.2 The term “Hazardous” Materials does not include those materials that are expressly and specifically required to be installed under the Contract Documents. 1.6.1.1.3 The term “Hazardous” Materials does not include products or materials that are commonly used in construction or industrial practice so long as they are used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions or Material Safety Data Sheets issued for the product or materials. (See Article 1.6.3 below.)

1.6.1.2 Obligation to Notify Owner of Existing Hazardous Materials. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner and the Design Professional, both orally and in writing, of the presence and location of any physical evidence of, or information regarding the presence of Hazardous Materials at the Site of which it becomes aware. If the Contractor encounters Hazardous Materials on the Site the Contractor shall (i) immediately stop performance of Work or that portion of the Work affected by or affecting such Hazardous Materials; (ii) secure the contaminated area against intrusion; (iii) not disturb or remove the Hazardous Materials; (iv) not proceed, or allow any subcontractor or supplier to proceed, with any Work or other activities in the area affected by such Hazardous Materials until such materials have been properly remediated and until directed in writing to do so by the Owner; and, (v) take any other steps necessary to protect life and health and the surrounding environment. The Contractor shall be entitled to adjustment of the Contract Time and the Contract Sum pursuant to Section 5, Part 2 of these General Conditions in order to compensate for the impact of any required demolition, re-work, shutdown, delay, protection of work, disruption, and start-up resulting from the encountering of such Hazardous Materials on the Site for which the Contractor is not responsible.

1.6.1.3 Prohibition Against Selecting and Installing Products Containing Hazardous Materials. The Contractor shall not select, install or otherwise incorporate any products or materials containing Hazardous Materials within the boundaries of the Site. Should the Contractor or any Subcontractors have knowledge that, or believe that, an item, component, material, substance, or accessory within a product or assembly selected by the Contractor or any Subcontractor may contain Hazardous Materials it is the Contractor’s responsibility to secure a written certification from the manufacturer of any suspected material which identifies the specific Hazardous Material(s) contained, together with the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for such materials which shall be submitted to the Owner and Design Professional. 1.6.1.4 Fill, Backfill and Landscaping. No soil found on Site, or transported to the Site from remote locations, which contains debris or waste or Hazardous Materials shall be used for fill, backfill or landscaping topsoil.

1.6.2 Responsibility and Warranty of Subcontractors, Trade Contractors and Suppliers. Products that are specified by reference standards or in descriptive manner without a manufacturer’s name, model number or trade name, to be selected by the Contractor, shall not contain Hazardous Materials in any form, except as and to the extent permitted in 1.6.1, above, and 1.6.3, below. The Contractor shall require that each of its Subcontractors and Suppliers warrant to the Owner and Design Professional that all materials, products and assemblies, other than those which specifically and expressly required by the Contract Documents, incorporated, or submitted for incorporation into this Project, are free of Hazardous Materials. This warranty shall also include all materials, components, and accessories not specifically enumerated or detailed in the Contract Documents but which are required by performance specifications or recommended by manufacturers for complete installation of materials, products and assemblies.

SECTION 1 – GENERAL PART 6 – HAZARDOUS CONDITIONS AND MATERIALS


20

1.6.3 Hazardous Materials and Substances Used On the Job Site. Products containing Hazardous Materials may be employed in the performance of work by the Contractor and its Subcontractors, as allowed by subparagraph 1.6.1.1.2 and 1.6.1.1.3 above, as a means and methods application or as part of its performance of the Work, such as chemicals used on the Site, but only provided that: (i) such products are used In accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and Material Safety Data Sheets; (ii) such products are rendered harmless upon completion of the affected Work; (iii) reasonable precautions can be and are taken to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons involved in the Work or in its proximity, including the ultimate users of the completed Work; (iv) the Contractor shall make available to the Owner and the Design Professional copies of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for any such products used on the Site, and (v), the Contractor shall immediately notify Owner, Design Professional and appropriate regulatory agencies if there is a spill or release or misuse of any such product used on the Site that exceeds State or Federal reportable limits. 1.6.4 Hazardous Conditions. The Contractor and Owner acknowledge that previously unknown hazardous conditions may be uncovered at any job site, and in particular where existing structures are being demolished and/or remodeled to accommodate new construction or to reutilize existing facilities. Should a hazardous condition not involving Hazardous Materials as set forth above be encountered on the Site, and should reasonable safety precautions be deemed by the Contractor in good faith to be inadequate to prevent foreseeable personal injury to persons encountering the hazardous condition, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the hazardous condition, stop work in the affected area and immediately report the hazardous condition to the Design Professional and Owner in writing. The Owner shall undertake, or shall contract (by Change Order) with the Contractor or contract with a Separate Contractor, to resolve the condition. So long as the hazardous condition did not result from activities or substances brought on the Site by the Contractor, the Contractor is entitled to adjustments in the Contract Time and the Contract Sum as set forth in Paragraph 1.6.1.2 above.

SECTION 1 – GENERAL PART 7 – MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS


21

PART 7 – MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 1.7.1 Legal Compliance.

1.7.1.1 General. This Contract shall be governed by the law of Georgia. The Contractor shall comply with all laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, and orders of any government agency having jurisdiction in the performance of the Work and shall ensure the compliance of its Subcontractors.

1.7.1.2 Specific Laws. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing Paragraph, the following laws are specifically referenced:

1.7.1.2.1 The Drug-Free Workplace Act, O.C.G.A. § 50-24-1, et seq. 1.7.1.2.2 Preference for Georgia Supplies, materials, equipment, and agricultural products, O.C.G.A. §§50-5-60 through 61. 1.7.1.2.3 Preference for Georgia forest products, O.C.G.A. § 50-5-63. 1.7.1.2.4 Preference for local sellers of Georgia products, O.C.G.A. § 50-5-62. 1.7.1.2.5 Standards and Requirements for Construction, Alterations, etc., O.C.G.A. § 8-2-1 et seq. 1.7.1.2.6 Control of Soil Erosion and Sedimentation, O.C.G.A. § 12-7.1, et seq. 1.7.1.2.7 Regulation of Fire and other Hazards, O.C.G.A. § 25-2-1 et seq. 1.7.1.2.8 Regulation of Blasting Operations, O.C.G.A. § 25-2-1 et seq. and 25-9-1 et seq. 1.7.1.2.9 Providing safe workplace, O.C.G.A. §s 34-2-10 and 34-7-20 1.7.1.2.10 Georgia Facility Protection Act, O.C.G.A. § 25-9-1 et seq. (See Article E-12(f)) 1.7.1.2.11 High Voltage Safety Act, O.C.G.A. § 46-3-30 et seq. 1.7.1.2.12 Access and Use by Physically Handicapped Persons, O.C.G.A. § 30-3-1 et seq. 1.7.1.2.13 Small and Minority Business Enterprises, O.C.G.A. §s 50-5-120 et seq. and 50-5-130 et seq. 1.7.1.2.14 Trading with the State or State Officials, O.C.G.A. §s 45-10-20 to 45-10-71. 1.7.1.2.15 Title VII of the Civil Rights Act, 42 U.S.C. § 2000a through 2000h-6 1.7.1.2.16 Age Discrimination in Employment Act, 29 U.S.C. § 621 et seq.; 42 U.S.C. § 6101 et seq. 1.7.1.2.17 Americans with Disabilities Act, 42 U.S.C. § 12101 et seq. 1.7.1.2.18 Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act, 29 U. S. C. § 651 et seq. 1.7.1.2.19 Federal Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act, 42 U. S. C. § 11001 et seq. 1.7.1.2.20 Georgia Open Records Act, O.C.G.A. §50-18-70 et seq.

1.7.1.2.21 Georgia Blasting Standards Act, O.C.G.A. § 25-8-1 et seq. and Blasting, Excavating Nearby

Underground Gas Pipes and Utilities, 25-9-1 et. seq. 1.7.1.2.22 Scaffolding and Staging Statute, O.C.G.A. §34-1-1 et seq. 1.7.1.2.23 Department of Labor Rules and Regulations, O.C.G.A. § 34-2-6 et seq. 1.7.1.2.24 Hazardous Chemical Protection and Right to Know Act, O.C.G.A. § 45-22-2 et seq.,



22

1.7.1.2.25 Retainage on Public Works Contracts, 0.C.G.A. §13-10-80 et seq. 1.7.1.2.26 Compliance with “federal work authorization programs” and federal Immigration Reform and

Control Act of 1986 by Georgia Public Employers, contractors and subcontractors, O.C.G.A. §13-10-90 et seq. 1.7.1.3 Building Codes. The following Building Codes, in the latest editions approved by the Georgia Department of Community Affairs, shall be used. (See O.C.G.A. §8-2-20.) The Design Professional will designate any additional codes or special modifications in the Supplementary General Conditions. As of the year 2000, these codes are published jointly by the Southern Building Code Congress International, the International Code Council, the Building Officials and Code Administrators, International, and the International Conference of Building Officials, and are commonly referred to as the International Building Codes.

1.7.1.3.1 Georgia State Minimum Standard Building Code (International Building Code, 2000 Edition) with

Georgia Amendments. 1.7.1.3.2 Georgia State Minimum Standard Mechanical Code (International Mechanical Code, 2000 Edition),

with Georgia Amendments. 1.7.1.3.3 Georgia State Minimum Standard Gas Code (International Fuel Gas Code, 2000 Edition), with

Georgia Amendments. 1.7.1.3.4 Georgia State Minimum Standard Plumbing Code (International Plumbing Code, 2000 Edition), with

Georgia Amendments. 1.7.1.3.5 Georgia State Minimum Standard Electric Code (National Electrical Code, 2002 Edition), with

Georgia Amendments. 1.7.1.3.6 Georgia State Minimum Standard Energy Code (International Energy Conservation Code, 2000

Edition), with Georgia Amendments. 1.7.1.3.7 Georgia State Minimum Standard Fire Prevention Code (International Fire Code, 2003 Edition),

with Georgia Amendments.

1.7.1.4 Fire, Life Safety, and Accessibility Codes. The following codes, in the versions approved by the Georgia State Fire Marshal/Fire Safety Commissioner and Department of Human Resources, shall be used. The Design Professional will designate any additional codes or special modifications in the Supplementary General Conditions.

1.7.1.4.1 Georgia State Life Safety Code (NFPA 101) 1.7.1.4.2 State Accessibility Codes (See O.C.G.A. §30-3-3) 1.7.1.4.3 Rules and Regulations of the Georgia Safety Fire Commissioner (See O.C.G.A. §§25-2-4,12.) 1.7.1.4.4 Swimming Pool Permits and Regulations (See O.C.G.A. §31-45-3, Rules and Regulations Chapter

290-5-57)

1.7.1.5 Latest Edition. The latest edition approved by the implementing agency of the regulations, rules, and codes listed in Paragraphs 1.7.1.3 and 1.7.1.4 above, with all amendments as of the date of the opening of bids, shall govern the installation of all Work and is adopted and incorporated into the Contract Documents and made a part thereof by reference, Provided, however that the drawings and specifications shall be adhered to in all cases where they call for quality of materials, quality of workmanship, or quality of construction which is equal to or in excess of the quality required by the above stated codes and Provided also: That there may be no variances from the drawings and specifications except to the extent that the said variances shall be necessary in order to comply with the above stated codes. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to familiarize himself with the requirements of the above stated codes. If there are any express requirements in the drawings or specifications that are at variance to the above stated codes, all changes in the Work necessary to eliminate or add to the said requirements and make the Work conform to the above stated codes shall be adjusted as provided in the Contract for changes in the Work.



23

1.7.1.6 Compliance with Executive Orders Concerning Ethics. The Contractor warrants that he and his firm have complied in all respects with the Governor’s Executive Orders concerning ethics matters, including, but not limited to, Executive Order dated January 13, 2003 (establishing Code of Ethics for Executive Branch Officers and Employees, including provisions governing former officers and employees); Executive Order dated October 1, 2003 (governing vendors to state agencies and disclosure and registration of lobbyists); and O.C.G.A. Sections 21-5-70(5), 21-5-71 and 21-5-73, all as amended effective January 9, 2006 (requiring registration and disclosure filings by state agency vendor lobbyists). In this regard, the Contractor certifies that any lobbyist employed or retained by the Contractor or his firm has both registered and made the required disclosures required by the Executive Orders, as amended. 1.7.1.7 Compliance with Federal and State Work Authorization and Immigration Laws. The Contractor and all subcontractors, suppliers and consultants must comply with all federal and state work authorization and immigration laws, and must certify compliance using the form set forth in Section 7 (“Georgia Security and Immigration Compliance Act Affidavits”). The required certificates must be filed with the Owner and copied maintained by the Contractor as of the beginning date of this contract and each subcontract, supplier contract, or consultant contract, and upon final payment to the subcontractor or consultant. State officials, including officials of the Georgia Department of Audits and Accounts, officials of the Owner, retain the right to inspect and audit the Project Site and employment records of the Contractor, subcontractors and consultants without notice during normal working hours until Final Completion, and as otherwise specified by law and by Rules and Regulations of the Georgia Department of Audits and Accounts.

1.7.2 Surveys, Permits, and Regulations. The Owner shall furnish all surveys unless otherwise specified. Permits and licenses of a temporary nature necessary for the prosecution of the Work shall be obtained and paid for by the Contractor. Permits, licenses, and easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities shall be obtained and paid for by the Owner unless otherwise specified. The Contractor and its Subcontractors must pay any municipal or county occupational licenses, taxes, or fees, if any. The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations bearing on the conduct of the Work. If the Contractor observes that the drawings or specifications are at variance with any such laws, ordinances, rules or regulations, he shall promptly notify the Owner in writing, and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the Contract for changes in the Work. If the Contractor performs any Work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules or regulations without such notice to the Owner, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom. Nothing in this paragraph shall be construed to impose design responsibility on the Contractor except as noted in the Contract Documents. 1.7.3 Open Records Act. Owner and Design Professional and Contractor acknowledge and agree that all records of the project and the Work, including records of Subcontractors, are subject to the Georgia Open Records Act, O.C.G.A. §50-18-70 et seq., with particular attention being called to O.C.G.A. §50-18-70(a) regarding the records of private persons, firms, corporations, or other private entity engaged in performance of services or functions on behalf of a state agency, public agency or public office. 1.7.4 Use of Site. The Contractor has a revocable license to come on, use, and perform Work upon the Premises, shall confine thereto his plant, his apparatus, the staging and storage of materials, the operations of his forces and the Work to limits indicated by law, ordinances, permits, or the Contract Documents, and shall not unreasonably encumber the Premises with his materials. The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the Work to be loaded with weight that will endanger its safety. The Contractor shall enforce Contract requirements regarding signs, advertisements, fires, and smoking and shall remove from the Premises and properly dispose all trash and debris. 1.7.5 Office for Contract Compliance Specialist (CCS). The Contractor shall provide at his expense a temporary office,

services, utilities, equipment, and supplies at the Site for the use of the CCS. The office shall be a minimum of 100 square feet in size; weather-tight; and shall be provided with heat, ventilation, cooling, electric lights, adequate windows, and securable access. The following services shall be provided: at least four dual-plug 110 v. electrical outlets, two private telephone connections and local telephone service. The following equipment for the CCS’s exclusive use shall be provided: a desk with drawers, two chairs, a four drawer metal file cabinet, a plan table and rack, a telephone with messaging capability, and connection, cables/electrical surge protection for the electronic equipment and for the CCS’s computer. The following items, which may be used in common with the Contractor’s facilities, shall be provided: wet (flush) toilet, potable water and soap for hand washing, potable water suitable for drinking, access to fax machine and copier, and use of a room with table and chairs to accommodate meetings of a minimum of eight (8) people. The use of a temporary portable wet toilet with a holding tank is acceptable only when a sanitary sewer is not available on the Site. Toilet tissue and paper hand towels shall be provided at all times. At the completion of the project, all of the equipment provided will be returned to the Contractor. The Contractor is not responsible for providing the following items for the CCS: computer equipment, internet access, long distance, stationery supplies, and personal safety equipment. 1.7.6 Utilities. Pending the extension and connection of permanent water, permanent gas, permanent sewer taps, and permanent electric power, the Contractor shall obtain temporary water, temporary gas, temporary electric power, and provide



24

sewage disposal at his own expense. In the absence of provisions to the contrary, the Contractor shall pay for all utilities services until Material Completion has been achieved. 1.7.7 Royalties and Patents. The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. He shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall save the Owner harmless from loss on account thereof. The Owner shall defend and be responsible for all such loss when a particular process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified. 1.7.8 Separate Contracts. The Owner reserves the right at any time and from time to time upon notice to Contractor to perform, or cause to be performed by other Contractors, other work at the Site in connection with the development of the Project that is not contemplated hereby or that is contemplated hereby if the Contractor and the Owner shall be unable to agree upon a Change Order incorporating such work as Work of the Contractor under this Contract. In either case, the Owner shall assure that such personnel or Contractors do not cause any conflict with the Work of Contractor. Contractor shall afford the Owner and other Contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction, protection, and storage of material and equipment at the Site and the execution of work, and shall properly connect, if required by Contract Documents, and coordinate its work with theirs. If any work by the Owner or its other Contractors increases Contractor's costs or extends the time of performance, Contractor shall be entitled upon timely claim to a Change Order for payment by Owner of any reasonable costs actually incurred by Contractor as a result thereof and to an extension of time for performance for such reasonable time as the Design Professional shall determine. Contractor has no responsibility hereunder to certify the suitability or correctness of any work performed by Owner's own personnel or other Contractors under direct contract with the Owner. This Article also applies to installation of loose equipment and fixtures by the Owner, Using Agency, or a Separate Contractor. 1.7.9 Women, and Disadvantaged Business Participation.

1.7.9.1 Good Faith Efforts. Contractor shall, to the extent consistent with quality, price, risk and other lawful and relevant considerations, use its good faith efforts to achieve participation by minority, women, and disadvantaged business enterprise participation in Work and services contracted to Contractor under this Contract.

1.7.9.2 Policy of the State of Georgia. It is the policy of the State of Georgia that minority business enterprises shall have the maximum opportunity to participate in the State purchasing process. Therefore, the State of Georgia encourages all minority business enterprises to compete for, win, and receive Contracts for goods, services, and construction. In addition, the State encourages all companies to sub-contract portions of any State Contract to minority business enterprises. It is the wish of the Owner that minority businesses be given the opportunity to propose on the various parts of the Work. This desire on the part of the Owner is not intended to restrict or limit competitive selection or to increase the cost of the Work. The Owner supports a healthy free market system that seeks to include responsible businesses and provides ample opportunity for business growth and development.

1.7.9.3 Minority Vendor Designee. The minority vendor designee of the Owner shall be specified in the Supplementary General Conditions or the Instructions to Bidders. For more information, please contact the Board of Regents’ Office of Business Development by e-mail at [email protected].

1.7.10 Assignment. The Contractor shall not assign the Contract or sublet it as a whole nor shall the Contractor assign any moneys due or to become due to him hereunder. Contractors may subcontract portions of the Work, normally performed by Subcontractors. 1.7.11 Interpretation of Contract Documents. The Contract Documents shall be construed neither against nor in favor of either party, but shall be construed in a neutral manner. 1.7.12 Counterparts. This Contract may be executed in multiple counterparts. All counterparts shall constitute one and the same instrument. One (1) counterpart of this Contract shall be delivered to the Owner and one (1) counterpart to the Contractor. 1.7.13 Forms and Specimens. The forms and specimens In Section 7 are incorporated by reference herein and shall be executed in substantial conformance as required or convenient in describing obligations under the Contract Documents. 1.7.14 Entire Agreement. The Contract Documents referenced herein constitute the entire Contract between the Owner and the Contractor with respect to the Project and supersedes all prior negotiations, representations, and agreements. Except as set forth herein, there are no other promises, understandings, agreements, representations or warranties, oral or written, expressed or implied between the parties. This Contract may not be changed, modified, or terminated, in whole or in part, nor any provision waived except by Change Order.

SECTION 2 – PRE-COMMENCEMENT PHASE PART 1 – PRE-COMMENCEMENT PHASE SERVICES


25

SECTION 2 – PRE-COMMENCEMENT PHASE

PART 1 – PRE-COMMENCEMENT PHASE SERVICES 2.1.1 Pre-commencement Coordination. As early as practicable and reasonably in advance of the commencement of Work on the Project, the Contractor shall schedule and conduct an initial construction coordination meeting for the purpose of determining and developing the appropriate and necessary processes and procedures for proper planning and coordination for the installation of all the Work. The meeting shall include all of the Subcontractors, Trade Contractors, , and Suppliers materially involved in such installation of the Work. The Contractor shall assure that each necessary Subcontractor involved in performance of the Work shall be present and represented by a knowledgeable person with authority to reach agreement on the coordination procedures and processes involving its portion of the Work. The Owner shall be represented at this initial meeting by the Owner’s Representative, and shall require that authorized and knowledgeable representatives of each of the separate disciplines in the design team, comprising the Design Professional and all Consultants contributing to the design preparation, shall also be present at the initial meeting. If necessary, additional meetings shall be scheduled by the Contractor with all of the affected parties to continue review and resolution of any real or apparent conflicts or interferences. 2.1.2 Construction Preparation Period.

2.1.2.1 Requirement for Project Planning. No physical work will begin on the construction site until the receipt of a Proceed Order issued by the Owner. The Contract assumes that a Proceed Order will be issued in not more than sixty days from the Effective Date of the Contract. Failure of the Contractor to provide the necessary documentation for the issuance of a Proceed Order shall not entitle the Contractor to any extension of time. If a Proceed Order is not issued within sixty days from the award of the Contract and non-issuance is due to nonperformance by the Contractor, the Contractor may be in default.

2.1.2.2 Timing of Submission of Documents. No Proceed Order shall be issued until the Owner has received, in good and proper order, the following documents. The documents shall be submitted in accordance with the following schedule:

2.1.2.2.1 Within ten days of the Notice of Apparent Successful Bid:

(a) Contract executed by Contractor (b) Payment and Performance Bonds in accordance with Article 1.5.1

2.1.2.2.2 Within fourteen days of the Effective Date of the Contract: (a) Proof of Insurance as required in Paragraph 1.5.3.1 (b) List of intended Subcontractors

2.1.2.2.3 Prior to the issuance of the Proceed Order, but in any event, within sixty days of the Effective Date of the Contract:

(a) Submittal and Shop Drawing Schedule as required in Article 2.2.3 (b) Construction Progress Schedule as required in Article 2.1.5 (c) Documents Review Report as required in paragraph 2.1.2.3 (d) Construction Management Plan as required in Article 2.1.3 (e) Documentation necessary for receiving land disturbance permits, See Article 2.2.5 (f) Contractor’s Quality Control Program as required in Article 2.1.4 (g) Written Safety Program as required in Article 1.4.7 (h) Contractor’s Schedule of Rental Rates and Wage Rates



26

2.1.2.3 Document Review and Verification. Within one business day of receipt of the Effective Date of the Contract Contractor shall commence a review of the plans and Specifications, to identify conflicts, omissions, or constructability issues in the documents. Contractor shall prepare a report containing a list of issues and suggested modifications identified. He shall provide a copy of the report to the Design Professional and the Owner prior to the end of the Construction Preparation Period. If a fire protection sprinkler system is required, the Contractor shall submit to the Design Professional the certificate of competency of the fire protection sprinkler system Trade Contractor as required by State of Georgia Fire Protection and Safety Code. The certificate of competency shall be provided to the Design Professional prior to any work being performed on the fire protection sprinkler system. Nothing in this paragraph shall be construed to impose design responsibility on the Contractor except as noted in the Contract Documents.

2.1.3 Construction Management Plan. Contractor shall prepare and furnish to the Owner a thorough and complete plan for the management of the Project from issuance of the Proceed Order through the issuance of the Design Professional's Certificate of Material Completion. Such plan shall include, without limitation, an estimate of the manpower requirements for each trade and the anticipated availability of such manpower, a schedule prepared using the critical path method that will amplify and support the schedule required in Article 2.1.5 below, and the Submittal Schedule as required in Article 2.2.3. The Contractor shall include in his plan the names and resumés of the Project Superintendent, Project Manager and the person in charge of Safety. 2.1.4 Quality Control Program.

2.1.4.1 Responsibility for Quality of Materials and Installation. Contractor acknowledges that he has full, total, and complete responsibility for providing materials, labor, and all other items necessary for providing the level of quality specified in the Contract Documents. He agrees that this responsibility is indivisible, non-delegable, non-transferable, and not diminished by any inspections provided by the Design Professional or his consulting engineers, nor by any inspections provided by the Owner. In recognition of this, Contractor will prepare for submission and review by the Design Professional, a written program describing the efforts that will be taken to insure the proper quality level is achieved. The program shall be submitted prior to the issuance of a Proceed Order.

2.1.4.2 Written Program. Contractor’s written Quality Control Program shall describe in detail the steps the Contractor will take to ensure quality and will include, without limitation, those personnel, in addition to the Superintendent, who will provide review and verification of the proper installation of the Work. Each Subcontractor having responsibility for more than $100,000 of the contract cost shall be addressed in the plan. The written program shall include affidavits from each of the involved Subcontractors acknowledging their responsibilities under the Contract in general and the Quality Control Program specifically.

2.1.5 Construction Progress Schedule; Overall Project Schedule. The Contractor shall submit for review by the Design Professional and approval by the Owner a Construction Progress Schedule based upon the Design Professional’s Preliminary Design and Construction Schedule and prepared using a CPM (Critical Path Method) process within sixty days after the Effective Date of the Contract, utilizing a full-featured software package in a form satisfactory to the Design Professional and Owner, showing the dates for commencement and completion of the Work required by the Contract Documents, including coordination of mechanical, plumbing, and electrical disciplines, as well as coordination of the various subdivisions of the Work within the Contract. Milestones must be clearly indicated and sequentially organized to identify the critical path of the Project. The Construction Schedule will be developed to represent the CSI specification divisions. It shall have the minimum number of activities required to adequately represent to the Owner the complete scope of Work and define the Project’s (and each Phase’s if phased) critical path and associated activities. The format of the Construction Progress Schedule will have dependencies indicated on a monthly grid identifying milestone dates such as construction start, phase construction, structural top out, dry-in, rough-in completion, metal stud and drywall completion, equipment installation, systems operational, inspections for Material Completion and Occupancy Date, and Final Completion Date. The Contractor shall submit, along with the Construction Progress Schedule, the Submittal Schedule for approval by the Design Professional, correlating the associated approval dates for the documents with the Construction Progress Schedule. Upon recommendation by the Design Professional and approval by the Owner, the Construction Progress Schedule shall become the Overall Project Schedule, which shall be utilized by the Design Professional, Owner and Contractor. The Contractor must provide the Design Professional and the Owner with monthly updates of the Overall Project Schedule indicating completed activities and any changes in sequencing or activity durations, including approved change orders. See also Article 3.3.5.



27

2.1.6 Progress Reports and Information. When required, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner such schedule of quantities and costs, payrolls, bills, vouchers, correct copies of all subcontracts, statements, reports, correct copies of all agreements, correspondence, and written transactions with the surety on the performance bond that have any relevance to the Work, estimates, records, and other data as the Owner may request that concerns the Work performed or to be performed under this Contract. When requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall give the Owner access to its records relating to the foregoing. (See also Article 1.2.3, Audits.) The above reports shall include, but are not limited to, (a) written notice of dates by which specified Work will have been completed, (b) written notice of dates by which Non-Compliant Work will be made good, (c) written notice that Non-Compliant Work has been made good, (d) written notice as to the date or dates by which Work that has not been performed with equal steps and at the same rate required by the Overall Project Schedule shall have been brought into conformity with the Overall Project Schedule, (e) date by which any undisputed claim of a Subcontractor supplier, or laborer shall have been paid, (f) written advice regarding the nature and amount of any disputed claim of a Subcontractor, supplier, or laborer, and (g) information regarding Work performed under Change Orders. 2.1.7 Rental Rates and Wage Rates for Change Orders. As soon as is practical, but prior to the completion of the

Construction Preparation Period and in any event prior to the commencement of any Work on the Site, the Contractor shall submit in accordance with the style and format of a specimen to be furnished by the Owner for consideration of the Owner the following: (1) a proposal for rental rates on heavy construction equipment that shall apply in the event Change Order Work is performed, and (2) a proposal for wage rates for the types of project labor that shall apply in the event of the execution of any Change Order Work. Under penalty of false swearing, a principal of the contracting firm shall certify that the proposal for rental rates and proposal for wage rates do not exceed current costs for like services. The Owner will in no event consider a rental rate in excess of eighty percent of the rate set forth in the latest edition of the "Compilation of Nationally Averaged Rental Rates for Construction Equipment" of the Associated Equipment Distributors unless the rates proposed in excess of eighty percent are supported by proof satisfactory to the Owner that the excess rates are reasonable. If the equipment is owned by the Contractor the costs shall be charged at a maximum of eighty percent of market monthly rental rates for the amount of time used. If applicable, transportation costs may be included. The decision of the Owner shall be final, binding and conclusive on all parties. Rental rates shall be payable only for the actual time the equipment is required on the Site. 2.1.8 Unit Prices.

2.1.8.1 During Construction Preparation Period. Prior to the completion of the Construction Preparation Period, the Contractor shall establish with the Owner Unit Prices not already bid. Examples include additional installation of stormwater management BMPs, any other anticipated Change Order Work that can utilize Unit Prices, or for any items of Work considered necessary by the Design Professional and not established in the Contract Documents.

2.1.8.2 During Construction. Upon request of the Owner the Contractor shall submit written proposals for unit prices to be applied in the event Change Order Work is authorized by the Owner to be performed under Case (b). 2.1.8.3 Calculation of Unit Prices. Unit Prices include all sums for payment, repayment, reimbursement, remittance, remuneration, compensation, profit, cost, overhead, expense, loss, expenditure, allowance, charge, demand, hire, wages, salary, tax, cash, assessment, price, money, bill, statement, dues, recovery, restitution, benefit, recoupment, exaction, or injury. Unit prices to cover the addition or reinstallation of stormwater management BMPs shall be calculated by type and linear foot. Unit Prices shall not include any Time Dependent Overhead Costs, as such costs will be added as appropriate pursuant to Section 3, Part 3. The Contractor shall certify that the Unit Prices submitted do not exceed current costs in the industry or trade for like services or materials.

2.1.9 Building Commissioning Services. The Owner may provide as a part of its testing services the Building Commissioning services involving the project’s HVAC and exhaust systems, temperature control systems, fire detection and alarm systems, emergency power and lighting system, fire suppression system, security locks and security locking control systems, food service equipment (if applicable), and laundry equipment (if applicable). In the event the Using Agency’s Program specifies additional commissioning services, the Owner shall procure such services as well. The Owner, through its Executive Administrator, may engage an independent Commissioning Authority. It is the intent of this Article that the Commissioning Authority enforce the requirements mentioned herein and certify that the systems and equipment listed all function properly prior to the initiation of each final inspection. 2.1.9.1 Initial Building Commissioning Plan. The Owner may develop with its Commissioning Authority, the Contractor and the Design Professional, an initial Building Commissioning plan to consist of the following:



28

2.1.9.1.1 The Building Commissioning Plan shall include a summary of understanding of the design intent for each of the relevant building systems and equipment. Each design intent summary shall establish critical performance criteria that indicates whether a system is properly functioning. 2.1.9.1.2 The Building Commissioning Plan shall include a commissioning schedule listing the duration of each commissioning activity such as system and equipment manual submittal and approval, equipment start-up, and system and equipment training, and combining all such activities in a manner reflecting the inherent subsidiary relationships between activities. This schedule shall be used as a basis for accomplishing the commissioning portion of the Overall Progress Schedule.

2.1.9.2 Define Duties. The Contractor, in coordination with the Commissioning Authority and the Design Professional, shall during preparation of the Contract Documents clearly define all duties and activities required of the various Trade Contractors relating to Building Commissioning, any necessary order in which these activities and duties must take place, and define all critical performance criteria to be achieved. 2.1.9.3 Inspect, Review and Monitor. The Commissioning Authority shall inspect, review and monitor all Building Commissioning related construction activities for timeliness, completeness and conformance with the criteria established by the contract documents, and report same to the Contractor, Owner and the Design Professional. The Contractor and Commissioning Authority shall coordinate and supervise the training activities of each system.

SECTION 2 – PRE-COMMENCEMENT PHASE PART 2 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE PLAN


29

PART 2 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE PLAN 2.2.1 Contract Documents.

2.2.1.1 Familiarity with Contract Documents. Contractor represents that it has reviewed or will review and become familiar with the Contract Documents, not later than the commencement of the construction phase.

2.2.1.2 Identification of Construction Documents. The Design Professional shall identify the Construction Documents, which shall include, but are not limited to, the Specifications, the Drawings, and all Addenda. The Construction Documents are included within the Contract Documents. 2.2.1.3 Correlation and Intent. It is the intention of the Owner, Design Professional, and Contractor that the Construction Documents include all items necessary for proper execution and full and final completion of the Work. The Contract and Construction Documents (the Contract Documents) are complementary, and what is required by one is as binding as if required by all. Performance by the Contractor is required to the extent consistent with and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents as being necessary to produce the design intent as expressed in the Contract Documents. The intention of the Owner and the Design Professional is that the Contract and Construction Documents include all labor and materials, equipment, and transportation necessary for the proper execution of the work. It is not intended, however, that materials or work not covered by or properly inferable from any heading, branch, class, or trade of the specifications shall be supplied unless noted on the drawings.

2.2.1.4 Arrangement. of Specifications. The Specifications are separated into numbered and titled divisions for convenience of reference. Neither the Owner nor the Design Professional shall assume any responsibility for defining the limits of any subcontracts on account of the arrangement of the Specifications. Notwithstanding the appearance of such language in the various divisions of the Specifications as, "The Plumbing Contractor,” "The Electrical Contractor," "The Roofing Contractor," etc., the Contractor is responsible to the Owner for the entire Contract and the execution of all of the Work referred to in the Contract Documents. No partial sets of Bidding Documents shall be issued by the Design Professional. Any partial documents issued by the Contractor shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

2.2.1.5 Conflicts. The following general principles shall govern the settlement of disputes that may arise over conflicts in the Contract Documents: (a) as between figures given on drawings and the scaled measurements, the figures shall govern; (b) as between large-scale drawings and small-scale drawings, the larger scale shall govern; (c) as between the Contract and the Specifications, the requirements of the Contract, as executed, shall govern. Conflicts noted shall be reported to the Design Professional. The principles set forth herein shall not alter the provisions of Paragraph 1.1.7.1. Schedules, lists, indexes, tables, inventories, written instructions, written descriptions, summaries, statements, classifications, Specifications, written selections, or written designations, although appearing on the drawings, are deemed to be and are Specifications.

2.2.1.6 Requests for Information (RFI). In the event the Contract Documents are not complete, definite, and clear, the Contractor shall request the Design Professional in writing for additional instructions and shall furnish the Owner a copy of the RFI. With reasonable promptness but not more than five days thereafter, the Design Professional shall furnish complete, definite, and clear instructions in writing, or by means of drawings, or both. In the event such additional instructions are given orally for expediency, they shall be confirmed in writing or by drawings or both within five days following the oral instructions. Any such additional instructions shall be consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable therefrom. The Work shall be executed in conformity with the aforesaid instructions. The Design Professional shall furnish the Owner a copy of all additional instructions issued to the Contractor. If, because of events beyond its reasonable control, the Design Professional is not able to meet the specified time period, then it is entitled to ask for additional time from the Owner.

2.2.1.7 Effect of Addenda, Bulletins, and Change Orders. No special implication, interpretation, construction, connotation, denotation, import, or meaning shall be assigned to any provision of the Contract Documents because of changes created by the issuance of any (1) Addendum, (2) Bulletin, or (3) Change Order other than the precise meaning that the Contract Documents would have had if the provision thus created had read originally as it reads subsequent to the (1) Addendum, (2) Bulletin, or (3) Change Order by which it was created.



30

2.2.1.8 Intellectual Property Rights in Construction Documents, Drawings, and Models. The drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Design Professional pursuant to this Contract (including, without limitation, the Construction Documents), are the property of the Owner, whether or not the Project for which they are made commences or completes construction. Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in such drawings, Specifications, and other similar or related documents; Owner shall retain all common law, statutory, and other intellectual property rights with respect thereto. The Contractor must deliver remaining copies of such documents to the Owner upon request or upon completion of the Work, except that the Contractor may keep one copy of such documents for its files. The Contractor shall only use such drawings, Specifications and other documents for this Project. Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor or material or equipment supplier may use such drawings, Specifications, and other documents on other projects without the specific written consent of the Owner. All models are the property of the Owner.

2.2.2 Documents at the Project Site.

2.2.2.1 Drawings and Specifications at the Project Site. The Contractor shall keep at the Site at least one copy of the Contract Documents and Change Orders, all in good order and available to the Design Professional and to his representatives.

2.2.2.2 Recording Changes. The Contractor shall record all changes and shall annotate a copy of the drawings to reflect the as-built condition as required in Paragraph 1.1.7.3 above.

2.2.3 Submittals. Submittals required by the Contract Documents shall be prepared specifically for the Work by the Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Submittals are not Contract Documents.

2.2.3.1 Submittal Schedule. Within sixty days after the Effective Date of the Contract, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a Submittal Schedule for review and approval of the Design Professional. In establishing the Submittal Schedule the Contractor shall take into account large submittal documents that will require longer review times, e.g., submittals with over fifty sheets of drawings. The Design Professional’s approval shall be based on conformance of the Submittal Schedule with the Overall Project Schedule, subject to change from time to time in accordance with the progress of the Work.

2.2.3.2 Submission and Approval. The Contractor’s Submittals must comply with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall review and approve all Submittals prior to submission. The Contract Documents shall specify when shop drawings or submittals require the seal of a specialty consultant. The Contractor shall submit copies of Submittals as required by the Contract Documents for the Work of the various trades. The Design Professional shall review, approve, or take other appropriate action with respect to shop drawings, samples, or other submissions of the Contractor, including, but not limited to, confirming conformance with the design concept of the Project and with the Contract Documents. The Design Professional shall respond to and return said items to the Contractor within fourteen calendar days from receipt provided that the Submittals are submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the required Submittal schedule. The Design Professional shall review and give comment or approval to Submittal schedule within fourteen calendar days from receipt. Large submittal documents may require longer review times, e.g., submittals with over fifty sheets of drawings. If, because of events beyond its reasonable control, the Design Professional is not able to meet the specified time period, then it is entitled to ask for additional time from the Owner. The Contractor shall make all corrections required by the Design Professional and furnish such corrected copies as may be needed. If the Contractor believes that any corrections required by the Design Professional constitute a change to the contract, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Design Professional and Owner and request instructions. By forwarding the approved Submittals to the Design Professional, the Contractor represents that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements, and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and has checked and coordinated the information contained within such Submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. The Design Professional’s approval of Submittals shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility for errors of any sort in Submittals or schedules. The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require Submittals until the Design Professional has approved the respective Submittal. The Contractor shall maintain at the Site one copy of all approved Submittals.

2.2.3.3 Cost of Additional Review. The Design Professional shall be responsible for an initial and one subsequent review of the Submittal. Where the subsequent Submittal is not accepted due to noncompliance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall be responsible for payment for the additional time required by the Design Professional to complete the Submittal review.



31

2.2.4 Manufacturer's Recommendations. All work or materials shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and requirements. The Contractor shall obtain the manufacturer’s recommendations and requirements, for its use at the Site in executing the Work, copies of bulletins, circulars, catalogues, or other publications bearing the manufacturer’s titles, numbers, editions, dates, etc. If the manufacturer’s recommendations and requirements are not available, the Contractor shall request installation instructions from the Design Professional. 2.2.5 Site Plan.

2.2.5.1 General. The Design Professional is responsible for providing the initial sealed Site Plan as a part of the Bidding Documents. During the Pre-Commencement phase, the Contractor shall review the initial Site Plan and make and submit recommendations for any changes to the initial Site Plan. The Contractor is required to obtain the land disturbance permit(s) applicable to the Owner that implement the National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) requirements for stormwater management for construction activities from the appropriate issuing authority. Compliance requires that there be properly designed Best Management Practices (BMPs), properly installed BMPs, and inspection and maintenance of the installed BMPs.

2.2.5.2 Implementation. The Design Professional will depict upon the Site Plan its initial recommendations as to elements of the erosion, sedimentation, and pollution control plan, specifying his recommended design of BMPs for the Project, including stormwater management facilities, and other like matters. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to review the design of the BMPs and submit any changes to the plan, including the Contractor’s desired use of entrances to the Site, Contractor’s trailer(s) location, laydown areas and other similar matters affecting the design and implementation of the BMPs. The Design Professional and Contractor shall arrive at a final sealed Site Plan for submission to the permitting officials that enables the land disturbance permitting of the Project. The Design Professional and Contractor shall resolve with the local permitting official any deficiencies by the end of the Pre-commencement period.

2.2.5.3 Installation, Inspection, and Maintenance. The Contractor is responsible for installation and maintenance of the BMPs as a part of its Bid. The Design Professional shall obtain the services of a qualified testing laboratory to inspect the BMPs in accordance with the permits, the costs of such inspections to be borne by the Owner. In the event of Abnormal Weather Conditions or force majeure, the Contractor shall be compensated for re-installation of BMPs at established Unit Prices.

2.2.6 Geological and Archeological Specimens. If, during the execution of the Work, the Contractor, any Subcontractor, or any servant, employee, or agent of either should uncover any valuable material or materials, such as, but not limited to, treasure trove, geological specimens, archival material, archeological specimens, or ore, the Contractor acknowledges that title to the foregoing is vested in the Owner. The Contractor shall notify the Owner upon the discovery of any of the foregoing, shall take reasonable steps to safeguard it, and seek further instruction from the Design Professional. Any additional cost incurred by the Contractor shall be addressed under the provision for changed conditions. The Contractor agrees that the Geological and Water Resources Division and the Historic Preservation Division of the Georgia Department of Natural Resources may inspect the Work at reasonable times.

SECTION 3 – CONSTRUCTION PHASE PART 1 – CONSTRUCTION PHASE SERVICES


32

SECTION 3 – CONSTRUCTION PHASE

PART 1 – CONSTRUCTION PHASE SERVICES 3.1.1 Basic Construction Services.

3.1.1.1 Requirement to Commence Work. The Contractor shall under all circumstances commence work under this Contract no later than ten days after the Proceed Order Date of the Proceed Order.

3.1.1.2 Payment for Services and Work. Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, labor, services, water, tools, equipment, light, power, transportation, and other utilities and facilities necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work.

3.1.1.3 Quality of Materials and Workmanship. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new, and both workmanship and materials shall be of good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and work. The burden of proof is on the Contractor.

3.1.1.4 Quality and Discipline of Employees. The Contractor shall at all times enforce strict discipline and good order among his employees and shall not employ on the work any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the work assigned to him.

3.1.1.5 Failure of the Contractor to Supply Workmen. A Notice of Non-Compliant Work may be issued for failure of the Contractor to supply enough workers or enough materials or proper materials.

3.1.1.6 Superintendence and Supervision by Contractor.

3.1.1.6.1 Supervision by Contractor. The Contractor shall give efficient supervision to the work, using his best skill and attention. He shall carefully study and compare all drawings, specifications, and instructions and shall at once report to the Design Professional any error, inconsistency, or omission that he may discover, but he shall not be held responsible for their existence or discovery.

3.1.1.6.2 Superintendent of Contractor. The Contractor shall keep on this work during its progress and until the Final Certificate has been executed by the Design Professional a competent Project Superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to the Design Professional and Owner. The Project Superintendent shall not be changed except with the consent of the Owner and the Design Professional unless the superintendent proves to be unsatisfactory to the Contractor and ceases to be in his employ. The superintendent represents the Contractor and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor.

3.1.1.6.3 Replacement Project Superintendent. If the Contractor terminates the Project Superintendent or, if the Contractor, for any reason, engages a Project Superintendent different from the one originally assigned to the Project, Contractor must ensure that the replacement Project Superintendent has similar qualifications and experience as the originally identified Project Superintendent. Furthermore, the Contractor must obtain the Owner's prior written approval before engaging a permanent replacement Project Superintendent.

3.1.2 Measurements and Dimensions. Before ordering material or doing work that is dependent upon coordination with building conditions, the Contractor shall verify all dimensions, elevations, grades, and pitch by taking measurements at the building and shall be responsible for the correctness of same. Any discrepancies between the drawings and/or specifications and the existing conditions shall be referred to the Design Professional for additional instructions before any work affected thereby is begun. 3.1.3 Rain Water, Surface Water, and Back-up. The Contractor shall protect all Work, including but not limited to, excavations and trenches, from rainwater, surface water, and back up of drains and sewers. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, pumps, shoring, enclosures, and equipment necessary to protect and to keep the Work free of water. 3.1.4 Dust Control. Dust-proof enclosures or partitions for protection wherever dusty or dirty work is performed and dampening of debris to avoid dusting when removed shall be provided and included as a cost of the work. 3.1.5 Cutting, Patching, and Fitting. The Contractor shall do all cutting, patching, and fitting of the Work that may be required to make its several parts come together properly and fit.

SECTION 3 – CONSTRUCTION PHASE PART 1 – CONSTRUCTION PHASE SERVICES


33

3.1.6 Space Conditions. All pipes passing through floors, walls, and ceilings shall be installed with sufficient space between them to permit installation of pipe insulation and floor, wall, and ceiling plates without cutting of insulation or plates. Roughed-in dimensions shall be prepared by the Contractor to accomplish this requirement. The Contractor shall locate all equipment that must be serviced, operated, or maintained in fully accessible positions. This provision includes but is not limited to valves, traps, cleanouts, motors, controllers, switchgear, drain points, filter, access doors, and fire dampers. If spaces, dimensions, or other design conditions do not permit compliance with the present article, the Contractor shall file a request in writing with the Design Professional for additional instructions, furnishing a copy to the Owner. 3.1.7 Cleaning Up. 3.1.13.1 During Construction. At all times, the Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste material or rubbish caused by his employees, Trade Contractors, or work. Periodically during the course of the Work he shall remove all his rubbish from and about the building and all his tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave his work "broom-clean" or its equivalent, unless more exactly specified. Prior to Final Completion by a Trade Contractor of any Trade Contract, Contractor shall require the Trade Contractor to remove from the Work and Site all temporary systems, tools, equipment, machinery, and surplus materials not required for the continued performance of any Work under the Trade Contract or this Contract. In case of dispute, after 48 hours written notice the Owner may remove the rubbish and charge the cost to the Contractor. 3.1.13.2 Prior to Material Completion. Prior to the inspection for Material Completion of the Project Contractor shall remove from the Site all wastes and rubbish, clean all tile and glass surfaces, replace broken glass, remove stains, paint spots, and clean and polish all plumbing fixtures and equipment, leave the Work “vacuum clean” or its substantial equivalent, all hard surface floors swept and mopped, all carpeted floors vacuumed, all surfaces other than floors dusted, blower dusted, or wiped (depending on type of surface) and surface blemishes cleaned, all glazing washed [both sides], and all electrical and mechanical equipment and fixtures cleaned, with all ductwork cleaned and filters replaced, if such are dirty, before other cleaning is started, and re-cleaned if any dust or dirt has gotten into the ductwork during the cleaning process. The Contractor shall restore existing facilities such as roads, other paved surfaces, fencing, curbing and the like at the Site to at least their preconstruction conditions; provided, however, the Contractor may, in an orderly fashion, leave such equipment and supplies at the Site as necessary to achieve Final Completion of the Project. This cleaning must be completed before the Contractor can expect the Design Professional to commence the inspection for Material Completion. To achieve Material Completion, the Contractor shall have fully cleaned the Site – all debris must have been removed from the site and all paved surfaces must have been broom swept and thoroughly hosed down. 3.1.8 Duty of Contractor to Report Defects. If any part of the Contractor’s work depends for proper execution or results upon the work of any Separate Contractor to the Owner, the Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to the Design Professional any apparent defects in such work that render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. 3.1.9 Duty of Contractor to Report Conflicts. To ensure the proper execution of his subsequent work, the Contractor shall measure work already in place and shall at once report to the Design Professional any discrepancy between the executed Work and the drawings or specifications.

SECTION 3 – CONSTRUCTION PHASE PART 2 – CHANGES TO THE WORK


34

PART 2 – CHANGES TO THE WORK 3.2.1 Acknowledgement of Existing Physical Conditions. In undertaking the work under this Contract, the Contractor acknowledges that he has visited the premises and has taken into consideration all open and apparent conditions that might affect his work. No claim based on lack of knowledge of existing conditions shall be allowed unless the existing physical conditions cannot be discovered by a reasonably observant person. Any claims relating to conditions that are materially different from the Contract Documents that were not open and apparent may be adjusted as provided in this Part. 3.2.2 Owner’s Right to Make Changes. Without invalidating the Contract, the Owner, by Change Order and without notice to the sureties, may authorize or order extra work or changes by altering, adding to, or deducting from the Work or the Contract Time, the Contract Sum being adjusted accordingly. All Change Orders shall be performed under the conditions of the original Contract except that any claim for extension of time caused thereby shall be adjusted at the time of signing of the Change Order. (See Change Order formats in Section 7.) Prior to the issuance of the Proceed Order, the Contractor and the Owner shall advise each other in writing of their designees authorized to accept and approve changes to the Contract Sum and the limits to each designee's authority. Should any designee or limits of authority change during the time this Contract is in effect, the Contractor or Owner shall give written notice to the other as provided in Article 1.1.5. There is no legal limitation on the Owner’s right to make changes such as may be, in the Owner’s sole discretion, useful or desirable to the Project. 3.2.3 Changes Forbidden without Consent of Owner. Neither the Design Professional nor the Contractor shall

make any change whatsoever in the work without an approved Change Order. In the absence of an approved Change Order, the Contractor shall have no claim for payment, repayment, reimbursement, remittance, remuneration, compensation, profit, cost, overhead, expense, loss, expenditure, allowance, charge, demand, hire, wages, salary, tax, cash, assessment, price, money, bill, statement, dues, recovery, restitution, benefit, recoupment, exaction, injury, damages, or time based upon or resulting from any change. The provisions of this Article do not apply to emergencies as described in Article 1.4.4. 3.2.4 Form and Execution of Change Orders.

3.2.4.1 The Change Order. The Change Order is the instrument by which adjustments in the Contract Sum and the Contract Time are effected. The Change Order shall be accompanied by a breakdown as set forth in Paragraph 3.2.7.4. The breakdown is for the purpose of enabling the Design Professional and the Owner to make a judgment on the dollar amount of the adjustment in the Contract Sum and is not a part of the Change Order. No condition, term, qualification, limitation, exception, exemption, modification, or proviso, except as set forth in this Part, shall appear in the breakdown. Only such conditions, terms, qualifications, limitations, exceptions, exemptions, modifications, and provisos as are permitted under this Part are valid. The Design Professional shall certify to the dollar amount and description of the adjustments permitted by the Change Order.

3.2.4.2 Execution of Change Orders. Change Orders shall be signed by the Contractor, ordinarily certified by the Design Professional, and approved by the Owner in accordance with the form of Change Order prescribed by the Owner. No request for payment by the Contractor for a Change Order shall be due, nor shall any such request appear on an Application for Payment, until the Change Order is executed by the Owner. In the event of emergency (see Article 1.4.4) or significant impact to the Overall Project Schedule, the Owner shall direct the Change Order to proceed upon a Force Account until the cost and time is resolved in the manner set forth in Paragraph 3.2.7.3 below.

3.2.4.3 Disagreement between Design Professional and Contractor.

3.2.4.3.1 As to Contract Sum. Should the Design Professional disagree with the Contractor as to the amount of the adjustment to the Contract Sum and such disagreement is not resolved between them within seven days, the Owner, if it desires the Change Order work to proceed, may direct a Change Order for Force Account or Indeterminate Units.



35

3.2.4.3.2 As to Contract Time. Should the Design Professional disagree with the Contractor as to the amount of the adjustment to the Contract Time and such disagreement not be resolved between them within seven days, the decision of the Design Professional as to any adjustment in the Contract Time, including any designation by the Design Professional of such time as is eligible for Time Dependent Overhead Costs, shall be final, subject to protest to the Owner of the Design Professional’s decision as set forth in Section 5 Part 2. 3.2.4.3.3 As to Other Disagreements. Should the Design Professional disagree with the Contractor as to matters other than Contract Sum or Contract Time, the dispute shall be resolved by the Owner as set forth in Section 5, Part 2.

3.2.4.4 Change Order Conditions. All Change Orders are issued under the following conditions and shall contain the following language as appropriate:

3.2.4.4.1 For Lump Sum Change Order: The payment and extension of time (if any) provided by this Change Order constitutes compensation in full to the Contractor and its Subcontractors and Suppliers for all costs and markups directly and indirectly attributable to the Change Order herein, for all delays related thereto and for performance of changes within the time stated.

3.2.4.4.2 For Force Account or Indefinite Amount Change Order: The payment and extension of time (if any) provided by this Change Order constitutes interim compensation to the Contractor and its Subcontractors and Suppliers for actual costs and markups directly and indirectly attributable to the Change Order herein, for all delays related thereto and for performance of changes within the time stated. 3.2.4.4.3 For All Change Orders: Any changes or reservations by the Contractor to the representations and releases in the Change Order, or refusal of the Contractor to execute the Change Order, shall be a material breach of this Contract that may be sufficient cause to issue a declaration of default.

3.2.5 All Cost and Time Impacts to be Included. Each Change Order shall include all time and monetary impacts of the change. Failure to include a change in Contract Time or in Contract Sum in Change Orders shall be considered a zero price/zero time Change Order and shall waive any change in Contract Time and Contract Sum. Commencement of Work upon a Change Order is conclusive proof that the Contractor accepts the Change Order. 3.2.6 Changes in Contract Time. All Change Orders must state that the Contract Time and the Material Completion and Occupancy Date either are not changed or are increased or decreased by a specific number of Days. The CONTRACTOR must provide written justification for the extension to the Design Professional and to the Owner. The written justification must demonstrate an anticipated actual increase in the time required to complete the Work beyond that allowed by the Contract as adjusted by prior Change Orders to the Contract. No extension to the Contract Time shall be allowed unless the additional or changed Work increases the length of the critical path beyond the Material Completion and Occupancy Date. If approved, the increase in time required to complete the Work shall be added to the Contract Time. The Owner may decrease, by Change Order, the Contract Time when an Owner-requested deletion from the Work results in a decrease in the actual time required to complete the Work as demonstrable on the critical path of the Construction Progress Schedule. Eligibility and processing requirements for Time Dependent Overhead Costs for compensable delay is addressed in Article 3.3.8 and 3.3.10. 3.2.7 Determining the Cost to Owner for Changes. The cost to the Owner of any change shall be determined in one or more of the following ways:

3.2.7.1 Lump Sum. The Change Order cost is determined by mutual agreement as a lump sum amount changing the Contract Sum allowed for completion of the Work. The Change Order shall be substantiated by documentation itemizing the estimated quantities and costs of all labor, materials and equipment required as well as any mark-up used. The price change shall include the cost percent allowed for the Contractor's overhead and profit and, if eligible, Time Dependent Overhead Costs.

3.2.7.2 Unit Price Work. The Change Order cost is calculated by using unit prices and calculating the number of net units of Work in each part of the Work that is changed, either as the Work progresses or before Work on the change commences, and by then multiplying the calculated number of units by the applicable unit price set forth in the Contract or multiplying by a mutually agreed unit price if none was provided in the Contract. No



36

additional percentage markup for overhead or profit shall be added to the unit prices as this markup is included within the unit prices. Time Dependent Overhead Costs will be added if eligible. 3.2.7.3 Force Account. The Change Order cost is accomplished by Force Account in the event the Contractor and Design Professional cannot agree on the cost of the Change Order or the cost cannot be reasonably determined prior to beginning the Work.

3.2.7.3.1 A Force Account is the establishment by the Owner’s Incumbrance Record of a maximum dollar amount (Stipulated Maximum Sum) beyond which no changed work may be undertaken, subject to amendment, for funding all costs of a Change Order. As the Work authorized by the Change Order progresses, the Contractor must provide an accounting of actual costs incurred in accomplishing the Work. The accounting must include an annotated copy of the Overall Project Schedule to accurately show the status of the Work at the time the Change Order utilizing a Force Account is issued, to show the start and finish of the changed Work, and to show the status of the Work when the changed Work is completed.

3.2.7.3.2 Actual costs, except as otherwise agreed to in writing by the Owner, shall not exceed those prevailing for the trades or crafts, materials, and equipment in the locality of the Project, may include only those items listed as allowable in Article 3.2.9, and shall not include any of the costs listed as not allowable in Article 3.2.10. The Owner shall be permitted, on a daily basis, to verify such records and may require such additional records as are necessary to determine the cost of the change to the Work.

3.2.7.3.3 The Owner shall prescribe the dollar limit for a Force Account in writing by authorizing a Stipulated Maximum Sum of money to be committed toward execution of the said change, and the Contractor shall have no authority to perform any change that will cost the Owner in excess of the Stipulated Maximum Sum. The Stipulated Maximum Sum shall be based on the estimated cost of the Work and the Contractor's allowance for overhead and profit as set forth in 3.2.8 below, including any time extension, Time Dependent Overhead Costs (if eligible), and a reasonable contingency. It shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to apply in writing to the Owner, NOT to the Design Professional, for an increase in the Stipulated Maximum Sum if the total value of the Work is approaching and might exceed the Stipulated Maximum Sum.

3.2.7.3.4 Within fourteen days of the conclusion of such Work ordered by Force Account, the Contractor and the Owner shall arrive at the total lump sum cost for the Change Order. Such lump sum cost shall be incorporated into and finalize the Change Order, and shall reference and close the Incumbrance Record establishing the Force Account.

3.2.7.4 Breakdown of Expenditures. The Contractor shall review any Owner requested or directed change and shall respond in writing within fourteen calendar days after receipt of the proposed change (or such other reasonable time as the Owner may direct), stating the effect of the proposed change upon his Work, including any increase or decrease in the Contract Time and Sum. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner and the Design Professional an itemized breakdown of the quantities and prices and expenditures for labor and materials used in computing the proposed change in Contract Sum, in the form prescribed by the Owner, and the breakdown shall be accompanied by the following declaration:

I do solemnly swear to the best of my knowledge, information, and belief, that the costs shown hereinabove do not exceed current costs for like services or materials in the locality of the Project and, in the case of a Force Account, the costs represented do not exceed the actual costs to the Contractor; and that the quantities shown do not exceed actual requirements.

The Contractor shall obtain and furnish as back up to the Contractor’s breakdown a separate breakdown for each subcontractor's charges prepared by each subcontractor on the letterhead of the subcontractor and properly signed by the subcontractor. The Owner shall review the Contractor’s proposal and respond to the Contractor within fourteen days of receipt.



37

3.2.8 Cost Allowable for Changes to the Work, Allowances for Contractor, and Permissible Expenditures.

3.2.8.1 Overhead and Profit. The percentage for overhead and profit to be used in calculating additive changes in the Work (not including changes covered by unit prices) shall not exceed the percentages for each category listed below. Said percentages for overhead and profit shall be applied only on the net cost of the changed Work, (i.e., the difference in cost between original and revised Work).

3.2.8.1.1 Contractor. If the Contractor does all or part of the changed Work with employees that

work directly for the Contractor, its markup for overhead and profit on the changed Work the Contractor performs with its employees shall be twenty-five percent of the first $50,000 of the net Allowable Costs, and twenty percent of the remaining net Allowable Costs, if any.

3.2.8.1.2 Subcontractor. If a Subcontractor does all or part of the changed Work with employees

that work directly for the Subcontractor, the Subcontractor's markup for overhead and profit on the Work the Subcontractor performs with its employees shall be twenty-five percent of the first $50,000 of the net Allowable Costs, and twenty percent of the remaining net Allowable Costs, if any. Determination of a Subcontractor’s extended overhead costs, if any, is the responsibility of the Contractor.

3.2.8.1.3 Contractor’s Markup on Subcontractor’ Work. The Contractor's management markup on

the subcontractor's net additional allowable expenditures shall be seven and one half percent. The Contractor shall not be permitted the overhead and profit markup on Time Dependent Overhead Costs, but shall be permitted a management markup of five percent on Time Dependent Overhead Costs.

3.2.8.1.4 Second and Lower Tier Subcontractor. If a Subcontractor at any tier does all or part of the

changed Work with its employees, the Subcontractor's markup on the Subcontractor’s work with its employees shall be twenty-five percent of the first $50,000 of the cost, and twenty percent of the remaining cost, if any. The management markup of a Subcontractor's work by the Contractor and all intervening tiers of Subcontractors shall not exceed seven and one half percent for the Contractor and any Subcontractor, or a total of fifteen percent for the changes to the Work.

3.2.8.2 The above percentages shall be applied to the net Allowable Costs, if any, as limited and defined in this Part. If the net difference between Allowable Costs and credits to the Owner results in a decrease in the Owner’s cost, the amount of credit allowed the Owner shall be the net decrease without any allowance for profit and overhead. Other than any eligible Time Dependent Overhead Costs, all costs that are not Allowable Costs in Article 3.2.9 or are disallowed in Article 3.2.10 shall be considered as overhead and shall be exclusively compensated in the allowances provided for in paragraph 3.2.8.1 above.

3.2.9 Allowable Costs for Changes in the Work. Allowable cost for changes to the Work are limited to the following:

3.2.9.1 Labor costs for employees directly employed in the change in the Work, including salaries and wages plus the cost of payroll charges and fringe benefits and overtime premiums, if such premiums are explicitly authorized by the Owner, set at rates established in the manner set forth in Article 2.1.7.

3.2.9.2 Materials incorporated into the change to the Work, including costs of transportation, handling, fuel, and on-site storage, if applicable.

3.2.9.3 Equipment incorporated in the changed Work or equipment used directly in accomplishing the Work. If the equipment is rented expressly for accomplishing the change in the Work, that cost shall be the rental rate according to the terms of the rental agreement, which the Owner shall have the right to approve, or shall be set at rates established in the manner set forth in Article 2.1.7. The decision of the Owner shall be final, binding, and conclusive on all parties.

3.2.9.4 Costs of increases in premiums for the Contractor’s Payment Bond and Performance Bond or for bond premiums for its Subcontractors, to the extent that such increased costs are a result of coverage adjustments for changes in Work approved by the Owner. Prior to requesting payment for the Change Order work, the Contractor shall provide proof of its notification to the Surety of the change in the Work and of the Surety's agreement to include such change in its coverage. The cost of the increase in premium shall be an allowable cost but shall not be marked up. In no event shall a cost in excess of two percent of the cost of the change be allowable.



38

3.2.9.5 Sales, consumer, use, and other applicable taxes that are legally in effect at the time the change order is approved.

3.2.9.6 Any other costs directly attributable to the change in the Work, such as professional engineering costs, except those set forth in Articles 3.2.8 and 3.2.10.

3.2.9.7 For Change Order Work directed by the Owner, where the headquarters of the Subcontractor actually performing the work is more than 100 miles from the Project Site, the Subcontractor may include in the cost of the Change Order a stipend of fifty dollars per day for each worker performing work at the Site if that worker is receiving a per diem under present company policy, not to exceed the number of workers and number of days determined by Design Professional’s decision to be attributable to the new work so ordered, so long as the number of workers and number of days attributable to any deleted work is deducted there from. No allowance for overhead or profit as set forth in Article 3.2.8 may be added to the Change Order cost on account of the stipend amount, and the full amount of the stipend must be actually paid to the eligible worker or it shall be forfeited by the Contractor and Subcontractor(s). 3.2.9.8 The Owner may require any or all of the following documentation to be provided by the Contractor to support the Allowable Costs:

(a) certified payroll records showing the name, classification, date, daily hours, total hours,

rate, and extension for each laborer, foreman, supervisor or other worker; (b) equipment type & model, dates, daily hours, total hours, rental rate or other specified

rate, and extension for each unit of equipment; (c) invoices for materials showing quantities, prices, and extensions; (d) daily records of waste materials removed from the Site and/or fill materials imported to

the Site; (e) certified measurements of over excavations, piling installed and similar work; and/or (f) transportation records for materials, including prices, loads, and extensions.

3.2.10 Costs Not Allowable for Changes in the Work. Costs not allowable under any circumstances are as follows: 3.2.10.1 Costs due to the negligence of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or other persons for whom the Contractor is responsible, including but not limited to costs of delay, costs for the correction of Non-Compliant Work, costs for improper disposal of material, costs for equipment wrongly supplied, costs for the Contractor’s delay in performing the Work, or costs for delay in ordering and obtaining normally available materials or equipment.

3.2.10.2 Home office expenses, including payroll costs for the Contractor's or any Subcontractors’ officers, executives, administrators, accountants, counsel, engineers, timekeepers, estimators, clerks, and other similar administrative personnel employed by the Contractor, whether at the Site or in the Contractor's or a Subcontractor’s principal or branch office for general administration of the Work (including those referred to as “Eichlay costs”). These costs are deemed overhead included in the percentage markups allowable in Article 3.2.8 above.

3.2.10.3 Home and branch office expenses that include, but are not limited to, expenses of Contractor's home and branch offices, Contractor's capital expenses, interest on Contractor's capital used for the Work, charges for delinquent payments, small tools, incidental costs, rent, utilities, telephone and office equipment, and other general overhead expenses of the home and branch office (including those referred to as “Eichlay costs”).

3.2.10.4 Where Work is deleted from the Contract (by Bulletin, Change Order, or otherwise) prior to commencement of that Work without substitution of other similar Work, one hundred percent of the Contract Sum attributable to that Work shall be deducted from the Contract Sum. However, in the event that material submittals have been approved and orders placed for said materials, a lesser amount as justified by proper documentation shall be deducted from the Contract Sum. The credit if any to the Owner for reduced premiums on payment bonds and performance bonds shall be in all cases one hundred percent of the credit. If the deductive Change Order affects the critical path or the schedule and it causes an overall reduction in the Contract Time, jobsite time dependent expenses shall be included in the deduction at the rate established in the Contract for Time Dependent Overhead Costs. 3.2.10.5 Wages of a foreman, if the foreman is concurrently supervising other Work at the Site. 3.2.10.6 Premiums for bonds required of Subcontractors by the Contractor.



39

3.2.11 Change Order Formats. Formats for Lump Sum Change Orders and for Change Orders based upon either a force account or upon unit pricing with an indeterminate number of units are in Section 7, Forms. 3.2.12 Changes due to Subsurface or Other Unforeseen Conditions.

3.2.12.1 Subsurface Conditions. Unless the Contract Documents stipulate specific quantities and units of rock or unsuitable soils, the Contractor shall assume material below the surface of the Earth to be earth and other material that can be removed by power shovel or similar equipment. Should conditions encountered below the surface of the ground be at variance to the number of unit requirements as indicated by drawings or specifications, and absent an agreed-upon unit price established prior to the bid by Addendum, or after contract execution by Change Order, the Contract Sum and/or time shall be adjusted as provided in the Contract Documents for changes in the work. 3.2.12.2 Other Unforeseen Conditions. If unknown physical conditions are encountered at the Site that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents, then the Contractor shall give notice to the Design Professional promptly before conditions are further disturbed, but in no event later than two business days after the first observance of the conditions. The Design Professional shall promptly investigate such conditions and, if they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost or time required for performance of any part of the Work, the Design Professional may recommend an adjustment by Change Order to the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Design Professional determines that the conditions at the Site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Design Professional shall so notify the Owner and the Contractor in writing, stating the reasons. Protest by either party of the Design Professional’s decision shall be in accordance with Section 5, Part 2.

3.2.13 Compensable Rock. CAUTION: No rock for which extra compensation is expected to be received shall be removed except pursuant to and in conformity with a written authorization or order of the Owner. Unless otherwise provided in the Bid Documents, no removal of rock as defined herein shall be included in the Bid. Shale, rottenstone, or stratified rock that can be loosened with a pick or removed by a hydraulic excavator equivalent to a Caterpillar Model 215, a single engine pan (Caterpillar 621 or equivalent) that is pushed by a crawler tractor (Caterpillar D-8K or equivalent), or similar equipment shall not be classified as rock.

3.2.13.1 Definitions of Compensable Rock. Rock, for the purposes of pricing its removal, is defined as follows:

3.2.13.1.1 Rippable Rock. Rippable rock is defined as any material that can be ripped with a single-tooth hydraulic ripper drawn by a crawler tractor having a minimum draw bar pull rated at not less than 56,000 pounds (Caterpillar D-8K or equivalent) and occupies an original volume of at least one cubic yard.

3.2.13.1.2 Mass Rock. Mass rock is defined as any material that cannot be ripped with a single-

tooth hydraulic ripper drawn by a crawler tractor having a minimum draw bar pull rated at not less than 56,000 pounds (Caterpillar D-8K or equivalent) and occupies an original volume of at least one cubic yard.

3.2.13.1.3 Trench Rock. Trench rock is defined as any material that must be removed from a

trench that cannot be excavated with a hydraulic excavator having a bucket curling force rated at not less than 18,300 pounds (Caterpillar Model 215 or equivalent) and occupies an original volume of at least one-half cubic yard.

3.2.13.1.4 Caisson Rock. Caisson Rock is defined as material that must be removed from a shaft

which cannot be penetrated faster than two feet per hour (fifteen minute minimum) using a rock auger with bullet-shaped hardened steel teeth (Kennametal bits or equivalent), and the drilling equipment should have the capacity to produce a continuous torque of at least 1,000,000 inch pounds and a downward force of at least 50,000 pounds (a Hughes LLDH in good working condition) for piers up to seventy two inches in diameter. Use of equipment with greater torque or downward force modifies the definition of refusal to be the point at which the equipment cannot penetrate faster than two feet per hour (fifteen minute minimum). In rare cases, refusal may occur on a rock seam or boulder above the general massive rock surface. The compensation for Caisson Rock should include only material that cannot be penetrated by the rock auger at the specified rate.



40

3.2.13.2 Pricing for Compensable Rock. All compensable rock shall be priced by unit prices upon volume prior to removal and shall be calculated by survey and engineering calculations. No rock shall be priced by truckload, bucket load, or other similar pricing methods. Unit prices shall be determined prior to removal, either in the Contract Documents or by Change Order. Unit prices shall be inclusive of all profit and overhead, except for Time Dependent Overhead Costs. Unit prices shall include the following:

(a) Excavation and removal of all rubble; (b) Addition and removal of overburden for blasting; (c) Excavation of all blast rubble; (d) Replacement of suitable soils in areas of overblasting or over removal; and (e) All costs of labor, equipment, supplies, blasting materials, safety requirements, drayage, haulage, and disposal, including offsite disposal costs.

The Contractor expressly agrees that the Contractor’s sole monetary remedy for extensions of Contract Time due to removal of rock that materially affects the completion of the Work by lengthening the critical path of the Overall Project Schedule shall be the daily rate established in the Time Dependent Overhead Costs in the Contract. Extensions of Time and compensation for Time Dependent Overhead Costs for compensable rock are to be processed as a Change Order pursuant to Article 3.2.6.

3.2.14 Subcontractor Claims for Extended General Conditions Costs. The daily rate for Time Dependent Overhead Costs established in the Contract is intended to compensate the Contractor for the additional jobsite overhead costs resulting from any compensable time extension. The Contractor, in its sole discretion, shall be responsible for allocating the Time Dependent Overhead Costs among its affected subcontractors and itself. Owner’s payment of the Time Dependent Overhead Costs to the Contractor, and Contractor’s allocation thereof, shall constitute the only monetary compensation the Contractor and subcontractors shall be entitled to receive as reimbursement for Time Dependent Overhead Costs incurred as a result of any compensable delay to the Project. 3.2.15 Release of Claims. The execution by the Contractor of a Change Order shall be and operate as a release to the Owner of all claims by the Contractor and of all liability owing to the Contractor for all things done or furnished in connection with the Work described in the Change Order. The execution of any Change Order by the Owner shall not be an acceptance of any Work or materials not in accordance with the Contract Documents, nor shall it relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship or operate to release the Contractor or his surety from any obligation arising under the Contract or the Performance Bond or Payment Bond. 3.2.16 Sole Source Designation for Change Order Work.

3.2.16.1 Definition of Sole Source. As used in this Article 3.2.16, “Sole Source” means a Trade Contractor or Supplier or Subcontractor specified by name in a Bulletin as the exclusive source from which conforming goods or services may be obtained. Designation of goods or services by reference to a named source accompanied by the qualification “or equal” or similar language is not a designation of a Sole Source as that term is defined herein. 3.2.16.2 Limitations. This Article 3.2.16 applies only to Bulletins referenced in a proposed Change Order that designates a Sole Source that was not designated in the Bidding Documents. Except as stated in this Article, the Contractor’s inability to obtain payment and performance bonds from Sole Source Subcontractors or warranties from Subcontractors, as required under the Bidding Documents for this Contract, shall not otherwise excuse the Contractor from its bonding and warranty obligations under this Contract.

3.2.16.3 Sole Source as Grounds for Rejection of a Change Order. If a Change Order is submitted to Contractor for the purposes of adding a Bulletin to this Contract and said Bulletin designates a Sole Source from which Contractor is required to procure goods or services necessary to perform the Work, which Sole Source has not been designated previously, Contractor shall be entitled to reject the proposed Change Order if the designated Sole Source refuses to provide to Contractor the warranties, bonds, terms or schedule required under the Contract Documents, including any warranty or terms or schedule required by Bulletins referenced in the proposed Change Order. In such event, Contractor shall give written notice to the Owner rejecting the proposed Change Order and, if possible, shall accompany said written notice with a proposal from Contractor for changes or modifications to the Bulletin so as to eliminate the Sole Source designation but to achieve goods or services equal in quality or function. The Owner may then require the Design Professional to revise the subject Bulletin so as to eliminate the designation of the Sole Source by incorporation of Contractor's proposal or otherwise. Upon revision of the Bulletin by the Design Professional and approval thereof by the Owner, the Owner shall again submit to the Contractor a proposed Change Order for the purpose of adding the revised Bulletin to this Contract. If the Owner decides to retain the Sole Source in the Change Order and Contractor



41

cannot acquire the full contractually required warranties from the Sole Source, Contractor shall be held only to the warranty terms and schedule obtainable from the Sole Source. 3.2.16.4 No Excuse Without Notice. If Contractor accepts a proposed Change Order adding a Bulletin to this Contract that designates a Sole Source without invoking this Article and putting the Owner on notice, Contractor shall not be excused from its obligations with respect to the described Work by reason of the refusal of a designated Sole Source to provide warranties as required under this Contract.

SECTION 3 – CONSTRUCTION PHASE PART 3 – TIME


42

PART 3 – TIME 3.3.1 Time is of the Essence. Time is of the essence of this Contract and all obligations hereunder. 3.3.2 Competent Management of Time. The Contractor has represented to the Owner, in order to be awarded this contract, that the Contractor is experienced in managing construction in accordance with contract requirements and in a timely manner and that the Contractor has included in his proposal sufficient sums to carefully and competently manage this project for completion within the stipulated Contract Time. 3.3.3 Contract Time.

3.3.3.1 Fair and Reasonable. The Contractor has carefully examined and analyzed the Site, the Contract Documents, and all known factors related to his ability to complete this project within the Contract Time stipulated. By submitting his bid for this project, the Contractor agrees that the stipulated Contract Time is fair and reasonable.

3.3.3.2 Delays. The parties recognize there may be delays to perform Change Order work in the event that conditions encountered at the Site are different from those indicated in the Contract Documents, or to perform Change Order work to correct errors in the plans and specifications. Execution of any change must be authorized. In such event, there shall be an adjustment in the Contract Sum as provided in the Contract Documents for changes in the Work, The parties agree that such delays are not a ground for claiming extraordinary remunerations except as set forth in this Contract in Article 3.3.8 below.

3.3.4 Commencement, Prosecution, and Completion.

3.3.4.1 Commencement, Prosecution, and Completion of Work. The Contractor will be required (a) to commence the Work under this Contract on the applicable Proceed Order Date, (b) to prosecute the Work with faithfulness and energy (c) to install the various parts of the work with equal steps shown on the Overall Project Schedule and at the same rate (or better) shown on the Overall Project Schedule and (d) to complete the Work within the Contract Time, as adjusted. Commencement of the Work shall mean actual physical work on the Site. Unless otherwise agreed, and subject to Change Orders, Material Completion of the Project must be achieved on or before the date established as the Material Completion and Occupancy Date under the Schedule.

3.3.4.2 Contractor’s Acceleration for failure to meet Schedule Requirements. In the event the Contractor shall be delinquent in respect to achieving the Milestone dates established in the Overall Project Schedule, Contractor shall, within seven days after receipt of written demand of the Owner, cause its employees and Subcontractors to perform work at an accelerated pace with hours and days in addition to the normal working hours and working days, as necessary to promptly bring the Work into compliance with the Overall Project Schedule. Fulfillment of this requirement as to overtime work shall not relieve the Contractor from liability for breach of the covenant as to time. For account of recovery of lost time required of the Contractor for its breach of covenant as to time, the Contractor shall be entitled to no claim against the Owner for any payment, repayment, reimbursement, remittance, remuneration, compensation, profit, cost, overhead, expense, loss expenditure, allowance, charge, demand, hire, wages, salary, tax, cash, assessment, price, money, bill, statement, dues, recovery, restitution, benefit, recoupment, exaction, injury or damages.

3.3.5 Construction Progress Schedule (Overall Project Schedule).

3.3.5.1 Submittal, Approval, and Updates. Not later than sixty days after the Effective Date of the Contract, but prior to the Proceed Order, the Contractor must submit a Construction Progress Schedule in accordance with Section 2.1.5.

3.3.5.2 Approval of Overall Project Schedule. . Upon recommendation by the Design Professional and approval by the Owner, the Construction Progress Schedule shall become the Overall Project Schedule, and becomes a part of this Contract. The Overall Project Schedule shall govern the schedule of activities of the Contractor under this Contract

3.3.5.3 Monthly Updates. The Contractor must provide the Design Professional and the Owner with monthly updates of the Overall Project Schedule indicating completed activities and any changes in sequencing or activity durations. (See also Articles 2.1.2 and 2.1.5).

3.3.6 Completion Date. The Work under this Contract shall be completed by midnight of the date required in the Contract as the Material Completion and Occupancy Date unless extended by approved requests for extension of time.



43

3.3.7 General Rule – No Damages for Delay, Extension of Time Sole Remedy. Contractor shall not be entitled to any damages for delay or to any other reimbursement as a Cost of the Work, or to an increase in the contract amount, or to payment, damages, monies, or compensation of any kind from Owner for direct, indirect, impact, or disruption damages (including but not limited to costs of acceleration of Work or any Phase thereof) arising because of delay or other hindrance of any kind whatsoever; except as specifically permitted by Article 3.3.8. Extension of the time is the Contractor's sole remedy for any delays not the fault of the Contractor. 3.3.8 Exception to General Rule – Compensable Delay. The extension of the Contract Time and the adjustment to the Contract Sum specifically provided for in this Article shall be Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy for delays, hindrances, interferences or resulting inefficiencies and re-sequencing.

3.3.8.1 Compensable Delay – Unavoidable Delay.

3.3.8.1.1 Delay by Owner or Design Professional. If the Contractor is delayed in the progress of the Work between the Proceed Order Date and the Material Completion and Occupancy Date, as amended, by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's employees, Design Professional or Separate Contractors employed by the Owner, or by other causes beyond the Contractor’s control which the Design Professional determines are the fault of the Owner or the Design Professional and may justify delay, then the Contract Time will be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Design Professional and the Owner may determine; provided, however, that (i) such delays extend the Overall Project Schedule’s critical path; (ii) the Contractor has taken all reasonable actions to mitigate the effects of the delay on the Work; (iii) the fault or negligence of the Contractor, the Contractor's agents or employees did not materially contribute to such causes; and (iv) the Contractor shall have notified Owner of the cause or causes of such delay within fourteen days from the date on which the Contractor first becomes aware of such delay.

3.3.8.1.2 Delay in Responses to Submittals. Any claim by Contractor for a change in the Material

Completion and Occupancy Date due to delay of responses to submittals may be made during the time

while the failure of the Design Professional to act or perform continues, or within seven days after such

failure to act or perform has been cured. If no Submittal Schedule or agreement as required in Paragraph 2.2.3.1 is agreed upon, then a claim for delay will be allowed only after the Design Professional has been allowed fourteen days to take action. Any claim for extension of time must be reasonable and take into consideration the nature of the submittal.

3.3.8.1.3 To be Processed as a Part of the Change Order Process. Extensions of Time and compensation for Time Dependent Overhead Costs for Unavoidable Delay are to be processed as a Change Order pursuant to Article 3.2.6.

3.3.8.2 Compensable Delay – Certain Change Orders.

3.3.8.2.1 Owner-Requested Changes. If the Owner requests changes in the Contract Documents that would materially affect the completion of the Work by lengthening the critical path of the Overall Project Schedule, the Design Professional shall determine the appropriate number of days and thereby extend the Material Completion and Occupancy Date. The Contractor expressly agrees that the Contractor’s sole monetary remedy for such extensions of Contract Time shall be calculated at the daily rate established for Time Dependent Overhead Costs in the Contract. 3.3.8.2.2 Other Change Orders. For Change Orders involving the following situations that would materially affect the completion of the Work by lengthening the critical path of the Construction Progress Schedule, the Design Professional shall determine the appropriate number of days and thereby extend the Material Completion and Occupancy Date. The Contractor expressly agrees that the Contractor’s sole monetary remedy for such extensions of Contract Time shall be calculated at the daily rate established for Time Dependent Overhead Costs in the Contract. (a) Changes due to Subsurface or Other Unforeseen Conditions, Article 3.2.12. (b) Changes for Compensable Rock, Article 3.2.13. (c) Changes deleting work, Paragraph 3.2.10.4 3.3.8.2.3 To be Processed as a Part of the Change Order Process. Extensions of Time and compensation for Time Dependent Overhead Costs for all Change Orders are to be processed as a part of each Change Order pursuant to Article 3.2.6.



44

3.3.8.3 Compensable Delay – Force Majeure. If, between the Proceed Order Date and the Material Completion and Occupancy Date, as amended, the CM/GC is unable to perform or is delayed in the performance of any of the terms and provisions of this Contract, that materially affects the completion of the Work by lengthening the critical path of the Construction Progress Schedule, as a result of (i) governmental preemption of materials in connection with a national emergency declared by the President of the United States; (ii) riot, insurrection, acts of terror or terrorism or other civil disorder affecting performance of the Work; (iii) labor strikes that could not be reasonably anticipated, or (iv) earthquakes, or unusual and extreme weather conditions constituting Acts of God, then, and in any such event, such inability or delay shall be excused, and the time for completing the affected portions of the Project (and the entire Project, if applicable) shall be extended for such reasonable period of time as the delay has affected the critical path of the performance of the Work hereunder.

3.3.8.3.1 Mitigation of Delay. Contractor shall take all reasonable actions to minimize the delay caused by any of the above factors, and shall notify Owner in writing with a copy to the Design Professional of any event allowing for excuse or delay not later than seven days after the Contractor first becomes aware of the event, or should have become aware, of the event; otherwise Contractor will be deemed to have waived the excuse or delay. 3.3.8.3.2 To be Processed as a Part of the Change Order Process. Extensions of Time and compensation for Time Dependent Overhead Costs for Force Majeure are to be processed as a Change Order pursuant to Article 3.2.6.

3.3.8.4 Compensable Delay – Abnormal Weather. Extensions of time will be granted for abnormal inclement weather conditions that delay the critical path of the progress of the work.

3.3.8.4.1 Abnormal weather delay is defined as days lost to weather conditions either (i) in excess of days specified in the Supplementary General Conditions, or (ii) if not defined in the Supplementary General Conditions, as days in excess of a local historic average prevailing at the Site recorded by the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) for the 120 months immediately preceding the Proceed Order Date. 3.3.8.4.2 Not later than ten days after of the first occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim or with respect to claims for extension of time as a result of abnormal weather, and not later than ten days after the end of each calendar month thereafter, the Contractor shall file a claim with the Design Professional with a copy to the Owner. By not later than fifteen days from the receipt of the claim, the Design Professional shall render a decision concerning the allowance of an extension of time and shall report his decision to both the Contractor and the Owner. 3.3.8.4.3 Extensions of Time and compensation for Time Dependent Overhead Costs for Abnormal Weather are to be processed as a Change Order pursuant to Article 3.2.6.

3.5.8.5 Protest. The Design Professional’s decision as to abnormal weather delay shall be subject to protest by either the Contractor or the Owner as set forth in Section 5, Part 2.

3.3.9 Non-Compensable Delay. Contractor understands, acknowledges and agrees that delays occasioned by the events and occurrences set forth below are not compensable delays and do not constitute reason for extending the Date for Material Completion and Occupancy. It is Contractor's responsibility to make adequate provision for the following in scheduling the Work:

3.3.9.1 Normal Weather Conditions. Weather conditions other than those that substantially vary from the normal climatology conditions that prevailed at the Site for the preceding 120 months, as evidenced by data published by the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration.

3.3.9.2 Delay in Delivery of Materials or Equipment. Delay in delivery of materials or equipment for any cause other than those specified in Paragraph 3.3.8.3. No claim will be approved if materials or equipment are delayed due to Contractor's tardy procurement or expediting. 3.3.9.3 All Other Delay. All delay not covered in Article 3.3.8.

3.3.10 Submission of Claims for Compensable Delay and to Extend the Material Completion and Occupancy Date.



45

3.3.10.1 Time for Submission. Except as specified below, any claim by Contractor for a change in the Contract Time or the Material Completion and Occupancy Date shall be made within fourteen days of the day on which the Contractor becomes aware of the event on which the claim is based or, if the Contract Documents specify a shorter or longer period with respect to such event, within the period specified by the Contract Documents. 3.3.10.2 Delay Claim Must Be In Writing. Any claim to extend the Contract Time and Material Completion and Occupancy Date must be in writing, must set forth in detail the basis for the claim and the number of days of delay claimed, must be correlated with the approved Overall Project Schedule, must be executed by the Contractor and delivered to the Design Professional and the Owner, and must be reviewed and an appropriate time assessed by the Design Professional. 3.3.10.3 When Delay Claim Deemed Waived. Any claim to extend the Contract Time and Material Completion and Occupancy Date not made in writing to Owner within the above time periods shall be deemed waived and shall not thereafter be valid. In the case of a continuing delay as a result of a single event, only one claim submission is necessary. 3.3.10.4 Design Professional to Decide. The Contract Time and the Material Completion and Occupancy Date may be extended for such reasonable time as the Design Professional may decide, and the Overall Project Schedule shall then be updated. 3.3.10.5 Payment for Extensions of Contract Time. The Contractor expressly agrees that the Contractor’s sole monetary remedy for Compensable Delay shall be calculated at the daily rate established for the Time Dependent Overhead Costs in the Contract. 3.3.10.6 Claims Related to Extraordinary Time Dependent Overhead Cost. In situations where Time Dependent Overhead Costs are authorized, and the cost incurred exceeds 170% of the established Time Dependent Overhead Cost daily rate, then the Contractor may submit a claim under this article for consideration of such extraordinary additional cost.

3.3.11 Recovery of Schedule Delays.

3.3.11.1 Recovery of Schedule Delays. If the Design Professional determines that the Project is one week or more behind schedule, per the approved Overall Project Schedule, the Design Professional shall so notify the Contractor in writing. Within seven days of the date of the Design Professional's notice, the Contractor shall deliver to the Design Professional and Owner a written plan explaining how the Contractor intends to bring the Project back on schedule. The Contractor's plan must provide sufficient detail to allow the Design Professional and Owner to determine the proposal's feasibility. 3.3.11.2 Recovery of Schedule Delays During Last Sixty Days of Contract Time. At any time during the last sixty days of the Contract Time that the Design Professional finds that the Contractor is behind schedule per the Contract Time, as amended, the Design Professional shall notify the Contractor in writing. Within seven days of the date of the Design Professional's notice, the Contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Design Professional and Owner a written plan explaining how the Contractor intends to bring the Project back on schedule. The Contractor's plan must provide sufficient detail to allow the Design Professional and Owner to determine the proposal's feasibility.

SECTION 3 – CORRECTING THE WORK INSPECTIONS PART 4 – COVERING AND UNCOVERING WORK


46

PART 4 – CORRECTING THE WORK, INSPECTIONS, COVERING AND UNCOVERING WORK

3.4.1 Correcting the Work.

3.4.1.1 Notice of Non-Compliant Work. A Notice of Non-Compliant Work shall be in writing, shall be dated, shall be signed by the Design Professional, shall be addressed to the Contractor with a copy to the Owner, and shall contain three elements as follows:

3.4.1.1.1 Description of Work.

(a) that has been omitted or (b) that is unexecuted as of the date of the Notice of Non-Compliant Work, the time for its

incorporation into the work as planned in the Overall Project Schedule having expired, or (c) that has not been executed in accordance with the methods and materials designated

in the Contract Documents.

3.4.1.1.2 Contract References: Citation of the provision or provisions of the Contract Documents which specify the Work to be executed.

3.4.1.1.3 Time for Compliance. Fixing of a reasonable space of time within which the Contractor shall have made good the deficiency (which said space of time shall not be deemed to be an extension of Contract Time) for filing the Notice of Readiness for Inspection for Material Completion pursuant to Article 6.3.2 nor shall it be deemed to be authorization for amendment to the Overall Project Schedule.

3.4.1.2 Failure to Supply Workmen or Materials or to Prosecute the Work. A Notice of Non-Compliant Work may be issued for failure of the Contractor to supply enough workers or enough materials or proper materials to prosecute the Work. A Notice of Non-Compliant Work in such event may be based on Article 3.3.2 (Competent Management of Time), and upon the definition of Work as set forth under Paragraph 1.1.9.58.

3.4.1.3 Removal and Making Good of Non-Compliant Work. The Contractor shall remove from the Site within the space of time designated in Notice of Non-Compliant Work all work determined by the Design Professional as failing to conform to the contract, whether incorporated in the work or not, and the Contractor shall promptly replace and re-execute the work in accordance with the Contract and without expense to the Owner and shall bear the expense of making good all work of other contractors destroyed by such removal or replacement. The Contractor shall supply any omitted work and perform all unexecuted work within the space of time fixed by the Design Professional in Notices of Non-Compliant Work.

3.4.1.4 Remedy of the Owner for Breach of Notice of Non-Compliant Work.

3.4.1.4.1 Failure to Make Good a Deficiency. If the Contractor does not make good a deficiency within a reasonable space of time fixed in a Notice of Non-Compliant Work, the Owner may do any of the following:

(a) Remove the Non-Compliant Work and store it at the expense of the Contractor. If the Contractor does not pay the expenses of such removal and storing within ten days after receipt of written demand of the Owner, the Owner may upon three days' notice in writing to the Contractor sell such materials at private sale or at auction and shall account for the net proceeds thereof after deducting all proper costs incurred by the Owner. (b) Supply omitted work, perform unexecuted work, or replace and re-execute work not done in accordance with the methods and materials designated in the Contract Documents, and deduct the cost thereof from any payment then or thereafter due the Contractor. The Design Professional shall approve the amount charged to the Contractor.



47

3.4.1.4.2 Other Remedies. The remedies stated in this article are in addition to the remedies otherwise available to the Owner, do not exclude such other remedies, and are without prejudice to any other remedies. Time limits stated in Notices of Non-Compliant Work are of the essence of the contract. Unless otherwise agreed to by the Owner in writing, the making good of Non-Compliant work shall physically commence at the Site in not more than seven days after receipt of the Notice of Non-Compliant Work, except that in case of emergency correction shall physically commence at the Site at once, and except that the Contractor shall in any event physically commence the correction at the Site early enough to complete within the space of time allowed in the Notice of Non-Compliant Work. The Owner shall give prompt consideration to reasonable requests for delay in commencement of the making good of Notices of Non-Compliant Work. The making good of Non-Compliant work shall be completed within the space of time allowed in the Notice of Non-Compliant Work unless the Contractor shall have requested from the Design Professional an increase in the amount of time allowed and the Design Professional shall have given notice to the Contractor in writing, with copy to the Owner, stating the additional amount of time, if any, allowed.

3.4.1.5 Notice of Correction from Contractor. The Contractor shall give prompt notice in writing to the Design Professional, with copy to the Owner, upon completion of the correction of the Non-Compliant work. In the absence of such notice, it shall be and is presumed under this Contract that there has been no correction, supplying remedy, or performance of unexecuted work.

3.4.1.6 The Owner's Right to Correct Work. If the Contractor should neglect to prosecute the Work properly or fail to correct Non-Compliant Work or fail to perform any provision of this Contract, the Owner, after three days' written notice to the Contractor, may without prejudice to any other remedy he may have (including without limitation remedies against the Contractor’s surety), make good the deficiencies and may deduct the cost thereof from the payment then or thereafter due the Contractor.

3.4.2 Inspections.

3.4.2.1 Access to Work. The Design Professional, the Owner, and their representatives shall have access at all times to the work wherever it is in preparation or progress, and the Contractor shall provide proper facilities for such access and for inspection.

3.4.2.2 Notice of Readiness for Inspection to Design Professional from Contractor Prior to Covering Work. If the specifications, the Design Professional's instructions (either in the specifications or issued later in writing), laws, ordinances or any public authority require any work to be specially tested or approved, the Contractor shall give the Design Professional timely notice in writing of its readiness for inspection. If the inspection is by any authority other than the Design Professional, the Contractor shall give timely notice of the date fixed for such inspection. Inspections by the Design Professional shall be made promptly and, where practicable, at the source of supply.

3.4.2.3 Fire Marshal Inspections.

3.4.2.3.1 General. The State Fire Marshal may make inspections at any time. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to request an inspection at eighty percent completion and at 100% completion and to give notice when all items on the 100% inspection report have been completed. Requests shall be in writing with a copy to the Owner and Design Professional.

3.4.2.3.2 Inspections Defined. The basic definitions for eighty percent and 100% inspections are as follows:

(a) Eighty Percent Inspection: The structural components are in place and open for review of the fire safety components. NOTE: Structural components include the following: fire walls, vertical shafts, stairways, smoke stops, hazardous area separation, roof and ceiling assemblies, corridor and door width, and HVAC system. (b) 100% Inspection: The Contractor has completed all of the items on the eighty percent inspection report and has the certificate of occupancy in hand.



48

3.4.2.4 False Start. In the event the Contractor shall have issued notice of readiness prematurely, his action shall be deemed to be a "false start.” The Contractor shall be liable for the damage resulting from the aforesaid false start, including, but not limited to, the salary, professional fees, and travel and living expenses of the person or parties inconvenienced by the aforesaid false start.

3.4.2.5 Certificate of Occupancy. The Contractor’s obligation under the Contract is to install the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, obtain the Certificate of Occupancy from the State Fire Marshal or his deputy, and forward it to the Design Professional as a part of the final close out procedures. The Design Professional’s obligation is to design the Work to comply with the applicable codes and to qualify for a Certificate of Occupancy.

3.4.3 Covering and Uncovering Work.

3.4.3.1 Re-examination or Re-testing of Work Covered Pursuant to Consent of Design Professional. Re-examination or re-testing of questioned Work previously covered pursuant to consent of the Design Professional may be ordered by the Design Professional. If so ordered the Work must be uncovered by the Contractor. The Owner shall pay the cost of re-examination and replacement or of re-testing if such Work is found in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall pay such cost if such Work is found not in accordance with the Contract Documents unless the Contractor can show that a Separate Contractor caused the defect in the Work. In that event, the Owner shall pay such cost. Re-examination or re-testing under the terms of this Paragraph applies only to Work that has been covered with consent of the Design Professional. Work covered without consent of the Design Professional must be uncovered for examination as provided below.

3.4.3.2 Re-examination or Re-testing of Work Covered Without Consent of Design Professional. If any Work should be covered without approval or consent of the Design Professional or contrary to any provision of the Contract Documents, such Work must be uncovered for examination by the Design Professional at the Contractor’s expense. The Contractor shall be liable for the costs resulting from the aforesaid uncovering, including, but not limited to, the salary, professional fees, and travel and living expenses of the person or parties inconvenienced thereby.

3.4.4 Inspection Does Not Relieve Contractor. Under the Contract Documents, the Contractor acknowledges that it has the responsibility for furnishing all services, labor, supplies, and materials for the entire Work in accordance with such documents. No provisions of this article nor any inspection of the Work by the Owner, representatives of the Owner, the Using Agency, Contract Compliance Specialist, clerk-of-the-works, engineers employed by the Design Professional, representatives of the Design Professional, or the Design Professional shall in any way diminish, relieve, or alter said responsibility and undertaking of the Contractor. Neither shall the omission of any of the foregoing to discover or to bring to the attention of the Contractor the existence of any Work or materials injured or done not in accordance with said Contract Documents in any way diminish, relieve, or alter such obligation of the Contractor nor shall the aforesaid omission diminish or alter the rights or remedies of the Owner as set forth in the Contract Documents. The Contract Compliance Specialist has no power to make decisions, to accept or reject work, or to consent to the covering of Work. The Contract Compliance Specialist owes no duty to the Contractor.

SECTION 3 – CONSTRUCTION PHASE PART 5 - SUBCONTRACTORS, TRADE CONTRACTORS, AND SUPPLIERS


49

PART 5 – SUBCONTRACTORS, TRADE CONTRACTORS, AND SUPPLIERS,

3.5.1 Subcontractors, Trade Contractors, and Suppliers.

3.5.1.1 Submission of List. Within fourteen days of the Effective Date of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit in writing to the Design Professional a list of the names of Subcontractors that the Contractor intends to employ on the Work. The list of Subcontractors is not submitted for approval but is for the purpose of establishing the following:

3.5.1.1.1 What trades and portions of the work are to be performed under subcontract, and. 3.5.1.1.2 The names of the parties selected by the Contractor to perform work by subcontract, the

aforesaid selection being a matter lying solely within the discretion of the Contractor. 3.5.1.1.3 The Contractor shall identify each minority owned and each female owned Trade

Contractor and Subcontractor or Supplier performing work on or supplying material to the project. 3.5.1.1.4 By not later than the tenth day of the month following the end of each quarter the

Contractor shall submit to the owner a list of all minority and female owned Subcontractors, Trade Contractors, or Supplier performing work on or supplying material to the Project and the amount paid to each for that quarter.

3.5.1.2 No Approval of Subcontractors, Trade Contractors, and Suppliers. Neither the Owner nor the Design Professional undertakes to pass upon or approve any Subcontractor, Trade Contractor, or supplier.

3.5.2 Representation of Contractor. The Contractor represents that the Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Trade Contractors selected by it are reputable, skilled, reliable, competent, qualified in the trade or field in which they are to perform on the Project, and thoroughly familiar with the codes and laws applicable to their work. 3.5.3 Contractor Responsible for Acts and Omissions. The Contractor agrees that he is as fully responsible for the acts and omissions of his Subcontractors, Trade Contractors, Suppliers, and employees, and further of all persons directly or indirectly employed by them, as the Contractor is for the acts and omissions of employees and persons directly employed by the Contractor. The failure of a Subcontractor, Trade Contractor, supplier, or employee to perform shall not be asserted by the Contractor as an excuse for any omission from or noncompliance with requirements of the Contract Documents; nor shall the Contractor be entitled to an extension of time solely because of failure of a Subcontractor, Trade Contractor, supplier, or employee to perform. The subcontracting of work does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for the execution of the work and for compliance with all requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not assert negligence, inefficiency, insolvency, bankruptcy, or incompetence of any Subcontractor, Trade Contractor, supplier, or employee as excuse for the existence of any noncompliance with or omission to fulfill any obligation under the Contract either as to timely performance or as to compliance with methods and materials designated in the Contract Documents; nor shall the Contractor assert nonperformance of a Subcontractor, Trade Contractor, supplier, or employee as excuse for the existence of any noncompliance with or omission to fulfill any obligation under the Contract. As to Subcontractor, Trade Contractor, supplier, and employees of the Contractor, the doctrine that a principal is liable for the acts and omissions of his agent shall be binding on the Contractor in his relationship to the Owner, and the Contractor may not reverse the aforesaid doctrine by contract or legal mechanism. 3.5.4 No Contract between Owner and Any Subcontractor, Trade Contractor, Supplier, or Employee. Nothing

contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relation between the Owner and any Subcontractor, Trade Contractor, Supplier, or employee of the Contractor or its Subcontractors.. 3.5.5 Relationship of Contractor With Subcontractors, Trade Contractors, and Suppliers.

3.5.5.1 Obligations of Each. The Contractor agrees to bind every Subcontractor, Trade Contractor, Supplier (hereinafter collectively referred to as “Subordinate Contractor”) to the terms of the Contract Documents insofar as they are applicable to its work, including the following provisions of this Article:



50

3.5.5.1.1 The Contractor Agrees:

(a) To be bound to the Subordinate Contractor by all the obligations that the Owner owes to the Contractor under the Contract Documents. (b) To pay the Subordinate Contractor upon the payment of certificates issued under the schedule of values described in the General Conditions the amount allowed to the Contractor on account of the Subordinate Contractor's work to the extent of the Subordinate Contractor's interest therein within seven days of receipt of payment from the Owner; provided, however, that retainage shall be released to the Subordinate Contractor as provided by law and in accordance with the statutory affidavit set forth in Section 7, Forms. (c) To pay the Subordinate Contractor upon the payment of certificates issued otherwise than the schedule of values such manner that at all times the Subordinate Contractor's total payments shall be as large in proportion to the value of the work done by the Subordinate Contractor as the total amount certified and paid to the Contractor is to the value of the work done by the Subordinate Contractor. (d) To pay the Subordinate Contractor a just share of any property insurance money received by the Contractor and due to Subordinate Contractor for work performed by Subordinate and paid for by insurance. (e) That no claim for services rendered or materials supplied or other matters by the Contractor against the Subordinate Contractor shall be valid unless written notice thereof is given by the Contractor to the Subordinate Contractor prior to or during the first ten days of the calendar month following that in which the Contractor determines that the claim is chargeable against that Subordinate Contractor. (f) To give the Subordinate Contractor, upon its request, an opportunity to be present with Contractor and to submit evidence in any dispute involving rights of the Subordinate Contractor.

3.5.5.1.2 The Contractor Agrees to require its Subcontractors to do the following:

(a) To be bound to the Contractor by the terms of the Contract Documents and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities that the Contractor by the aforesaid documents assumes toward the Owner. (b) To submit to the Contractor applications for payment in such reasonable time as to enable the Contractor to apply for payment under these General Conditions. (c) To make all claims for extras, for extensions of time or for damages to the Contractor in the manner provided in the General Conditions for like claims by the Contractor upon the Owner, except that the time for making such claims to the Contractor is within ten days after the initial event leading to the claim. (d) To pay their Subordinate Contractors upon the payment of certificates issued under the schedule of values described in the General Conditions the amount allowed on account of such Subordinate Contractor's work to the extent of such Subordinate Contractor's interest therein within seven days of its receipt of payment; provided, however, that retainage shall be released as provided by law and in accordance with the statutory affidavit set forth in Section 7, Forms. (e) To pay their Subordinate Contractors upon Subcontractor’s receipt of payment such that at all times their Subordinate Contractors’ aggregate payments shall be in proportion to the Work performed by each of the Subordinate Contractors.

3.5.5.2 Owner Not Obligated to Any Subcontractor, Subordinate Contractor, Trade Contractor, or Supplier. There is no obligation on the part of the Owner to pay to or to see to the payment of any sums to any



51

Subcontractor, Subordinate Contractor, Trade Contractor, Supplier, laborer, employee, or person supplying labor, materials, machinery or equipment to the Project.

3.5.5.3 Term “Substantial Completion” Deleted. The term “substantial completion,” if found, is hereby deleted and is of no force in all Subcontracts, Trade Contracts, and in the Trade Sections of the Contract Documents. In certain contexts, the term may be superseded by the term “Material Completion” as defined in this Contract.

3.5.5.4 Failure to Incorporate Terms in Subcontracts. The Contractor agrees that failure on his part to incorporate this Article 3.5.5 in all Subcontracts, Trade Contracts, or Supplier contracts, is a material breach of an essential covenant of this Contract, and further agrees that in the event of such breach the Contractor shall, within five days after demand of the Owner, furnish proof in writing that the deficiency has been remedied to the end that (1) the Contractor may not maintain that it is beyond his competence to require performance of terms of the contract by a subcontractor and (2) no subcontractor may maintain that he has not assumed toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities that the Contractor has assumed toward the Owner. Failure on the part of the Contractor to effect remedy as above within five days after receipt of written demand of the Owner shall be grounds for issuance of a declaration of default by the Owner.

SECTION 4 – COMPENSATION PART 1 – GENERAL


52

SECTION 4 – COMPENSATION

PART 1 - GENERAL 4.1.1 Payments. The Owner will make progress payments to the Contractor in accordance with Section 4 of the General Conditions. Final Payment will be made in accordance with Section 6 of the General Conditions. The date and amount of payment are subject to Section 4, Part 2. Sums retained by the Owner remain the property of the Owner until such time as the Contractor shall have become entitled to receive such payment pursuant to Section 6 of the General Conditions by furnishing the remainder of the Work and services required by the Contract Documents. 4.1.2 Application for Payments.

4.1.2.1 Form of Application. The Contractor shall periodically submit to the Design Professional an Application for Payment on the form set forth in Section 7 (sometimes called a "Periodical Estimate") for each payment requested, and, if requested by the Owner or Design Professional, shall attach backup materials including, but not limited to, receipts or other vouchers, showing his payments for materials and labor, including payments previously made to Subcontractors.

4.1.2.2 Initial Breakdown and Periodical Payments. Each Application for Payment shall be submitted at least ten days before each payment falls due, and the Contractor shall, before the first application, shall submit to the Design Professional a Schedule of Values of the various parts of the work, including quantities, aggregating the total sum of the Contract, divided in the same manner set forth in the Application for Payment Form set forth in Section 7 showing the Contractor’s right to the payment claimed and so arranged and so itemized as to meet the approval of the Design Professional and, further, if requested, supported by such evidence as to its correctness as the Design Professional may direct.

4.1.2.3 Materials Stored. If the Application for Payment includes materials delivered and suitably stored at the Site but not incorporated in the work, they shall, if required by the Owner or the Design Professional, be conditional upon submission by the Contractor of bills of sale or such other procedure as will establish the Owner's title to such material or otherwise adequately protect the Owner's interest. The Contractor is responsible for the existence, protection, and, if necessary, replacement of materials until execution of the Final Certificate of the Design Professional. The Owner shall not pay for any materials stored off-site.

4.1.2.4 Retainage.

4.1.2.4.1 Withholding of Retainage; Conversion to Lump Sum. Retainage shall be withheld from each periodic payment to the Contractor in the amount of ten percent of the sum of the total amount earned for work–in-place (original Contract), total amount earned for work-in-place (Change Orders), and Value of Materials stored at the Site. After one-half of the Contract Sum, including Change Orders, becomes due and the Work meets all of the following conditions:

(a) On or ahead of the Overall Project Schedule; and (b) There are no breaches of Notices of Non-Compliant Work; and (c) There is no delinquency in the completion of work and filing of the final breakdown and

accounting pursuant to any Change Orders utilizing a Force Account;

then, if the Contractor requests and the Design Professional approves in writing, the sum being withheld as retainage will be converted to a lump sum and held by the Owner until Material Completion.

4.1.2.4.2 Reinstatement of Retainage. The Owner will withhold no further retainage from payments to the Contractor unless one or more of the following events occur:

(a) The percentage of work complete falls behind the percentage required by the Overall Project

Schedule by as much as five percent; or (b) The Contractor breaches a Notice of Non-Compliant Work; or (c) The Contractor becomes delinquent in regard to the filing of the final breakdown and

accounting pursuant to any Change Orders utilizing a Force Account;

in which event or events the Owner shall reinstate the ten percent retainage on all Applications for Payment due to be paid while one or more of the events continues to exist. The Contractor will be given written notice of the reinstatement of the retainage.

SECTION 4 – COMPENSATION PART 1 – GENERAL


53

4.1.2.4.3 Reconversion to Lump Sum. If the Contractor subsequently:

(a) Recovers all lost time and puts the work back on schedule; and (b) Remedies all breaches of Notices of Non-Compliant Work; and (c) Supplies a proper breakdown and accounting pursuant to any Change Orders utilizing a Force

Account;

then the sums withheld while either or all of the events existed will be again converted to a lump sum.

4.1.2.5 Subcontractor’s Retainage Release. At the discretion of the Owner and request by Contractor, an amount equal to the subcontract retainage of a Subcontractor may be separately released from the retainage held by the Owner as he completes his work. An application in accordance with the Owner’s specimen (See Section 7, Forms) for release of a Subcontractor's retainage shall contain a release of all claims by the Subcontractor and shall bear the original certificates of the Subcontractor, the Contractor, and the Design Professional that the Subcontractor's work has been fully performed and that the sum for which payment is requested is due by the Contractor to the Subcontractor. Checks releasing a Subcontractor's retainage shall be made payable to the Contractor, the Contractor’s surety, and the Subcontractor and shall be mailed to the Contractor’s surety. This article does not create any contractual relationship between the Owner and the Subcontractor or any duty of the Owner to any Subcontractor.

4,1.2.6 Accounting Format. Applications for Payment shall be broken down by CSI Category and, in certain situations, by CSI Description and capital asset category, as set forth in the form for Application for Payment. The purpose is to provide appropriate backup documents for the Contractor’s Final Certification of Costs in conformance with GASB 34 accounting standards. See Section 7 – Forms, “Application for Payment” and Final Certification of Costs.

4.1.3 Processing of Application for Payment (Periodical Estimates). The Contract Compliance Specialist (CCS) will review the Application for Payment prepared and executed by the Contractor and, if he concurs, execute a certificate on the face of the Application for Payment as to its accuracy. The Design Professional shall visit the Site after the Contractor and CCS have agreed on the Application for Payment and conduct such inspections and reviews as are necessary to make a decision as to the accuracy of the Application for Payment. If the CCS and the Contractor cannot agree on the appropriateness of the Application for Payment in question, the Design Professional shall make a decision. Upon determining the appropriateness of the Application, the Design Professional shall execute the certificate on the Application for Payment and forward it to the Owner for payment. Not later than seven days after receipt of the Application for Payment, the Design Professional shall issue its certificate for such amount as it decides to be properly due or state in writing its reasons for withholding any sums in its certificate. 4.1.4 Effect of Design Professional’s Certificate on an Application for Payment. No certificate issued by the Design Professional, nor payment made to the Contractor by the Owner, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Work by the Owner shall be an acceptance of any work or materials not in accordance with the Contract Documents.

4.1.5 Payment Due. Payment of an Application for Payment shall be due ten days after receipt by the Owner of the certification of the Application for Payment by the Design Professional. 4.1.6 Payment Due Dates and Interest. Should the Owner fail to pay a proper invoice within thirty calendar days of receipt, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing by certified or statutory mail. If the Owner fails to pay within five business days of receipt of the notice, the Contractor shall receive, in addition the sum named in the proper invoice, interest thereon at the rate of one half percent per month on the unpaid balance as may be due. 4.1.7 Payments for Change Order Work. Payments will not be made for any changes in the Work until a Change Order has been executed.

SECTION 4 – COMPENSATION PART 2 – PAYMENTS WITHHELD


54

PART 2 – PAYMENTS WITHHELD 4.2.1 Payments Withheld.

4.2.1.1 Payments Withheld or Nullified. The Design Professional or the Owner may withhold or, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, nullify the whole or a part of any certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect the Owner from loss because of the following conditions:

(a) Defective work not remedied. (b) Claims or liens filed (c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractor or Supplier for materials or labor. (d) A reasonable doubt that the Contract can be completed for the balance then unpaid. (e) Damage to a Separate Contractor or to the Owner or a third party. (f) Failure to maintain a rate of progress consistent with the Milestones. (g) Failure to supply enough skilled workers or proper materials. (h) Court-ordered retention. (i) State Tax Forms not on file. (j) Breach of this Contract

4.2.1.2 Withheld Payments Restored. When the conditions above are remedied, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them.

SECTION 4 – COMPENSATION PART 3 - LIENS


55

PART 3 - LIENS 4.3.1 Public Property Not Subject to Lien. The Contractor acknowledges that, pursuant to law, the Site is public property of the State of Georgia and is not subject to lien or levy. The Contractor will notify the Owner of any liens or levies against the Site of which it becomes aware. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner and shall use its best efforts to assist in securing the release of any liens or levies of which it becomes aware. 4.3.2 Notice of Commencement. A Notice of Commencement shall be filed by the Contractor with the Clerk of the Superior Court in the county in which the Project is located, pursuant to O.C.G.A. §13-10-62.

4.3.3 Release of Liens. Neither any part of the retainage nor the Final Payment shall become due until the Contractor, if required, shall deliver to the Owner a complete release of all liens or conditional release of lien upon payment or claims arising out of this contract in accordance with the Owner’s specimen form (a copy of which will be provided to any bidder on request), or receipts in full in place thereof and, if required in either case, an affidavit that so far as he has knowledge or information the releases and receipts include all labor and materials for which a lien or claim could be filed; but the Contractor may, if any Subcontractor or claimant refuses to provide a release, furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against any lien or claim. If any lien or claim remains unsatisfied after all payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all monies that the latter may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien or claim, including all costs and reasonable attorney's fees.

SECTION 5 – CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS, DISPUTES AND TERMINATION PART 1 – OWNER’S RIGHT TO SUSPEND OR STOP WORK


56

SECTION 5 – CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS, DISPUTES, AND TERMINATION

PART 1 – OWNER’S RIGHT TO SUSPEND OR STOP WORK

5.1.1 Owner’s Right to Suspend Work. The Owner reserves the right, with or without the concurrence of the Design Professional, to suspend the Work at any time or from time to time at the Owner's sole discretion, upon giving Contractor five days advanced written notice thereof. If the Owner exercises this right and then resumes the Work covered hereby, Contractor shall be entitled upon timely claim to a Change Order for payment by Owner of any reasonable Actual Costs actually incurred by Contractor in connection with the suspension and resumption of the Work, as well as an extension in the time for performance of the Work to the extent Contractor is delayed by Owner's suspension, to include compensation based upon the rate for Time Dependent Overhead Costs. The Design Professional shall determine the time, which shall be binding upon both Owner and Contractor, as set forth in Section 3, Part 3. 5.1.2 Owner’s Right to Stop Work. The Owner reserves the right, for itself and for any designated Construction Inspector retained by Owner, upon observation of apparent nonconforming Work, to immediately stop the affected Work. If the Work is later determined by the Design Professional to be in fact conforming Work, then Contractor shall be entitled upon timely claim to a Change Order for payment by Owner of any reasonable Actual Costs actually incurred by Contractor in connection with the stop Work order and resumption of the Work, as well as an extension in the time for performance of the Work to the extent Contractor is delayed by Owner's stop Work order. The Design Professional shall determine the time, which shall be binding upon both Owner and Contractor, as set forth in Section 3, Part 3. 5.1.3 Owner’s Rights Independent from Rights and Duty of the Design Professional. The rights granted to Owner under this Article are independent of the duty and obligation of the Design Professional to stop the Work for non-compliant work or to issue Notices of Non-Compliant Work.

SECTION 5 – CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS, DISPUTES AND TERMINATION PART 2 – CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS AND DISPUTES


57

PART 2 – CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS AND DISPUTES 5.2.1 General Provisions.

5.2.1.1 No Arbitration. There is no agreement to arbitrate any dispute arising under the Contract Documents. Any and all references to arbitration in any of the Contract Documents, including without limitation any exhibits, attachments or references, are hereby deleted and rendered null and void.

5.2.1.2 Continuation of the Work. Unless otherwise agreed in writing, and notwithstanding any other rights or obligations of either of the parties under any Contract Documents or Contracts, the Contractor must carry on with the performance of its contract services and the Work, including all duties and obligations hereunder, during the pendency of any Claim, dispute, and other matter in question or during any alternative dispute resolution proceeding, court proceeding, or other proceeding to resolve any Claim, dispute, and other matter in question, and the Owner will continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Owner, however, is under no obligation to make payments on or against such Claims, disputes, and other matters in question during the time required to resolve such Claims, disputes, and other matters in question.

5.2.2 General Claims for Contract Adjustments and Disputes.

5.2.2.1 General Claims of the Contractor. Should the Contractor suffer any injury or damage to person or property that Contractor reasonably believes a legal basis exists for liability on the part of the Owner, Program manager, or Design Professional, and that should result in an adjustment in the Cost of the Work or the Contract Time, such claim shall be made in writing in the form of a Request for Change Order to the Design Professional and copy the owner within fourteen days after such injury or damage is or has been observed. Any and all claims not made within said fourteen days are barred, waived, released, and discharged. The decision of the Design Professional is final and binding on the Contractor unless the Contractor protests the decision of the Design Professional and files a Statement of General Claim as set forth below.

5.2.2.2 Processing of General Claims. All claims must be filed and processed as a request for Change Order and subject to the processes and limitations set forth in Section 3 Part 2. If the requested Change Order is rejected, a protest may be made as set forth in Paragraph 5.2.2.3 below.

5.2.2.3 Protest; Statement of General Claim; Time of Submission. No protest of a claim decision of the Design Professional by the Contractor, whether said claim shall be accrued or prospective, shall be valid unless a "Statement of Claim" in writing and accompanied by vouchers and other supporting data shall have been filed with the Owner’s Representative, or if there is no Owner’s Representative, with the Owner by the Contractor not later than thirty days after the Design Professional’s decision to reject the claim, time being of the essence. The "Statement of Claim" shall contain a concise and clear recital of the grounds and the legal basis upon which the claim is asserted, including a designation of the applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. The Statement of Claim shall indicate the dollar amount of the claim and the number of days of adjustment of the Contract Time. The Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to resolve the dispute in accordance with Article 5.2.3 below. 5.2.2.4 Claims by Subcontractors. No claim or protest shall be made by the Contractor solely on the ground that a Subcontractor, Supplier, or Trade Contractor has made a claim or protest against the Contractor. The Contractor must maintain its claim or protest against the Owner based upon the provisions of the Contract Documents and independent of any right the Subcontractor, Supplier, or Trade Contractor has against the Contractor. The Contractor shall defend the Owner from any claims or protests submitted by a Subcontractor, Supplier, or Trade Contractor asserted in violation of, or contrary to any provision of the Contract Documents.

5.2.3 Dispute Resolution.

5.2.3.1 Initial Dispute Resolution. If a dispute arises out of or relates to this Contract or its breach, the parties shall endeavor to settle the dispute first through direct discussions between the parties’ representatives who have the authority to settle the dispute. If the parties’ representatives are not able to promptly settle the dispute, they shall refer the dispute to the senior administrators of the parties who have the authority to settle the dispute, who shall meet within fourteen days thereafter. If the dispute is not settled by the senior administrators, the parties may submit the dispute to mediation in accordance with Paragraph 5.2.3.2.

5.2.3.2 Mediation. If the dispute cannot be settled pursuant to Paragraph 5.2.3.1, the parties may elect to submit the dispute to mediation. The parties agree to conclude such mediation within sixty days of electing

SECTION 5 – CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS, DISPUTES AND TERMINATION PART 2 – CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS AND DISPUTES


58

mediation. The parties shall select a mutually agreeable mediator and shall share the cost of the mediator equally. Either party may terminate the mediation at any time after the first session, but the decision to terminate shall be communicated directly by the party’s representative to the other party’s representative and the mediator.

5.2.3.3 Multiparty Proceeding. All parties necessary to resolve a claim shall be parties to the same dispute resolution proceeding and shall share the costs equally. Appropriate provisions shall be included in all other contracts relating to the Work to provide for the consolidation of such dispute resolution procedures.

5.2.3.4 No Litigation. No litigation may be commenced without first following the process in this Article. Action may be filed in the Superior Court in Fulton County, Georgia, pursuant to OCGA §50-21-1, after the filing party

provides thirty days written notice to the opposing party. 5.2.4 Certain Claims Excluded from General Claims. 5.2.4.1 All claims for Compensable Delay under Article 3.3.8.

5.2.4.2 All claims for changes to the Work under Article 3.2.12, Article 3.2.13, Article 3.2.14, and Article 3.2.16.

SECTION 5 – CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS, DISPUTES AND TERMINATION PART 3 - TERMINATION


59

PART 3 - TERMINATION 5.3.1 Owner’s Right to Terminate Contract for Convenience.

5.3.1.1 Termination for Convenience. The Owner may at any time, and for any reason or without any reason or cause, terminate this Contract by written notice to the Contractor specifying the termination date, without cause and irrespective of whether or not Contractor is in default of any of its obligations hereunder. The effective date of termination shall not be earlier than seven days from the date of confirmed receipt of the written notice.

5.3.1.1.1 The Contractor shall: (i) stop the Services or the Work (as applicable); (ii) place no further

orders or Subcontracts for materials, labor, services or equipment; and (iii) terminate all material and equipment orders and Subcontracts to the extent terminable (unless otherwise directed by Owner in writing) and advise Owner of all materials, equipment and other items which cannot be canceled or which are already delivered and allow Owner to participate in the salvage or disposition thereof.

5.3.1.1.2 If Owner terminates this Contract pursuant to this Section prior to the commencement of the Construction Stage, Contractor shall, as soon as practical after receiving notice of termination under Section 5.3.1.1, submit to Owner an Application for Payment for all services performed through the date of receipt of the notice of termination, for which payment has not been previously made pursuant to the terms of this Contract.

5.3.1.1.3 If Owner terminates this Contract pursuant to this Section after commencement of the Construction Stage, Contractor shall, as soon as practical after receiving notice of termination under Section 5.3.1.1, submit to Owner an Application for Payment showing all of the costs incurred by Contractor in the performance of the Work terminated through the date of receipt of the notice of termination. The phrase “costs incurred by Contractor in the performance of the Work terminated” as used herein shall be deemed to include:

(i) Subcontract costs of Work completed; (ii) Cancellation fees in regard to equipment and materials ordered; (iii) Cost of all materials and equipment ordered which cannot be cancelled; less actual proceeds received upon the disposition thereof; (iv) Field Work accomplished; (v) Permit, engineering, bond and inspection fees;

(vi) All other direct costs actually incurred by Contractor that can be demonstrated by invoice, canceled check, or other appropriate documentation; (vii) General Conditions costs and profit incurred through the date of termination. (viii) Job Site and termination costs for ten business days after the date of termination to be paid at the daily rate Time Dependent Overhead Costs.

5.3.1.2, Acceptance of payment by the Contractor shall constitute a waiver of all further claims by Contractor against Owner under the Contract, and shall be Contractor’s exclusive remedy for termination of the Contract.. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in the Contract Documents, in no event shall Contractor be entitled to any payment on account of accident or lost profits or consequential damages in connection with any termination of the Contract, or otherwise in connection with the Contract.

5.3.1.3 Condition Precedent to Payment. As a condition precedent to receiving the payment set forth in this

Article 5.3.1, Contractor shall deliver to the Owner all papers, documents, assignments and agreements relating to the Project, in particular the Contract Documents (including ownership and copyright thereof) as set forth in Article 1.1.7, Paragraphs 1.1.9.17 and 2.2.1.8.



60

5.3.1.4 Assignment of Rights, Trade, and Subcontracts. 5.3.1.4.1 Assignment. If requested, Contractor shall assign to the Owner or to an entity of Owner's

choice any or all of Contractor's contractual rights in respect thereof, so that the assignee shall be fully vested with all rights and benefits of Contractor under such papers, documents and agreements, together with releases and waivers of lien in the same manner as would be required upon Final Completion. The Owner may also request the assignment from Contractor to Owner or to the entity of Owner's choice of any or all Subcontractors and supplier agreements entered into by Contractor and in that event the assignee shall be solely obligated to the Subcontractors and Suppliers under such contracts or agreements for all sums payable thereunder and not previously paid by the Owner to Contractor.

5.3.1.4.2 Cessation of Entitlement. Upon the Contractor's assignment of agreements, contracts, Trade Contracts and/or Owner's payment of monies due Contractor as provided in Subparagraph 5.3.1.4.1 above, Contractor shall be entitled to no further compensation of any kind from Owner and shall have no further obligation with regard to the assigned agreements, contracts, Subcontractors or Supplier.

5.3.2 Owner’s Right to Declare Default and/or Terminate Contract for Cause.

5.3.2.1 Termination for Cause. In the event that any provisions of this Contract are violated by the Contractor, through its own forces or by any of its subcontractors, the Owner may serve written notice upon the Contractor and the surety of the Owner's intention to declare default and terminate the Contractor. Unless within ten days after the serving of such notice upon the Contractor, such violation or delay shall cease and satisfactory arrangement of correction be made, the Contractor shall, upon the expiration of said ten days, be in default. Such notices shall outline the reasons for such intention to terminate the contract. In the event of any such default, the Owner shall immediately serve notice thereof upon the surety and the Contractor, and the Owner shall demand that the surety perform in accordance with its bond. If the surety fails to exercise its election under the bond or does not commence performance thereof within the time required by the bond, the Owner may take over the Work and prosecute the same to completion for the account of and at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor and its surety shall be liable to the Owner for any excess cost to the Owner. The Owner may take possession of and utilize in completing the Work such materials, appliances, and plant as may be on the Site and necessary thereto.

5.3.2.2 Grounds for Issuance of Notice of Declaration of Default. It shall be a sufficient ground for the issuance of a notice of declaration of default that the Contractor has been unfaithful or delinquent in the performance of the Contract or any part of it in any respect. The Design Professional does not have authority to declare the Contractor in default.

5.3.2.2.1 Non-Compliant Work. Without limitation of the foregoing and without subtracting from any right or defense of the Owner under other provisions of the Contract Documents, the Contractor acknowledges and agrees that it is grounds for issuance of a notice of declaration of default under the performance bond if the Contractor shall have neglected or failed for any reason to remedy a breach of a Notice of Non-Compliant Work within thirty days after the Owner shall have given written notice of said breach to the Contractor.

5.3.2.2.2 Failure to Prosecute the Work. If the Contractor refuses or fails, except in cases for which extensions of time are provided, to supply enough properly skilled workmen or proper materials, or if it fails to make proper payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor, or if it fails to diligently prosecute the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, then the Owner may, without prejudice to any right or remedy and after giving the Contractor and its Surety, after ten days' written notice of the Owner’s Intent to Declare Default, during which period the Contractor fails to cure or fails to commence and thereafter diligently prosecute Work necessary to cure the violation, declare the Contractor to be in default.



61

5.3.2.2.3 Other Failures of the Contractor. If Contractor, without limitation, makes a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors, or if a receiver is appointed on account of its insolvency, or if it persistently disregards laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction over the Project, or if it otherwise is guilty of a violation of any provision of this Contract, then the Owner may, without prejudice to any right or remedy and after giving the Contractor and its Surety, if any, ten days written notice of the Owner’s Intent to Declare Default, during which period the Contractor fails to cure or fails to commence and thereafter diligently prosecute Work necessary to cure the violation, declare the Contractor to be in default.

5.3.2.3 Owner’s Right to Prosecute the Work. Time being of the essence, if the Contractor shall be declared in default, both the Contractor and the Surety agree that the Owner may, after giving the Contractor and Surety the required notice and time under the bond if any is required, without prejudice to any other remedy and without invalidating the performance bond, make good such deficiencies and may deduct the cost thereof from payment due the Contractor or, at the Owner's option and without prejudice to the Owner’s rights against the Contractor and Surety, the Owner may terminate the Contractor and take possession of the Site and of all materials, equipment, tools and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor and finish the Work by whatever method the Owner shall deem expedient.

5.3.2.4 Effect of Later Determination. In the event the parties agree or a court of competent jurisdiction determines (or the parties agree to settle with a consent determination) that a default is wrongful or not the fault of the Contractor, the termination shall be considered to be a Termination for Convenience and the sole remedy available to the Contractor shall be the contractual treatment of the termination pursuant to Article 5.3.1 above and without any other damages or relief.

5.3.3 Contractor’s Right to Terminate.

5.3.3.1 Contractor's Right to Stop Work. The Contractor may, upon seven days written notice to the Owner and the Design Professional, stop Work without penalty for the following reasons:

5.3.3.1.1 Order of Court or Superior Public Authority. If any court or other superior public authority issues an order that affects the Work and the order results from no act or fault of the Contractor, the Contractor may stop the affected Work. In addition, the Contractor may stop Work as a result of an act of government, such as a declaration of a national emergency, making critical materials unavailable.

5.3.3.1.2 Failure to issue Certificate of Payment. Work may be stopped if the Design Professional should fail to certify any Application for Payment within fourteen days after said certification is due from the Design Professional. This ground terminates upon any payment of the Application for Payment by the Owner.

5.3.3.2 Contractor's Right to Terminate Contract.

5.3.3.2.1 Contractor’s Right to Terminate for Nonpayment. If the Owner fails to pay the Contractor when payment is due, the Contractor must give written notice of the Contractor's intention to terminate this Contract. If the Owner fails to provide the Contractor payment or written notice of a dispute as to the amount sought by the Contractor within thirty days after receipt of the Contractor's written notice, the Contractor may terminate this Contract. Upon such termination the Owner will pay the Contractor for the Work properly executed to date, and, upon timely claim therefore, for any proven loss sustained or cost incurred upon any materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, and cancellation charges on existing obligations of the Contractor.

5.3.3.2.2 Contractor’s Right to Terminate after Stopping Work. After stopping its Work in accordance with Paragraph 5.3.3.1 above, the Contractor may, upon thirty days written notice to the Owner and the Design Professional, terminate this Contract and recover from the Owner payment for all Work executed and any proven loss sustained or incurred upon any plant or any materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, and cancellation charges on existing obligations of the Contractor, if the grounds for stopping the Work are not removed.

5.3.4 Limitation on Payments. For terminations pursuant to Article 5.3.2 and 5.3.3, the Contract Sum shall be deemed earned only to the extent of an amount that bears to the total Contract Sum the same ratio that the Work in place



62

at the time of termination bears to the total Work, as reasonably determined by the Design Professional, and approved by the Owner. 5.3.5 Termination by Owner for Abandonment by Contractor. Both the Contractor and the Surety agree that, after fourteen calendar days’ written notice to the Contractor, the Owner may terminate the Contractor if the Contractor abandons the Project. If such termination occurs, the Owner shall credit the Contractor for Work satisfactorily completed, less any costs and liquidated damages the Owner suffers in correcting the Work, re-contracting and starting-up a replacement contractor, and completing the Project, including all warranties. 5.3.6 Notices of Termination. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Contract, no party may terminate this Contract, regardless of reason, unless the terminating party shall first issue a written Notice of Termination or of Default to the terminated or defaulted party by Statutory Mail or Certified Mail, Return Receipt Requested.

SECTION 6 – PROJECT COMPLETION PART 1 – MATERIAL COMPLETION


63

SECTION 6 - PROJECT COMPLETION

PART 1 – MATERIAL COMPLETION

6.1.1 Material Completion.

6.1.1.1 Material Completion Defined. Material Completion is when the Work or designated portion thereof is complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner and its Using Agency can occupy and utilize the Work for its intended use. Material Completion shall include issuance of any required Health Department inspections and any necessary certificates to operate, certificate of occupancy, as well as complete operation of all applicable building systems including, but not limited to, mechanical, electrical, plumbing, fire protection, fire alarm, security, elevators, life safety, and accessibility. Material Completion occurs when the Work is complete, except for Minor Items or Permitted Incomplete Work or Warranty Complaint Items (see Article 6.6.3), and a Certificate of Material Completion is obtained.

6.1.1.1.1 Material Completion and Occupancy Date. The date designated in the Contract for Material

Completion to be achieved. 6.1.1.1.2 Minor Item Defined. A Minor Item is a portion or element of the Work—

(a) that can be totally complete within thirty days; and (b) that can be completed while the Using Agency occupies the Work without impeding or interfering with either the Using Agency’s use and occupation of the Work or the Contractor’s ability to complete the Minor Item; and (c) that will not interfere with the complete use and enjoyment of the project by the Using Agency.

6.1.1.1.3 Permitted Incomplete Work Defined. Permitted Incomplete Work is work that is incomplete through no fault of the Contractor, as determined by the Owner, including, but not limited to, seasonal test and balance, seasonal landscaping, scheduled elevator inspection or maintenance, incomplete work due to failure of Separate Contractors to complete work, and the like.

6.1.1.2 When Material Completion Required. Material Completion shall be achieved within the Contract Time and by the Material Completion and Occupancy Date, as amended. Failure by the Contractor to achieve Material Completion by not later than the Material Completion and Occupancy Date, as amended, shall be sufficient cause for the assessment of Liquidated Damages.

6.1.2 Effect of Achieving Material Completion. Upon the date when Material Completion is actually achieved, the following matters are conclusively determined:

6.1.2.1 Occupancy of the Work. The Using Agency may immediately occupy the Work without restriction.

6.1.2.2 Warranty Periods. All warranties begin to run from the date Material Completion is achieved.

6.1.2.3 Utilities. All utilities become the responsibility of the Using Agency.

6.1.2.4 Insurance. The Using Agency is responsible for all insurance for the Project.

6.1.2.5 Liquidated Damages. The Liquidated Damages daily rate is reduced to zero.

6.1.2.6 Payment for Material Completion. The Contractor may request payment of the remaining contract balance, including retainage, less the amounts credited the Owner or incurred as Liquidated Damages, and less the amounts withheld for the punchlist by reason of Minor Items or Permitted Incomplete Work. See Paragraph 6.5.3.2.

6.1.3 Effect of Failure to Achieve Material Completion. Should Material Completion not be achieved by the Material Completion and Occupancy Date, as amended, the following matters are conclusively determined:

6.1.3.1 Breach of Contract. As time is of the essence in the completion of the Work, the Contractor is in breach of the Contract and is subject to default.

6.1.3.2 Liquidated Damages. Liquidated Damages at the specified daily rate in the Contract begin to accrue and are payable on the day immediately following the Material Completion and Occupancy Date.

SECTION 6 – PROJECT COMPLETION PART 2 – FINAL COMPLETION


64

PART 2 – FINAL COMPLETION 6.2.1 Final Completion.

6.2.1.1 Final Completion Final Completion shall be evidenced by the Design Professional’s Certificate of Final Completion. Final Completion should include completion of Permitted Incomplete Work, as defined in Section 6, Part 1.

6.2.1.2 When Final Completion Required. Minor Items shall be completed as expeditiously as possible, but not later than thirty days after Material Completion of the Work. Permitted Incomplete Work shall be completed as expeditiously as possible, but not later than a date established by the Design Professional. The Design Professional’s Certificate of Final Completion shall not be issued until all Minor Items and Permitted Incomplete Work are completed. 6.2.1.3 Deductions for Uncorrected Work. If the Design Professional and Owner deem it inexpedient to correct work not done in accordance with Contract Documents, a deduction from the Contract Sum may be made; but there is no duty on the part of the Owner to accept any work not done in accordance with the Contract Documents.

6.2.2 Effect of Achieving Final Completion. Upon the date when Final Completion is achieved and the Design Professional’s Certificate of Final Completion is issued, the following matters are conclusively determined:

6.2.2.1 Project Completion. The Project and the Work are complete.

6.2.2.2 Payment for Final Completion. All amounts withheld from Payment for Material Completion and not previously paid to the Contractor or credited to the Owner, as set forth in Section 6, Part 4, are payable upon receipt of a final pay request from the Contractor.

6.2.3 Effect of Failure to Achieve Final Completion. Should Final Completion not be achieved within the time specified, as amended, the Owner may issue to the Contractor a fourteen-day notice as a final warning to complete the Work. If Final Completion is not achieved by the end of the fourteenth day from the date of the Notice, the following matters are conclusively determined, subject to any request for extension of time as set forth in paragraph 6.2.3.3 below:

6.2.3.1 Breach of Contract. As time is of the essence in the completion of the Work, the Contractor is in breach of the Contract and is subject to default. 6.2.3.2 Ineligibility to Bid Upon State Contracts. The Contractor is ineligible to bid or propose on any contract of the Owner, the Georgia State Financing and Investment Commission, the Board of Regents of the University System of Georgia or any unit of the University System of Georgia, or the Georgia Department of Administrative Services. In the event a bid has been submitted but the bid award has not been made, the Contractor’s ineligibility requires that its bid be rejected.

6.2.3.2.1 Automatic Restoration of Eligibility to Bid. The Contractor’s eligibility to bid upon state contracts shall be restored automatically as of the date of achievement of Final Completion as evidenced by the Certificate of Final Completion.

6.2.3.2.2 Application to Reinstate Eligibility to Bid. If the Contractor never achieves Final Completion, the Contractor’s eligibility to bid or propose on state contracts may be reinstated upon the following:

(a) Not earlier than eighteen months after the date of failure to achieve Final Completion, a written application requesting reinstatement of eligibility to one of the following: the Director, Construction Division, GSFIC; the Vice Chancellor for Facilities, Board of Regents; or the Commissioner, Department of Administrative Services; and (b) The showing of good and just cause to believe that the actual achievement of Final Completion was impossible, or the showing of other good and just cause that the Contractor’s eligibility should be reinstated. (c) The Contractor may request a personal presentation in the application.

6.2.3.3 Extension of Time for Final Completion. The Contractor may file a request for an additional extension of time in the manner prescribed in Section 3, Part 3, and the effects of Failure to Achieve Final Completion shall be suspended until the Design Professional’s decision. Should the Design Professional grant the application for extension of time generally, the time for achieving Final Completion shall be adjusted accordingly. Should the

SECTION 6 – PROJECT COMPLETION PART 2 – FINAL COMPLETION


65

Design Professional grant the application for extension of time for a specific item of Work, that item of Work shall be deemed Permitted Incomplete Work with a specific individual final completion date.

SECTION 6 – PROJECT COMPLETION PART 3 – INSPECTIONS FOR COMPLETION OF THE WORK


66

PART 3 – INSPECTIONS FOR COMPLETION OF THE WORK 6.3.1 General Responsibility of the Contractor for Inspection. The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that it has an indivisible, non-delegable, and nontransferable contractual obligation to the Owner to make its own inspections of the Work at all stages of construction; and it shall supervise and superintend performance of the Contract in such manner as to enable it to confirm and corroborate at all times that all work has been executed strictly in accordance with the methods and materials designated in the Contract Documents. The Contractor’s inspections are also for the purpose of permitting the Contractor to accurately represent that (a) its certifications on Applications for Payment are true and correct and (b) its notices of readiness for inspections are true and correct. Accordingly, the Contractor acknowledges and agrees that it may not defend or excuse any deviation from the Contract Documents on the ground (a) that another person or party failed to bring the deviation to its attention, or (b) that any Subcontractor is at fault. 6.3.2 Notice of Readiness for Inspection for Material Completion.

6.3.2.1 Preparation of Initial Punchlist. Prior to the Material Completion and Occupancy Date, as amended, the Contractor shall correct all non-compliant or incomplete work. The Contractor shall then prepare an initial punchlist itemizing to the best of the Contractor’s knowledge all Minor Items and Permitted Incomplete Work (as defined in Section 6, Part 1) and provide a copy of the initial punchlist to the Design Professional and Owner. The Contractor is encouraged to consult with the Design Professional prior to finalizing the initial punchlist, in particular in arriving at consensus for Minor Items and Permitted Incomplete Work.

6.3.2.2 Contractor’s Notice of Readiness for Inspection for Material Completion. After or simultaneously with the provision of the initial punchlist, the Contractor shall give the Design Professional and Owner written Notice of Readiness for Inspection for Material Completion in the following words:

The work on the Contract for the [show name of Project as it appears in the Contract] having been materially completed, I request that the Design Professional perform an Inspection for Material Completion promptly in accordance with Section 6 of the General Conditions. I have attached the initial punchlist.

6.3.2.3 No Inspection without Notice. No Inspection for Material Completion shall be made until such time as the Design Professional and Owner have received notice in the form indicated above. In the event the Contractor shall have issued the Contractor’s Notice of Readiness for Inspection for Material Completion prematurely, the Contractor shall be liable for the damage resulting therefrom, including but not limited to the salaries, professional fees, travel expenses, and living expenses of the persons or parties inconvenienced thereby.

6.3.2.4 Additional Requirements for Inspection for Material Completion. The Contractor shall not request any Inspection for Material Completion before the Contractor has provided to the Design Professional the following:

6.3.2.4.1 a copy of the initial test and balance report on the heating, ventilating, and air conditioning system;

6.3.2.4.2 a copy of the facility operation and maintenance instructions, and any other documents specified by the Design Professional in Division 1 of the Specifications; and

6.3.2.4.3 A certification from the Contractor that all building systems specified in Paragraph 6.1.1.1 above are operational. The Contractor expressly agrees that obtaining the manufacturer’s warranties are solely the responsibility of the Contractor. In fulfilling this responsibility, the Contractor shall obtain the manufacturer’s certificates in the format specified in Section 7 below, and shall coordinate the initial start-up and testing of building systems. In all cases where the equipment of two or more manufacturers ties in and functions together, the Contractor shall require the manufacturers’ field representatives to perform simultaneously the initial start-up, the testing, and the placing of their equipment into operation. "Start-up" is defined as putting the equipment into action. "Testing" is defined as performing such testing as is stipulated in the Contract Documents to be performed. "Placing into operation" is defined as operating the equipment for a sufficient period of time to determine that it is performing properly.

SECTION 6 – PROJECT COMPLETION PART 3 – INSPECTIONS FOR COMPLETION OF THE WORK


67

6.3.3 Conducting the Inspection for Material Completion. The Design Professional shall conduct the Inspection for Material Completion within seven days of receipt of the notice specified in Paragraph 6.3.3.2. The Design Professional shall confirm the initial punchlist, shall add or delete Minor Items or Permitted Incomplete Work as appropriate, shall assign values to each item on the punchlist, and shall assign completion dates for the items of Permitted Incomplete Work. At the completion of the Inspection for Material Completion, the resulting punchlist shall be finalized by the Design Professional and provided to the Contractor within five days and shall become the final punchlist. Upon determination of conformity with the definition of Material Completion as specified in Section 6.1.1.1 above, the Design Professional shall issue a Certificate of Material Completion. 6.3.4 Notification of Using Agency of Site Visits by the Contractor or Subcontractors. Following the issuance of a Certificate of Material Completion, the Contractor or its Subcontractors shall not visit the Site without first giving notice to the Using Agency and the Owner. 6.3.5 Contractor’s Notice of Readiness for Interim Inspection for Punchlist Completion. Not more than thirty days after Material Completion, and upon completion of the Final Punchlist (including all Minor Items and such Permitted Incomplete Items as are due to be completed), the Contractor shall give the Design Professional and Owner written notice requesting Inspection for Final Completion in the following words:

The work on the Contract for the [show name of Project as it appears in the Contract] having been 100% completed, except for Permitted Incomplete Work not yet due to be completed, I request that the Design Professional perform an Inspection for Final Completion promptly in accordance with Section 6 of the General Conditions.

No inspection for Interim Inspection for Punchlist Completion shall be made until the Design Professional and the Owner have received notice in the form indicated above. In the event the Contractor shall have issued the Contractor’s Notice of Readiness for Interim Inspection for Punchlist Completion prematurely, the Contractor shall be liable for the damages resulting therefrom, including but not limited to the salaries, professional fees, travel expenses, and living expenses of the persons or parties inconvenienced thereby. 6.3.6 Conducting the Interim Inspection for Punchlist Completion. The Design Professional will conduct the Inspection for Final Completion. The Design Professional will confirm the final punchlist has been completed including all Minor Items. Upon completion of the inspection, the Design Professional will issue a Report of Interim Inspection, noting any Permitted Incomplete Work that remains to be accomplished and the date by which it is to be completed. In the event all Permitted Incomplete Work has been completed at the time of this Interim Inspection, and the Design Professional so certifies, then this inspection shall be deemed an Inspection for Final Completion. In the event any Minor Item is determined to be incomplete, the Owner may give the fourteen-day notice of failure to complete the Work, as set forth in Article 6.2.3. 6.3.7 Conducting the Inspection for Final Completion. When all Permitted Incomplete Work has been completed or scheduled for completion, the Owner shall call for and the Design Professional shall schedule the Final Inspection with the Owner and Contractor. The Design Professional shall conduct the Inspection for Final Completion and shall confirm that all Permitted Incomplete Work has been completed. Then the Design Professional shall issue the Certificate of Final Completion and Final Payment and any remaining funds may, upon an Application for Payment, be paid to the Contractor. Any Final Documents not yet submitted must be submitted with the Application for Final Payment. In the event any item of Permitted Incomplete Work is determined to be incomplete and the date for its completion has passed, the Owner may give the fourteen-day notice of failure to complete the Work, as set forth in Article 6.2.3.

SECTION 6 – PROJECT COMPLETION PART 4 – FINAL DOCUMENTS


68

PART 4 – FINAL DOCUMENTS 6.4.1 Final Documents.

6.4.1.1 Final Documents Defined. Final Documents consist of all documents set forth in Division 1 of the specifications, as well as all warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents.

6.4.1.2 Minimum Specific Final Documents Required. Prior to submission of the Application for Payment for Material Completion, all Final Documents, including but not limited to the following, must be submitted to the Owner and Using Agency:

6.4.1.2.1 Affidavits.

(a) A Non-Influence Affidavit in the exact form as shown in Section 7, Forms. (b) A Statutory Affidavit in the exact form as shown in Section 7, Forms. Any exceptions to the Statutory Affidavit are subject to the approval of the Owner.

6.4.1.2.2 Bonds.

(a) A Five-Year Bond for Roofs and Walls as shown in Section 7, Forms, written by a surety authorized to do business in the State of Georgia and in the penal sum of the actual cost of the exterior walls, wall cladding, wall components, wall insulation, roof insulation, roof deck and roof but not less than the amount shown as in the approved initial breakdown for these roof systems and wall systems. (b) Any Bonds to Discharge Claim issued to Subcontractors and Suppliers as shown in Section 7, Forms.

6.4.1.2.3 Marked-up Construction Documents. The Contractor shall provide a complete set of Marked-up Contract Documents to the Design Professional, which set shall reflect all changes caused by RFIs, field changes, Change Orders, or observed changes by the Contractor or subcontractor(s) for the purpose of the Design Professional’s issuance of Record Documents to the Owner.

6.4.1.2.4 Operation and Maintenance Data and Instructions and Training. The Contractor shall furnish proper written instructions to the Owner and Using Agency on operation and maintenance of all mechanical and electrical equipment. The Contractor shall provide training to the Using Agency in the operation and maintenance of all mechanical and electrical systems in the presence of the Design Professional and Owner and shall give notice in writing to the Design Professional, Owner and Using Agency at least fifteen days prior to the date it is proposes for the training. For all items of mechanical or electrical equipment or apparatus installed that require operation or maintenance after occupancy, the Contractor shall furnish and deliver to the Owner and Using Agency complete brochures and data as prepared and published by the manufacturers covering details of operation and maintenance.

6.4.1.2.5 Certificates of Manufacturers for Major Components. Certificates of Manufacturers shall be provided for elevators, moving walks, dumbwaiters, escalators, lifts, major components of HVAC and plumbing systems, e.g., cooling towers, compressors, condensers, absorption units, chiller units, fan coil units, air handling units, boilers, base mounted pumps, temperature controls, chemical feed systems; sewage pumps and water treatment systems, and incinerator systems; and major components of electrical systems. Start-up, testing, and placing into operation shall be performed by the field representative(s) of the manufacturer(s), and certificate(s) of the manufacturer(s) shall be filed with the Owner on the letterhead(s) of the manufacturer(s) in which the manufacturer(s) certifies or certify that "the equipment has been installed in strict compliance with the recommendations of the manufacturer(s) and is operating properly,” in the format shown in Section 7, Forms. The manufacturer shall list in the certificate the item or items furnished to the job and the date, name, or other positive means of identifying any supplementary documents containing the recommendations of the manufacturer, with a copy of each of the supplementary documents attached to the certificate.

6.4.1.2.6 Final Certification of Costs. For proper capital asset reporting of the Project, the Contractor shall submit its Final Certification of Costs in the format set forth in Section 7, Forms.

6.4.1.2.7 Keys. Unless an alternative locking or keying system is specified, a minimum of two sets of keys, with tags indicating room number or room description or door each key is intended to fit attached

SECTION 6 – PROJECT COMPLETION PART 4 – FINAL DOCUMENTS


69

to each key, shall be delivered to the Owner and Using Agency. Contractor shall prepare and furnish with the keys an itemized key schedule listing the room number or room description or door, serial number of key, and number of keys being delivered for each door or lock.

6.4.2 Presentation of Final Documents. At the time of the Inspection for Material Completion, but in any event prior to the application for Final Payment, the Contractor will provide the Owner and Using Agency with a three ring binder containing all of the Final Documents, warranties, and guarantees required by the Contract Documents. Included in the binder shall be the documents indicating the brand names actually used in the installation of the work. 6.4.3 Keys. Keys with tags indicating number and/or description of door or room each key is intended to fit attached to each key shall be delivered to the Owner and Using Agency. The Contractor shall prepare and furnish with the keys an itemized key schedule in quintuplicate listing the door or room number and/or description, serial number of key, and number of keys being delivered for each door or lock.

SECTION 6 – PROJECT COMPLETION PART 5 – PAYMENT FOR MATERIAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT


70

PART 5 – PAYMENT FOR MATERIAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT

6.5.1 Payment for Material Completion. Payment for Material Completion shall be due 10 days after receipt by the Owner of the application for payment upon achievement and certification of Material Completion, provided that Final Documents shall have been submitted. Payment shall be made by a check payable jointly to the Contractor and surety and shall be mailed to the surety. 6.5.2 Application for Payment for Material Completion. 6.5.2.1 Certification of Contractor. The Contractor shall certify, over his own signature, that the Work provided for by the Contract Documents has been completed under the terms and conditions thereof, and that the entire balance of the contract, including retainage, is due and payable, except for those amounts determined by the Design Professional to be withheld due to credits due to the Owner and Minor Items or Permitted Incomplete Work pursuant to Article 6.6.3 below. 6.5.2.2 Supporting Documentation.

6.5.2.2.1 Financial Data. The Contractor shall submit evidence satisfactory to the Design Professional that all payrolls, material bills, and other indebtedness connected with the work have been paid. 6.5.2.2.2 Affidavits and Bonds. The Contractor shall attach copies of the affidavits and bonds set forth in subparagraphs 6.4.2.2.1 and 2 above, execute the payment certification and forward it directly to the Design Professional.

6.5.3 Release of Contractor’s Retainage. 6.5.3.1 Establishment of List. At the completion of the Inspection for Material Completion, the Design Professional and Contractor, with the consent of the Owner, shall develop the Final Punchlist. The Design Professional will assign a value for each the Minor Items and Permitted Incomplete Work. 6.5.3.2 Establishment of Amount of to be Withheld for Punchlist Items. In general, the amount to be withheld from the Payment for Material Completion and to be paid upon Final Completion shall be equal to 200% of the Design Professional’s value of completing the Work for each Minor Item or Permitted Incomplete Work. The following additional amounts to be withheld shall be applied where applicable.

6.5.3.2.1 Mechanical and HVAC Systems. Until such time as the Design Professional shall have certified that the heating system has been balanced under seasonable weather conditions, the amount withheld shall in no event be less than $1,000.00. 6.5.3.2.2 Certificates. For each certificate required for major components a sum of $500.00 shall be withheld until such certificate shall have been filed with the Owner and Institution.

6.5.4 Effect of Payment for Material Completion and Release of Claims. Owner shall process the Payment for Material Completion as expeditiously as possible in accordance with the certification of the Design Professional, but interest shall not accrue until thirty (30) days have elapsed from receipt, unless error is found in the application or supporting documents. Acceptance of Payment for Material Completion by the Contractor shall operate as settlement, waiver, release, discharge and payment in full of all claims against Owner of any nature arising out of the Project except for the work associated with the Minor Items and the Permitted Incomplete Work. 6.5.5 Final Payment. Final Payment shall be due 10 days after receipt by the Owner of the application for payment upon achievement and certification of Final Completion, provided that Final Documents shall have been submitted. Payment shall be made by a check payable jointly to the Contractor and surety and shall be mailed to the surety. Owner shall process the Final Payment expeditiously as possible in accordance with the certification of the Design Professional, but interest shall not accrue until thirty (30) days have elapsed from receipt, unless error is found in the application or supporting documents. 6.5.5.1 Certification of Contractor. The Contractor shall certify, over his own signature, that the Work provided for by the Contract Documents has been completed under the terms and conditions thereof, and that the entire balance of the contract is due and payable.

SECTION 6 – PROJECT COMPLETION PART 5 – PAYMENT FOR MATERIAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT


71

6.5.5.2 Supporting Documentation.

6.5.5.2.1 Financial Data. The Contractor shall submit evidence satisfactory to the Design Professional that all payrolls, material bills, and other indebtedness connected with the work have been paid. 6.5.5.2.2 Affidavits and Bonds. The Contractor shall attach copies of the affidavits and bonds set forth in subparagraphs 6.4.2.2.1 and 2 above, execute the payment certification, and forward it directly to the Design Professional.

6.5.6 Effect of Final Payment and Release of Claims. Acceptance of Final Payment for Material Completion by the Contractor shall operate as settlement, waiver, release, discharge and payment in full of all claims against Owner of any nature arising out of the Project.

SECTION 6 – PROJECT COMPLETION PART 6 – CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT


72

PART 6 – CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT 6.6.1 Non-Compliant or Defective Work. Neither the Design Professional's Certificate of Final Completion, nor any decision of the Design Professional, nor payment, nor any provision in the Contract shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials, faulty workmanship, or omission of contract work, and it shall remedy any defects or supply any omissions resulting therefrom and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom.

6.6.1.2 Notice of Non-Compliant or Defective Work. The Owner shall give notice of observed defects or omissions with reasonable promptness. Attached to or included within the notice shall be a Notice of Non-Compliant Work.

6.6.1.3 Correction of the Work. Within the space of time designated in Notices of Non-Compliant Work and without expense to the Owner, the Contractor shall correct, remedy, replace, re-execute, supply omitted work, or remove from the premises all work designated as non-compliant by the Design Professional. The Contractor shall give prompt notice in writing to the Design Professional, with copy to the Owner, upon completion of the supplying of any omitted work or the correction of any work designated as non-compliant by the Design Professional. In the absence of said notice, it shall be and is presumed under this Contract that there has been no correction of the non-compliant work or supplying of omitted work. If the Contractor does not remove, make good the deficiency, correct, or remedy faulty work, or supply any omitted work within the space of time designated in Notices of Non-Compliant Work, then the Owner, after ten days' notice in writing to the Contractor, may remove the work, correct the work, remedy the work or supply omitted work at the expense of the Contractor. In case of emergency involving health, safety of property, or safety of life the Owner may proceed at once with correction of the Work without waiving any rights of the Owner. Correction of defective work executed under the plans and specifications or supplying of omitted work whether or not covered by warranty of a subcontractor or supplier, remains the primary, direct responsibility of the Contractor. The foregoing obligation of the Contractor shall remain in effect until the expiration of the statute of limitations covering the Work.

6.6.2 Warranty and Guaranty. The Contractor warrants and guarantees that all work executed under the Contract Documents shall be free from defects of materials or workmanship for a period of one year from the date of Material Completion. Whenever a manufacturer’s warranty or the Contract Documents call for written guaranties or warranties in excess of one year, the Contractor shall furnish them in such form as to permit direct enforcement by the Owner against any Subcontractor, Supplier, or manufacturer whose guaranty or warranty is called for. The Contractor further agrees to all of the following:

6.6.2.1 Jointly and Severally Liable. The Contractor is jointly and severally liable with such Subcontractors, Trade Contractors, Suppliers, or manufacturers;

6.6.2.2 Ratification of Warranties by the Contractor. The warranties and guaranties of the Subcontractors, Trade Contractors, Suppliers, and manufacturers are provided by the Contractor for purposes of performance under this article, and the Contractor, ratifies them by its warranty and guaranty;

6.6.2.3 Service of notice. Service of notice on the Contractor that there has been breach of any warranty or guaranty will be sufficient to invoke the terms of this article;

6.6.2.4 Bind Subcontractors, etc. The Contractor shall bind its Subcontractors, Trade Contractors, Suppliers, and manufacturers to the terms of this article; and

6.6.2.5 Warranties no Limitation. The calling for or the furnishing of written warranties shall in no way limit the contractual obligation of the Contractor to correct the work as set forth in this Part. The remedies stated in this article are in addition to the remedies otherwise available to the Owner, do not exclude such other remedies, and are without prejudice to any other remedies.

SECTION 6 – PROJECT COMPLETION PART 6 – CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT


73

6.6.3 Warranty Complaint Item Procedure.

6.6.3.1 Notice of Warranty/Guaranty Complaint Items. The Owner and Using Agency may provide notice of warranty work by a warranty complaint letter, sent by statutory mail or facsimile to the Contractor. The letter should outline the complaint item in non-technical language. In emergency situations, the initial notification may be oral to a person or office designated by the Contractor. The Contractor shall respond promptly to all such notices.

6.6.3.2 Duty to Correct. During the one year period of the warranty and guaranty, any defects of material or workmanship that become apparent shall be the responsibility of the Contractor until and unless the Contractor can show abuse or design defect. The Contractor shall immediately correct all defects that become known during the one year period at no cost to the Owner unless notice is given to the Design Professional, Owner and Using Agency, prior to correcting the defect that the cause of the defect is the result of abuse or design deficiency.

6.6.3.2.1 Initial Response. When the Using Agency, the Owner, or the Design Professional notifies the Contractor of a defect, the Contractor will visit the site to review the complaint within five days and shall promptly correct the Work. If the Contractor fails to respond within this time limit, the Owner may correct the defect or malfunction and charge the Contractor for the Work. The Contractor shall give notice in writing to the Owner when corrections have been completed. 6.6.3.2.2 Design Defect or User Abuse. If the Contractor believes that a design defect or user abuse has caused the malfunction or defect, he will notify the Design Professional and the Design Professional will issue a formal decision in his capacity as Design Professional and initial interpreter of the conditions of the contract. If the Contractor disagrees with the Design Professional’s response, he shall protest to the Owner in accordance with Section Five Part two. If it is determined the complaint is not the responsibility of the Contractor, the Contractor shall be promptly paid for the cost of the corrective work. 6.6.3.2.3 Emergency Situations. If the condition is an emergency, this will be communicated to the Contractor with the request that corrections are to be accomplished immediately. The Contractor shall respond to the notice in emergency situations within twenty-four hours. If the Contractor fails to respond within this time limit, the Owner may correct the defect and charge the Contractor for the Work. If it is determined the complaint is not the responsibility of the Contractor, the Contractor shall be promptly paid for the cost of the corrective work. The Contractor shall give notice in writing to the Owner when corrections have been completed.

SECTION 7 – FORMS

DBB CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT SECTION 7, FORMS

1

SECTION 7 – FORMS FORMS INDEX:

Performance Bond Payment Bond Georgia Security and Immigration Compliance Act Affidavit(s) Non-Influence Affidavit Statutory Affidavit Five Year Bond on Roofs and Walls Specimen Certificate of Manufacturer Certificate of Insurance Bond to Discharge Claim Change Order Forms Application for Payment Form Subcontractor Retainage Release Certificate Final Certification of Costs

SECTION 7 – FORMS PERFORMANCE BOND


2

PERFORMANCE BOND

Bond No. Project No. J-284

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That ___________________________________________________________ as principal (hereinafter referred to (Legal Name and Address of the Contractor) as "Contractor"), and ________________________________________________ as surety (hereinafter referred to

(Legal Title and Address of Surety) as "Surety"), are held and firmly bound unto the Board of Regents of the University System of Georgia as Obligee (hereinafter referred to as "Owner") in the amount of and No/100 Dollars ($ .00), to which payment Contractor and Surety bind Themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the above bounden Principal has entered into a contract with the Owner bearing date of Month, Day, Year for: J-284 Darton Student Services II, Darton State College, Albany, Georgia in accordance with drawings and specifications prepared by: Flynn Finderup Architects which said contract is incorporated herein by reference and made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as the Contract. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that, if the Contractor shall promptly and faithfully perform and comply with the terms and conditions of said contract; and shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against and from all cost, expenses, damages, injury or loss to which said Owner may be subjected by reason of any wrongdoing, including patent infringement, misconduct, want of care or skill, default or failure of performance on the part of said Principal, his agents, subcontractors or employees, in the execution or performance of said contract, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect.

(1) The said Surety to this bond, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change or changes, extension of time or extensions of time, alteration or alterations or addition or additions to the terms of the contract, or to the work to be performed thereunder, or the specifications or drawings accompanying same, or the exercise of the Owner’s right to do work pursuant to Articles 1.3.7, 1.7.8, or 5.3.5, or Paragraphs 3.4.1.4 or 5.3.2.3, shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change or changes, extension of time or extensions of time, alteration or alterations or addition or additions to the terms of the contract or to the Work or to the specifications or drawings. In addition, the Surety to this bond, for value received, hereby agrees to the provisions of Article 1.5.1, including Paragraph 1.5.1.3 for increases in the penal amount of this bond, and waives notice from the Owner of any such changes. (2) If pursuant to the Contract Documents the Contractor shall be declared in default by the Owner under the aforesaid Contract and the Owner has terminated the Contractor’s right to complete the Contract, the Surety shall promptly perform this bond agreement in accordance with its terms and conditions. If Surety chooses to investigate, Owner shall cooperate with the Surety in its investigation and shall make all public project records available for inspection by Surety at no cost to Owner. It shall be the duty of the Surety to give an unequivocal notice in writing to the Owner, within twenty-five (25) days after receipt of such a declaration of default, of the Surety's election to either remedy the default or defaults promptly or to perform the Contract promptly, time being of the essence. In said notice of election, the Surety shall indicate the date on which the remedy or performance will commence, and it shall then be the duty of the Surety to give prompt notice in writing to the Owner immediately upon completion of (a) the remedy and/or correction of each default, (b) the remedy and/or correction or each item of condemned work, (c) the furnishing of each omitted item of work, and (d) the performance of the contract. The Surety shall not assert its Principal as justification for its failure to give notice of election or for its failure to promptly remedy the default or defaults or perform the Contract. (3) It is expressly agreed by the Principal and the Surety that the Owner, if he desires to do so, is at liberty to make inquiries at any time of subcontractors, laborers, materialmen, or other parties concerning the status of payments for labor, materials, or services furnished in the prosecution of the work. (4) No right of action shall accrue on this bond to or for the use of any person or corporation other than the Owner named herein or the legal successors of the Owner.

SECTION 7 – FORMS PERFORMANCE BOND


3

(5) For the purposes of this bond, the name and address of the responsible official of the Surety’s claims department, to whom correspondence and telecommunications may be addressed and/or with whom business concerning this bond may be conducted will be as follows: NAME TITLE __________________________________________________________________ ADDRESS CITY STATE ZIP CODE TELEPHONE (6) Further, this bond shall be the Performance Bond furnished under O.C.G.A. §§ 13-10-2, 13-10-20 and shall be subject to increase in the penal amount of the bond pursuant to such statutes and Article 1.5.1 of the Contract. (7) No action can be instituted on this bond after one year from the date of Final Completion as determined pursuant to Article 6.2.2. SIGNED AND SEALED THIS ___________ DAY OF __________________________, 20_____. ATTEST: (NAME OF Contractor) By Secretary(*) President (SURETY) (*)(*) (TITLE) (*) Please apply seal of Corporation over Secretary’s Signature. (*)(*) Please apply seal of Surety and arrange for countersignature by a “Georgia Licensed Agent” of Surety pursuant to O.C.G.A. §33-23-5. Kindly show title of the aforesaid agent as “Georgia Licensed Agent.” (*) Attach Power of Attorney

SECTION 7 – FORMS PAYMENT BOND


4

PAYMENT BOND Bond No. Project No. J-284

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That____________________________________________________________ as Principal (hereinafter referred to as the (Legal Title and Address of the Contractor)

"Principal") and ____________________________________________________________ as Surety (hereinafter referred ( Legal Name and Address of the Surety)

to as "Surety"), are held and firmly bound unto the BOARD OF REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY SYSTEM OF GEORGIA as Obligee (hereinafter referred to as "Owner") for the use and benefit of claimants defined, hereinafter in the amount of Dollars ($ )to which payment Principal and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the above bounden Principal has entered into a contract with Owner dated Month, Day, Yearfor J-284 Darton Student Services II, Darton State College, Albany, Georgia in accordance with the drawings and specifications prepared by: Flynn Finderup Architects which contract is incorporated herein by reference and made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as the Contract. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that if the Principal shall promptly make payment to all claimants as hereinafter defined, for all labor and materials supplied in the prosecution of the work provided for in said Contract, then this obligation shall be void, otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect subject, however, to the following conditions: (1) The said Surety to this bond, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change or changes, extension of time or

extensions of time, alteration or alterations or addition or additions to the terms of the contract or to the work to be performed thereunder, or the specifications or drawings accompanying same, or the exercise of the Owner’s right to do work pursuant to Articles 1.3.7,1.7.8 or 5.3.5 or Paragraphs 3.4.1.4 or 5.3.2.3, shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change or changes, extension of time or extensions of time, alteration or alterations or addition or additions to the terms of the contract or to the Work or to the specifications or drawings. In addition, the Surety to this bond, for value received, hereby agrees to the provisions of Article 1.5.1, including Paragraph 1.5.1.3, for increases in the penal amount of this bond and waives notice from the Owner of any such changes.

(2) A claimant is defined as any subcontractor and any person supplying labor, materials, machinery, or equipment in the prosecution of

the work provided for in said contract. (3) Every person entitled to the protection hereunder and who has not been paid in full for labor or materials furnished in the prosecution

of the work referred to in said bond before the expiration of a period of ninety (90) days after the day on which the last of the labor was done or performed by him, or materials or equipment or machinery was furnished or supplied by him for which claim is made, shall have the right to sue on such payment bond for the amount, or the balance thereof, unpaid at the time of the commencement of such action and to prosecute such action to final execution and judgment for the sum or sums due him, provided, however, that any person having direct contractual relationship with a subcontractor, but no contractual relationship express or implied with the Contractor furnishing said payment bond shall have (a) given written notice to said Contractor within ninety (90) days from the day on which such person did or performed the last of the labor, or furnished the last of the materials or machinery or equipment for which such claim is made stating with substantial accuracy the amount claimed and the name of the party to whom the materials were furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was performed or done; and (b) if the Contractor has filed a Notice of Commencement in accordance with the requirements of O.C.G.A. §13-10-62 and Articles 4.3.2 of the contract, given to said contractor a written Notice to Contractor within 30 days from the filing of the Notice of Commencement or 30 days following the first delivery of labor, materials, machinery or equipment, whichever is later, setting forth:

A) The name, address, and telephone number of the person providing labor, material, machinery, or equipment;

B) The name and address of each person at whose instance the labor, material, machinery or equipment is being furnished;

C) The name and the location of the public work; and

D) A description of the labor, material, machinery, or equipment being provided and, if known, the contract price or anticipated

value of the labor, material, machinery, or equipment to be provided or the amount claimed to be due, if any. It is provided further that nothing contained herein shall limit the right of action to said 90-day period. Notice may be served by the

depositing of a notice, certified mail, postage paid, duly addressed to the Contractor at any place he maintains an office or conducts his business, or his residence, in any post office or branch post office or any letter box under the control of the Post Office Department or notice may be served by statutory mail pursuant to O.C.G.A. §9-10-12 or in any manner in which the sheriffs of Georgia are authorized by law to serve summons or process. Every suit instituted under this section shall be brought in the name of the claimant without Owner being made a party thereof. The official who has custody of said bond is authorized and directed to furnish, to any person making application thereof who submits an affidavit that he has supplied labor or materials for such work and payment therefore has not been made, or that he is being sued on any such bond, a copy of such bond and the contract for which it was given, certified, by the official who has custody of said bond and contract shall be admitted in evidence without further proof. Applicants

SECTION 7 – FORMS PAYMENT BOND


5

shall pay for such certified statements and such fees as the official fixes to cover the cost of preparation thereof, but in no case shall the fixed fee exceed the fees that the clerks of the superior courts are permitted to charge for similar copies.

(4) It is expressly agreed by the Principal and the Surety that the Owner, if he desires to do so, is at liberty to make inquiries at any

time of subcontractors, laborers, materialmen, or other parties concerning the status of payments for labor, materials, or services furnished in the prosecution of the work.

(5) For the purposes of this bond, the name and address of the responsible official of the Surety’s claims department, to whom

correspondence and telecommunications may be addressed and/or with whom business concerning this bond may be conducted will be as follows:

NAME TITLE __________________________________________________________________ ADDRESS CITY STATE ZIP CODE TELEPHONE (6) Further, this bond shall be the Payment Bond furnished under O.C.G.A. §§ 13-10-1, 13-10-60 et seq. and shall be subject to

increase in the penal amount of the bond pursuant to such statutes and Article 1.5.1 of the Contract. (7) No action can be instituted on this bond after one year from the date of Final Completion as determined pursuant to Article 6.2.2. SIGNED AND SEALED THIS ___________ DAY OF __________________________, 20_____. ATTEST: (NAME OF Contractor) By Secretary(*) President (SURETY) (*)(*) (TITLE) (*) Please apply seal of Corporation over Secretary’s Signature. (*)(*) Please apply seal of Surety and arrange for countersignature by a “Georgia Licensed Agent” of Surety pursuant to O.C.G.A.

§33-23-5. Kindly show title of the aforesaid agent as “Georgia Licensed Agent.” (*) Attach Power of Attorney

SECTION 7 – FORMS GEORGIA SECURITY AND IMMIGRATION COMPLIANCE ACT AFFIDAVIT(S)


6

GEORGIA SECURITY AND IMMIGRATION COMPLIANCE ACT AFFIDAVIT(S)

“Contractor” in the following Affidavits shall mean “General Contractor”/”Contractor” for the purpose of compliance with O.C.G.A. § 13-10-91, (b). For the purpose of completing the attached Affidavits, please insert the following:

• “Name of Public Employer” shall mean “Board of Regents of the University System of Georgia, Owner, for the use and benefit of Darton State College, Using Agency”

• “Name of Project” shall mean “Project No. J-284 Darton Student Services”



7

Contractor Affidavit under O.C.G.A. § 13-10-91(b)(1) By executing this affidavit, the undersigned contractor verifies its compliance with O.C.G.A. § 13-10-91, stating affirmatively that the individual, firm or corporation which is engaged in the physical performance of services on behalf of Board of Regents of the University System of Georgia for the use and benefit of Darton State College, Using Agency (public employer) has registered with, is authorized to use and uses the federal work authorization program commonly known as E-Verify, or any subsequent replacement program, in accordance with the applicable provisions and deadlines established in O.C.G.A. § 13-10-91. Furthermore, the undersigned contractor will continue to use the federal work authorization program throughout the contract period and the undersigned contractor will contract for the physical performance of services in satisfaction of such contract only with subcontractors who present an affidavit to the contractor with the information required by O.C.G.A. § 13-10-91(b). Contractor hereby attests that its federal work authorization user identification number and date of authorization are as follows: _________________________________ Federal Work Authorization User Identification Number _________________________________ Date of Authorization _________________________________ Name of Contractor J-284 Darton Student Services II Name of Project Board of Regents of the University System of Georgia For the use and benefit of Darton State College Name of Public Employer

I hereby declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct.

Executed on ______, ___, 20__ in _____(city), ______(state).

_________________________________ Signature of Authorized Officer or Agent _______________________________ Printed Name and Title of Authorized Officer or Agent

SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN BEFORE ME ON THIS THE ______ DAY OF ______________,20__. _________________________________ NOTARY PUBLIC My Commission Expires: _________________________________



8

Subcontractor Affidavit under O.C.G.A. § 13-10-91(b)(3)

By executing this affidavit, the undersigned subcontractor verifies its compliance with O.C.G.A. § 13-10-91, stating affirmatively that the individual, firm or corporation which is engaged in the physical performance of services under a contract with (name of contractor) on behalf of Board of Regents of the University System of Georgia for the use and benefit of Darton State College, Using Agency (public employer) has registered with, is authorized to use and uses the federal work authorization program commonly known as E-Verify, or any subsequent replacement program, in accordance with the applicable provisions and deadlines established in O.C.G.A. § 13-10-91. Furthermore, the undersigned subcontractor will continue to use the federal work authorization program throughout the contract period and the undersigned subcontractor will contract for the physical performance of services in satisfaction of such contract only with sub-subcontractors who present an affidavit to the subcontractor with the information required by O.C.G.A. § 13-10-91(b). Additionally, the undersigned subcontractor will forward notice of the receipt of an affidavit from a sub-subcontractor to the contractor within five business days of receipt. If the undersigned subcontractor receives notice that a sub-subcontractor has received an affidavit from any other contracted sub-subcontractor, the undersigned subcontractor must forward, within five business days of receipt, a copy of the notice to the contractor. Subcontractor hereby attests that its federal work authorization user identification number and date of authorization are as follows: _________________________________ Federal Work Authorization User Identification Number _________________________________ Date of Authorization _________________________________ Name of Subcontractor J-284 Darton Student Services II Name of Project Board of Regents of the University System of Georgia For the use and benefit of Darton State College Name of Public Employer I hereby declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct. Executed on ______, ___, 20__ in _____(city), ______(state). _________________________________ Signature of Authorized Officer or Agent _______________________________ Printed Name and Title of Authorized Officer or Agent SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN BEFORE ME ON THIS THE ______ DAY OF ______________,20__. _________________________________ NOTARY PUBLIC My Commission Expires: _________________________________



9

Sub-subcontractor Affidavit under O.C.G.A. § 13-10-91(b)(4)

By executing this affidavit, the undersigned sub-subcontractor verifies its compliance with O.C.G.A. § 13-10-91, stating affirmatively that the individual, firm or corporation which is engaged in the physical performance of services under a contract for (name of subcontractor or sub-subcontractor with whom such sub-subcontractor has privity of contract) and (name of contractor) on behalf of Board of Regents of the University System of Georgia for the use and benefit of Darton State College, Using Agency (public employer) has registered with, is authorized to use and uses the federal work authorization program commonly known as E-Verify, or any subsequent replacement program, in accordance with the applicable provisions and deadlines established in O.C.G.A. § 13-10-91. Furthermore, the undersigned sub-subcontractor will continue to use the federal work authorization program throughout the contract period and the undersigned sub-subcontractor will contract for the physical performance of services in satisfaction of such contract only with sub-subcontractors who present an affidavit to the sub-subcontractor with the information required by O.C.G.A. § 13-10-91(b). The undersigned sub-subcontractor shall submit, at the time of such contract, this affidavit to (name of subcontractor or sub-subcontractor with whom such sub-subcontractor has privity of contract). Additionally, the undersigned sub-subcontractor will forward notice of the receipt of any affidavit from a sub-subcontractor to (name of subcontractor or sub-subcontractor with whom such sub-subcontractor has privity of contract). Sub-subcontractor hereby attests that its federal work authorization user identification number and date of authorization are as follows: _________________________________ Federal Work Authorization User Identification Number _________________________________ Date of Authorization _________________________________ Name of Sub-subcontractor J-284 Darton Student Services II Name of Project Board of Regents of the University System of Georgia For the use and benefit of Darton State College Name of Public Employer I hereby declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct. Executed on ______, ___, 20__ in _____(city), ______(state). _________________________________ Signature of Authorized Officer or Agent _______________________________ Printed Name and Title of Authorized Officer or Agent SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN BEFORE ME ON THIS THE ______ DAY OF ______________,20__. _________________________________ NOTARY PUBLIC My Commission Expires: _________________________________

SECTION 7 – FORMS NON-INFLUENCE AFFIDAVIT


10

NON-INFLUENCE AFFIDAVIT

COUNTY OF ________________________________ STATE OF ________________________________ I do solemnly swear on my oath that as to the Contract dated_________________________, 20_____________, between _______________________________________________________________________________

(NAME OF CONTRACTOR)

and the Owner, I have no knowledge of the exertion of any influence or the attempted exertion of any influence on the firm on behalf of which this affidavit is made in any way, manner, or form in the purchase of materials, equipment, or other items involved in construction, manufacture, or employment of labor under the aforesaid Contract by any employee, officer, or agent of the Owner, or any person connected with the State Government of Georgia in any way whatsoever. This ________ day of __________________________, 20_______. ______________________________________________(L.S.) Signature ______________________________________________ Title ______________________________________________ Firm COUNTY OF __________________________________ STATE OF ____________________________________ Personally before me, the undersigned authority, appeared____________________________________________

(NAME OF PERSON SIGNING THE AFFIDAVIT) who is known to me to be an official of the firm of ___________________________________________________, (NAME OF CONTRACTOR) and who, after being duly sworn, stated on his oath that he had read the above statement and that the same is true and correct. ________________________________________________ Notary Public My Commission expires _____________________________ This______ day of __________________________, 20____.

SECTION 7 – FORMS STATUTORY AFFIDAVIT


11

STATUTORY AFFIDAVIT

COUNTY OF ______________________________ STATE OF ______________________________ FROM: ___________________________________ Contractor TO: _____________________________________

Owner Re: Contract entered into the _____ day of ______________, 20____, between the above-mentioned parties for the construction of Project No. ____J-284__________________ located at Darton State College in Albany, Georgia___________________

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:

1. The undersigned hereby certifies that all work required under the above Contract has been performed in accordance with the terms thereof, that all Subcontractors, Suppliers, Trade Contractors, mechanics, and laborers have been paid and satisfied in full, or will be paid and satisfied in full out of the proceeds of this payment as set forth in O.C.G.A. §13-10-80, and that there are no outstanding claims of any character [including disputed claims or any claims to which the Contractor has or will assert any defense] arising out of the performance of the Contract which have not been paid and satisfied in full except as listed herein below:.......

2. The undersigned further certifies that to the best of his knowledge and belief there are no unsatisfied claims for damages resulting from injury or death to any employees, Subcontractors, or the public at large arising out of the performance of the contract, or any suits or claims for any other damage of any kind, nature, or description which might constitute a lien upon the property of the Owner.

3. The undersigned makes this affidavit for the purpose of receiving final payment in full settlement of all claims against the Owner arising under or by virtue of the contract, and acceptance of such payment is acknowledged as a release of the Owner from any and all claims arising under or by virtue of the contract.

This ______ day of ____________________________, 20___________.

___________________________________(L.S.)

Signature ___________________________________________ Title ___________________________________________ Firm

COUNTY OF _______________________________ STATE OF ________________________________

Personally before me, the undersigned authority, appeared____________________________________________ (NAME OF PERSON SIGNING THE AFFIDAVIT)

who is known to me to be an official of the firm of ___________________________________________________, (NAME OF CONTRACTOR) and who, after being duly sworn, stated on his oath that he had read the above statement and that the same is true and correct. ________________________________________________ Notary Public My Commission expires __________________________ This______ day of __________________________, 20____.

Instructions to Contractor- ENTER THE WORD "NONE" OR LIST THE NAMES OF CLAIMANTS

SECTION 7 – FORMS FIVE-YEAR ROOF AND WALL BOND


12

FIVE YEAR BOND ON ROOFS AND WALLS

STATE OF GEORGIA COUNTY OF ______________________________

Firmly Bound. Know all men by these presents, that we, ________________ (“Contractor”) as Principal, and (Name of Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto ______________________________________________________________________________,

(Insert Name of Owner) Owner, in the sum of____________ Dollars ($______________) for the payment of which well and truly to be made and done, we bind ourselves, our executors and administrators, our successors and assigns, jointly and severally, by these presents.

Condition of Obligation. The condition of the above obligation is such that WHEREAS Contractor has entered into a Contract with Owner dated_________________ (enter date of contract), for construction of Project No.___J-284_____________.

Warranty. WHEREAS, the said Contractor warrants with respect to the said work that for a period of five years from the date of the execution of the final certificate of the Design Professional, the roofs of the building (or buildings) and roofs of passages, including but not limited to the roof envelope, including but not limited to the roof decking; deck sheathing; material used as a roof base or insulation over which roof is applied; roofing materials; promenade decks or any other work on the surface of the roof; flashing; base flashing; counter flashing; metal work, gravel stops; or roof expansion joints shall be absolutely watertight and free from all leaks. At no expense to the Owner, the Contractor will make repairs to any defects that may develop in the work including but not limited to: blisters, exposed felts, ridges, wrinkles, splits, warped insulation, and loose flashing, in a manner compatible to the system and acceptable under industry standards and in accordance with the construction specifications. The Contractor also warrants that for the same five-year period the walls of the building (or buildings) and building envelope, including but not limited to: vertical and/or horizontal expansion joints, below and/or above grade waterproofing, below and/or above grade damp-proofing, thru-wall flashing, damp course flashing and waterproofing of joints at openings in walls including but not limited to door perimeters, window perimeters, vents and pipe openings shall be absolutely watertight and free from all leaks, seepage or dampness, and that he shall, at no expense to the Owner, make repairs to any defects that may develop in the work in a manner compatible to the system and acceptable under industry standards and in accordance with the construction specifications, Provided, however: That the following are excluded from the warranty:

(a) Defects or failures resulting from abuse by the Owner, upon presentation of competent evidence of same by the Contractor.

(b) Defects in design that the said Contractor shall produce competent evidence of having had provided clear written notice in writing to the Owner prior to commencing installation of the Work, except, however, that the Contractor shall not be responsible, insofar as liability under this bond is concerned, for bringing to the attention of the Owner defects in design involving failure of only the following three structural elements:

(1) Structural Frame (2) Load bearing walls (3) Foundations

nor shall the Contractor be responsible for correction of leaks resulting from said failure.

(c) Damage caused by fire, tornado, hail, hurricane, acts of God, wars, riots, or civil commotion upon presentation of competent evidence of same by the Contractor..

(d) The Contractor is not an insurer nor is he a guarantor of the design. Any other provisions of this bond to the contrary notwithstanding, the Contractor shall not be required to remedy any errors or omissions of design.

Leaks or Defects. WHEREAS the said Contractor agrees that should any leaks or defects occur in the roof envelope or wall envelope of the said (Name and Number of Project) the said Contractor will promptly remedy the said leaks or defects and pay for any damage to other work of said Project resulting therefrom, except, however, that when this instrument is executed by a Trade Contractor this Contract, shall, insofar as the Trade Contractor is concerned, extend only to the work executed by said Trade Contractor.

Notice to Surety. If the Contractor shall have been given notice to remedy leaks or defects pursuant to the Contract Documents and has been declared in default by the Owner and the Owner has terminated the Contractor’s right to complete the remedy, the Surety shall be notified in writing and shall promptly perform this bond agreement in accordance with its terms and conditions. If Surety chooses to investigate, Owner shall cooperate with the Surety in its investigation and shall make all public project records available for inspection by Surety at no cost to Owner. It shall be the duty of the Surety to give an unequivocal notice in writing to the Owner, within twenty-five

SECTION 7 – FORMS FIVE-YEAR ROOF AND WALL BOND


13

(25) days after receipt of such notice, of the Surety's election to either remedy the leaks and defects promptly, time being of the essence. In said notice of election, the Surety shall indicate the date on which the remedy or performance will commence, and it shall then be the duty of the Surety to give prompt notice in writing to the Owner immediately upon completion of the remedy and/or correction of the leaks or defects. The Surety shall not assert its Principal as justification for its failure to give notice of election or for its failure to promptly remedy the leaks or defects.

Full Force and Effect. NOW, THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor shall in all things promptly and faithfully perform and comply with the terms and conditions hereinbefore set forth, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise, it shall remain in full force and effect.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this instrument to be duly executed this ________ day of ____________, 20___. ________________________________ WITNESS Principal By:______________________________ _______________________ TITLE____________________________ _______________________ ________________________________ WITNESS Surety By:______________________________ _______________________ TITLE____________________________ _______________________ (*) Attach Power of Attorney Instructions for execution by Contractor

(a) If the firm is a partnership, all members of the partnership must execute. (b) If the firm is a corporation, the president must sign, the secretary must attest, and the Seal of

Corporation must be affixed. (c) If the firm operates as a sole proprietorship, the proprietor must execute.

SECTION 7 – FORMS CERTIFICATE OF MANUFACTURER


14

SPECIMEN CERTIFICATE OF MANUFACTURER

INSTRUCTIONS FOR PREPARATION OF CERTIFICATE: To be acceptable, the certificate must be prepared in the form indicated by this specimen on the official letterhead of the manufacturer. No portions of the certificate may be omitted. Attached is a copy of the Contract provision under which the certificate is required. The Authority needs only one copy of the certificate. If equipment of a manufacturer is not installed in strict compliance with the recommendations of the manufacturer or if in the design of the work the equipment is not applied in strict compliance with the recommendations of the manufacturer, a letter from the manufacturer should be forwarded to the Contractor [with copies to the Design Professional and the Owner] setting forth a list of the deviations from the recommendations of the manufacturer and stating what remains to be done in order to bring the work into strict compliance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. Prior to calling upon the representative of the manufacturer for performance of the services necessary to enable him to execute a certificate in accordance with this specimen, it is the obligation of the Contractor to have installed the work in strict compliance with the recommendations of the manufacturer [See Article 2.2.4 of the Contract], and it is likewise the obligation of the Contractor to have put the equipment in good operating condition in absolute and final readiness for the "start-up,” "testing,” and "placing into operation" as defined herein below by the representative of the manufacturer.

Date:_______________________________

Re: Certificate of [JOHN DOE CORPORATION] that equipment or components furnished by it has [or have, as the case may be] been installed in strict compliance with its recommendations and is [or are, as the case may be] operating properly at J-284 Darton Student Services II

Gentlemen:

1. We certify through our duly authorized and acting agent that the following item [or items, as the case may be] furnished by us to the Project named in the caption was [or were, as the case may be] started up, tested, and placed in operation by our authorized field representative on [enter the date on which the field representative performed the start-up, test, and placing into operation] and is [or are, as the case may be] operating properly:

[List the item or items furnished to the job. Show catalogue number or numbers.]

2. We certify further that the aforesaid equipment was installed in strict compliance with our recommendations as published by us in the following document [or documents, as the case may be]:

[Insert the date, name, or other positive means of identifying the exact document or documents in which the recommendations for installation and use of the item or items are published.] (*)

3. A copy of the aforesaid document(s) is (are) attached hereto.

This __________________ day of________________, 20____

JOHN DOE CORPORATION

By:_________________________________ Authorized Representative

(*) The date must be shown [See Article 6.4.1.2.5 DEFINITIONS: l. "Start-up" is defined as putting the equipment into action. 2. "Testing" is defined as performing such testing as is stipulated in the Contract Documents to be performed. 3. "Placing into operation" is defined as operating the equipment for a sufficient period of time for the determination to be made that it is performing properly.

Darton State College 2400 Gillionville Road Albany, Georgia 31707

SECTION 7 – FORMS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE


15

SECTION 7 – FORMS BOND TO DISCHARGE CLAIM


16

THIS FORM IS FOR OPTIONAL USE TO RELEASE TO THE CONTRACTOR FUNDS WITHHELD FROM A PAY APPLICATION IN THE EVENT A

SUBCONTRACTOR FILES A CLAIM AGAINST THE CONTRACT BALANCE HELD BY THE OWNER THAT REMAINS UNRESOLVED. THIS IS A

SUBORDINATE DOCUMENT TO THE PAYMENT BOND FOR THE PROJECT, AND IS CALCULATED AGAINST THE PENAL AMOUNT OF THAT

PAYMENT BOND. THERE ARE OTHER METHODS THAT MAY BE USED TO REMEDY SUCH SITUATIONS, HOWEVER, THIS FORM IS

EFFECTIVE WHEN NONE OF THE PARTIES ARE ABLE TO REACH AGREEMENT UPON THE CLAIM.

BOND TO DISCHARGE CLAIM WHEREAS, _______________________________________________________ (hereinafter referred to as “Claimant” has filed a claim against ______________________________________________________________ (the “Contractor”, hereinafter referred to as “Principal”) on the following contract: WHEREAS, the undersigned Principal and Surety have issued Payment Bond No. _____________________ (the “Primary Bond”) to the Owner, as Obligee, on the Contract dated ___________ for Project ______ _________________________________ ; WHEREAS, the undersigned Principal and Surety dispute the Claimant’s entitlement to all or part of the claim and expressly reserve all rights and defenses available at law in connection therewith; WHEREAS, ___________________________________________________________ as Principal and __________________________________________________ as Surety, desire to continue to receiving payments from the Owner for work done on the above referenced project, NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of these premises, the undersigned Principal and Surety do hold themselves firmly bond unto __________________________________________________ as Claimant, in the total amount of _______________________________________ dollars ($_____________), representing double the amount of the claim. The condition of this Bond to Discharge Claim is such that should the undersigned Principal or Surety pay to the Claimant the sum that may be found to be due to the Claimant upon the trial of any action that may be filed by said Claimant, or if Principal or Surety pay to the Claimant a sum agreeable to Claimant and Claimant accepts such payment, then this Bond shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. The penal amount of the Primary Bond is conditionally reduced by the amount of this Bond to Discharge Claim, and upon payment of any sums to the Obligee under this Bond to Discharge Claim, the penal amount of the Primary Bond is reduced instanter by the amount of such payment. No action can be instituted on this bond after one year from the date of Final Completion as determined pursuant to Article 6.2.2 of the Contract. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have set their hands and seals this _____ day of ____________, 20___.

_________________________________ Principal by:_______________________________ _________________________________ Surety by:_______________________________ Attorney-in-Fact _________________________________ Type Name Above

SECTION 7 - FORMS CHANGE ORDER FORMAT


17

CHANGE ORDER FORMAT (Lump Sum)

CHANGE ORDER No. _______

Project Name: Darton Student Services II_____ Project Number: J-284_____________________

Owner 1. Submission of this Change Order for consideration was authorized by letter from the Owner, dated , 20__, Incumbrance Record No. . 2. The changes hereinafter described are applicable to the Contract for the construction of the above-referenced Project and amend the Contract Documents. 3. Description of Change: 4. This Change Order is deemed necessary and originated with the (Design Professional) (Owner) (Contractor) (Using Agency). (Indicate applicable entity.) 5. This Change Order is necessary to: 6. The amount of the Change Order was determined by: 7. A memorandum is attached showing cost breakdown of labor and materials by unit and quantities as prepared by the Contractor and checked by the Contract Compliance Specialist and Program Manager (if any).

NOTE TO DESIGN PROFESSIONAL: Please prepare each Change Order in the form and wording given below, deleting inapplicable wording and adding such explanations as may be necessary. The wording in Paragraph 11 may not be changed or altered in any way by either the Design Professional or the Contractor. Send four copies, signed by you and the Contractor, to the Owner. Do not forward a Change Order unless it is accompanied by a breakdown which has been certified by the Contract Compliance Specialist and Program Manager (if applicable).

Note to Design Professional: Please leave the Change Order number blank. The Owner will assign a number.

Choose one: a. Estimate and acceptance in lump sum. b. Unit prices stated in contract or subsequently agreed upon. c. Cost and percentage as described in general conditions.

Note to Design Professional:: No Change Order should be forwarded unless you have been furnished with a letter from the Owner authorizing same.

Note to Design Professional: Be sure to give a complete statement describing the changes in the work, including the specifications. If drawings are necessary, refer to them by date, etc., and state they are made a part of the Change Order. Copy of drawings should be attached to the Change Order.

Note to Design Professional: Give a complete description of conditions which necessitate the change.



18

8. We have verified the quantity and quality of all materials shown on the memorandum. We have verified that all prices are reasonable and do not exceed current costs for like services or materials, and we have verified that the quality of the materials meets the requirements of the Contract Documents. 9. The contractor shall be allowed additional calendar days for completion. The Material Completion and Occupancy Date is: __________________ . 10. The Contract Sum shall be (increased) (decreased) by $ _________________ on account of this change. 11. The payment and extension of time, if any, provided by this Change Order constitutes compensation in full to the Contractor and its Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Trade Contractors for all costs and markups, directly and indirectly attributable to the changes ordered herein, and for all delays or time related costs thereto and for any acceleration costs for performance of changes within the time stated and to be completed by the Material Completion and Occupancy Date and for any claims related thereto against the Owner and the Design Professional, and design consultants. APPROVED AND AGREED BY CONTRACTOR: RECOMMENDED FOR OWNER'S ACCEPTANCE LEGAL GC Firm Name DESIGN PROFESSIONAL: Flynn Finderup Architects By: By: (Print Name/Title) (Print Name/Title)

Date approved by Contractor: Date approved by Design Professional: APPROVED AND AGREED BY USING AGENCY: APPROVED AND AGREED BY OWNER: DARTON STATE COLLEGE BOARD OF REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY By: By: (Print Name/Title) (Print Name/Title)

Date approved by Using Agency: Date approved by Owner:

Note to Design Professional: Please insert the number of additional Days allowed and the new Material Completion and Occupancy Date, or, if no additional time is allowed, insert “0” for the Days and “No Change” for the date.

Note to Design Professional: Please observe that verification of quantities and prices means the Design Professional who signs the Change Order has personal knowledge that the quantities shown in the memorandum referred to under paragraph 7 above are correct, that he has personally satisfied himself that full credit has been extended for any work or materials deleted or omitted, and that he has conclusively established by such checking or inquire as may be necessary that the prices and allowances shown in the memorandum comparable with current costs for like services and materials.

Note to Design Professional: Please delete inapplicable language in parentheses and enter the dollar amount for this change. Insure that cost of the Work, percentage markup for profit, and the daily rate of general conditions costs is accurate and included in the amount of an additive change. If a deductive change, the amount is generally cost of the work only; however, consult with the owner in significant deductive Change Orders to determine if time or profit should be included in the deducted amount.



19

CHANGE ORDER FORMAT (Force Account or Indeterminate Units)

CHANGE ORDER No. _______

Project Name: Darton Student Services II_______ Project Number: J-284_______________________

Owner 1. Submission of this Change Order for consideration was authorized by letter from the Owner, dated , 20__, Incumbrance Record No. . 2. The changes hereinafter described are applicable to the Contract for the construction of the above-referenced Project and amend the Contract Documents.. 3. Description of Change: 4. This Change Order is deemed necessary and originated with the (Design Professional) (Owner) (Contractor) (Using Agency). (Indicate applicable entity.) 5. This Change Order is necessary to: 6. The Maximum Allowable Cost of the Change Order was estimated by:

NOTE TO DESIGN PROFESSIONAL: Please prepare each Change Order in the form and wording given below, deleting inapplicable wording and adding such explanations as may be necessary. The wording in Paragraph 8 may not be changed or altered in any way by either the Design Professional or the Contractor. The wording in Paragraph 5 of the Final Cost Amendment may not be changed or altered in any way by either the Design Professional or the Contractor. Send four copies, signed by you and the Contractor, to the Owner. Do not forward a Change Order unless it is accompanied by a breakdown which has been checked by the Contract Compliance Specialist and Program Manager (if applicable).

Note to Design Professional: Please leave the Change Order number blank. The Owner will assign a number.

Choose one: a. Estimate in lump sum. b. Unit prices stated in contract or subsequently agreed upon, and an estimated number of units. c. Cost and percentage as described in general conditions.

Note to Design Professional:: No Change Order should be forwarded unless you have been furnished with a letter from the Owner authorizing same.

Note to Design Professional: Be sure to give a complete statement describing the changes in the work, including the specifications. If drawings are necessary, refer to them by date, etc., and state they are made a part of the Change Order. Copy of drawings should be attached to the Change Order.

Note to Design Professional: Give a complete description of conditions which necessitate the change.



20

7. A memorandum is attached showing the estimated cost breakdown of labor and materials by unit and quantities as prepared by the Contractor and checked by the Contract Compliance Specialist and Program Manager (if any). 8. The Maximum Allowed Cost for this Change Order is $ __________________________, and is established as Incumbrance Record No. _______________ . This Maximum Allowed Cost may be amended by the Owner in the event the actual costs are expected to exceed the Maximum Allowed Cost, provided that Contractor shall give written notice of such fact prior to incurring actual costs in excess of ninety percent of the Maximum Allowable Cost. In no event shall actual costs be incurred in excess of the Maximum Allowed Cost, as it may be amended. APPROVED AND AGREED BY CONTRACTOR: RECOMMENDED FOR OWNER'S ACCEPTANCE LEGAL GC Firm Name DESIGN PROFESSIONAL: Flynn Finderup Architects

By: By: (Print Name/Title) (Print Name/Title)





21

FINAL COST AMENDMENT TO

CHANGE ORDER NO. ___________ 1. A memorandum is attached showing cost breakdown of labor and materials by unit and quantities as prepared by the Contractor and checked by the Contract Compliance Specialist and Program Manager (if any). 2. We have verified the quantity and quality of all materials shown on the memorandum. We have verified that all prices are reasonable and do not exceed current costs for like services or materials, and we have verified that the quality of the materials meets the requirements of the Contract Documents. 3. The contractor shall be allowed additional calendar days for completion. The Material Completion and Occupancy date is: __________________ . 4. The Contract Sum shall be (increased) (decreased) by $ _________________ on account of this change. 5. The payment and extension of time, if any, provided by this Change Order constitutes compensation in full to the Contractor and its Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Trade Contractors for all costs and markups, directly and indirectly attributable to the changes ordered herein, and for all delays or time related costs thereto and for any acceleration costs for performance of changes within the time stated and to be completed by the Material Completion and Occupancy Date and for any Claims related thereto against the Owner and the Design Professional, and design consultants. APPROVED AND AGREED BY CONTRACTOR: RECOMMENDED FOR OWNER'S ACCEPTANCE LEGAL GC Firm Name DESIGN PROFESSIONAL: Flynn Finderup Architects By: By: (Print Name/Title) (Print Name/Title)



Note to Design Professional: Please insert the number of additional Days allowed and the new Material Completion and Occupancy Date, or, if no additional time is allowed, insert “0” for Days and “No Change” for the date.

Note to Design Professional: Please observe the fact that verification of quantities and prices means the Design Professional who signs the Change Order has personal knowledge that the quantities shown in the memorandum referred to under paragraph 7 above are correct, that he has personally satisfied himself that full credit has been extended for any work or materials deleted or omitted, and that he has conclusively established by such checking or inquire as may be necessary that the prices and allowances shown in the memorandum comparable with current costs for like services and materials.

Note to Design Professional: Please delete inapplicable language in parentheses and enter the dollar amount for this change. Insure that cost of the Work, percentage markup for profit, and the daily rate of general conditions costs is accurate and included in the amount of an additive change. If a deductive change, the amount is generally cost of the work only; however, consult with the owner in significant deductive Change Orders to determine if time or profit should be included in the deducted amount.

SECTION 7 - FORMS APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT FORM


22

APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT NO. PROJECT NO. J-284 . CERTIFICATE OF THE CONTRACTOR OR HIS DULY AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE

To the best of my knowledge and belief, I certify that all items, units, quantities, and prices of work and material shown on this Application for Payment No. are correct; that all work has been performed and materials supplied in full accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents between

(Owner) and dated (Contractor)

and all authorized changes thereto; and that the following is a true and correct statement of the contract account up to and including the

last day of the period covered by this Application and that no part of the "amount due this Application" has been received.

(a) Total amount earned for work in place (original contract) $

(b) Total amount earned for work in place (Change Orders) $

(c) Value of materials stored at site $

(d) Total amount earned ( (a) plus (b) plus (c) ) $

(e) Amount retained (10%) $

(f) Total earned less retained percentage ( (d) minus (e) ) $

(g) Total previously approved $

(h) Amount due THIS ESTIMATE ( (f) minus (g) ) $

(i) Retainage payment to Subcontractors per Paragraph 4 .1.2.5 of the General Conditions. $

(j) AMOUNT DUE Contractor ( (h) minus (i) ) $

I further certify that all claims outstanding against the undersigned Contractor for labor, materials, and expendable equipment employed in the performance of said contract have been paid in full in accordance with the requirements of said contract, except such outstanding claims as are listed below or on the attached sheet, which statement contains all claims against the Contractor which are not yet paid, including all disputed claims and any claims to which the Contractor has or will assert any defense.

I further certify that all of the materials indicated on this Application for Payment as being stored on the Site, but not yet incorporated into the building, have been purchased, delivered, and are now stored on the Site for future incorporation into the building and until so incorporated the title to same is, upon payment of this statement, vested in the Owner. Furthermore, the undersigned Contractor assumes full responsibility for the existence, protection, and, if necessary, replacement of the above-mentioned materials until the completion of this contract. Contractor By Date Title STATEMENT OF THE CONTRACT COMPLIANCE SPECIALIST

I have checked this Application for Payment and, to the best of my knowledge and belief, the statement of work performed and statement of materials stored on site by the Contractor are supported by my observations Name Contract Compliance Specialist. Date: CERTIFICATE OF THE DESIGN PROFESSIONAL

I certify that I have verified this Application for Payment and, to the best of my knowledge and belief, it is a true and correct statement of work performed and statement of materials stored on site by the Contractor and that the Contractor's certified statement of his account and the amount due him is correct and just. I further certify that all work has been performed and materials have been supplied in full accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and authorized changes thereto. Name Design Professional. Date:

SECTION 7 - FORMS APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT FORM


23

SCHEDULE OF CHANGE ORDERS In support of Application for Payment No. Project No. Period Ending: Contractor:

CHANGE ORDERS

ADDITIONS

DEDUCTIONS

Number (1)

Date (2)

Authorized Amount (3)

Amount this Period (4)

Completed Previous

Periods (5)

Authorized Deductions

(6)

SECTION 7 – FORMS APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT FORM


24

WORK PERFORMED TO DATE In support of Application for Payment No. For the period from , through inclusive. Project No. Name and location of Project Contractor's Name and Address

WORK INCLUDED IN ORIGINAL CONTRACT

DETAILED ESTIMATE

WORK PERFORMED TO DATE

CSI Category and Description

Item No. and Designation (1)

Number & Kind of Units

(2)

Unit Price (3)

Estimated Cost (4)

No. of Units (5)

Amount Earned

to Date (6)

Value of

Incomplete Work

(7)

Percent

Complete (8)

A. Contracting Requirements: * a. b. c, 1. Division 1 – General Requirements: * a. b. c. 2. Division 2 – Site Construction: ** (i) Building a. b. c. (ii) Infrastructure a. b. c. 3. Division 3 – Concrete: * a. b. c. 4. Division 4 – Masonry: ** (i) Building a. b. c. (ii) Infrastructure a. b. c. 5. Division 5 – Metals: * a. b. c.



25

6. Division 6 – Wood and Plastics: * a. b. c. 7. Division 7 – Thermal & Moisture: ***** a. b. c. Roof: 8. Division 8 – Doors & Windows: * a. b. c. 9. Division 9 – Finishes: * a. b. c. 10. Division 10 – Specialties: * a. b. c. 11. Division 11 – Equipment: *** (i) Fixed or Built-in: a. b. c. (ii) Moveable: a. b. c. 12. Division 12 – Furnishings: *** (i) Fixed or Built-in: a. b. c. (ii) Moveable: a. b. c. 13. Division 13 – Special Construction: * a. b. c. 14. Division 14 – Conveying Systems: * a. b. c. 15. Division 15 – Mechanical: **** (i) Building a. b. c. (ii) Infrastructure a. b. c. 16. Division 16 – Electrical: ** (i) Building a. b. c.



26

(ii) Infrastructure a. b. c. 17. Division 17 – Special Inspections: **

(i) Building

a.

b.

c.

(ii) Infrastructure

a. b.

c.

(iii) Documents

A. Total Amount of original contract

B. Plus or minus total previously approved C. O.'s Nos.-----------incl.

C. Plus or minus C. O.'s Nos.-----------incl. approved during period covered by this est.-----------

D. Total Net Adjusted Amt.

NOTES: The following breakdowns must be accomplished in order to comply with Government Accounting requirements. Upon completion of the Project, the final Application for Payment must show all divisions and sections, and a Final Certification of Costs for Capital Asset Accounting completed and submitted with the Application for Final Payment. * Report Items in each division, by CSI division and such other breakdown as is useful to the Contractor or Contract Compliance

Specialist. ** These items must be broken down into 2 categories, (i) Building and (ii) Infrastructure, reported by specification section.

Infrastructure for these purposes is defined as everything outside a line five feet from the building footprint. *** These items must be broken down into 2 categories; (i) fixed equipment & furnishings and (ii) Moveable equipment & furnishings and

reported by specification section. **** Division 15 – Mechanical. This item must be broken down into 2 categories, (i) Building and (ii) Infrastructure, reported by specification

section. Chillers and HVAC units that serve the facility are to be included as a part of the Building, even if they are outside the 5-foot limit. Chillers and HVAC units that are outside the 5 foot limit and serve more than one facility, such as equipment used in a central plant, are to be included in Infrastructure.

***** Division 7 – Thermal & Moisture Components of the Roof system should be reported as a separate line item. Generally, this includes

components of Sections 7500 and 7600.



27

SUMMARY OF MATERIALS STORED

In support Application for Payment No. Project No. Period Ending: Contractor:

ITEM NO.

NAME

(Contractor or Subcontractor)

TYPE OF MATERIAL

QUANTITY

AMOUNT

(Dollars)

TOTALS

Prepared by for (Contractor) Date , and certified by him to be a true and accurate statement.

Checked:

By: Contract Compliance Specialist

Date:

SECTION 7 – FORMS SUBCONTRACTOR RETAINAGE RELEASE CERTIFICATE


28

SUBCONTRACTOR RETAINAGE RELEASE CERTIFICATE (To be Originated by Subcontractor)

TO: Board of Regents of the University System of Georgia, Owner Darton State College, Using Agency RE: Project Name and Number: J-284 Darton Student Services II, Darton State College, Albany, Georgia: Certificate Regarding Subcontractor's Completed Work and Retainage Release 1. This is to certify that our work is one hundred percent complete for our subcontract number . Our retainage is due in accordance with the contract documents. Our scope of work included the . The total amount of retainage now due is $ . 2. The Subcontractor hereby certifies that all work required under the above contract has been performed in accordance with the terms thereof, that all materialmen, subcontractors, mechanics, and laborers have been paid and satisfied in full, and that there are no outstanding claims of any character (including disputed claims or any claims to which the subcontractor has or will assert any defense) arising out of the performance of the contract which have not been paid and satisfied in full except as listed hereinbelow, which exceptions apply only to the release in Paragraph 5, below:

[Enter: "None" or List or Make Reference & Attach Exhibit A.] 3. The Subcontractor further certifies that to the best of his knowledge and belief there are no unsatisfied claims for damages resulting from injury or death to any employees, subcontractors, or the public at large arising out of the performance of the contract, or any suits or claims for any other damage of any kind, nature, or description which might constitute a claim or lien upon the property of the Owner. 4. The Subcontractor has received final payment in full settlement of all claims against the Owner arising under or by virtue the contract, and acceptance of such payment is acknowledged as a release of the Owner from any and all claims arising under or by virtue of the contract. This release includes any claims set forth or excepted in Paragraph 2 above. 5. [Strike out if not applicable] The Subcontractor has received final payment in full settlement of all claims against the Contractor arising under or by virtue the contract, and acceptance of such payment is acknowledged as a release of the Contractor from any and all claims arising under or by virtue of the contract except as set forth in Paragraph 2 above. 6. Payments pursuant to this certificate shall in no way diminish, change, alter or affect the rights of the Owner under the contract documents. SUBCONTRACTOR: By: Date: CONTRACTOR: By: Date: DESIGN PROFESSIONAL: By: Date: NOTICE: OWNER MUST RECEIVE A COPY WITH ALL ORIGINAL SIGNATURES.

SECTION 7 – FORMS FINAL CERTIFICATION OF COSTS FORM


29

FINAL CERTIFICATION OF COSTS FOR CAPITAL ASSET ACCOUNTING

Date: ____________________________________ To: _______________________________________ (Owner)

The following accounting of costs for Project No. ___________J-284________________ , Project Name: Darton_____ Student Services II_______________________ at ____Darton State College in Albany, Georgia__________________

is submitted as follows, with the breakdown of costs as specified in the Final Pay Request attached hereto and incorporated herein, for the purposes of capital asset accounting pursuant to GASB 34 Accounting Statements:

1. BUILDING AND BUILDING IMPROVEMENTS: * $ _____________________________________

2. INFRASTRUCTURE: ** $ _____________________________________

3. FURNISHINGS AND EQUIPMENT: *** $ _____________________________________

======================================

TOTAL: $ _____________________________________ Notes: (Contractor must insure costs from all Change Orders are apportioned and included in each line item above) * Building: Include totals from Items A, 1, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 13, 14, 15 and “Building” portions of Items 2, 4, and 16.

** Infrastructure: Include totals from the “Infrastructure” portions of Items 2, 4 and 16. *** Furnishing and Equipment : Include totals from only the “moveable” portions of Items 11 and 12.

I certify to the best of my knowledge and belief that all of the amounts set forth on this Certificate are true and correct and

are supported by the financial records for this project on file with the Contractor. Contractor By: ___________________________________ Date Title: __________________________________

CERTIFICATE OF THE DESIGN PROFESSIONAL

I certify to the best of my knowledge, information and belief that the amounts certified by the Contractor are consistent with

the estimates provided in my final Statement of Probable Cost for the Project; that the Building Improvement contains a footprint based upon a line 5 feet outside the building structure) of _________ square feet, a total of __________ gross square feet, and contains ______ floors (including basements). The building fire protection system is _________________ (include type of system). The Certificate of Occupancy was issued on _________________________. I further certify that the design intent for this project is that the Building and Building Improvements are of Building Construction Class _________ and ISO Occupancy Type(s) _______ and have an expected useful life of _____________ years from the date of this Certificate, and that my observations of the construction confirm these expectations. (See Exhibit J of Design Professional Contract.) Name Design Professional. Date: ______________________

CERTIFICATE OF THE USING AGENCY OR OWNER

I certify that to the best of my knowledge, information, and belief that the cost of the real property covered by this project, to

the boundaries on the final Site Plan, was $ and the cost of additional

government-supplied furnishings and equipment acquired for this Project was $ _____________________________________

.

Name Title: ____________________. Date: ________________

SECTION 7 – FORMS FINAL CERTIFICATION OF COSTS FORM


SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 1. Minority Vendor Designee. The minority vendor designee of the Board of Regents of the University System of Georgia to act as liaison with minority vendors is Ms. Christina Hobbs . For more information, please contact the Board of Regents’ Office of Business Development by e-mail at [email protected]. 2. The use of all forms of tobacco products on property owned, leased, rented, in the possession of, or in any way used by the USG or its affiliates is expressly prohibited. “Tobacco Products” is defined as cigarettes, cigars, pipes, all forms of smokeless tobacco, clove cigarettes and any other smoking devices that use tobacco such as hookahs or simulate the use of tobacco such as electronic cigarettes. (Board of Regents Policy Manual, 9.1.7 Tobacco and Smoke-Free Campus Policy. http://www.usg.edu/policymanual/section9/policy/C503/#p9.1.7_tobacco_and_smoke_free_campus_policy) 3. Design Builder may be required to use e-Builder, the BOR’s Capital Program Management Software. 4. Darton State College is a tobacco free campus. Contractor and all subcontractor employees, as well as anyone visiting the job site, will need to comply..

......

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 00 6110 - 1

1515 08.29.2016 CONTRACTOR WARRANTY FORM

SECTION 00 6110 –CONTRACTOR WARRANTY FORM

PROJECT: J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II

DARTON STATE COLLEGE

LOCATION: ALBANY, GEORGIA

OWNER: BOARD OF REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY SYSTEM OF GEORGIA

We, ____________________________, Contractor for the above referenced project, hereby warrants that

all labor and materials furnished and work performed is in compliance with Contract Documents and

authorized modifications thereto, and will be free from defects due to defective materials or workmanship

for a period of one year from Date of Substantial Completion.

This warranty commences on ____________________________________________________________

(Date of Substantial Completion affixed by Architect)

And expires on________________________________________________________________________

(One year from commencement date)

Should any defect develop during warranty period due to improper materials, workmanship or arrangement,

the same, including adjacent work displaced, shall be made good by undersigned at no expense to Owner.

The Owner will give Contractor written notice of defective work. Should Contractor fail to correct

defective work within 60 days after receiving written notice, Owner may, at his option, correct defects and

charge Contractor costs for such correction. Contractor agrees to pay such charge upon demand.

Nothing in the above shall be deemed to apply to work which has been abused or neglected by Owner.

FOR: ______________.______________________

(Company Name)

BY: _____________________________________

TITLE: ___________________________________

DATE: ____________________________________


......


1515 08.29.2016 SUBCONTRACTOR WARRANTY FORM

SECTION 00 6120 –SUBCONTRACTOR WARRANTY FORM

PROJECT: J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II

DARTON STATE COLLEGE

LOCATION: ALBANY, GEORGIA

OWNER: BOARD OF REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY SYSTEM OF GEORGIA

GENERAL CONTRACTOR: ________________________________

We,_________________________________________________________________________________,

Subcontractor for___________________________________________(List Trade) as described in

Specified Section(s)__________________________________________________________________

(List appropriate Sections of the Specifications) do hereby warrant that all labor and materials furnished

and work performed in conjunction with the above referenced project are in compliance with Contract

Documents and authorized modifications thereto, and will be free from defects due to defective materials

or workmanship for a period of ______year(s) from Date of Substantial Completion.

This warranty commences on ____________________________________________________________

(Date of Substantial Completion)

And expires on________________________________________________________________________

(Expiration Date)

Should any defect develop during warranty period due to improper materials, workmanship or arrangement,

the same, including adjacent work displaced, shall be made good by undersigned at no expense to Owner.

The Owner will give Subcontractor written notice of defective work. Should Subcontractor fail to correct

defective work within 60 days after receiving written notice, Owner may, at his option, correct defects and

charge Subcontractor costs for such correction. Subcontractor agrees to pay such charge upon demand.

Nothing in the above shall be deemed to apply to work which has been abused or neglected by Owner.

FOR: _____________________________________ FOR: ______________________________

(Company Name) (Company Name)

BY: _____________________________________ BY: _______________________________

TITLE: ___________________________________ TITLE: ____________________________

DATE: ____________________________________ DATE: _____________________________


......

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 01 1000 - 11515 08.29.2016 SUMMARY

SECTION 01 1000SUMMARY

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 PROJECT

A. Project Name: J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES IIB. Architect's Name: Flynn Finderup Architects.C. The Project consists of the alteration of mostly interior space within the Student Services

Building.1.02 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION1.03 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERATIONS WORK

A. Scope of demolition and removal work is shown on drawings.B. Scope of alterations work is shown on drawings.

1.04 OWNER OCCUPANCYA. Owner intends to occupy the Project upon Substantial Completion.B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations.C. Schedule the Work to accommodate Owner occupancy.

1.05 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISESA. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings. B. Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner:

1. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by code openduring construction period; provide temporary exit signs if exit routes are temporarilyaltered.

2. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit.C. Time Restrictions:

1. Limit conduct of the hours of 8am to 5pm.PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED


......

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 01 2100 - 11515 08.29.2016 ALLOWANCES

SECTION 01 2100ALLOWANCES

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Allowances.1.02 ALLOWANCES

A. Contractor's costs for products, delivery, installation, labor, insurance, payroll, taxes, bonding,equipment rental, overhead and profit will be included in expenditure of funds from Allowance.

B. At closeout of Contract, funds remaining in Allowance will be credited to Owner by ChangeOrder.

1.03 ALLOWANCES SCHEDULEA. Allowance No. 1: Include allowance of $40,000.00 for miscellaneous repair of unforeseen

existing conditions where deemed necessary by the Owner or Architect. For each occurrence, submit change order proposal for approval prior to proceeding with repair work. Price will beaccepted on a lump sum basis for each occurrence. Unused portion of allowance, if applicable,will be credited back to the Owner by Change Order.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED


......

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 01 2300 - 11515 08.29.2016 ALTERNATES

SECTION 01 2300ALTERNATES


A. Description of Alternates.1.02 ACCEPTANCE OF ALTERNATES

A. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at Owner's option. Accepted Alternates will be identified in the Owner-Contractor Agreement.

B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work to integrate the Work of each Alternate.1.03 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

A. Alternate No. 1: Reference Architectural Drawings, Sheets A110, A111, A201, A202, A410, andrelated Details. Omit demolition of existing brick kneewalls on stair and balcony railing atLounge 135; omit installation of Ornatmental Railings specified in Section 05 5214. Existingguards and handrails are to remain intact. Deduct $____________.

B. Alternate No. 2: Reference Architectural Drawings, Sheet A201. In Transaction 130, omitcustom fabricated steel and millwork transaction counter. Counter will be provided as an FFEitem under another contract. Do not omit installation of electrical and data wiring and devices;coordinate this work with Owner’s furniture vendor. Deduct $___________.

C. Alternate No. 3: Reference Project Manual, Sections 09 6500 Resilient Flooring and 09 6813Tile Carpeting. Omit requirement for remediation of excessive moisture by coating floor slabswith Polyurethane Moisture Barrier system. Instead, manage moisture content by conventionalmethods as required to meet flooring manufacturers’ recommended maximum moisture contentprior to installation of flooring. Deduct $___________.



......

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 01 3000 - 11515 08.29.2016 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 3000ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS


A. Site mobilization meeting.B. Progress meetings.C. Construction progress schedule.D. Progress photographs.E. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout.F. Number of copies of submittals.G. Submittal procedures.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 SITE MOBILIZATION MEETING

A. Owner will schedule meeting at the Project site prior to Contractor occupancy.B. Attendance Required:

1. Contractor.2. Owner.3. Architect.4. Special Consultants.5. Contractor's Superintendent.6. Major Subcontractors.

C. Agenda:1. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor.2. Owner's requirements .3. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner.4. Temporary utilities provided by Owner.5. Security and housekeeping procedures.6. Schedules.7. Application for payment procedures.8. Procedures for testing.9. Procedures for maintaining record documents.10. Requirements for start-up of equipment.11. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period.

D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, withelectronic copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.02 PROGRESS MEETINGSA. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum bi-monthly

intervals.B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at

meetings.C. Attendance Required:

1. Contractor.2. Owner.3. Architect.4. Contractor's Superintendent.5. Major Subcontractors.


D. Agenda:1. Review minutes of previous meetings.2. Review of Work progress.3. Field observations, problems, and decisions.4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress.5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.6. Maintenance of progress schedule.7. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.8. Planned progress during succeeding work period.9. Maintenance of quality and work standards.10. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.11. Other business relating to Work.

E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, withelectronic copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.03 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULEA. Within 10 days after date established in Notice to Proceed, submit preliminary schedule defining

planned operations for the first 60 days of Work, with a general outline for remainder of Work.B. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days.C. Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete

schedule for review.1. Include written certification that major Subcontractors have reviewed and accepted

proposed schedule.D. Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule.E. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment.

3.04 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHSA. Submit photographs with each application for payment, taken not more than 3 days prior to

submission of application for payment.B. Photography Type: Digital; electronic files.C. Provide photographs of site and construction throughout progress of Work produced by an

experienced photographer, acceptable to Architect.D. In addition to periodic, recurring views, take photographs of each of the following events:

1. Excavations in progress.2. Foundations in progress and upon completion.3. Structural framing in progress and upon completion.4. Final completion, minimum of ten (10) photos.

E. Views: 1. Provide non-aerial photographs from four cardinal views at each specified time, until Date

of Substantial Completion.2. Consult with Architect for instructions on views required.3. Provide factual presentation.4. Provide correct exposure and focus, high resolution and sharpness, maximum depth of

field, and minimum distortion.5. Point of View Sketch: Provide sketch identifying point of view of each photograph.

F. Digital Photographs: 24 bit color, minimum resolution of 1024 by 768, in JPG format; providefiles unaltered by photo editing software.1. Delivery Medium: Via email.2. File Naming: Include project identification, date and time of view, and view identification.3. Point of View Sketch: Include digital copy of point of view sketch with each electronic

submittal; include point of view identification in each photo file name.


4. PDF File: Assemble all photos into printable pages in PDF format, with 2 to 3 photos perpage, each photo labeled with file name; one PDF file per submittal.

3.05 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEWA. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review:

1. Product data.2. Shop drawings.3. Samples for selection.4. Samples for verification.

B. Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance withinformation given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.

C. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection.D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

article below .3.06 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION

A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information:1. Design data.2. Certificates.3. Test reports.4. Inspection reports.5. Manufacturer's instructions.6. Manufacturer's field reports.7. Other types indicated.

B. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. No action will betaken.

3.07 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUTA. Submit Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion.B. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout:

1. Project record documents.2. Operation and maintenance data.3. Warranties.4. Bonds.5. Other types as indicated.

C. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion.3.08 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS

A. Electronic Documents: Submit one electronic copy in PDF format; an electronically-marked upfile will be returned. Create PDFs at native size and right-side up; illegible files will be rejected.

B. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will beretained by Architect.1. After review, produce duplicates.2. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated.

3.09 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURESA. Shop Drawing Procedures:

1. Prepare accurate, drawn-to-scale, original shop drawing documentation by interpreting theContract Documents and coordinating related Work.

2. Do not reproduce the Contract Documents to create shop drawings.3. Generic, non-project specific information submitted as shop drawings do not meet the

requirements for shop drawings.B. Transmit each submittal with a copy of approved submittal form.


C. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and asequential alphabetic suffix.

D. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, andspecification section number, as appropriate on each copy.

E. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification ofProducts required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination ofinformation is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.

F. Deliver submittals to Architect at business address.G. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items.H. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor.I. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be

detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.J. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps.K. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission.L. Distribute reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to

comply with requirements.M. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed.


J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 01 4000 - 11515 08.29.2016 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 4000QUALITY REQUIREMENTS


A. Submittals.B. References and standards.C. Testing and inspection agencies and services.D. Control of installation.E. Mock-ups.F. Tolerances.G. Manufacturers' field services.H. Defect Assessment.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 4216 - Definitions.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Design Data: Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose

of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in thecontract documents, or for Owner's information.

C. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect andto Contractor.1. Include:

a. Date issued.b. Project title and number.c. Name of inspector.d. Date and time of sampling or inspection.e. Identification of product and specifications section.f. Location in the Project.g. Type of test/inspection.h. Date of test/inspection.i. Results of test/inspection.j. Conformance with Contract Documents.k. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of results.

2. Test report submittals are for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for thelimited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design conceptexpressed in the contract documents, or for Owner's information.

D. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by themanufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Architect, in quantitiesspecified for Product Data.1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit

supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.2. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be

acceptable to Architect.E. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed

instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for theOwner's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring specialattention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation.


F. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for Architect's benefit as contract administrator orfor Owner.1. Submit report within 30 days of observation to Architect for information.2. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information

given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.G. Erection Drawings: Submit drawings for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for

Owner.1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information

given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.1.04 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS

A. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not includedin the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of thestandard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicablecodes.

B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, exceptwhere a specific date is established by applicable code.

C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections.D. Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until

Substantial Completion.E. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification

from Architect before proceeding.F. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor

those of Architect shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inferenceotherwise in any reference document.

1.05 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES AND SERVICESA. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform specified

testing.B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in

accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION

A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, andworkmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.

B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from

Architect before proceeding.D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent

tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more preciseworkmanship.

E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the

manufacturer.G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand

stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.


3.02 MOCK-UPSA. Before installing portions of the Work where mock-ups are required, construct mock-ups in

location and size indicated for each form of construction and finish required to comply with thefollowing requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work. The purpose ofmock-up is to demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.

B. Accepted mock-ups establish the standard of quality the Architect will use to judge the Work.C. Notify Architect fifteen (15) working days in advance of dates and times when mock-ups will be

constructed.D. Tests shall be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the

respective product specification sections.E. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices,

flashings, seals, and finishes.F. Obtain Architect's approval of mock-ups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.

1. Architect will issue written comments within seven (7) working days of initial review andeach subsequent follow up review of each mock-up.

2. Make corrections as necessary until Architect's approval is issued.G. Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work.H. Where mock-up has been accepted by Architect and is specified in product specification

sections to be removed, protect mock-up throughout construction, remove mock-up and cleararea when directed to do so by Architect.

3.03 TOLERANCESA. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work.

Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract

Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding.C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.

3.04 TESTING AND INSPECTIONA. Testing Agency Duties:

1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor inperformance of services.

2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specifiedstandards.

3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.4. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of

Work or products.5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect.6. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified.

B. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority:1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor.4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work.

C. Contractor Responsibilities:1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be

used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs.2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to

manufacturers' facilities.3. Provide incidental labor and facilities:

a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected.


b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to betested/inspected.

c. To facilitate tests/inspections.d. To provide storage and curing of test samples.

4. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiringtesting/inspection services.

5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additionalsamples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.

6. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspectionsrequired by Contractor beyond specified requirements.

D. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performedby the same agency on instructions by Architect.

E. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for byContractor.

3.05 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICESA. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or

manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions ofsurfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust andbalance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary.

B. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect 30 days in advance of required observations.1. Observer subject to approval of Architect.2. Observer subject to approval of Owner.

C. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that aresupplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.

3.06 DEFECT ASSESSMENTA. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements.B. If, in the opinion of Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Architect will

direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment.END OF SECTION 01 4000

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 01 4216 - 11515 08.29.2016 DEFINITIONS

SECTION 01 4216DEFINITIONS

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section supplements the definitions contained in the General Conditions.B. Other definitions are included in individual specification sections.

1.02 DEFINITIONSA. Furnish: To supply, deliver, unload, and inspect for damage.B. Install: To unpack, assemble, erect, apply, place, finish, cure, protect, clean, start up, and make

ready for use.C. Product: Material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the work

result. Not materials or equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying, or erection andnot incorporated into the work result. Products may be new, never before used, or re-usedmaterials or equipment.

D. Project Manual: The book-sized volume that includes the procurement requirements (if any),the contracting requirements, and the specifications.

E. Provide: To furnish and install.F. Supply: Same as Furnish.



......

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 01 5000 - 11515 08.29.2016 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

SECTION 01 5000TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS


A. Temporary utilities.B. Temporary telecommunications services.C. Temporary sanitary facilities.D. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing.E. Security requirements.F. Vehicular access and parking.G. Waste removal facilities and services.H. Project identification sign.I. Field offices.

1.02 TEMPORARY UTILITIESA. Owner will provide the following:

1. Electrical power , consisting of connection to existing facilities.2. Water supply, consisting of connection to existing facilities.

B. Existing facilities may be used.C. New permanent facilities may not be used.D. Use trigger-operated nozzles for water hoses, to avoid waste of water.

1.03 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICESA. Provide, maintain, and pay for telecommunications services to field office at time of project

mobilization.B. Telecommunications services shall include:

1. Windows-based personal computer dedicated to project telecommunications, withnecessary software and laser printer.

2. Telephone Land Lines: One line, minimum; one handset per line.3. Internet Connections: Minimum of one; DSL modem or faster.4. Facsimile Service: Fax-to-email software on personal computer.

1.04 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIESA. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization.B. Use of existing facilities is not permitted.C. New permanent facilities may not be used during construction operations.D. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition.E. At end of construction, return facilities to same or better condition as originally found.

1.05 BARRIERSA. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to prevent access to areas

that could be hazardous to workers or the public, to allow for owner's use of site and to protectexisting facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations .

B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for publicrights-of-way .

C. Provide protection for plants designated to remain. Replace damaged plants.D. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage.


1.06 FENCINGA. Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence with privacy screen.B. Provide 6 foot high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates

with locks.1.07 SECURITY

A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, existing facilities, and Owner's operations fromunauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft.

B. Coordinate with Owner's security program.1.08 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING

A. Comply with regulations relating to use of streets and sidewalks, access to emergency facilities,and access for emergency vehicles.

B. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner.C. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions.D. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets.E. Designated existing on-site roads may be used for construction traffic.F. Existing parking areas may be used for construction parking after careful coordination with

Owner concerning location and time of use.1.09 WASTE REMOVAL

A. See Section 01 7419 - Waste Management and Disposal, for additional requirements.B. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and

orderly condition.C. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site periodically.D. If materials to be recycled or re-used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable

non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structureunless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Open free-fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containerswith lids.

1.10 PROJECT IDENTIFICATIONA. Provide project identification sign of design coordinated with Owner and Architect.B. Erect on site at location determined by Owner, Architect and governing Authorities.C. No other signs are allowed without Owner permission except those required by law.

1.11 FIELD OFFICESA. Office: Weathertight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling equipment, and equipped

with sturdy furniture, drawing rack and drawing display table.B. Provide space for Project meetings, with table and chairs to accommodate 6 persons.C. Locate offices a minimum distance of 30 feet from existing structures.

1.12 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLSA. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Date of Substantial

Completion inspection.B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet. Grade site as indicated.C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition.E. Restore new permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.




......

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 01 5721 - 11515 08.29.2016 INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS

SECTION 01 5721INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS


A. Construction procedures to promote adequate indoor air quality after construction.1.02 PROJECT GOALS

A. Dust and Airborne Particulates: Prevent deposition of dust and other particulates in HVACducts and equipment.1. Cleaning of ductwork is not contemplated under this Contract.2. Contractor shall bear the cost of cleaning required due to failure to protect ducts and

equipment from construction dust.B. Airborne Contaminants: Procedures and products have been specified to minimize indoor air

pollutants.1. Furnish products meeting the specifications.2. Avoid construction practices that could result in contamination of installed products leading

to indoor air pollution.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASHRAE Std 52.2 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for RemovalEfficiency by Particle Size; 2012, with 2015 amendments.

B. SMACNA (OCC) - IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction; 2007.1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Adsorptive Materials: Gypsum board, acoustical ceiling tile and panels, carpet and carpet tile,fabrics, fibrous insulation, and other similar products.

B. Contaminants: Gases, vapors, regulated pollutants, airborne mold and mildew, and the like, asspecified.

C. Particulates: Dust, dirt, and other airborne solid matter.D. Wet Work: Concrete, plaster, coatings, and other products that emit water vapor or volatile

organic compounds during installation, drying, or curing.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Indoor Air Quality Management Plan: Describe in detail measures to be taken to promote

adequate indoor air quality upon completion; use SMACNA (OCC) as a guide.1. Submit not less than 60 days before enclosure of building.2. Identify potential sources of odor and dust.3. Identify construction activities likely to produce odor or dust.4. Identify areas of project potentially affected, especially occupied areas.5. Evaluate potential problems by severity and describe methods of control.6. Describe construction ventilation to be provided, including type and duration of ventilation,

use of permanent HVAC systems, types of filters and schedule for replacement of filters.7. Describe cleaning and dust control procedures.

C. Interior Finishes Installation Schedule: Identify each interior finish that either generates odors,moisture, or vapors or is susceptible to adsorption of odors and vapors, and indicate airhandling zone, sequence of application, and curing times.

D. Duct and Terminal Unit Inspection Report.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS

A. Low VOC Materials: See Section 01 6116.

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 01 5721 - 21515 08.29.2016 INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS

B. Low VOC Materials: See other sections for specific requirements for materials with low VOCcontent.

C. Auxiliary Air Filters: MERV of 8, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASHRAE Std 52.2.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES

A. Prevent the absorption of moisture and humidity by adsorptive materials by:1. Sequencing the delivery of such materials so that they are not present in the building until

wet work is completed and dry.2. Delivery and storage of such materials in fully sealed moisture-impermeable packaging.3. Provide sufficient ventilation for drying within reasonable time frame.

B. Begin construction ventilation when building is substantially enclosed.C. If extremely dusty or dirty work must be conducted inside the building, shut down HVAC

systems for the duration; remove dust and dirt completely before restarting systems.D. When working in a portion of an occupied building, prevent movement of air from construction

area to occupied area.E. HVAC equipment and supply air ductwork may be used for ventilation during construction:

1. Operate HVAC system on 100 percent outside air, with 1.5 air changes per hour,minimum.

2. Ensure that air filters are correctly installed prior to starting use; replace filters when theylose efficiency.

3. Do not use return air ductwork for ventilation.4. Seal return air inlets or otherwise positively isolate return air system to prevent

recirculation of air; provide alternate return air pathways.F. Do not store construction materials or waste in mechanical or electrical rooms.G. Prior to use of return air ductwork without intake filters clean up and remove dust and debris

generated by construction activities.1. Inspect duct intakes, return air grilles, and terminal units for dust.2. Clean plenum spaces, including top sides of lay-in ceilings, outsides of ducts, tops of pipes

and conduit.3. Clean tops of doors and frames.4. Clean mechanical and electrical rooms, including tops of pipes, ducts, and conduit,

equipment, and supports.5. Clean return plenums of air handling units.6. Remove intake filters last, after cleaning is complete.

H. Do not perform dusty or dirty work after starting use of return air ducts without intake filters.I. Use other relevant recommendations of SMACNA (OCC) for avoiding unnecessary

contamination due to construction procedures.END OF SECTION 01 5721

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 01 6000 - 11515 08.29.2016 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 6000PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS


A. General product requirements.B. Transportation, handling, storage and protection.C. Product option requirements.D. Substitution limitations and procedures.E. Procedures for Owner-supplied products.F. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 6116 - VOC Content Restrictions: Requirements for VOC-restricted product

categories.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy toidentify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers'standard data to provide information specific to this Project.

B. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electricalcharacteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service forfunctional equipment and appliances.

C. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, withintegral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the

manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 NEW PRODUCTS

A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents.B. DO NOT USE products having any of the following characteristics:

1. Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's.2. Made of wood from newly cut old growth timber.3. Containing lead, cadmium, asbestos.

C. Where all other criteria are met, Contractor shall give preference to products that:1. If used on interior, have lower emissions, as defined in Section 01 6116.2. If wet-applied, have lower VOC content, as defined in Section 01 6116.3. Are extracted, harvested, and/or manufactured closer to the location of the project.4. Have longer documented life span under normal use.5. Result in less construction waste.6. Are made of recycled materials.7. If made of wood, are made of sustainably harvested wood, wood chips, or wood fiber.8. Are Cradle-to-Cradle Certified.9. Have a published Environmental Product Declaration (EPD).10. Have a published Health Product Declaration (HPD).11. Have a published GreenScreen Chemical Hazard Analysis.12. Have a published Manufacturer's Inventory of Chemical Content.

2.02 PRODUCT OPTIONSA. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting

those standards or description.


B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of themanufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.

C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named.

2.03 MAINTENANCE MATERIALSA. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in

individual specification sections.B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

A. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitutionwith Contract Documents.

B. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter:1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality

level of the specified product.2. Agrees to provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product.3. Agrees to coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required

for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner.4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become

apparent.5. Agrees to reimburse Owner and Architect for review or redesign services associated with

re-approval by authorities.C. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or

product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will requirerevision to the Contract Documents.

3.02 OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTSA. Owner's Responsibilities:

1. Arrange for and deliver Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples, toContractor.

2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site.3. On delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor.4. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective, or deficient

items.5. Arrange for manufacturers' warranties, inspections, and service.

B. Contractor's Responsibilities:1. Review Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.2. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage jointly with

Owner.3. Handle, store, install and finish products.4. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt.

3.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLINGA. Package products for shipment in manner to prevent damage; for equipment, package to avoid

loss of factory calibration.B. If special precautions are required, attach instructions prominently and legibly on outside of

packaging.C. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site

storage time and potential damage to stored materials.D. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


E. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering ofsurrounding areas.

F. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities arecorrect, and products are undamaged.

G. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,disfigurement, or damage, and to minimize handling.

H. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible.3.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according toinstallation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due toexcessive materials handling and misapplication.

B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible.D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment

favorable to product.E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.F. Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or

protection.G. Protect products from damage or deterioration due to construction operations, weather,

precipitation, humidity, temperature, sunlight and ultraviolet light, dirt, dust, and othercontaminants.

H. Comply with manufacturer's warranty conditions, if any.I. Do not store products directly on the ground.J. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to

prevent condensation and degradation of products.K. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with

foreign matter.L. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining.M. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,

disfigurement, or damage.N. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify

products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.END OF SECTION 01 6000

......

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 01 6116 - 11515 08.29.2016 VOC CONTENT RESTRICTIONS

SECTION 01 6116VOC CONTENT RESTRICTIONS


A. Requirement for installer certification that they did not use any non-compliant products.B. VOC restrictions for product categories listed below under "DEFINITIONS."

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures.

1.03 DEFINITIONSA. VOC-Restricted Products: All products of each of the following categories when installed or

applied on-site in the building interior:1. Adhesives, sealants, and sealer coatings.2. Paints and coatings.3. Insulation.4. Gypsum board.5. Cabinet work.6. Other products when specifically stated in the specifications.

B. Interior of Building: Anywhere inside the exterior weather barrier.C. Adhesives: All gunnable, trowelable, liquid-applied, and aerosol adhesives, whether specified or

not; including flooring adhesives, resilient base adhesives, and pipe jointing adhesives.D. Sealants: All gunnable, trowelable, and liquid-applied joint sealants and sealant primers,

whether specified or not; including firestopping sealants and duct joint sealers.E. Inherently Non-Emitting Materials: Products composed wholly of minerals or metals, unless

they include organic-based surface coatings, binders, or sealants; and specifically the following:1. Concrete.2. Clay brick.3. Metals that are plated, anodized, or powder-coated.4. Glass.5. Ceramics.6. Solid wood flooring that is unfinished and untreated.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. CAL (CHPS LEM) - Low-Emitting Materials Product List; California Collaborative for High

Performance Schools (CHPS); current edition at www.chps.net/.B. CAL (CDPH SM) - Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical

Emissions From Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers; California Department ofPublic Health; v1.1, 2010.

C. GreenSeal GS-36 - Commercial Adhesives; 2011.D. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition.E. SCS (CPD) - SCS Certified Products; current listings at www.scscertified.com.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Evidence of Compliance: Submit for each different product in each applicable category.C. Product Data: For each VOC-restricted product used in the project, submit evidence of

compliance.D. Installer Certifications Regarding Prohibited Content: Require each installer of any type of

product (not just the products for which VOC restrictions are specified) to certify that either 1) noadhesives, joint sealants, paints, coatings, or composite wood or agrifiber products have been

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 01 6116 - 21515 08.29.2016 VOC CONTENT RESTRICTIONS

used in the installation of his products, or 2) that such products used comply with theserequirements.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing testing and

inspections of the type specified in this section.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS

A. All Products: Comply with the most stringent of federal, State, and local requirements, or thesespecifications.

B. All VOC-Restricted Products: Provide products having VOC content of types and volume notgreater than those specified in State of California Department of Health Services StandardPractice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions From Various Sources Using Small-ScaleEnvironmental Chambers.1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are:

a. Current GREENGUARD Children & Schools certification; www.greenguard.org.b. Current SCS Indoor Advantage Gold certification; www.scscertified.com.c. Product listing in the CHPS Low-Emitting Materials Product List at

www.chps.net/manual/lem_table.htm.d. Current certification by any other agencies acceptable to CHPS.e. Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with CHPS requirements for

getting a product listed in the Low-Emitting Materials Product List; report must includelaboratory's statement that the product meets the specified criteria.

2. Product data submittals showing VOC content are NOT acceptable forms of evidence.C. Adhesives and Joint Sealants: Provide only products having volatile organic compound (VOC)

content not greater than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District RuleNo.1168.1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are:

a. Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with requirements.b. Published product data showing compliance with requirements.c. Certification by manufacturer that product complies with requirements.

D. Aerosol Adhesives: Provide only products having volatile organic compound (VOC) content notgreater than required by GreenSeal GS-36.1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are:

a. Current GreenSeal Certification.b. Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with GreenSeal GS-36

requirements.c. Published product data showing compliance with requirements.

E. Paints and Coatings: Provide products having VOC content as specified in Section 09 9000.F. Other Product Categories: Comply with limitations specified elsewhere.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner reserves the right to reject non-compliant products, whether installed or not, and requiretheir removal and replacement with compliant products at no extra cost to Owner.

B. Additional costs to restore indoor air quality due to installation of non-compliant products will beborne by Contractor.


J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 01 7000 - 11515 08.29.2016 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 7000EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS


A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures.B. Requirements for alterations work, including selective demolition, except removal, disposal,

and/or remediation of hazardous materials and toxic substances.C. Pre-installation meetings.D. Cutting and patching.E. Cleaning and protection.F. Starting of systems and equipment.G. Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel.H. Closeout procedures, including Contractor's Correction Punch List, except payment procedures.I. General requirements for maintenance service.

1.02 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Demolition Plan: Submit demolition plan as specified by OSHA and local authorities.

1. Indicate extent of demolition, removal sequence, bracing and shoring, and location andconstruction of barricades and fences. Include design drawings and calculations forbracing and shoring.

2. Identify demolition firm and submit qualifications.3. Include a summary of safety procedures.

C. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects:1. Structural integrity of any element of Project.2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element.3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor.6. Include in request:

a. Identification of Project.b. Location and description of affected work.c. Necessity for cutting or alteration.d. Description of proposed work and products to be used.e. Alternatives to cutting and patching.f. Effect on work of Owner or separate Contractor.g. Written permission of affected separate Contractor.h. Date and time work will be executed.

D. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities.1.03 QUALIFICATIONS

A. For demolition work, employ a firm specializing in the type of work required.1. Minimum of 5 years of documented experience.

B. For field engineering, employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for specificservice on Project, licensed in the State in which the Project is located.

C. For design of temporary shoring and bracing, employ a Professional Engineer experienced indesign of this type of work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.

1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Use of explosives is not permitted.


B. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintainpumping equipment.

C. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect sitefrom soil erosion.

D. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to preventaccumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.

E. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and overadjacent property.1. Provide dust-proof enclosures to prevent entry of dust generated outdoors.

F. Erosion and Sediment Control: Plan and execute work by methods to control surface drainagefrom cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation.1. Minimize amount of bare soil exposed at one time.2. Provide temporary measures such as berms, dikes, and drains, to prevent water flow.3. Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to avoid erosive surface silts or

clays.4. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation; promptly

apply corrective measures.G. Noise Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by

construction operations.1. Outdoors: Limit conduct of especially noisy exterior work to the hours of 8 am to 5 pm.2. Indoors: Limit conduct of especially noisy interior work to 8 am to 5 pm.

H. Pest and Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insectsfrom damaging the work.1. Pest Control Service: Monthly treatments.

I. Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents from accessing orinvading premises.

J. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil,water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced byconstruction operations. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations.

1.05 COORDINATIONA. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to

ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements,with provisions for accommodating items installed later.

B. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements.C. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible

with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilitiesfor installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.

D. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical workthat are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, andconduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spacesefficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.

E. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within theconstruction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.

F. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections.G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work

and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner'sactivities.


PART 2 PRODUCTS- NOT USED2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS

A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patchingand extending work.

B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products wherenecessary, referring to existing work as a standard.

C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitutiondescribed in Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work beingapplied or attached.

C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize

waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication.E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct

locations.F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements

subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work,assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching meansacceptance of existing conditions.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to

applying any new material or substance in contact or bond.3.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at the siteprior to commencing work of the section.

B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section.C. Notify Architect four days in advance of meeting date.D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting:

1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures.2. Review coordination with related work.

E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, withelectronic copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.04 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTSA. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement.B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated.C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and

horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated.D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated.E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance.


3.05 ALTERATIONSA. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and

existing record documents only.1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown.2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation.3. Beginning of alterations work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Maintain weatherproof exterior building enclosure except for interruptions required forreplacement or modifications; take care to prevent water and humidity damage.1. Where openings in exterior enclosure exist, provide construction to make exterior

enclosure weatherproof.2. Insulate existing ducts or pipes that are exposed to outdoor ambient temperatures by

alterations work.C. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work.

1. Remove items indicated on drawings.2. Relocate items indicated on drawings.3. Where new surface finishes are to be applied to existing work, perform removals, patch,

and prepare existing surfaces as required to receive new finish; remove existing finish ifnecessary for successful application of new finish.

4. Where new surface finishes are not specified or indicated, patch holes and damagedsurfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces as closely as possible.

D. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, andTelecommunications): Remove, relocate, and extend existing systems to accommodate newconstruction.1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to

equipment and operational components; if necessary, modify installation to allow access orprovide access panel.

2. Where existing systems or equipment are not active and Contract Documents requirereactivation, put back into operational condition; repair supply, distribution, and equipmentas required.

3. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with newservices, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and readyfor service.a. Disable existing systems only to make switchovers and connections; minimize

duration of outages.b. Provide temporary connections as required to maintain existing systems in service.

4. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities.5. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above

accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stuband tag with identification; patch holes left by removal using materials specified for newconstruction.

E. Protect existing work to remain.1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary.2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work.3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work.

F. Adapt existing work to fit new work: Make as neat and smooth transition as possible.G. Patching: Where the existing surface is not indicated to be refinished, patch to match the

surface finish that existed prior to cutting. Where the surface is indicated to be refinished, patchso that the substrate is ready for the new finish.

H. Refinish existing surfaces as indicated:1. Where rooms or spaces are indicated to be refinished, refinish all visible existing surfaces

to remain to the specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacentfinishes.


2. If mechanical or electrical work is exposed accidentally during the work, re-cover andrefinish to match.

I. Clean existing systems and equipment.J. Remove demolition debris and abandoned items from alterations areas and dispose of off-site;

do not burn or bury.K. Do not begin new construction in alterations areas before demolition is complete.L. Comply with all other applicable requirements of this section.

3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHINGA. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching.B. See Alterations article above for additional requirements.C. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to:

1. Complete the work.2. Fit products together to integrate with other work.3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services.4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work.5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition.6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work.7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.8. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work.

D. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriatesurfaces to receive patching and finishing.

E. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moistureresistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces.

F. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without priorapproval.

G. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.H. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.I. Patching:

1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuoussurfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entireunit.

2. Match color, texture, and appearance.3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other

imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repairsubstrate prior to repairing finish.

3.07 PROGRESS CLEANINGA. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly

condition.B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed

or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning

to eliminate dust.D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose

off-site; do not burn or bury.3.08 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK

A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations.B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.


C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediatework area to prevent damage.

D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement

of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is

necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing materialmanufacturer.

G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings ifpossible.

3.09 SYSTEM STARTUPA. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.B. Notify Architect and owner seven days prior to start-up of each item.C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive

rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage.D. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by

the equipment or system manufacturer.E. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.F. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel in accordance with

manufacturers' instructions.G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized

representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or systeminstallation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.

H. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioningcorrectly.

3.10 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONA. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to

date of Substantial Completion.B. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance,

and shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled time, at equipment location.C. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other

season within six months.D. Provide a qualified person who is knowledgeable about the Project to perform demonstration

and instruction of owner personnel.E. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual

with Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.F. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for

additional data becomes apparent during instruction.G. The amount of time required for instruction on each item of equipment and system is that

specified in individual sections.3.11 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.3.12 FINAL CLEANING

A. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment.B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous.


C. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stainsand foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and softsurfaces.

D. Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels ornameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment.

E. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to thesurface and material being cleaned.

F. Clean filters of operating equipment.G. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, scuppers, overflow drains, area drains, and

drainage systems.H. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.I. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site;

dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury.3.13 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities.B. Accompany Owner on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for completion or

correction in the Contractor's Correction Punch List for Contractor's Notice of SubstantialCompletion.

C. Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Architect's Substantial Completioninspection.

D. Submit written certification containing Contractor's Correction Punch List, that ContractDocuments have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete inaccordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's Substantial Completioninspection.

E. Conduct Substantial Completion inspection and create Final Correction Punch List containingArchitect's and Contractor's comprehensive list of items identified to be completed or correctedand submit to Architect.

F. Correct items of work listed in Final Correction Punch List and comply with requirements foraccess to Owner-occupied areas.

G. Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete and ready for Architect's SubstantialCompletion final inspection.

H. Complete items of work determined by Architect listed in executed Certificate of SubstantialCompletion.

3.14 MAINTENANCEA. Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections.B. Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than one

year from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty, whicheveris longer.

C. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust,and lubricate as required.

D. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replaceparts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component.

E. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor withoutprior written consent of the Owner.


......

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 01 7419 - 11515 08.29.2016 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

SECTION 01 7419WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS

A. Employ processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due to error, poorplanning, breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors.

B. Minimize trash/waste disposal in landfills; reuse, salvage, or recycle as much waste aseconomically feasible.

C. Required Recycling, Salvage, and Reuse: The following may not be disposed of in landfills orby incineration:1. Aluminum and plastic beverage containers.2. Corrugated cardboard.3. Wood pallets.4. Clean dimensional wood.5. Land clearing debris, including brush, branches, logs and stumps, see Civil Drawings.6. Metals, including packaging banding, metal studs, sheet metal, structural steel, piping,

reinforcing bars, door frames, and other items made of steel, iron, galvanized steel,stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead, brass, and bronze.

D. Methods of trash/waste disposal that are not acceptable are:1. Burning on the project site.2. Burying on the project site.3. Dumping or burying on other property, public or private.4. Other illegal dumping or burying.5. Incineration, either on- or off-site.

E. Regulatory Requirements: Contractor is responsible for knowing and complying with regulatoryrequirements, including but not limited to Federal, state and local requirements, pertaining tolegal disposal of all construction and demolition waste materials.

1.02 DEFINITIONSA. Clean: Untreated and unpainted; not contaminated with oils, solvents, caulk, or the like.B. Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes typically including building materials,

packaging, trash, debris, and rubble resulting from construction, remodeling, repair anddemolition operations.

C. Hazardous: Exhibiting the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity,toxicity or reactivity.

D. Nonhazardous: Exhibiting none of the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility,corrosivity, toxicity, or reactivity.

E. Nontoxic: Neither immediately poisonous to humans nor poisonous after a long period ofexposure.

F. Recyclable: The ability of a product or material to be recovered at the end of its life cycle andremanufactured into a new product for reuse by others.

G. Recycle: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for remanufactureinto a new product for reuse by others.

H. Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating and reconstituting solid waste and otherdiscarded materials for the purpose of using the altered form. Recycling does not includeburning, incinerating, or thermally destroying waste.

I. Return: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit.J. Reuse: To reuse a construction waste material in some manner on the project site.K. Salvage: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for resale or reuse by

others.

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 01 7419 - 21515 08.29.2016 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

L. Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by storm or wellproduction run-off water.

M. Source Separation: The act of keeping different types of waste materials separate beginningfrom the first time they become waste.

N. Toxic: Poisonous to humans either immediately or after a long period of exposure.O. Trash: Any product or material unable to be reused, returned, recycled, or salvaged.P. Waste: Extra material or material that has reached the end of its useful life in its intended use.

Waste includes salvageable, returnable, recyclable, and reusable material.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES

A. See Section 01 3000 for additional requirements for project meetings, reports, submittalprocedures, and project documentation.

B. See Section 01 5000 for additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and removalfacilities and services.

C. See Section 01 6000 for waste prevention requirements related to delivery, storage, andhandling.

D. See Section 01 7000 for trash/waste prevention procedures related to cutting and patching,installation, protection, and cleaning.

3.02 WASTE MANAGEMENT IMPLEMENTATIONA. Instruction: Provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and recycling,

salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of theproject.

B. Meetings: Discuss trash/waste management goals and issues at project meetings.1. Regular job-site meetings.

C. Facilities: Provide specific facilities for separation and storage of materials for recycling,salvage, reuse, return, and trash disposal, for use by all contractors and installers.1. Provide containers as required.2. Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to subcontractors.3. Keep recycling and trash/waste bin areas neat and clean and clearly marked in order to

avoid contamination of materials.D. Hazardous Wastes: Separate, store, and dispose of hazardous wastes according to applicable

regulations.E. Recycling: Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable waste products

in order to prevent contamination of materials and to maximize recyclability of identifiedmaterials. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facility in order toprevent contamination of recyclable materials.

F. Reuse of Materials On-Site: Set aside, sort, and protect separated products in preparation forreuse.

G. Salvage: Set aside, sort, and protect products to be salvaged for reuse off-site.END OF SECTION 01 7419

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 01 7800 - 11515 08.29.2016 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

SECTION 01 7800CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS


A. Project Record Documents.B. Operation and Maintenance Data.C. Warranties and bonds.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings,

product data, and samples.B. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data.C. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for

Payment.B. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents beforestart of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments.

2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction andoperated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance.

3. Submit one copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy willbe reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise contentof all document sets as required prior to final submission.

4. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after finalinspection.

C. Warranties and Bonds:1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with

Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance.2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final

Application for Payment.3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial

Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as thebeginning of the warranty period.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work:1. Drawings.2. Specifications.3. Addenda.4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.

B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner.C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.D. Record information concurrent with construction progress.E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products

installed, including the following:1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number.2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.


3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.F. Record Drawings : Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including:

1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum.2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances,

referenced to permanent surface improvements.3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,

referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.4. Field changes of dimension and detail.5. Details not on original Contract drawings.

3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATAA. Source Data: For each product or system, list names, addresses and telephone numbers of

Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and

data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and

systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents asmaintenance drawings.

D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructionsfor each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions.

3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHESA. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish:

1. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations.2. Information for re-ordering custom manufactured products.

B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agentsand methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, andrecommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.

C. Moisture protection and weather-exposed products: Include product data listing applicablereference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Providerecommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair.

D. Additional information as specified in individual product specification sections.E. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed

instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation andmaintenance of the specific products.

3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMSA. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System:

1. Description of unit or system, and component parts.2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests.4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts.

B. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printedinstructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation andmaintenance of the specific products.

C. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, andcommunications; typed.

D. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed.E. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and

sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.


F. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventativemaintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; andalignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.

G. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.H. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.I. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.J. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams

required for maintenance.K. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed.L. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and

control diagrams.M. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections.

3.05 ASSEMBLY OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALSA. Assemble operation and maintenance data into durable manuals for Owner's personnel use,

with data arranged in the same sequence as, and identified by, the specification sections.B. Where systems involve more than one specification section, provide separate tabbed divider for

each system.C. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic

covers; 2 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into relatedconsistent groupings.

D. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCEINSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents.

E. Project Directory: Title and address of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers ofArchitect, Consultants, Contractor and subcontractors, with names of responsible parties.

F. Tables of Contents: List every item separated by a divider, using the same identification as onthe divider tab; where multiple volumes are required, include all volumes Tables of Contents ineach volume, with the current volume clearly identified.

G. Dividers: Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system; identify the contentson the divider tab; immediately following the divider tab include a description of product andmajor component parts of equipment.

H. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 20 pound paper.I. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to

size of text pages.J. Arrangement of Contents: Organize each volume in parts as follows:

1. Project Directory.2. Table of Contents, of all volumes, and of this volume.3. Operation and Maintenance Data: Arranged by system, then by product category.

a. Source data.b. Product data, shop drawings, and other submittals.c. Operation and maintenance data.d. Field quality control data.e. Photocopies of warranties and bonds.

3.06 WARRANTIES AND BONDSA. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers,

and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except foritems put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty untilDate of Substantial completion is determined.

B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.


C. Co-execute submittals when required.D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.E. Include originals of each in operation and maintenance manuals, indexed separately on Table of

Contents.END OF SECTION 01 7800

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 03 3000 - 11515 08.29.2016 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

SECTION 03 3000CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE


A. Elevated concrete slabs.B. Concrete reinforcement.C. Concrete curing.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Products and installation for sealants for saw cut joints and

isolation joints in slabs.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and MassConcrete; 1991 (Reapproved 2009).

B. ACI 211.2 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural Lightweight Concrete;1998 (Reapproved 2004).

C. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2010 (Errata 2012).D. ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; 2004 (Errata 2007).E. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; 2000.F. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; 2001 (Reapproved 2008).G. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2011.H. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement; 2015.I. ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire

Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2015.J. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2013.K. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete

Specimens; 2015a.L. ASTM C143/C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete; 2012.M. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2015.N. ASTM C173/C173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the

Volumetric Method; 2014.O. ASTM C330/C330M - Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural

Concrete; 2014.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with

specified requirements and installation instructions.C. Mix Design: Submit proposed concrete mix design.

1. Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 301, Section 4 - ConcreteMixtures.

2. Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 318, Chapter 5 -Concrete Quality, Mixing and Placing.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.


PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (60,000 psi).1. Type: Deformed billet-steel bars.2. Finish: Unfinished, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement (WWR): Galvanized, plain type, ASTM A1064/A1064M.1. Form: Flat Sheets.2. WWR Style: As indicated on drawings.

C. Reinforcement Accessories:1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage, 0.0508 inch.2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of

reinforcement during concrete placement.2.02 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I - Normal Portland type. 1. Acquire all cement for entire project from same source.

B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33.1. Acquire all aggregates for entire project from same source.

C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C330/C330M.D. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.

2.03 CONCRETE MIX DESIGNA. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations.B. Proportioning Structural Lightweight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.2 recommendations.C. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis

of field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301.1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for

preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.D. Normal Weight Concrete:

1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M at 28 days: 3,000 pounds per square inch.

2. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight.3. Total Air Content: 4 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C173/C173M.4. Maximum Slump: 3 inches.5. Maximum Aggregate Size: 5/8 inch.

E. Structural Lightweight Concrete:1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M at 28 days:

3,000 pounds per square inch.2. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight.3. Total Air Content: 3 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C173/C173M.4. Maximum Slump: 3 inches.5. Maximum Aggregate Size: 5/8 inch.


A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface bycleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions.


3.03 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT AND OTHER EMBEDDED ITEMSA. Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and

accurately position, support, and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concretecoverage required for protection.

B. Install welded wire reinforcement in maximum possible lengths, and offset end laps in bothdirections. Splice laps with tie wire.

C. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete areaccurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with concrete placement.

3.04 PLACING CONCRETEA. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R.C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, waterstops, embedded parts, and formed construction joint

devices will not be disturbed during concrete placement.D. Finish floors level and flat, unless otherwise indicated, within the tolerances specified below.

3.05 SLAB JOINTINGA. Locate joints as indicated on the drawings.B. Anchor joint fillers and devices to prevent movement during concrete placement.C. Isolation Joints: Use preformed joint filler with removable top section for joint sealant, total

height equal to thickness of slab, set flush with top of slab.D. Saw Cut Contraction Joints: Saw cut joints before concrete begins to cool, within 4 to 12 hours

after placing; use 3/16 inch thick blade and cut at least 1 inch deep but not less than one quarter(1/4) the depth of the slab.

3.06 FLOOR FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness:

1. Exposed Concrete Floors: 1/4 inch in 10 feet.2. Under Seamless Resilient Flooring: 1/4 inch in 10 feet.3. Under Carpeting: 1/4 inch in 10 feet.

B. Correct the slab surface if tolerances are less than specified.C. Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work. Areas

requiring corrective work will be identified. Re-measure corrected areas by the same process.3.07 CONCRETE FINISHING

A. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows:1. Surfaces to Receive Thick Floor Coverings: "Wood float" as described in ACI 302.1R;

thick floor coverings include quarry tile, ceramic tile, and terrazzo with full bed settingsystem.

2. Surfaces to Receive Thin Floor Coverings: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI 302.1R; thinfloor coverings include carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring, thin set quarry tile,and thin set ceramic tile.

3. Other Surfaces to Be Left Exposed: Trowel as described in ACI 302.1R, minimizingburnish marks and other appearance defects.

3.08 CURING AND PROTECTIONA. Comply with requirements of ACI 308R. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from

premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period

necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.1. Normal concrete: Not less than 7 days.2. High early strength concrete: Not less than 4 days.


C. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms:1. Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry.

Keep continuously moist for not less than three days by saturated burlap.a. Saturated Burlap: Saturate burlap-polyethylene and place burlap-side down over floor

slab areas, lapping ends and sides; maintain in place.2. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry.

a. Moisture-Retaining Sheet: Lap strips not less than 3 inches and seal with waterprooftape or adhesive; secure at edges.

3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01

4000 - Quality Requirements.B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm.C. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance

with specified requirements.D. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete

test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 100 cubic yards or less of each class of concreteplaced.

E. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTMC143/C143M.

3.10 DEFECTIVE CONCRETEA. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor

within 24 hours of test.B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances

or specified requirements.C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of

additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified.D. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction

of Architect for each individual area.3.11 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected concrete floor surface until fully cured.END OF SECTION 03 3000

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20C143/C143M













J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 05 1200 - 11515 08.29.2016 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

SECTION 05 1200STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING


A. Structural steel framing members, support members.1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AISC (MAN) - Steel Construction Manual; 2011.B. AISC S303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; 2010.C. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.D. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,

Welded and Seamless; 2012.E. ASTM A242/A242M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel; 2004

(Reapproved 2009).F. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000

PSI Tensile Strength; 2014.G. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi

Minimum Tensile Strength; 2014.H. ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa

Minimum Tensile Strength (Metric); 2014.I. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon

Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013.J. ASTM A501/A501M - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon

Steel Structural Tubing; 2014.K. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts; 2007a (Reapproved

2014).L. ASTM A563M - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts [Metric]; 2007.M. ASTM A992/A992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes; 2011 (Reapproved

2015).N. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,

Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2015.

O. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, andUltra-High Strength; 2014.

P. ASTM F436 - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers; 2011.Q. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; 2012.R. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015.S. IAS AC172 - Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel;

International Accreditation Service, Inc; 2011.T. RCSC (HSBOLT) - Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts; Research

Council on Structural Connections; 2009.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, locations of structural members, openings, attachments,and fasteners.


2. Connections not detailed.3. Indicate cambers and loads.4. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.

C. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification withinthe previous 12 months.

D. Fabricator's Qualification Statement: Provide documentation showing steel fabricator isaccredited under IAS AC172.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC "Steel Construction Manual."B. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five

years of documented experience.C. Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years of

documented experience.D. Design connections not detailed on the drawings under direct supervision of a Professional

Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State in which theProject is located.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS

A. Steel Angles, Plates, Channels, S Shapes, M Shapes, and HP Shapes: ASTM A36/A36M.B. Steel W Shapes and Tees: ASTM A992/A992M.C. Rolled Steel Structural Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M.D. Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A242/A242M high-strength, corrosion-resistant

structural steel.E. Cold-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B.F. Hot-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A501/A501M, seamless.G. Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/A1011M, Designation SS, Grade 30 hot-rolled, or ASTM

A1008/A1008M, Designation SS, Grade 30 cold-rolled.H. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B, Finish black.I. Structural Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, ASTM A307, Grade A.J. High-Strength Structural Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 or ASTM A325M, Type 1,

medium carbon, plain, with matching compatible ASTM A563 or ASTM A563M nuts and ASTMF436 washers.

K. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded.L. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC limitations of

authorities having jurisdiction.2.02 FABRICATION

A. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible.B. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. Grind exposed welds smooth.C. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors.

2.03 FINISHA. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed, field

welded, in contact with concrete, or high strength bolted.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20A1008/A1008M





http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20F436












PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 ERECTION

A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildingsand Bridges".

B. Allow for erection loads, and provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure in safecondition, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanentbracing.

C. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings.D. Use carbon steel bolts only for temporary bracing during construction, unless otherwise

specifically permitted on drawings. Install high-strength bolts in accordance with RCSC"Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts".

E. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect.F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in

contact with concrete.3.02 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative.B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01

4000 - Quality Requirements.END OF SECTION 05 1200
























......

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 05 3100 - 11515 08.29.2016 STEEL DECKING

SECTION 05 3100STEEL DECKING


A. Metal form deck.B. Bearing plates and angles.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.C. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015.D. AWS D1.3/D1.3M - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel; 2008.E. IAS AC172 - Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel;

International Accreditation Service, Inc; 2011.F. SDI (DM) - Publication No.30, Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, and Roof

Decks; 2007.G. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); 2002 (Ed.

2004).1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate deck plan, support locations, projections, openings, reinforcement,

pertinent details, and accessories.C. Product Data: Provide deck profile characteristics, dimensions, structural properties, and

finishes.D. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within

the previous 12 months.E. Fabricator's Qualification Statement: Provide documentation showing steel fabricator is

accredited under IAS AC172.1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Design deck layout, spans, fastening, and joints under direct supervision of a ProfessionalStructural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State in which theProject is located.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified steel fabricator that is accredited by the InternationalAccreditation Service (IAS) Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (AC172).

C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section withminimum five years of experience.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Cut plastic wrap to encourage ventilation.B. Separate sheets and store deck on dry wood sleepers; slope for positive drainage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Steel Deck:1. Canam Steel Corporation: www.canam-steeljoists.ws.2. Cordeck, Inc: www.cordeck.com.3. Nucor-Vulcraft Group: www.vulcraft.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 05 3100 - 21515 08.29.2016 STEEL DECKING

2.02 STEEL DECKA. All Deck Types: Select and design metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual.

1. Calculate to structural working stress design and structural properties specified.2. Maximum Vertical Deflection of Floor Deck: 1/360 of span.

B. Metal Form Deck: Ribbed sheet steel, with provision for ventilation of concrete:1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS) Grade 33/230, with

G90/Z275 galvanized coating.2. Formed Sheet Width: 24 inch.3. Side Joints: Lapped, welded.4. End Joints: Lapped, welded.

2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALSA. Bearing Plates and Angles: ASTM A36/A36M steel, galvanized per ASTM A123/A123M.B. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M.C. Weld Washers: Mild steel, uncoated, 3/4 inch outside diameter, 1/8 inch thick.D. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, complying with VOC limitations of

authorities having jurisdiction.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. On concrete surfaces provide minimum 4 inch bearing.B. On steel supports provide minimum 1-1/2 inch bearing.C. Fasten deck to steel support members at ends and intermediate supports at 12 inches on

center maximum, parallel with the deck flute and at each transverse flute using methodsspecified.1. Welding: Use fusion welds through weld washers.

D. At welded male/female side laps weld at 18 inches on center maximum.E. Weld deck in accordance with AWS D1.3/D1.3M.F. Immediately after welding deck and other metal components in position, coat welds, burned

areas, and damaged surface coating, with touch-up primer.END OF SECTION 05 3100

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 05 5214 - 11515 08.29.2016 ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS

SECTION 05 5214ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS


A. Ornamental Glass Railings.1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design, fabricate and install guardrails to withstand the following, loads applied separately:Handrails and guardrails: Design handrail assemblies and guardrails to resist a load of 50pounds per linear foot (pound per foot) applied in any direction at top and to transfer this loadthrough supports to structure.1. Concentrated load: Provide handrail assemblies and guardrails able to resist a single

concentrated load of 200 pounds applied in any direction at any point supporting structureto transfer this loading to appropriate structural elements of building.

2. Components: Design intermediate rails (all those except handrail), balusters and panelfillers, to withstand a horizontally applied normal load of 50 pounds on an area equal to 1square foot, including openings and space between rails.

3. Stress increase: Where handrails and guardrails are designed in accord with provisions forallowable stress design (working stress design) exclusively for loads specified in BuildingCode, allowable stress for members and their attachments may be increased by one-third.

B. Handrails and Guardrails shall comply with ADA requirements.1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures, project meetings,progress schedules and documentation, reports, coordination.

B. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance(O&M) data, warranties and bonds.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM E 935 - Standard Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing Systems

and Rails for Buildings, current edition.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate sizes, shapes, configuration, sections, locations, fabrication and

installation details. Indicate fabricated sizes and anchorage to adjacent surfaces. Indicate thatrailings meet code requirements for vertical and horizontal loading. Include dimensioned plan ofbuilt-in anchorage devices, materials, finishes and itemization of parts and accessories.

C. Product Data: Submit for manufactured items. Indicate materials, construction, finishes andinstallation instructions.

D. Samples: Submit metal samples of actual handrail material. Samples shall be minimum of 1'-0"long, of each color and finish specified, and shall indicate shapes, workmanship and full rangeof selected finish to be expected in work.

E. Testing: Showing that system meets performance requirements.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Applicable standards; comply with the requirements of the following, except where morestringent requirements are specified:1. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA), standards as referenced

herein.2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication

and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings," Eighth Edition with Supplements.3. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI), standards as referenced herein.4. American Welding Society (AWS):


a. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code."b. AWS B2.1, "Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification."

5. ASTM International (ASTM), standards as referenced herein.6. Consumer Products Safety Commission (CPSC), "Safety Standards for Architectural

Glazing Materials," 16-CFR, Part 1201.B. Qualifications:

1. Fabricator/installer: Proposed fabricator/installer shall submit evidence of satisfactorycompletion of similar work. Architect reserves the right to inspect fabrication facilities indetermining qualifications.

2. Welders employed on the work shall have passed qualification tests within the past 12months in the position for which employed, using test procedures covered in the AWSD1.1.

C. Field measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings andfabrication, to ensure fitting of work. Allow for trimming and fitting wherever taking of fieldmeasurements before fabrication might delay work.

1.07 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.


A. Basis of Design: Global Glass Railings: Hercules Glass Railing System;www.architecturalglassrailings.com.

B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.2.02 ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS

A. Components, glass guardrail system.B. Stainless steel: AISI Type 302/304 stainless steel tubing, meeting ASTM A789-05b, minimum

11 ga. wall thickness; #4 satin finish.C. Glass: Clear, fully tempered and laminated, 1/2 inch glass, as required to meet performance

criteria.D. Accessory products:

1. Structural steel:a. Meeting ASTM A36-05, hot-rolled plate and shapes; shop prime painted.

2. Fasteners: Corrosion resistant steel or stainless steel for concealed locations; match finishat exposed locations.

3. Sealants: Heat formed rigid plastic or high durometer hardness sealant; manufacturer'sstandard.

4. Setting blocks: Neoprene or EPDM meeting ASTM D2240-05; 70-90 durometer.2.03 FABRICATION

A. Materials shall be free from defects impairing strength, durability or appearance; havingstructural properties to sustain or withstand strains and stresses to which subjected. Exposedelements throughout project shall have the same texture and color for adjacent locations. Fastenings shall be non-corrosive and concealed, except as indicated on approved shopdrawings.

B. Exposed fastenings shall be of same materials, color and finish as material to which applied,shall be countersunk and finished flush. Exposed welds shall be ground smooth,indistinguishable in finished work. Molded, bent or shaped members shall be formed with clean,sharp arrises, without dents, scratches, cracks and other defects. Provide anchors, bolts, shimsand accessory items for building into and fastening to adjacent work.

C. Fabricate railing components in accord with approved shop drawings. Shop fabricate togreatest extent practicable to minimize field fitting, splicing and fastening. Remove burrs fromcut edges and finish edges and corners to match exposed part of railing.


D. Fabricate system with welded or bolted connections as indicated on approved shop drawings. Welding shall be in accord with AWS standards, performed by qualified welders. Do not distortmembers or deface exposed finish. Grind welds smooth; blend and refinish to match factoryfinish.

E. Ends of handrails shall be rounded or returned to floor, wall or post as indicated on drawings. Close wall return ends using caps of the same material and finish as rails.

F. Factory fabricate components to greatest extent practicable. Form returns with sharp arrises;curved components with smooth radii. For components not to be factory welded, attach usingconcealed fasteners and with hairline joints.

G. Fabrication tolerances:1. Machine shop-assemble mechanical joints to fit within +/- 1/32".2. Sizes of each element of an assembly shall be correct within 1/8"; for curved elements,

maximum +/- 1/8" on the chord rise and maximum +/- in chord length.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Inserts and anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be preset inconcrete or welded to structure on timely basis to avoid delay in the work. Set at locationsindicated on approved shop drawings. Verify location and alignment of preset anchors prior toproceeding.

B. Cutting, fitting and placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting for installation of work. Setwork in location, alignment and elevation, plumb and level within specified tolerances, true andfree of rack; measured from established lines and levels. Install work in accord with approvedshop drawings.

C. Fit exposed connections together to form tight hairline joints. Field weld connections only asindicated on approved shop drawings. Field finish welded joints to be indistinguishable infinished work.

D. Protection: Maintain installed work until Date of Architect's Final Certification by wrapping withtemporary protective material.

E. Site tolerances:1. Machine field mechanical joints to fit within +/- 1/32".2. Install free-standing items to +/- 1/8" of indicated position, plumb and level.

F. Final cleaning: Just prior to Date of Architect's Final Certification, clean and polish all surfaces. Repair or replace work that cannot be cleaned or has been damaged during constructionoperations.


......

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 06 1000 - 11515 08.29.2016 ROUGH CARPENTRY

SECTION 06 1000ROUGH CARPENTRY


A. Fire retardant treated wood materials.B. Communications and electrical room mounting boards.C. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware; 2009.B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.C. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; 2012.D. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.E. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; 2010.F. SPIB (GR) - Grading Rules; 2014.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide technical data on application instructions.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent

deformation and to allow air circulation. B. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, or

installation.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies.1. Species: Southern Pine, unless otherwise indicated.2. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no

grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting thespecified requirements.

3. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review,American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading servicefor the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unlessotherwise indicated.

4. Lumber of other species or grades is acceptable provided structural and appearancecharacteristics are equivalent to or better than products specified.

B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS

A. Grading Agency: Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc. (SPIB).B. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.C. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19.D. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring:

1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade.2. Boards: Standard or No. 3.


2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELSA. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A-D plywood, or medium density

fiberboard; 3/4 inch thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 orless, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

2.04 ACCESSORIESA. Fasteners and Anchors:

1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidityand preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.

2.05 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENTA. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System

for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specificapplications. 1. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating

compliance with specified requirements.B. Fire Retardant Treatment:

1. Manufacturers:a. Arch Wood Protection, Inc: www.wolmanizedwood.com.b. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc: www.frtw.com.c. Osmose, Inc: www.osmose.com.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2. Interior Type A: AWPA U1, Use Category UCFA, Commodity Specification H, lowtemperature (low hygroscopic) type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated;capable of providing a maximum flame spread index of 25 when tested in accordance withASTM E84, with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for anadditional 20 minutes.a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber

and 15 percent for plywood.b. All interior rough carpentry items are to be fire retardant treated.c. Do not use treated wood in applications exposed to weather or where the wood may

become wet.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections.3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory

components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking.C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately

after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants.3.03 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures,specialty items, and trim.

B. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items,unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support isexplicitly indicated.

C. Where ceiling-mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports aboveceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated.

D. Provide the following specific non-structural framing and blocking:1. Cabinets and shelf supports.

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20E84



























2. Wall brackets.3. Handrails.4. Grab bars.5. Towel and bath accessories.6. Wall-mounted door stops.7. Chalkboards and marker boards.8. Wall paneling and trim.9. Joints of rigid wall coverings that occur between studs.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELSA. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with

edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center on all edges and intostuds in field of board.1. At fire-rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire-rated assembly.2. Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge of board

parallel to studs.3. Install adjacent boards without gaps.4. Size: 48 by 96 inches, installed horizontally at ceiling height.

3.05 TOLERANCESA. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum.B. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet

maximum.3.06 CLEANING

A. Waste Disposal: Comply with the requirements of Section 01 7419 - Waste Management andDisposal.1. Comply with applicable regulations.2. Do not burn scrap on project site.3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated.4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-generation

facilities or “waste-to-energy” facilities.B. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill. C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.




































......

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 06 4100 - 11515 08.29.2016 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

SECTION 06 4100ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK


A. Specially fabricated cabinet units.B. Cabinet hardware.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 6116 - VOC Content Restrictions.B. Section 12 3600 - Countertops.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014.B. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; 2010.C. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting not less than one week before

starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and

accessories.1. Minimum Scale of Detail Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot.

C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories.D. Samples: Submit actual sample items of proposed pulls, hinges, shelf standards, and locksets,

demonstrating hardware design, quality, and finish.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in thissection with minimum five years of documented experience.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Protect units from moisture damage.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONSA. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions

in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 CABINETS

A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified byAWI//AWMAC/WI (AWS) for Premium Grade.

B. Plastic Laminate Faced Cabinets: Custom grade.2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS

A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.2.03 LAMINATE MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers:1. Formica Corporation: www.formica.com.2. Panolam Industries International, Inc\Nevamar: www.nevamar.com.3. Wilsonart, LLC: www.wilsonart.com.


4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.B. High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): NEMA LD 3, types as recommended for specific

applications. 2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesive: Type recommended by AWI/AWMAC to suit application.B. Plastic Laminate Edge Banding: To match laminate on each cabinet.C. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application.D. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized

or chrome-plated finish in concealed locations and stainless steel finish in exposed locations.E. Grommets: Standard plastic grommets for cut-outs, in color to match adjacent surface.

2.05 HARDWAREA. Hardware: BHMA A156.9, types as recommended by fabricator for quality grade specified.B. Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull, aluminum with polished finish, 4 inch centers.C. Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, two keys per lock, master keyed, steel with chrome finish.D. Catches: Magnetic.E. Drawer Slides:

1. Type: Full extension.2. Static Load Capacity: Heavy Duty grade.3. Mounting: Side mounted.4. Stops: Integral type.5. Features: Provide self closing/stay closed type.6. Manufacturers

a. Accuride International, Inc: www.accuride.com.b. Grass America Inc: www.grassusa.com.c. Hettich America, LP: www.hettichamerica.com.d. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company: www.knapeandvogt.com.e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

F. Hinges: European style concealed self-closing type, steel with polished finish.1. Manufacturers:

a. Grass America Inc: www.grassusa.com.b. Hardware Resources: www.hardwareresources.com.c. Hettich America, LP: www.hettichamerica.com.d. Julius Blum, Inc: www.blum.com.

2.06 FABRICATIONA. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit

passage through building openings.B. Edging: Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than

one piece for any single length.C. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for

cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting.D. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with

manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightlybevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs.1. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces.2. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern.

E. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, and fixtures and fittings. Verify locations ofcutouts from on-site dimensions. Prime paint cut edges.



A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level.B. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components.C. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units.D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not

use additional overlay trim for this purpose.E. Secure cabinets to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages.F. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species

to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces.3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust installed work.B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures.


......

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 07 2100 - 11515 08.29.2016 THERMAL INSULATION

SECTION 07 2100THERMAL INSULATION


A. Batt insulation in exterior wall, ceiling, and roof construction.1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for LightFrame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012.

B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;2015a.

C. ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750Degrees C; 2016.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product

limitations.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 APPLICATIONS

A. Insulation in Metal Framed Walls: Batt insulation with no vapor retarder.2.02 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Where batt insulation is indicated, either glass fiber or mineral fiber batt insulation may be used,at Contractor's option.

B. Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665;friction fit.1. Flame Spread Index: 75 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.3. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136, except for

facing, if any.4. Thermal Resistance/Thickness: See Drawings.5. Manufacturers:

a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.b. Johns Manville: www.jm.com.c. Owens Corning Corporation: www.ocbuildingspec.com.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Mineral Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible or semi-rigid preformed batt or blanket, complying withASTM C665; friction fit; unfaced flame spread index of 0 (zero) when tested in accordance withASTM E84.1. Smoke Developed Index: 0 (zero), when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.2. Thermal Resistance/Thickness: See Drawings.3. Manufacturers:

a. Johns Manville: www.jm.com/sle.b. Thermafiber, Inc; SAFB: www.thermafiber.com.c. ROXUL, Inc; ComfortBatt: www.roxul.com/sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.


A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates areready to receive insulation.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20C665













J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 07 2100 - 21515 08.29.2016 THERMAL INSULATION

3.02 BATT INSTALLATIONA. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install in exterior wall and roof spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation.C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.D. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services

within the plane of the insulation.3.03 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment.END OF SECTION 07 2100












J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 07 8400 - 11515 08.29.2016 FIRESTOPPING

SECTION 07 8400FIRESTOPPING


A. Firestopping systems.B. Firestopping of all joints and penetrations in fire resistance rated and smoke resistant

assemblies, whether indicated on drawings or not.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 6116 - VOC Content Restrictions.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials;2015.

B. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops; 2013a.C. ASTM E2837 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Fire Resistance of Continuity

Head-of-Wall Joint Systems Installed Between Rated Wall Assemblies and Nonrated HorizontalAssemblies; 2013.

D. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition.E. FM 4991 - Approval Standard for Firestop Contractors; 2013.F. FA (AG) - FM Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition.G. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition.H. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; current edition.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the penetrated assembly,

and firestopping test or design number.C. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance ratings, and limitations.D. Sustainable Design Submittal: Submit VOC content documentation for all non-preformed

materials.E. Installer Qualification: Submit qualification statements for installing mechanics.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the specified fire ratings

when tested in accordance with methods indicated.1. Listing in the current-year classification or certification books of UL, FM, or ITS (Warnock

Hersey) will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report.B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience.C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and:

1. Trained by the manufacturer.2. Approved by Factory Mutual Research Corporation under FM 4991, or meeting any two of

the following requirements:.3. With minimum 3 years documented experience installing work of this type.4. Able to show at least 5 satisfactorily completed projects of comparable size and type.5. Licensed by authority having jurisdiction.


1.06 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions

during and after installation. Maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days afterinstallation of materials.

B. Provide ventilation in areas where solvent-cured materials are being installed.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 FIRESTOPPING - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Manufacturers:1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.: www.adfire.com.2. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop.3. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com/#sle.4. Nelson FireStop Products: www.nelsonfirestop.com.5. Specified Technologies, Inc.: www.stifirestop.com.6. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements.C. Firestopping Materials with Volatile Content: Provide only products having lower volatile organic

compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District RuleNo.1168.

D. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required fortested assembly design.

2.02 FIRESTOPPING ASSEMBLY REQUIREMENTSA. Head-of-Wall Firestopping at Joints Between Non-Rated Floor and Fire-Rated Wall: Use any

system that has been tested according to ASTM E2837 to have fire resistance F Rating equal torequired fire rating of floor or wall, whichever is greater.

B. Through Penetration Firestopping: Use any system that has been tested according to ASTME814 to have fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire rating of penetrated assembly.

2.03 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMSA. Firestopping:

1. Fire Ratings: Use any system that is listed by FM, ITS (DIR), or UL (FRD) and tested inaccordance with ASTM E814 or ASTM E119 with F Rating equal to fire rating ofpenetrated assembly and minimum T Rating Equal to F Rating and in compliance withother specified requirements.


A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter that couldadversely affect bond of firestopping material.

B. Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond.C. Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions, completely closing openings.B. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authorities having jurisdiction.C. Install labeling required by code.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20E814





















3.04 CLEANINGA. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.









......

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 07 9005 - 11515 08.29.2016 JOINT SEALERS

SECTION 07 9005JOINT SEALERS


A. Sealants and joint backing.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 6116 - VOC Content Restrictions.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate the work with other sections referencing this section.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics.C. Samples: Submit color charts depicting accurate representations of manufacturer's standard

colors for each product submitted. Architect to select from manufacturer's standard colors.D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience.B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with

minimum three years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and afterinstallation.

1.08 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight

seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.D. Provide cost of separate warranty from installer covering labor for repairs or replacement for all

exterior joints for a period of not less than 2 years for Owner and Contractor review/acceptance.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Low Modulus Silicone Sealants:1. Dow Corning Corporation; Product # 790: www.dowcorning.com2. Pecora Corporation; Product # 890: www.pecora.com3. Tremco, Inc., an RPM Company; Product SpecTrem 1: www.tremcosealants.com

B. Medium Modulus Silicone Sealants:1. Dow Corning Corporation; Product # 795: www.dowcorning.com2. Pecora Corporation; Product # 895: www.pecora.com.3. Tremco, Inc., an RPM Company; Product SpecTrem 2: www.tremcosealants.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Medium Modulus Silicone Sealant for use at stone:1. Dow Corning Corporation; Product # 756: www.dowcorning.com.2. Tremco, Inc., an RPM Company; Product SpecTrem 3: www.tremcosealants.com.


3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.D. Multi-Part, Non-Sag Polyurethane Sealant:

1. Tremco, Inc., an RPM Company; Product Vulkem 227: www.tremcosealants.com.2. Pecora Corporation; Product Dynatrol II: www.pecora.com.3. BASF Building Systems; Product Sonolastic NP-2: www.buildingsystems.basf.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

E. Silicone Bath Sealant for Wet Areas:1. Dow Corning Corporation; Product 786 Mildew-Resistant Silicone: www.dowcorning.com.2. General Electric Company; Silicone Products Department; Product Sanitary 1700 Silicone

Sealant: www.siliconeforbuilding.com.3. Pecora Corporation; Product #898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant: www.pecora.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

F. Two-Part Polyurethane Sealant for Horizontal Traffic-Bearing Pavements:1. BASF Building Systems; Product Sonolastic SL2: www.buildingsystems.basf.com.2. Pecora Corporation; Product Urexpan NR-200: www.pecora.com.3. Tremco, Inc., an RPM Company; Product Vulkem 245/255 or THC-900/THC-901:

www.tremcosealants.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

G. Paintable Acyrlic-Latex Caulking Compound:1. BASF Building Systems; Product Sonolastic Sonolac: www.buildingsystems.basf.com2. Bostik, Inc.; Product Chem-Calk Painter's Calk: www.bostik-us.com.3. Pecora Corporation; Product AC-20 Acrylic Latex: www.pecora.com.4. Tremco, Inc., an RPM Company; Product Tremflex 834: www.tremcosealants.com5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

H. Acrylic Sealant:1. Bostik, Inc.; Product Chem-Calk 600: www.bostik-us.com.2. Pecora Corporation; Product AVW-920: www.percora.com.3. Tremco, Inc., an RPM Company; Product Mono 555: www.tremcosealants.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 SEALANTSA. Sealants and Primers - General: Provide products having volatile organic compound (VOC)

content as specified in Section 01 6116.B. Low Modulus Silicone Sealant:

1. Type: One-part, low modulus silicone rubber; meeting ASTM C920-05, Type S, Grade NS,Class 25.

2. Colors: Standard colors as selected by Architect.C. Medium Modulus Silicone Sealant:

1. Type: One-part medium modulus silicone rubber; meeting ASTM C920-05, Type S, GradeNS, Class 25.

2. Colors: Standard colors as selected by Architect.D. Medium Modulus Silicone Sealant for use at stone veneer:

1. Type: One-part, medium modulus silicone rubber; meeting ASTM C920-05, Type S, GradeNS, Class 50.

2. Colors: Standard colors as selected by Architect.E. Multi-Part, Non-Sag Polyurethane Sealant:

1. Type: Two-part, polyurethane-based sealant with separate pre-packaged color agent toachieve special colors required; meeting ASTM C920-08, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25.

2. Colors: Standard colors as selected by Architect.F. Silicone Bath Sealant for Wet Areas:

1. Type: One-part silicone rubber, mildew- and stain-resistant.2. Color; White or off-white, as selected by Architect.


G. Two-Part Polyurethane Sealant for Horizontal Traffic-Bearing Pavements:1. Type: Two-component polyurethane sealant for horizontal traffic-bearing surfaces meeting

ASTM C920-05, Type M, Grade P or NS, Class 25; non-sag.2. Colors: Standard colors as selected by Architect.

H. Paintable Acyrlic-Latex Caulking Compound:1. Characteristics: Flexible, paintable, non-staining, non-bleeding acrylic emulsion.

I. Acrylic Sealant:1. Type: One-part, acrylic polymer sealant.2. Colors: Standard colors as selected by Architect.

2.03 ACCESSORIESA. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer;

compatible with joint forming materials.C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC;

oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit

application.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193.D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of

surfaces and material installation instructions.B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.C. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck

dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specificdimensions are indicated.

D. No exterior joint with backer rod smaller than 3/4" shall be installed without written approval ofthe Architect.

E. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.G. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer

when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.H. Tool joints concave.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Protect sealants until cured.


3.06 SCHEDULEA. Exterior and interior joints at perimeter of windows/storefront: Medium modulus silicone sealant.B. Interior concealed bedding joints and thresholds: Acrylic sealant.C. Exterior and interior horizontal traffic-bearing joints, excluding tile floor joints: Two-part

polyurethane sealant.D. Firestopped joints: Firestop sealant as specified in Firestopping section.E. Typical interior joints and seams at abutting and adjacent materials except as specified herein:

Acrylic-latex caulking compound.F. Interior joints in conjunction with vanities, fixtures and tile finishes except solid surfacing:

Silicone bath sealant.END OF SECTION 07 9005

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 08 1213 - 11515 08.29.2016 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

SECTION 08 1213HOLLOW METAL FRAMES


A. Non-fire-rated hollow metal frames for non-hollow metal doors.B. Fire-rated hollow metal frames for non-hollow metal doors.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.B. ANSI/SDI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel

Doors, Frames and Frame Anchors; 2011.C. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames (SDI-100); 2014.D. ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces

for Steel Doors and Frames; 2011.E. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.F. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,

Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2015.

G. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, andUltra-High Strength; 2014.

H. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2009.I. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition.J. NAAMM HMMA 830 - Hardware Selection for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2002.K. NAAMM HMMA 831 - Hardware Locations for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2011.L. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors

and Frames; 2007.M. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2016.N. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.O. UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations,

reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes.C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and

identifying location of different finishes, if any.1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified inthis section with minimum three years of documented experience.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Store in accordance with applicable requirements and in compliance with standards and/or

custom guidelines as indicated.B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion.



A. Hollow Metal Frames with Integral Casings:1. Ceco Door, an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com.2. Republic Doors: www.republicdoor.com.3. Steelcraft, an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 DESIGN CRITERIAA. Door Frame Type: Provide hollow metal door frames with integral casings.B. Steel used for fabrication of frames shall comply with one or more of the following requirements;

Galvannealed steel conforming to ASTM A653/A653M, cold-rolled steel conforming to ASTMA1008/A1008M, or hot-rolled pickled and oiled (HRPO) steel conforming to ASTMA1011/A1011M, Commercial Steel (CS) Type B for each.

C. Accessibility: Comply with ICC A117.1 and ADA Standards.D. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more

than one type of requirement, comply with the specified requirements for each type; forinstance, an exterior frame that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with therequirements specified for exterior frames and for sound-rated frames; where two requirementsconflict, comply with the most stringent.

E. Hardware Preparations, Selections and Locations: Comply with NAAMM HMMA 830 andNAAMM HMMA 831 or ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100) in accordance with specified requirements.

2.03 HOLLOW METAL DOOR FRAMES WITH INTEGRAL CASINGSA. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire Rated: Full profile/continuously welded type.

1. Based on SDI Standards: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100).a. Level 3 - Extra Heavy-duty.b. Physical Performance Level A, 1,000,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI

A250.4.c. Frame Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.053 inch, minimum.

B. Fire-Rated Door Frames: Full profile/continuously welded type.1. Based on SDI Standards: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100).

a. Level 3 - Extra Heavy-duty.b. Physical Performance Level A, 1,000,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI

A250.4.c. Frame Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.053 inch, minimum.

2. Fire Rating: As indicated on Door and Frame Schedule, tested in accordance with UL 10Cor NFPA 252 ("positive pressure fire tests").

3. Provide units listed and labeled by ITS (DIR) or UL (DIR).a. Attach fire rating label to each fire rated unit.

4. Frame Finish: Factory primed and field finished.2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on centermullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions.

2.05 FINISHESA. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.


https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20A1011/A1011M








http://www.naamm.org/






http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ANSI%20A250.4























C. Verify that finished walls are in plane to ensure proper door alignment.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and related requirements ofspecified frame standards or custom guidelines indicated.

B. Install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80.C. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.D. Coordinate installation of hardware.E. Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items.F. Touch up damaged factory finishes.

3.03 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edges, crossed corner to

corner.END OF SECTION 08 1213
















......

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 08 1416 - 11515 08.29.2016 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

SECTION 08 1416FLUSH WOOD DOORS


A. Flush wood doors; flush configuration; fire rated and non-rated.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 08 8000 - Glazing.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014.B. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2016.C. UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.D. UL 1784 - Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All

Revisions.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and

characteristics.C. Shop Drawings: Show doors, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts, beveling, blocking for

hardware, factory machining, factory finishing, cutouts for glazing and other details.D. Specimen warranty.E. Samples: Submit two samples of door veneer, 8 by 10 inch in size illustrating wood grain, stain

color, and sheen.F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions.G. Warranty, executed in Owner's name.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Maintain one copy of the specified door quality standard on site for review during installation and

finishing.B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum three years of documented experience.C. Installed Fire Rated Door and Transom Panel Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire-rating as

indicated.1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard.B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or

wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges withtinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.

1.07 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation.C. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances,

defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.



A. Wood Veneer Faced Doors:1. Eggers Industries: www.eggersindustries.com.2. Haley Brothers: www.haleybros.com.3. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc: www.marshfielddoors.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 DOORS AND PANELSA. Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements.

1. Quality Level: Custom Grade, Heavy Duty performance, in accordance withAWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS).

2. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated.B. Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction.

1. Provide solid core doors at each location.2. Fire Rated Doors: Tested to 20 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, and ratings as indicated

on drawings in accordance with UL 10C - Positive Pressure; Underwriters LaboratoriesInc. (UL) or Intertek/Warnock Hersey (WHI) labeled without any visible seals when door isopen.

3. Smoke and Draft Control Doors (Indicated as "S" on Drawings): In addition to required firerating, provide door assemblies tested in accordance with UL 1784 with maximum airleakage of 3.0 cfm per sq ft of door opening at 0.10 inch wg pressure at both ambient andelevated temperatures for "S" label; if necessary, provide additional gasketing or edgesealing.

4. Wood veneer facing with factory transparent finish.2.03 DOOR AND PANEL CORES

A. Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core (PC), plies andfaces as indicated.

B. Fire Rated Doors: Mineral core type, with fire resistant composite core (FD), plies and faces asindicated above; with core blocking as required to provide adequate anchorage of hardwarewithout through-bolting.

2.04 DOOR FACINGSA. Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish: To match existing building door veneer, veneer grade in

accordance with quality standard indicated, plain sliced (flat cut), with book match betweenleaves of veneer, running match of spliced veneer leaves assembled on door or panel face.1. Vertical Edges: Any option allowed by quality standard for grade.2. "Running Match" each pair of doors and doors in close proximity to each other.

2.05 ACCESSORIESA. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 8000.B. Glazing Stops: Wood, of same species as door facing, butted corners; prepared for countersink

style tamper proof screws.2.06 DOOR CONSTRUCTION

A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified.B. Cores Constructed with stiles and rails:

1. Provide solid blocks at lock edge for hardware reinforcement.2. Provide solid blocking for other throughbolted hardware.

C. Where supplementary protective edge trim is required, install trim after veneer facing has beenapplied full-width.

D. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance withhardware requirements and dimensions.


E. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edgeclearances in accordance with specified quality standard.

F. Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified.2.07 FACTORY FINISHING - WOOD VENEER DOORS

A. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS), Section 5 - Finishing for gradespecified and as follows:1. Transparent:

a. System - 11, Polyurethane, Catalyzed.b. Stain: As selected by Architect.c. Sheen: Satin.

B. Factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample.C. Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or

alignment.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard.1. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 requirements.

B. Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door.C. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware.D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.E. Coordinate installation of glazing.

3.03 TOLERANCESA. Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances.B. Conform to specified quality standard for telegraphing, warp, and squareness.

3.04 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.B. Adjust closers for full closure.


......

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 08 3326 - 11515 08.29.2016 SIDE SLIDIING GRILLES

SECTION 08 3326SIDE SLIDIING GRILLES


A. Side sliding metal grilles and operating hardware, manual operation.1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide general construction, component connections and details.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and

installation details.D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation sequence and procedures,

adjustment and alignment procedures.E. Maintenance Data: Indicate lubrication requirements and frequency and periodic adjustments

required.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Side Sliding Grilles:1. Alpine Overhead Doors, Inc: www.alpinedoors.com.2. Cornell Iron Works, Inc: www.cornelliron.com.3. Basis of Design: The Cookson Company; Classic 126: www.cooksondoor.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 GRILLE AND COMPONENTSA. Grille: Aluminum; bar curtain.

1. Finish: Anodized, clear color.2. Mounting: Within framed opening.

B. Curtain: Round vertical and flat horizontal bars connected with links.1. Horizontal bars: 1/8 inch by 5/8 inch.2. Vertical bars: 5/16 inch diameter.3. Bar spacing: 12 inch on center vertically.4. Tube spacers: 7/16 inch diameter.5. Link spacing: 6 inch on center.6. Top and Bottom Bar: 2 inch truss like plates.

C. Lock Hardware:1. Members are to be vertical stiles fabricated from rectangular tubing 1.3” x 2.4”. Members

using floor bolts include dust free, stainless top floor sockets.2. Lead and trailing end members are to be cylinder controlled lock stiles with self-adjusting,

cold rolled steel floor bolts and top bolts through the top of the track into the support.3. Intermediate locking members with cold rolled steel floor bolts are supplied for (up to)

every 10’-0” of curtain.4. Bipart assemblies are supplied as required. One lock member will retain a hookbolt

deadlock activated by keyed or thumbturn cylinders. A second intermediate lockingmember with a steel floor bolt shall include a full height channel to accept the hookboltdeadlock.

D. Track:1. Overhead track is to be 1.3” wide x 1.8” high and is to accept 1-1/8” diameter roller trolleys.

Rollers are to bear on 0.27” thick aluminum surface within the track. Track curves, whereindicated, are to have 10” or 14” radii.

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 08 3326 - 21515 08.29.2016 SIDE SLIDIING GRILLES

2.03 MATERIALSA. Aluminum: 6063 aluminum with T-5 temper.

2.04 FINISHA. Factory finishes are to be: 0.0004” clear anodizing.

2.05 WEIGHT AND STACKINGA. Grille weights are to be expressed in lbs./sq. ft. and kg/sq.m of clear opening: 1.2 lbs./sq. ft.B. Minimum stacking shall be 1.05”/linear foot of opening plus 3.5” for each locking member.C. Grille support must be able to carry the weight of a fully stacked door at any point along its

length. Support is to carry the total weight / the total stacking.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install grille unit assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing

without distortion or stress.C. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure.D. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation.

3.03 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust grille, hardware and operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Clean grille and components.B. Remove labels and visible markings.


J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 08 4313 - 11515 08.29.2016 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS

SECTION 08 4313ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS


A. Aluminum-framed storefront, with vision glass.B. Aluminum doors and frames.C. Weatherstripping.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Hardware items other than specified in this section.B. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; 2015.B. AAMA 501.2 - Field Check of Metal Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems for

Water Leakage; 2009.C. AAMA 609 & 610 - Cleaning and Maintenance Guide for Architecturally Finished Aluminum

(Combined Document); 2015.D. AAMA 612 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements, and Test Procedures for

Combined Coatings of Anodic Oxide and Transparent Organic Coatings on ArchitecturalAluminum; 2015.

E. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014.F. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

[Metric]; 2014.G. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014.H. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2013.I. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior

Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across theSpecimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012).

J. ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2014.

K. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2009).

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly,

anchorage and fasteners and glass and infill.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances,

affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field weldingrequired.

D. Samples: Submit two samples 12 inches long illustrating finished aluminum surface.E. Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics, engineering

calculations, and dimensional limitations.F. Hardware Schedule: Complete itemization of each item of hardware to be provided for each

door, cross-referenced to door identification numbers in Contract Documents.G. Report of field testing for water leakage.


H. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner'sname and registered with manufacturer.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Designer Qualifications: Design structural support framing components under direct

supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work andlicensed in the State in which the Project is located.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified andwith at least three years of documented experience.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10.B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed

coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather.1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain thisminimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation.

1.08 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish.

Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 BASIS OF DESIGN -- FRAMING FOR INSULATING GLAZING

A. Center-Set Style, Thermally-Broken:1. Basis of Design: YKK AP America Inc.; YES 45 XT: www.ykkap.com.2. Vertical Mullion Dimensions: 2 inches wide by 4-1/2 inches deep.

B. Other Manufacturers: Provide either the product identified as "Basis of Design" or an equivalentproduct of one of the manufacturers listed below:1. C.R. Laurence Co., Inc.; U.S. Aluminum: www.crl-arch.com.2. Kawneer: www.kawneer.com.3. Old Castle Building Envelope: www.obe.com.

C. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.1. For any product not identified as "Basis of Design", submit information as specified for

substitutions.2.02 BASIS OF DESIGN -- SWINGING DOORS

A. Medium Stile, Insulating Glazing, Thermally-Broken:1. Basis of Design: YKK AP America Inc.; MegaTherm 35XT: www.ykkap.com.2. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.

B. Other Manufacturers: Provide either the product identified as "Basis of Design" or an equivalentproduct of one of the manufacturers listed below:1. C.R. Laurence Co., Inc.; U.S. Aluminum: www.crl-arch.com.2. Kawneer: www.kawneer.com.3. Old Castle Building Envelope: www.obe.com.

C. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.1. For any product not identified as "Basis of Design", submit information as specified for

substitutions.2.03 STOREFRONT

A. Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing memberswith infill, anchorage and attachment devices.


1. Glazing Rabbet: For 1 inch insulating glazing.2. Glazing Rabbet: For 1/4 inch monolithic glazing.3. Finish: Class I natural anodized.

a. Factory finish all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies.b. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or

dissimilar metals with bituminous paint.4. Finish Color: Black.5. Fabrication: Joints and corners flush, hairline, and weatherproof, accurately fitted and

secured; prepared to receive anchors and hardware; fasteners and attachments concealedfrom view; reinforced as required for imposed loads.

6. Construction: Eliminate noises caused by wind and thermal movement, prevent vibrationharmonics, and prevent "stack effect" in internal spaces.

7. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network anywater entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moistureoccurring within system.

8. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system componentscaused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period withoutcausing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other buildingelements.

9. Movement: Allow for movement between storefront and adjacent construction, withoutdamage to components or deterioration of seals.

10. Perimeter Clearance: Minimize space between framing members and adjacentconstruction while allowing expected movement.

11. Air and Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughoutassembly, primarily in line with inside pane of glazing and heel bead of glazing compound.

B. Performance Requirements:1. Wind Loads: Design and size components to withstand the specified load requirements

without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M,using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load.a. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of applicable code.b. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction,

with full recovery of glazing materials.2. Water Penetration Resistance: No uncontrolled water on interior face, when tested in

accordance with ASTM E331 at pressure differential of 8 psf.3. Air Leakage: Maximum of 0.06 cu ft/min sq ft of wall area, when tested in accordance with

ASTM E283 at 6.27 psf pressure differential across assembly.2.04 COMPONENTS

A. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections.1. Framing members for interior applications need not be thermally broken.2. Glazing Stops: Flush.

B. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 8000.C. Swing Doors: Glazed aluminum.

1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.2. Top Rail: 4 inches wide.3. Vertical Stiles: 4-1/2 inches wide.4. Bottom Rail: 8 inches wide.5. Glazing Stops: Square.6. Finish: Same as storefront.

2.05 MATERIALSA. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M); for use as aluminum closure plates between

adjacent storefront window mullions and provided by Storefront Manufacturer.



















1. Thickness: 1/8" material.C. Fasteners: Stainless steel.D. Exposed Flashings: Aluminum sheet, 20 gage, 0.032 inch minimum thickness; finish to match

framing members.E. Concealed Flashings: Sheet aluminum, 26 gage, 0.017 inch minimum thickness.F. Sill Flashing Sealant: Elastomeric, silicone or polyurethane, compatible with flashing material.G. Sealant for Setting Thresholds: Non-curing butyl type.H. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application.I. Glazing Accessories: As specified in Section 08 8000.

2.06 FINISHESA. Color Anodized Finish with Organic Seal: AAMA 612 Electrolytically deposited colored anodic

coating with non-aqueous electro-deposited organic seal; not less 0.7 mils.2.07 HARDWARE

A. For each door, include weatherstripping, sill sweep strip, and threshold.B. Other Door Hardware: As specified in Section 08 7100.C. Weatherstripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable; provide on all doors.D. Sill Sweep Strips: Resilient seal type, retracting, of neoprene; provide on all doors.E. Threshold: Extruded aluminum, one piece per door opening, ribbed surface; provide on all

doors.F. Hinges: Provide continuous aluminum or stainless steel piano hinge at storefront doors.


A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work.B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of

this section.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and

other irregularities.C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure.D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional

tolerances, aligning with adjacent work.E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam.G. Where fasteners penetrate sill flashings, make watertight by seating and sealing fastener heads

to sill flashing.H. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of

thermal barrier.I. Set thresholds in bed of sealant and secure.J. Install glass in accordance with Section 08 8000, using glazing method required to achieve

performance criteria.K. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be

satisfactorily repaired.















































3.03 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft,

whichever is less.B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for independent testing and inspection

requirements. Inspection will monitor quality of installation and glazing.B. Test installed storefront for water leakage in accordance with AAMA 501.2.

3.05 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation.

3.06 CLEANINGA. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.B. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean aluminum surfaces in accordance with AAMA

609 & 610.3.07 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage until Date of Substantial Completion.END OF SECTION 08 4313
















http://www.aamanet.org/general.asp?sect=2&id=45




......

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 08 4413 - 11515 08.29.2016 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS

SECTION 08 4413GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS


A. Aluminum-framed curtain wall, with vision glazing and glass infill panels.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Steel attachment members.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; 2015.B. AAMA 609 & 610 - Cleaning and Maintenance Guide for Architecturally Finished Aluminum

(Combined Document); 2015.C. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for

Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013.D. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014.E. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2013.F. ASTM C661 - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Elastomeric-Type Sealants by

Means of a Durometer; 2006 (Reapproved 2011).G. ASTM C793 - Standard Test Method for Effects of Laboratory Accelerated Weathering on

Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2005 (Reapproved 2010).H. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.I. ASTM C1087 - Standard Test Method for Determining Compatibility of Liquid-Applied Sealants

with Accessories Used in Structural Glazing Systems; 2000 (Reapproved 2011).J. ASTM C1135 - Standard Test Method for Determining Tensile Adhesion Properties of Structural

Sealants; 2000 (Reapproved 2011).K. ASTM C1184 - Standard Specification for Structural Silicone Sealants; 2014.L. ASTM C1249 - Standard Guide for Secondary Seal for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for

Structural Sealant Glazing Applications; 2006 (Reapproved 2010).M. ASTM C1401 - Standard Guide for Structural Sealant Glazing; 2014.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly,

anchorage and fasteners, internal drainage details, glazing, and infill.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances,

affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field weldingrequired.

D. Shop Drawings: Provide details of proposed structural sealant glazing (SSG) and weathersealant joints indicating dimensions, materials, bite, thicknesses, profile, and support framing.

E. Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics and engineeringcalculations, and identify dimensional limitations; include load calculations at points ofattachment to building structure.

F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner'sname and registered with manufacturer.


1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Designer Qualifications: Design structural support framing components under direct

supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work andlicensed at the State in which the Project is located.

B. Verify that each component is appropriate for use in structural sealant glazing (SSG) applicationin regards to at least the following properties; size, shape, dimensions, material, self-life,storage conditions, and color.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in thissection with not less than three years of documented experience.

D. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified and with atleast three years of documented experience and approved by manufacturer.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10.B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed

coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather.1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain thisminimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation.

1.08 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units,

including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 BASIS OF DESIGN

A. Four (4)-Sided Structural Sealant Glazing (SSG):1. Basis of Design: YKK AP America, Inc.: YCW 750 SSG; www.ykkap.com.

B. Other Manufacturers: Provide either product identified as "Basis of Design" or an equivalentproduct of one of the manufacturers listed below.1. C.R. Laurence Co, Inc; U.S. Aluminum: www.crl-arch.com.2. Kawneer North America; www.kawneer.com.3. Old Castle Building Envelope; www.obe.com.

C. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.2.02 CURTAIN WALL

A. Aluminum-Framed Curtain Wall: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framingmembers with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.1. Structural sealant glazing (SSG) adhesive on four (4)-sides.2. Fabrication Method: Either shop/factory or field fabricated system.3. Glazing Method: Field glazed system.4. Vertical Mullion Depth From Face of Glazing to Back of Frame: 6-1/4 inches.5. Finish: Superior performing organic coatings.

a. Factory finish surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies.b. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in

completed assemblies, including joint edges.c. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or

dissimilar metals with bituminous paint.6. Provide flush joints and corners, weathersealed, accurately fitted and secured; prepared to

receive anchors; fasteners and attachments concealed from view; reinforced as requiredfor imposed loads.


7. Construction: Eliminate noises caused by wind and thermal movement, prevent vibrationharmonics, and prevent "stack effect" in internal spaces.

8. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network anywater entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moistureoccurring within system.

9. Perimeter Clearance: Minimize space between framing members and adjacentconstruction while allowing expected movement.

B. Structural Performance Requirements: Design and size components to withstand the followingload requirements without damage or permanent set.1. Design Wind Loads: Comply with the applicable code.2. Movement: Accommodate the following movement without damage to components or

deterioration of seals:a. Expansion and contraction caused by 180 degrees F surface temperature.b. Expansion and contraction caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F

over a 12 hour period.c. Movement of curtain wall relative to perimeter framing.d. Deflection of structural support framing, under permanent and dynamic loads.

3. Structural Sealant Glazing (SSG) System: For individual glass lites, design framingmembers to not exceed a deflection normal to the wall of L/175 between supports with 3/4inch maximum, and a deflection parallel to the wall of L/360 with 1/8 inch maximum,whichever is less.

2.03 COMPONENTSA. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, drainage holes and internal weep

drainage system.1. Framing members for interior applications need not be thermally broken.2. Cross-Section: As indicated on drawings.

B. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 8000.2.04 MATERIALS

A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).B. Structural Supporting Anchors: See Section 05 1200.C. Structural Sealant Glazing (SSG) Adhesive: Neutral curing, silicone sealant formulated for SSG

applications in compliance with ASTM C1184 and structural glazing industry guidelines, ASTMC1401.1. SSG adhesive in compliance with ASTM C920; Type S - Single-component, Grade NS,

Class 50, Use NT, G, and A.2. Ultimate Tensile Strength: Minimum of 50 psi as determined by test method ASTM

C1135 under the following conditions.a. Exposure to air temperatures of 190 degrees F and minus 20 degrees F.b. Water immersion for seven (7) days, minimum.c. Exposure to weathering for 5,000 hours, minimum.

3. Sealant Design Tensile Strength: 20 psi, maximum.4. Hardness: 20 to 60 with Type A-2 durometer in compliance with test method ASTM C661.5. Shelf Life: Six (6) months, minimum.6. Color: Black.7. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: Less than 20 g/l.8. SSG sealant tested for compatibility with glazing accessories in compliance with ASTM

C1087, tested for accelerated weathering in compliance with ASTM C793, and incompliance with insulating glass secondary sealant design standards of ASTM C1249.

D. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltrationrequirements.

E. Glazing Accessories: As specified in Section 08 8000.

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20C1401




















2.05 FINISHESA. Superior Performing Organic Coatings: AAMA 2605 multiple coat, thermally cured

polyvinylidene fluoride system.1. Polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) multi-coat thermoplastic fluoropolymer coating system,

including minimum 70 percent PVDF color topcoat and minimum total dry film thickness of0.9 mil; color and gloss as indicated on drawings.


A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other related work.B. Verify that curtain wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive

work of this section.C. Verify that anchorage devices have been properly installed and located.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install curtain wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and

other irregularities.C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure.D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional

tolerances, aligning with adjacent work.E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam.G. Structural Sealant Glazing (SSG) Adhesive: Install structural sealant glazing adhesive and

weatherseal sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.H. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be

satisfactorily repaired.3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 0.5 inches per 100 ft,whichever is less.

B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch.C. Sealant Space Between Curtain Wall Mullions and Adjacent Construction: Maximum of 3/4 inch

and minimum of 1/4 inch.3.04 CLEANING

A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.B. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean aluminum surfaces in accordance with AAMA

609 & 610.3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage until Date of Substantial Completion.END OF SECTION 08 4413









































J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 08 4600 - 11515 08.29.2016 GLAZED INTERIOR WALL AND DOORASSEMBLIES

SECTION 08 4600GLAZED INTERIOR WALL AND DOOR ASSEMBLIES


A. Frameless glazed interior door assemblies.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless SteelSheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.

B. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.C. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011.D. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass;

2012.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature for each component in partition assembly.C. Shop Drawings: Drawings showing layout, dimensions, identification of components, and

interface with adjacent construction.D. Certificates: Contractor to certify that installer of partition assemblies meets specified

qualifications.E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For manufacturer-supplied operating hardware.F. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been

completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include complete preparation, installation, and cleaning

requirements.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: Minimum three years of experience designing, assembling, andinstalling partition assemblies similar to those specified in this section.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until installation.

1.07 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Correct defective Work within a one year period after Date of Substantial Completion.


A. Frameless Glazed Interior Door Assemblies:1. C.R. Laurence Co., Inc; www.crl-arch.com.2. DORMA USA, Inc.; www.dorma.com.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 FRAMELESS GLAZED INTERIOR WALL AND DOOR ASSEMBLIESA. Pivoting Glass Doors: Tubular profile hardware sets, without rail or patch fittings.

1. Door Configuration: As indicated on drawings.2. Type of Glass Mount: Surface mount.

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 08 4600 - 21515 08.29.2016 GLAZED INTERIOR WALL AND DOORASSEMBLIES

3. Door Weight: 176 lbs, maximum.4. Door Width: As scheduled, maximum.5. Door Height: As scheduled, maximum.6. Glass Thickness: 1/2 inch, tempered.7. Hardware Finish: Brushed stainless steel.8. Door Hardware: Refer to the Section 08 7100.9. Provide accessories as required for complete installation.

B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.2.03 MATERIALS

A. Glass: Flat glass meeting requirements of ASTM C1036, Type I - Transparent Flat Glass,Class 1 - Clear, Quality Q3, fully tempered in accordance with ASTM C1048, Kind FT, and asfollows:1. Thickness: 1/2 inch.2. Color: Clear.3. Temper glass materials horizontally; visible tong marks or tong mark distortions are not

permitted.B. Stainless Steel Components: Conforming to ASTM A666, Type 316 alloy.C. Sealant: One-part silicone sealant, conforming to ASTM C920, clear.


A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.B. Verify floor flatness of 1/8 inch in 10 feet, non-cumulative.C. Do not begin installation until supports and adjacent substrates have been properly prepared.D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates thoroughly prior to installation.B. Prepare substrates using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving

acceptable result for the substrate under the project conditions.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with glazed interior wall and door assembly manufacturer's instructions.B. Fit and align glazed interior wall and door assembly level and plumb.

3.04 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust glazed interior wall and door assembly to operate smoothly from sliding or pivoting

positions.3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean installed work to pristine condition.3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until Date of Substantial Completion.B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.


J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 08 7100 - 1 1515 08.29.2016 DOOR HARDWARE

SECTION 087100 DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Commercial door hardware for the following:

a. Swinging doors. b. Sliding doors. c. Folding doors. d. Other doors to the extent indicated.

2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections. 3. Electrified door hardware.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 081113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames." 2. Section 081416 "Flush Wood Doors." 3. Section 081433 "Stile and Rail Wood Doors." 4. Section 083113 "Access Doors and Frames." 5. Section 084113 "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts." 6. Section 084126 "All-Glass Entrances and Storefronts." 7. Section 28 “Electronic Safety and Security”

C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following. Coordinating,

purchasing, delivering, and scheduling remain requirements of this Section. 1. Final replacement cores and keys to be installed by Using Agency.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Standards of the following as referenced: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI) 3. Factory Mutual (FM) 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 5. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 6. Warnock Hersey (WHI) 7. International Building Code (IBC)

B. Regulatory Standards of the following as referenced:


1. Department of Justice, Office of the Attorney General, Americans with Disabilities Act, Public Law 101-336 (ADA).

2. COBO/ANSI A117.1: Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically Handicap People, 1992 edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware, indicating the following:

1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate

between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Include the following: a. System schematic. b. Point-to-point wiring diagram. c. Riser diagram. d. Elevation of each door.

2. Detail interface between electrified door hardware and fire alarm, and security system.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units

showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of door hardware indicated.

D. Samples: For exposed door hardware of each type indicated below, in specified finish, full size.

Tag with full description for coordination with the Door Hardware Schedule. Submit samples before, or concurrent with, submission of the final Door Hardware Schedule. 1. Door Hardware: As follows:

a. Miscellaneous items as requested by Architect.

2. Samples will be returned to Contractor. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final check of operation, be incorporated into the Work, within limitations of keying requirements.

E. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication

and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and

Format for the Hardware Schedule." Hardware schedule to be submitted in 8-1/2” x 11” size.

2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. a. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Schedule at

the end of Part 3.

3. Content: Include the following information:


a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. If submitting products other than those specified,

provide a complete cross-reference to products specified and products submitted.

c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor

plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Schedule each floor separately (i.e. schedule the entire first floor, then second

floor, then third floor, etc.) f. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. g. Mounting locations for door hardware. h. Door and frame sizes and materials. i. Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location,

sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems. 1) Sequence of Operation: Include description of component functions that

occur in the following situations: authorized person wants to enter; authorized person wants to exit; unauthorized person wants to enter; unauthorized person wants to exit.

4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.

5. Submittal Sequence: Submit initial draft of final schedule along with essential Product Data to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule after Samples, Product Data, coordination with Shop Drawings of other work, delivery schedules, and similar information has been completed and accepted.

F. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing Using Agency's final

keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations. Keying to be done by Armstrong State University.

G. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of electrified door hardware certifying that products

furnished comply with requirements. 1. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire doors

complies with listed fire door assemblies.

H. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. 1. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses of architects and

Using Agencys, and other information specified.

I. Compliance to UBC 7-2 (1997) parts 1 & 2 and IBC (2000): Where compliance is required, provide door hardware which has positive pressure certification and “S” labels; UL10C classified Edge Sealing System and UL1784 Smoke & Draft Control Gasketing. Gasketing (including intumescent types as required) is to be provided as part of the door, frame and door hardware assembly.


1. Provide installation instructions, certificates for compliance and labels for UBC Standard 7-2 (1997) parts 1 & 2 and IBC (2000) Positive Pressure and “S”. The certificate is to be used by the authority having jurisdiction for inspection.

J. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer

and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, indicating current products comply with requirements.

K. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals specified

in Division 1.

L. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Supplier Qualifications: Door hardware supplier with warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity and

who is or employs a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC), available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Using Agency about door hardware and keying. 1. Electrified Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: An experienced door hardware

supplier who has completed projects with electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance, and who is acceptable to manufacturer of primary materials. a. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for electrified door hardware, including

Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. 3. Positive Pressure Compliance Qualifications: For compliance to UBC 7-2 (1997) parts 1

& 2 and IBC (2000) for positive pressure and smoke and draft control; doors, frames and door hardware are to be supplied by a distributor licensed by a listing agency.

C. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by the Door

and Hardware Institute as an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) and who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. 1. Electrified Door Hardware Qualifications: Experienced in providing consulting services for

electrified door hardware installations.


D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware,

unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that are listed to perform electrical modifications, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, are acceptable.

E. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and

plans for future expansion. 2. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. Coordinate with Armstrong State University.

F. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to electrified door hardware including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in and other preparatory work performed by other

trades. 2. Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware. 3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's

personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Coordinate subparagraph below with Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" and

with "Field Quality Control" Article in this Section. Expand requirements to suit Project. 5. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures. 6. Other requirements and agenda items not listed in Division 01 Section "Project

Management and Coordination" to suit Project. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware

Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. 1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of recessed pivots and closers with floor construction. Cast anchoring inserts into concrete. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other


work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

C. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies, fire alarm system and detection devices and security systems.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Using Agency of other rights Using Agency may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace

components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.

C. Warranty Period: One year from date of Material Completion, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Warranty Period for Electrical Hardware: Two years from date of Material Completion.

E. Warranty Period for Exit Devices: Three years from date of Material Completion.

F. Warranty Period for Manual Closers: Ten years from date of Material Completion.

1. With reference to door closers, refer to “additional security” in Article B-20 of the General

Conditions and extend the guarantee period to ten (10) years from the date of the Final Certificate of the Architect.

2. The Contractor shall furnish a certificate executed by a representative of the manufacturer of the door closers that all closers have been inspected and adjusted, are operating as designed and have been installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Using Agency's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Date of Material Completion, provide six months' full maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door hardware operation. Provide parts and supplies as used in


the manufacture and installation of original products.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section, door

hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule, and the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3. 1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated. 2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of

operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated. 3. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive

qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3.

4. Specified manufacturer indicated with an asterisk (*). 2.2 HINGES

A. Hinges: 1. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. PBB* b. Bommer c. Hager

2. Characteristics:

a. Templates: Provide only template- produced units. b. Screws: Provide Phillips flat-head screws complying with the following

requirements: 1) For metal doors and frames install machine screws into drilled and

tapped holes. 2) For wood doors and frames install threaded-to-the-head wood screws. 3) For fire-rated wood doors install #12 x 13 inch, threaded-to-the-head

steel wood screws. 4) Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots.

c. Hinge pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows: 1) Out-Swing Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins. 2) Out-Swing Corridor Doors with Locks: Non-removable pins. 3) Interior Doors: Non-rising pins. 4) Tips: Flat button and matching plug. Finished to match leafs.


d. Size: Size hinges in accordance with specified manufacturer’s published

recommendations. e. Quantity: Furnish one pair of hinges for all doors up to 5'0" high. Furnish one

additional hinge for every 2½ feet or fraction thereof. f. Clearances: Furnish wide throw hinge widths that positions the door out further,

when open, than with a conventional hinge to clear applied trim on the frame or when doors are set in a deep reveal. Furnish raised barrel hinges for doors set in a deep reveal.

g. Materials: Provide non-ferrous hinges for use on all exterior doors and doors located in wet areas and in pool areas.

B. Continuous Hinges:

1. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. ABH* b. PBB c. Select Products

2. Characteristics:

a. Continuous gear hinges to be manufactured of extruded 6063-T6 aluminum alloy

with anodized finish, or factory painted finish as scheduled. b. All hinges are to be manufactured to template. Uncut hinges shall be non-

handed and shall be a pinless assembly of three interlocking extrusions applied to the full height of the door and frame without mortising.

c. Vertical door loads shall be carried on chemically lubricated polyacetal thrust bearings. The door and frame leaves shall be continually geared together for the entire hinge length and secured with a full cover channel. Hinge to operate to a full 180o.

d. Hinges to be milled, anodized and assembled in matching pairs. Fasteners supplied shall be 410 stainless steel, plated and hardened.

2.3 CYLINDERS AND KEYING

A. Cylinders: 1. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. Best Lock Company*

2. Characteristics:

a. All locks to be master keyed to Best Locking Systems incorporating the

interchangeable core. b. All cores are to be of a seven pin design, and shall be instantly interchangeable


without adaptation or modification into the core housings for mortise locks, rim locks, cylindrical locks, padlocks, letter file cabinet lock, cabinet door locks, storage cabinet handle locks, and any other types or applications included in the MASTER KEY system.

c. The interchangeable core shall be removable with a control key which shall have an operating shear line for the control key involving all seven barrels. Such shear line shall be operable with the control key cuts different from the cost of the grandmaster key, in every barrel cut.

d. The grandmaster, master, sub-master, and operating keys shall operate a shear line independent of the control shear line.

e. The core shall have the capability of exposing single barrels for recombinations (i.e., each barrel shall be independently capped).

f. All cores and keys shall be marked per Using Agency specifications. g. All keyed cylinders shall be provided with Best Locking Systems construction

cores for use by the Contractor during the construction period. Brass construction cores shall be used for all exterior doors. Plastic construction cores are permitted on the interior doors.

h. All locks shall be grandmaster keyed and master keyed to the specifications of the Using Agency. All permanent cores, together with all their keys, shall be shipped directly to the Using Agency only. The permanent cores are to be the same finish as specified for the locksets.

i. Furnish twenty (20) operating keys and two (2) control keys for use with the construction cores.

j. Prior to including the cost of Best Cylinders on any periodical estimate and in any event prior to making demand for final payment, the Contractor shall deliver to the Using Agency a “certificate and receipt” in the following exact language:

CERTIFICATE AND RECEIPT

This will certify (a) that the permanent cores for the doors designated in the contract documents for Project No. ______ on the Campus of ______________________ were delivered to the comptroller of the said Institution on ___________, 20___; that (b) all keys for permanent cores call for in the aforesaid contract documents were delivered to the aforesaid comptroller on the same date; and the (c) by reason of the fact that the cost of the aforesaid permanent cores and the aforesaid keys for the aforesaid permanent cores were included in the cost of the Best Mortise Cylinders (consisting of cylinder housing and construction core), no additional charge has been made or will be made by Best Universal Lock Company against the General Contractor, any Subcontractor, the Using Agency, or the institution for the aforesaid permanent cores or the aforesaid keys for the aforesaid permanent cores. This certificate is furnished in consideration of $1.00 and other good and valuable consideration the receipt of which is hereby acknowledged.


This ________day of __________________, 20_____. BEST UNIVERSAL LOCK COMPANY BY: ________________________________________ Factory Representative **** This receipt, made on behalf of the __________________ will acknowledge receipt of the permanent cores and the keys to the said permanent cores as referred to in the above certificate of BEST UNIVERSAL LOCK COMPANY. _____________________________ Comptroller, __________________ _____________________________ Neither the Using Agency, the General Contractor, nor any Subcontractor shall be accountable to Best Universal Lock Company for construction cores. The Contractor shall have no responsibility for installing permanent cores. The contract between the General Contractor and the supplier of the Best Cylinders (consisting of cylinder housing and construction cores) shall include provisions (a) imposing upon Best Lock Company the obligation to obtain and deliver to the General Contractor the “certificate and receipt” set forth hereinabove and (b) relieving the General Contractors, Subcontractors, and the Using Agency from an obligation to deliver construction cores to Best Universal Lock Company. 2.4 LOCKSETS AND LATCHSETS

A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Best Lock Company* 2. Schlage Lock Company 3. Sargent

B. Characteristics:

1. Heavy Duty Cylindrical and Mortise Locks/Latches:

a. Chassis: cold-rolled steel, handing field-changeable without disassembly

(cylindrical). b. Latchbolts: 3/4-inch throw stainless steel anti-friction type (mortise). c. Lever Trim: through-bolted, accessible design, cast or solid rod lever as

scheduled. Spindles: independent break-away. d. Thumbturns: accessible design not requiring pinching or twisting motions to

operate. e. Deadbolts: stainless steel 1-inch throw (mortise). f. Strikes: 16 gage curved stainless steel, bronze or brass with 1" deep box


construction, lips of sufficient length to clear trim and protect clothing. g. Scheduled Lock Series and Design: Best 45H series and 93K series, design as

selected by the Architect.

2.5 EXIT DEVICES

A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Detex* 2. Sargent 3. Von Duprin

B. Characteristics:

1. Exit devices to be “UL” listed for life safety. All exit devices for fire rated openings to have

“UL”labels for “Fire Exit Hardware”. 2. Exit devices mounted on labeled wood doors to be mounted on the door in accordance

with the door manufacturer’s requirements. 3. All exit devices are to have ramped end caps. 4. All exit devices are to be stainless steel. Outside trim if not available in stainless steel

shall be furnished in brushed chrome. 5. All exit devices are to be furnished with a Physical Vapor Deposition (PVD) coating to

prevent corrosion, fading, chipping, scratching or discoloring. 6. All exit devices are to have plastic mounting plates for installation in lieu of paper

templates. 7. Provide glass bead conversion kits to shim exit devices on doors with raised glass beads. 8. All exit devices to be non-handed. Touchpad to extend a minimum of 1/2 of the door

width. 9. Lever trim to be solid case material with a break-away feature to limit damage to the unit

from vandalism. 10. Furnish security screws and fasteners as indicated. 11. Vertical rod devices are to have top and bottom rods which are assembled outside of the

door, which provides a visual check of the latch adjustment. The complete assembly shall be installed through the top of the door. a. Push pads are to be removable with the internal assembly installed in the door

with no loss of adjustment. b. The device is to accommodate up to 1-1/2” gap under door. c. The device is to have top strikes which accommodate up and down and in and

out lateral adjustments for varying thickness of weather stripping. d. The device is to have multiple hold back retraction positions to prevent the

bottom rod from dragging on the floor. e. The device is to accommodate door heights from 6’8” to 8’0”.

2.6 CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES

A. Acceptable manufacturers:


1. LCN Closers* 2. Norton 3. Sargent

B. Characteristics standard closers:

1. Door closers shall have fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with a high strength

cast iron cylinder. 2. Spring power shall be continuously adjustable over the full range of closer sizes, and

allow for reduced opening force for the physically handicapped. Hydraulic regulation shall be by tamper-proof, non-critical valves. Closers shall have separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed and back check.

3. All closers shall have solid forged steel main arms (and forearms for parallel arm closers) and where specified shall have a cast-in solid stop on the closer shoe ("cush"). Where door travel on out-swing doors must be limited, use "cush" type closers. Auxiliary stops are not required when cush type closers are used.

4. Access-Free Manual Closers: Where manual closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped. Provide adjustable units complying with ADA and ANSI A-117.1 provisions for door opening force.

5. Closers to be installed to allow door swing as shown on plans. Doors swinging into exit corridors shall provide for corridor clear width as required by code. Where possible, mount closers inside rooms.

2.7 OVERHEAD DOOR HOLDERS

A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. ABH* 2. Glynn Johnson 3. Rixson

B. Characteristics:

1. Provide heavy duty and medium duty door holders concealed and surface mounted of stainless steel.

2. Concealed holders to be installed with the jamb bracket mortised flush with the bottom of the jamb. The arm and channel to be mortised into the door.

3. Surface holder to be installed with the jamb bracket mounted on the stop.

2.8 FLOOR STOPS AND WALL BUMPERS

A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Trimco* 2. Burns 3. Hiawatha

B. Characteristics:


1. Provide types as indicated in Hardware Headings.

2.9 DOOR BOLTS AND COORDINATORS

A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Trimco* 2. Burns 3. Hiawatha

B. Characteristics:

1. Flush bolts to be forged brass 6-3/4" x 1", with 1/2" diameter bolts. Plunger to be

supplied with milled surface one side which fits into a matching guide. 2. Automatic flush bolts to be UL listed as top and bottom bolts on a pair of classified fire

doors. Bolt construction to be of rugged steel and brass components. 3. Coordinator to be soffit mounted non-handed fully automatic UL listed coordinating

device for sequential closing of paired doors with or without astragals. 4. Provide filler pieced to close the header. Provide brackets as required for mounting of

soffit applied hardware.

2.10 PUSH-PULLS, DOOR PULLS AND PROTECTION PLATES

A. Push Plates: 1. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. Trimco* b. Burns c. Hiawatha

2. Characteristics:

a. Exposed Fasteners: Provide manufacturers standard exposed fasteners. b. Material to be stainless steel, per the hardware headings. c. Provide plated sized as shown in Hardware Headings.

B. Door Pulls & Pull Plates:



2. Characteristics:


a. Provide concealed thru-bolted trim on back to back mounted pulls, but not for single units.

b. Material to be stainless steel. c. Provide units sized as shown in Hardware Headings.

C. Push-Pull Sets:



2. Characteristics:

a. Provide mounting systems as shown in hardware sets. b. Material to be stainless steel. c. Provide Push/Pull sets sized as shown in Hardware Headings.

D. Protective Plates:



2. Characteristics:

a. Provide manufacturers standard exposed fasteners for door trim units consisting

of either machine screws or self-tapping screws. All four edges are to be beveled (B4E) and to have counter sunk screws (CSK) for mounting.

b. Materials: 1) Metal Plates: Stainless Steel, .050 inch (U.S. 18 gage).

c. Fabricate protection plates 2 inches less than full door width on stop side and 1 inch less than full door width on hinge side.

d. Heights: 1) Kick plates to be 10 inches in height. 2) Mop plates to be 6 inches in height. 3) Armor plates to be 36 inches in height. Armor plates on fire doors to

comply with NFPA 80. 2.11 THRESHOLDS AND WEATHERSTRIP

A. Thresholds:


1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Reese Industries* b. National Guard Products, Inc. c. Zero Weatherstripping Co., Inc.

2. Characteristics:

a. Provide types as indicated in Hardware Headings.

B. Weatherstripping:


a. Reese Industries* b. National Guard Products, Inc. c. Zero Weatherstripping Co., Inc.

2. Characteristics:

a. Provide types as indicated in Hardware Headings.

2.12 SILENCERS

A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Glynn Johnson 2. Ives 3. Rockwood Manufacturing*

B. Three for each single door; two for each pair of doors.

2.14 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION

A. Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise acceptable to Architect. 1. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.

B. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using

manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI/BHMA A156 series standards for each type of hardware item and with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for finish designations indicated. Do not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified.

C. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally

prepared for machine screw installation.


1. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws,

except as specifically indicated. 2. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Philips flat-head screws

except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including "prepared for paint" surfaces to receive painted finish.

3. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of adequately fastening the hardware. Coordinate with wood doors and metal doors and frames where thru-bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners.

2.15 HARDWARE FINISHES

A. Match items to the manufacturer’s standard color and texture finish for the latch and lock sets (or push-pull units if no latch of lock sets).

B. Provide finishes that match those established by ANSI or, if none established, match the

Architect’s sample.

C. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer’s standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.

D. Provide protective lacquer coating on all exposed hardware finishes of brass, bronze, and

aluminum, except as otherwise indicated. The suffix "-NL" is used with standard finish designations to indicate "no lacquer."

E. The designations used to indicate hardware finishes are those listed in ANSI/BHMA A156.18,

"Materials and Finishes," including coordination with the traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products. 1. Hinges (Exterior) 630 (US32D) Satin Stainless Steel 2. Hinges (Interior wood doors) 652 (US26D) Satin Chrome Plated Steel 3. Hinges (Interior metal doors) 600 (USP) Prime Coat Paint 4. Continuous Hinges 628 (US28) Clear Anodized Aluminum 5. Flush Bolts 626 (US26D) Satin Chrome Plated

Brass/Bronze 6. Locks 630 (US32D) Satin Stainless Steel 7. Exit Devices 630 (US32d) Satin Stainless Steel 8. Door Closers/Operators White to match storefront 9. Push Plates 630 (US32D) Satin Stainless Steel 10. Pull Plates 630 (US32D) Satin Stainless Steel


11. Protective Plates 630 (US32D) Satin Stainless Steel 12. Door Stops - Floor 626 (US26D) Satin Chrome Plated

Brass/Bronze 13. Door Stops – Wall 630 (US32D) Satin Stainless Steel 14. Overhead Holders 630 (US32D) Satin Stainless Steel 15. Weatherstripping 628 (US28) Clear Anodized Aluminum 16. Thresholds 627 (US27) Mill Aluminum

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections

before electrified door hardware installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 series. 1. Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to SDI 107.

B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI A115-W series.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural

Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for

Wood Flush Doors."

B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment


substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space

fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

C. Key Control System: Place keys on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule.

D. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above accessible ceilings or in equipment rooms. Verify location with Architect. 1. Configuration: Provide one power supply for each door opening.

E. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with

requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Using Agency may engage a qualified Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports. 1. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant may inspect door hardware and state in

each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door

will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.

B. Six-Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Architects Final Certificate,

Installer shall perform the following: 1. Examine and readjust each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of

doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware. 2. Consult with and instruct Using Agency's personnel on recommended maintenance

procedures. 3. Replace door hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design,

materials, or installation of door hardware units. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.


B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or

deterioration at time of Architects Final Certificate. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Using Agency's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes.

3.8 HARDWARE SCHEDULE HEADING 1 DOORS # 099 EACH PAIR TO HAVE: 2 CONTINUOUS HINGES A110HD 1 REMOVABLE MULLION 90KR 1 EXIT DEVICE 4003 1 EXIT DEVICE 40 3 CYLINDERS 1E7 SERIES 2 PULLS 1410 X E MTG 2 CLOSERS 4041-CUSH (X BRACKETS & SPACERS AS REQUIRED 1 THRESHOLD S207A X RCE 1 SET DOOR SEALS BY FRAME MANUFACTURER 2 DOOR BOTTOM SEALS 323A 1 ASTRAGAL BY DOOR MANUFACTURER NOTES: FINISH TO MATCH STOREFRONT. HEADING 2 DOORS # 118 EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 1 CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HD 1 EXIT DEVICE 4003 1 CYLINDER 1E7 SERIES 1 PULL 1410 X E MTG 1 CLOSER 4041-CUSH (X BRACKETS & SPACERS AS REQUIRED


1 THRESHOLD S207A X RCE 1 SET DOOR SEALS BY FRAME MANUFACTURER 1 DOOR BOTTOM SEAL 323A NOTES: FINISH TO MATCH STOREFRONT. HEADING 3 DOORS # 130 EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 1 CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HD 1 LOCKSET 4900 SERIES X 4568 1 CYLINDER 1E7 SERIES 2 PULLS 1191-3 X G MTG 1 WALL BUMPER 1270WV NOTES: FINISH TO MATCH STOREFRONT. HEADING 4 DOORS # 133A EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 1 CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HD 1 LOCKSET MS1850 X 4066 1 CYLINDER 1E7 SERIES 2 PULLS 1191-3 X G MTG 1 CLOSER 4041-CUSH (X BRACKETS & SPACERS AS CONDITIONS REQUIRE) 1 THRESHOLD S207A X RCE 1 SET DOOR SEALS BY FRAME MANUFACTURER 1 DOOR BOTTOM SEAL 323A NOTES: FINISH TO MATCH STOREFRONT.


HEADING 5 DOORS # 101 EACH PAIR TO HAVE: 2 CONTINUOUS HINGES A240HD 2 EXIT DEVICES 2114 2 CLOSERS 4041-T 2 WALL MAGNETS 2100 NOTES: COORDINATE INSTALLATION OF WALL MAGNETS WITH FIRE SYSTEM. HEADING 6 DOORS # 132E, 210 EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 1 CONTINUOUS HINGE A240HD 1 PUSH 1013-3 1 PULL 1001-3 1 CLOSER 4041 1 KICK PLATE K0050 1 WALL BUMBER 1270WV HEADING 7 DOORS # 133B EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 1 CONTINUOUS HINGE A240HD 1 PUSH 1013-3 1 PULL 1001-3 1 CLOSER 4041 1 OVERHEAD STOP 1020SL 1 KICK PLATE K0050 HEADING 8 DOORS # 132D, 214A


EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 3 HINGES BB81 1 LOCKSET 45H7R 1 CLOSER 4041-CUSH 1 KICK PLATE K0050 HEADING 9 DOORS # 131A, 131B, 138A, 138B EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 3 HINGES BB81 1 LOCKSET 45H7AB 1 FLOOR STOP 1231 HEADING 9.1 DOORS # 137, 140, 141, 142, 144, 145, 147, 149, 150, 151, 152, 154, 155, 156, 208, 209, 211, 215, 226, 229 EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 3 HINGES BB81 1 LOCKSET 93K7A 1 FLOOR STOP 1231 HEADING 10 DOORS # 153, 226 EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 3 HINGES BB81 1 LOCKSET 45H7R 1 FLOOR STOP 1231 HEADING 10.1


DOORS # 148, 224 EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 3 HINGES BB81 1 LOCKSET 93K7R 1 FLOOR STOP 1231 HEADING 11 DOORS # 135, 139, 143, 146 EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 3 HINGES BB81 1 LOCKSET 45H7R 1 CLOSER 4041 1 KICK PLATE K0050 1 WALL BUMPER 1270WV HEADING 12 DOOR # 134, 136, EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 3 HINGES BB81 1 PRIVACY SET 45HOL X IND 1 KICK PLATE K0050 1 MOP PLATE KM050 1 WALL BUMPER 1270WV HEADING 13 DOORS # 132, 133 EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 1 CYLINDER 1E7 SERIES NOTES: BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY SECURITY GRILL MANUFACTURER.


HEADING 14 DOORS # 157A EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 1 CYLINDER 1E7 SERIES NOTES: BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY GATE MANUFACTURER. HEADING 15 DOORS # 157 EACH DOOR TO HAVE: NOTES: NIC – FUTURE OPENING. HEADING 16 DOORS # 225 EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 3 HINGES BB81 1 LOCKSET 45H7D 1 CLOSER 4041 1 KICK PLATE K0050 1 WALL BUMPER 1270WV HEADING 17 DOORS # 217, 224A EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 3 HINGES BB81 1 LOCKSET 45H7R 1 CLOSER 4041-CUSH 1 KICK PLATE K0050 HEADING 17.1 DOORS # 215A


EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 3 HINGES BB81 1 LOCKSET 93K7R 1 CLOSER 4041-CUSH 1 KICK PLATE K0050 HEADING 18 DOORS # 227B EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 3 HINGES BB81 1 LOCKSET 45H7AB 1 FLOOR STOP 1231 1 SET DOOR SEALS 797 HEADING 18.1 DOORS # 227A EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 3 HINGES BB81 1 LOCKSET 93K7A 1 FLOOR STOP 1231 1 SET DOOR SEALS 797 HEADING 19 DOORS # 215A, 230 EACH PAIR TO HAVE: 2 CONTINUOUS HINGES A240HD 2 EXIT DEVICES 2114 2 CYLINDERS 1E7 SERIES 2 CLOSERS 4041-CUSH 2 KICK PLATES K0050


HEADING 20 DOORS # 203 EACH PAIR TO HAVE: 2 CONTINUOUS HINGES A240HD 1 SET FLUSH BOLTS 3913/W3913 X 3910 1 LOCKSET 45H7D 1 CLOSER 4041-CUSH 2 KICK PLATES K0050 HEADING 21 DOORS # 159 EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 1 CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HD 1 LOCKSET 4900 SERIES X 4568 1 CYLINDER 1E7 SERIES 2 PULLS 1191-3 X G MTG 1 CLOSER 4041-CUSH (X BRACKETS & SPACERS AS REQUIRED) NOTES: FINISH TO MATCH STOREFRONT. HEADING 22 DOORS # 214 EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 3 HINGES BB81 1 LOCKSET 45H7R 1 CLOSER 4041 1 OVERHEAD STOP 1020SL 1 KICK PLATE K0050 HEADING 23 DOORS # 213


EACH PAIR TO HAVE: 2 CONTINUOUS HINGES A240HD 1 SET FLUSH BOLTS 3913/W3913 X 3910 1 LOCKSET 45H7D 1 CLOSER 4041 2 FLOOR STOPS 1231 1 SET DOOR SEALS 797 1 ASTRAGAL SET BY DOOR MANUFACTURER

END OF SECTION 087100

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 08 8000 - 11515 08.29.2016 GLAZING

SECTION 08 8000GLAZING


A. Insulating glass units.B. Glazing units.C. Glazing compounds and accessories.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets,

Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 2005 (Reapproved 2011).B. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.C. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011.D. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass;

2012.E. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013.F. ASTM C1376 - Standard Specification for Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on Flat

Glass; 2015.G. ASTM E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings;

2012a.H. ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation;

2010.I. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; 2009.J. GANA (SM) - GANA Sealant Manual; 2008.K. GANA (LGRM) - Laminated Glazing Reference Manual; 2009.L. IGMA TM-3000 - North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for

Commercial & Residential Use; 1990 (2004).M. NFRC 100 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-factors; 2014.N. NFRC 200 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and

Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence; 2014.O. NFRC 300 - Test Method for Determining the Solar Optical Properties of Glazing Materials and

Systems; 2014.1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work ofthis section; require attendance by each of the affected installers.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data on Insulating Glass Unit and Glazing Unit Glazing Types: Provide structural,

physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling and installationrequirements.

C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds and Accessories: Provide chemical, functional, andenvironmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify availablecolors.

D. Samples: Submit two samples 12 by 12 inch in size of glass units, showing coloration.E. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been

completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.


1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Perform Work in accordance with GANA (GM), GANA (SM), GANA (LGRM), and IGMA

TM-3000 for glazing installation methods. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum three years of documented experience.C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with

at least three years documented experience.1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F.B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing

compounds.1.07 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Insulating Glass Units: Provide a five (5) year manufacturer warranty to include coverage for

seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, including replacement of failed units.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Float Glass Manufacturers:1. AGC Glass Company North America, Inc: www.us.agc.com.2. Cardinal Glass Industries: www.cardinalcorp.com.3. Guardian Industries Corp: www.sunguardglass.com.4. Pilkington North America Inc: www.pilkington.com/na.5. PPG Industries, Inc: www.ppgideascapes.com.6. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS - EXTERIOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIESA. Provide type and thickness of exterior glazing assemblies to support assembly dead loads, and

to withstand live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane ofglass.1. Design Pressure: Calculated in accordance with applicable codes.2. Comply with ASTM E1300 for design load resistance of glass type, thickness, dimensions,

and maximum lateral deflection of supported glass.3. Provide glass edge support system sufficiently stiff to limit the lateral deflection of

supported glass edges to less than 1/175 of their lengths under specified design load.4. Glass thicknesses listed are minimum.

B. Vapor Retarder and Air Barrier Seals: Provide completed assemblies that maintain continuity ofbuilding enclosure vapor retarder and air barrier.1. In conjunction with vapor retarder and joint sealer materials described in other sections.

a. Refer to Section 07 2500.2. To utilize the inner pane of multiple pane insulating glass units for the continuity of the

vapor retarder and air barrier seal.3. To maintain a continuous vapor retarder and air barrier throughout the glazed assembly

from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant.C. Thermal and Optical Performance: Provide glass products with performance properties as

indicated. Performance properties are in accordance with manufacturer's published data asdetermined with the following procedures and/or test methods:1. Center of Glass U-Value: Comply with NFRC 100 using Lawrence Berkeley National

Laboratory (LBNL) WINDOW 5.2/6.3 computer program.2. Center of Glass Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Comply with NFRC 200 using

Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (LBNL) WINDOW 5.2/6.3 computer program.


3. Solar Optical Properties: Comply with NFRC 300 test method.2.03 GLASS MATERIALS

A. Float Glass: Provide float glass based glazing unless noted otherwise.1. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I - Transparent Flat, Class 1 - Clear, Quality-Q3.2. Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C1048, Kind HS and FT.3. Tinted Type: ASTM C1036, Class 2 - Tinted, Quality-Q3, color and performance

characteristics as indicated.2.04 INSULATING GLASS UNITS

A. Manufacturers:1. Any of the manufacturers specified for float glass.2. Fabricator certified by glass manufacturer for type of glass, coating, and treatment involved

and capable of providing specified warranty.3. Viracon, Apogee Enterprises, Inc: www.viracon.com.4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated.1. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190.2. Coated Glass: Comply with requirements of ASTM C1376 for pyrolytic (hard-coat) or

magnetic sputter vapor deposition (soft-coat) type coatings on flat glass; coated visionglass, Kind CV; coated overhead glass, Kind CO; or coated spandrel glass, Kind CS.

3. Metal Edge Spacers: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners.4. Spacer Color: Black.5. Edge Seal:

a. Dual-Sealed System: Provide polyisobutylene sealant as primary seal appliedbetween spacer and glass panes, and silicone, polysulfide, or polyurethane sealant assecondary seal applied around perimeter.

6. Color: Black.7. Purge interpane space with dry air, hermetically sealed.

2.05 BASIS OF DESIGN - INSULATING GLASS UNITSA. Basis of Design - Insulating Glass Units: Vision glazing, with Low-E coating.

1. Applications: Exterior insulating glass glazing unless otherwise indicated.2. Space between lites filled with air.3. Total Thickness: 1 inch.4. Thermal Transmittance (U-Value), Winter - Center of Glass: 0.29, nominal.5. Visible Light Transmittance (VLT): 70 percent, nominal.6. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): 39, nominal.7. Glazing Method: Dry glazing method, gasket glazing.8. Basis of Design - PPG Industries, Inc: www.ppgideascapes.com.9. Outboard Lite: Annealed float glass (except where required by Code to be Fully tempered

float glass), 1/4 inch thick, minimum.a. Low-E Coating: PPG Solarban 60 on #2 surface.b. Tint: Clear.

10. Inboard Lite: Annealed float glass (except where required by Code to be Fully temperedfloat glass), 1/4 inch thick.a. Coating: No coating on inboard lite.b. Tint: Clear.

11. Other Manufacturers: Provide either the product identified as "Basis of Design" or anequivalent product of another acceptable manufacturer.

12. Substitution Procedures: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.a. For any product not identified as "Basis of Design", submit information as specified for

substitutions.


2.06 GLAZING UNITSA. Monolithic Interior Vision Glazing:

1. Applications: Interior glazing unless otherwise indicated.2. Glass Type: Annealed float glass, unless otherwise indicated.3. Tint: Clear.4. Thickness: 1/4 inch, nominal.

2.07 GLAZING COMPOUNDSA. Glazing Putty: Polymer modified latex recommended by manufacturer for outdoor use, knife

grade consistency; grey color.B. Butyl Sealant: Single component; ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A, Shore

A hardness of 10 to 20; black color.C. Polysulfide Sealant: Two component; chemical curing, non-sagging type; ASTM C920, Type M,

Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; with cured Shore A hardness range of 15 to 25; coloras selected.

D. Polyurethane Sealant: Single component, chemical curing, non-staining, non-bleeding; ASTMC920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; with cured Shore A hardness range of20 to 35; color as selected.

E. Silicone Sealant: Single component; neutral curing; capable of water immersion without loss ofproperties; non-bleeding, non-staining; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A,and G; with cured Shore A hardness range of 15 to 25; color as selected.

F. Manufacturers:1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.2. Dow Corning Corporation: www.dowcorning.com/construction.3. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc, exclusive licensee of General Electric:

www.siliconeforbuilding.com/sle.4. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.5. BASF Corporation: www.basf.com/us/en.html.6. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.08 ACCESSORIESA. Setting Blocks: Silicone, with 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness; ASTM C864 Option II.

Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbetspace minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.

B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness; ASTM C864 Option II. Minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, selfadhesive on one face.

C. Glazing Tape, Back Bedding Mastic Type: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solidscompound with integral resilient spacer rod applicable to application indicated; 5 to 30 curedShore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; black color.1. Width: As required for application.2. Thickness: As required for application.3. Spacer Rod Diameter: As required for application.

D. Glazing Splines: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTMC864 Option II; color black.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS

A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerances, including those forsize, squareness, and offsets at corners.

B. Verify that the minimum required face and edge clearances are being provided.


C. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that mayimpede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and support framing is ready to receive glazingsystem.

D. Verify that sealing between joints of glass framing members has been completed effectively.E. Proceed with glazing system installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean contact surfaces with appropriate solvent and wipe dry within maximum of 24 hoursbefore glazing. Remove coatings that are not tightly bonded to substrates.

B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant where required for proper sealant adhesion.

3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERALA. Install glazing in compliance with written instructions of glass, gaskets, and other glazing

material manufacturers, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those inglazing referenced standards.

B. Install glazing sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193, GANA Sealant Manual, andmanufacturer's instructions.

C. Do not exceed edge pressures around perimeter of glass lites as stipulated by glassmanufacturer.

D. Set glass lites of system with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.E. Set glass lites in proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as indicated.F. Prevent glass from contact with any contaminating substances that may be the result of

construction operations such as, and not limited to the following; weld splatter, fire-safing,plastering, mortar droppings, etc.

3.04 INSTALLATION - DRY GLAZING METHOD (GASKET GLAZING)A. Application - Exterior and/or Interior Glazed: Set glazing infills from either the exterior or the

interior of the building.B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inch from corners.C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket to

attain full contact.D. Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full continuous

contact.3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.B. Glass and Glazing product manufacturers to provide field surveillance of the installation of their

products.C. Monitor and report installation procedures and unacceptable conditions.

3.06 CLEANINGA. Remove excess glazing materials from finish surfaces immediately after application using

solvents or cleaners recommended by manufacturers.B. Remove non-permanent labels immediately after glazing installation is complete.C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces after sealants are fully cured.D. Clean glass on both exposed surfaces not more than 4 days prior to Date of Substantial

Completion in accordance with glass manufacturer's written recommendations.


3.07 PROTECTIONA. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark

heat absorbing or reflective glass units.B. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period prior to Date of

Substantial Completion.END OF SECTION 08 8000

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 09 2116 - 11515 08.29.2016 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

SECTION 09 2116GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES


A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies.B. Metal stud wall framing.C. Metal channel ceiling framing.D. Acoustic insulation.E. Cementitious backing board.F. Gypsum wallboard.G. Joint treatment and accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 6116 - VOC Content Restrictions.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer

Units; 2010 (Revised).B. ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications

for Cementitious Backer Units; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).C. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing

Gypsum Board; 2015.D. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2014.E. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light

Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012.F. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive

Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2015.G. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013.H. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel

Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm)in Thickness; 2015.

I. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application ofGypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2014.

J. ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories For Gypsum Wallboard and GypsumVeneer Base; 2014a.

K. ASTM C1278/C1278M - Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Panel; 2007a(Reapproved 2011).

L. ASTM C1325 - Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cementitious BackerUnits; 2014.

M. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2014.N. ASTM C1658/C1658M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Panels; 2013.O. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of

Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2012.P. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound

Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009.Q. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2010.R. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013.


1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing

system.C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on partition head to structure connectors, showing

compliance with requirements.D. Test Reports: For stud framing products that do not comply with ASTM C645 or ASTM C754,

provide independent laboratory reports showing maximum stud heights at required spacingsand deflections.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and

finishing, with minimum 5 years of documented experience.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216.1. See PART 3 for finishing requirements.

B. Interior Partitions, Indicated as Acoustic: Provide completed assemblies with the followingcharacteristics:1. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 45-49 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on

tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.C. Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide completed assemblies as shown on the drawings.

2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALSA. Manufacturers - Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories:

1. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC: www.clarkdietrich.com.2. Marino: www.marinoware.com.3. Phillips Manufacturing Company: www.phillipsmfg.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of sizeand properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximumdeflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf.1. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces.2. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs.3. Ceiling Channels: C-shaped.4. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch.

C. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required.D. Partition Head To Structure Connections: Provide track fastened to structure with legs of

sufficient length to accommodate deflection, for friction fit of studs cut short and screwed tosecondary deflection channel set inside but unattached to top track.

2.03 BOARD MATERIALSA. Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board:

1. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.2. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum: www.gpgypsum.com.3. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com.4. USG Corporation: www.usg.com.5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes tominimize joints in place; ends square cut.1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.


2. Glass mat faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1658/C1658M, suitable for paintfinish, of the same core type and thickness may be substituted for paper-faced board.

3. Unfaced fiber-reinforced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1278/C1278M, suitable forpaint finish, of the same core type and thickness may be substituted for paper-facedboard.

4. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.a. Mold resistant board is required at all locations.

5. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly;if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed.

6. Thickness: a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch.b. Ceilings: 5/8 inch.

C. Backing Board For Wet Areas: 1. Application: Surfaces behind tile in wet areas including wet walls to receive tile.2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.3. ANSI Cement-Based Board: Non-gypsum-based; aggregated Portland cement panels

with glass fiber mesh embedded in front and back surfaces complying with ANSI A118.9 orASTM C1325.a. Thickness: 1/2 inch.b. Products:

1) Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com.2) National Gypsum Company; PermaBase Cement Board:

www.nationalgypsum.com.3) USG Corporation: www.usg.com.4) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

D. Backing Board For Non-Wet Areas: Water-resistant gypsum backing board as defined in ASTMC1396/C1396M; sizes to minimum joints in place; ends square cut.1. Application: Vertical surfaces behind thinset tile, except in wet areas.2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.3. Type C Thickness: 5/8 inch.4. Edges: Tapered.

E. Ceiling Board: Special sag resistant gypsum ceiling board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M;sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.1. Application: Ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.2. Thickness: 5/8 inch.3. Edges: Tapered.

2.04 ACCESSORIESA. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. B. Acoustic Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex or water-based elastomeric sealant; do not use

solvent-based non-curing butyl sealant.C. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless noted otherwise.

1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance.2. Special Shapes: In addition to conventional corner bead and control joints, provide U-bead

at exposed panel edges.D. Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project

conditions.1. Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners.2. Ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound.

E. High Build Drywall Surfacer: Vinyl acrylic latex-based coating for spray application, designed totake the place of skim coating and separate paint primer in achieving Level 5 finish.



































F. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Cold-Formed Steel Studs Less than 0.033inch in Thickness and Wood Members: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping screws, corrosionresistant.

G. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Steel Members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch inThickness: ASTM C954; steel drill screws, corrosion resistant.

H. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of type and size tosuit application; to rigidly secure materials in place.


A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions.B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members at 12 inches on center.

1. Level ceiling system to a tolerance of 1/1200.2. Laterally brace entire suspension system.

C. Studs: Space studs as indicated.1. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations.2. Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling track in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions.3. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach extended leg top runner to structure, maintain

clearance between top of studs and structure, and brace both flanges of studs withcontinuous bridging.

D. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using notless than double studs at jambs.

E. Blocking: Install mechanically fastened steel sheet blocking for support of:1. Framed openings.2. Wall mounted cabinets.3. Plumbing fixtures.4. Toilet partitions.5. Toilet accessories.6. Wall mounted door hardware.

3.03 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATIONA. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around

electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Place continuous bead at perimeter of each layer of gypsum board.2. Seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe, ducts, and rough-in boxes, except where

firestopping is provided.3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ASTM C 840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt endjoints, especially in highly visible locations.

B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends andedges occurring over firm bearing.

C. Double-Layer Non-Rated: Use gypsum board for first layer, placed parallel to framing or furringmembers, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. Place second layer perpendicularto framing or furring members. Offset joints of second layer from joints of first layer.

D. Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements ofassembly listing.




















































E. Exposed Gypsum Board in Interior Wet Areas: Seal joints, cut edges, and holes withwater-resistant sealant.

F. Cementitious Backing Board: Install over steel framing members and plywood substrate whereindicated, in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's instructions.

G. Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of gypsum board.3.05 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES

A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated.1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet long.

B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.

3.06 JOINT TREATMENTA. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows:

1. Level 5: Walls and ceilings to receive semi-gloss or gloss paint finish and other areasspecifically indicated.

2. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwiseindicated.

3. Level 2: In utility areas, behind cabinetry, and on backing board to receive tile finish.4. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the

completed construction.B. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to

receive finishes.1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.2. Taping, filling, and sanding is not required at surfaces behind adhesive applied ceramic tile

and fixed cabinetry.3. Taping, filling and sanding is not required at base layer of double layer applications.

C. Where Level 5 finish is indicated, spray apply high build drywall surfacer over entire surfaceafter joints have been properly treated; achieve a flat and tool mark-free finish.

3.07 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet

in any direction.END OF SECTION 09 2116


































......

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 09 2236.23 - 11515 08.29.2016 METAL LATH

SECTION 09 2236.23METAL LATH


A. Metal lath for cement and gypsum plaster.1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM C841 - Standard Specification for Installation of Interior Lathing and Furring; 2003(Reapproved 2013).

B. ASTM C847 - Standard Specification for Metal Lath; 2014a.C. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel

Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm)in Thickness; 2015.

D. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application ofGypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2014.

E. ASTM C1063 - Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring to Receive Interiorand Exterior Portland Cement-Based Plaster; 2016a.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on furring and lathing components, structural characteristics,

material limitations, and finish.1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section a minimumthree years documented experience.


A. Metal Lath:1. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation: www.amico-lath.com.2. Cemco: www.cemcosteel.com.3. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC: www.clarkdietrich.com.4. Semco Southeastern Metals: www.semetals.com.5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 LATHA. Diamond Mesh Metal Lath: ASTM C847, galvanized; self-furring.

1. Weight: To suit application and as specified in ASTM C841 or ASTM C1063 for framingspacing.

2. Backed with treated paper.B. Corner Mesh: Formed sheet steel, minimum 0.018 inch thick, perforated flanges shaped to

permit complete embedding in plaster, minimum 2 inch size; same finish as lath.C. Strip Mesh: Expanded metal lath, same weight as lath, 2 inch wide by 24 inch long; same finish

as lath.D. Beads, Screeds, Joint Accessories, and Other Trim: Depth governed by plaster thickness, and

maximum possible lengths.1. Material: Formed galvanized sheet steel, expanded metal flanges.2. Casing Beads: Square edges.3. Corner Beads: Bullnosed corners.4. Base Screeds: Bevelled edges.5. Expansion Joints: Two-piece sliding type with reveal, 2 inch wide flanges.

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 09 2236.23 - 21515 08.29.2016 METAL LATH

6. Control Joints: Accordion profile with protective tape, 2 inch flanges.2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchorage: Tie wire, nails, and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; torigidly secure materials in place, galvanized.

B. Fasteners: Self-piercing tapping screws; ASTM C1002 or ASTM C954.C. Tie Wire: Annealed galvanized steel.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify that substrates are ready to receive work and conditions are suitable for application.C. For exterior plaster and stucco on stud walls, verify that water-resistive barrier has been

installed over sheathing substrate completely and correctly.D. Do not begin until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.E. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding.3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install interior lath and furring for gypsum plaster in accordance with ASTM C841.B. Install lath and furring for Portland cement plaster in accordance with ASTM C1063.

3.03 LATH INSTALLATIONA. Apply metal lath taut, with long dimension perpendicular to supports.B. Lap ends minimum 1 inch. Secure end laps with tie wire where they occur between supports.C. Lap sides of diamond mesh lath minimum 1-1/2 inches.D. Continuously reinforce internal angles with corner mesh, except where the metal lath returns 3

inches from corner to form the angle reinforcement; fasten at perimeter edges only.E. Place corner bead at external wall corners; fasten at outer edges of lath only.F. Place base screeds at termination of plaster areas; secure rigidly in place.G. Place 4 inch wide strips of metal lath centered over junctions of dissimilar backing materials,

and secure rigidly in place.H. Place lath vertically above each top corner and each side of door frames to 6 inches above

ceiling line.I. Place casing beads at terminations of plaster finish. Butt and align ends. Secure rigidly in

place.J. Place additional strip mesh diagonally at corners of lathed openings. Secure rigidly in place.

3.04 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation from True Lines and Levels: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.B. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/8 inch.

END OF SECTION 09 2236.23

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 09 2300 - 11515 08.29.2016 GYPSUM PLASTERING

SECTION 09 2300GYPSUM PLASTERING


A. Gypsum plaster over metal lath.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 09 2236.23 - Metal Lath: Metal lath, furring, and accessories for plaster base.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM C28/C28M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Plasters; 2010.B. ASTM C61/C61M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Keene's Cement; 2000 (Reapproved

2015).C. ASTM C206 - Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime; 2014.D. ASTM C842 - Standard Specification for Application of Interior Gypsum Plaster; 2005

(Reapproved 2010).1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on plaster materials, characteristics, and limitations of products

specified.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section withminimum three years documented experience.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not apply plaster when substrate or ambient air temperature is under 50 degrees F or over

80 degrees F.B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F during and after installation of plaster.


A. Gypsum Plaster:1. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com.2. USG: www.usg.com.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 PLASTER MATERIALSA. Ready-Mixed Gypsum Plaster: ASTM C28/C28M; mill-mixed type, requiring only the addition of

water. B. Gypsum Keene's Cement: ASTM C61/C61M.C. Ready-Mixed Finishing Plaster: Keene's cement/lime putty type; ASTM C61/C61M and ASTM

C206.D. Water: Clean, fresh, potable and free of mineral or organic matter that could adversely affect

plaster.2.03 METAL LATH AND FURRING

A. Metal Lath and Accessories: As specified in Section 09 2236.23. B. Beads, Screeds, and Joint Accessories: Galvanized steel, as specified in Section 09 2236.23.

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 09 2300 - 21515 08.29.2016 GYPSUM PLASTERING

2.04 PLASTER MIXESA. Over Metal Lath: Three-coat application, ready-mixed plaster, mixed and proportioned in

accordance with ASTM C842 and manufacturer's instructions.B. Ready-Mixed Plaster Materials: Mix in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


A. Verify that existing conditions are satisfactory before starting work.B. Grounds and Blocking: Verify items within walls for other sections of work have been installed.C. Metal Lath and Accessories: Verify lath is flat, secured to substrate, and joint and surface

perimeter accessories are in place.3.02 PLASTERING

A. Apply gypsum plaster in accordance with ASTM C842 and manufacturer's instructions.B. Thickness of Plaster including Finish Coat:

1. Over metal lath and where patching existing: 5/8 inch.3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.END OF SECTION 09 2300

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 09 2400.00 - 11515 08.29.2016 CEMENT PLASTERING

SECTION 09 2400.00CEMENT PLASTERING


A. Cement plastering and stucco.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 09 2236.23 - Metal Lath: Metal lath, furring, beads, screeds, and joint accessories forplaster base.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C926 - Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster; 2015b.B. ASTM C932 - Standard Specification for Surface-Applied Bonding Compounds for Exterior

Plastering; 2006 (Reapproved 2013).1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on plaster materials and trim accessories.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with

minimum three years documented experience.1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Exterior Plaster Work: Do not apply plaster when substrate or ambient air temperature is 40degrees F or lower, or when temperature is expected to drop below 40 degrees F within 48hours of application.

B. Interior Plaster Work: Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F duringinstallation of plaster and until fully cured.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 CEMENT PLASTER APPLICATIONS

A. Metal Plaster Base: Metal lath.1. Plaster Type: Factory prepared plaster mix.2. Number of Coats: Three.3. First Coat: Apply to a nominal thickness of 3/8 inch.4. Second Coat: Apply to a nominal thickness of 3/8 inch.5. Leveling Coat: Apply to a nominal thickness of 1/32 to 1/16 inch.6. Finish: Acrylic.

2.02 FACTORY PREPARED CEMENT PLASTERA. Exterior Portland cement plaster system made of scratch and brown base coat, leveling coat

with reinforcing mesh, and acrylic finish coat; install in accordance with ASTM C926.1. Manufacturers:

a. Master Wall, Inc: www.masterwall.com.b. Parex USA, Inc: www.parexusa.com.c. Sto Corp: www.stocorp.com/sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.03 ACCESSORIESA. Metal Lath: As specified in Section 09 2236.23.B. Beads, Screeds, and Joint Accessories: As specified in Section 09 2236.23.C. Bonding Compound: Provide type recommended for bonding plaster to solid surfaces,

complying with ASTM C932.

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 09 2400.00 - 21515 08.29.2016 CEMENT PLASTERING


A. Verify existing conditions are acceptable prior to starting this work.B. Verify metal lath is flat, secured to substrate, and joint and surface perimeter accessories are

properly in place.3.02 APPLICATION

A. Apply plaster in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and comply with ASTMC926.

B. Base Coats:1. Apply base coat(s) to fully embed lath and to specified thickness.2. Follow guidelines in ASTM C926 and manufacturer's written installation instructions for

moist curing base coats and application of subsequent coats.C. Leveling Coat:

1. Apply leveling coat to specified thickness.D. Finish Coats:

1. Primer and Acrylic Coatings:a. Remove surface contaminants such as dust and dirt without damaging substrate.b. Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.c. Apply finish coating in number of coats and to thickness recommended by

manufacturer.3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.3.04 REPAIR

A. Patching: Remove loose, damaged or defective plaster and replace with plaster of samecomposition; finish to match surrounding area.

END OF SECTION 09 2400.00

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 09 3000 - 11515 08.29.2016 TILING

SECTION 09 3000TILING


A. Tile for floor applications.B. Tile for wall applications.C. Non-ceramic trim.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Tile backer board.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 - American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of

Ceramic Tile (Compendium); 2013.1.B. ANSI A108.1a - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the

Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 2014.C. ANSI A108.1b - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a

Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999(Reaffirmed 2010).

D. ANSI A108.1c - Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in theWet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a CuredPortland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

E. ANSI A108.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile withOrganic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 2009 (Revised).

F. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile withDry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

G. ANSI A108.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile withChemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy; 1999 (Reaffirmed2010).

H. ANSI A108.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile withChemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

I. ANSI A108.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile withModified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

J. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework;1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

K. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious BackerUnits; 2010 (Revised).

L. ANSI A108.12 - American National Standard for Installation of Ceramic Tile with EGP (Exteriorglue plywood) Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

M. ANSI A108.13 - American National Standard for Installation of Load Bearing, Bonded,Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone; 2005 (Reaffirmed2010).

N. ANSI A118.3 - American National Standard Specifications for Chemical Resistant, WaterCleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive;2013 (Revised).

O. ANSI A137.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile; 2013.1.P. ASTM C373 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption, Bulk Density, Apparent Porosity,

and Apparent Specific Gravity of Fired Whiteware Products, Ceramic Tiles, and Glass Tiles;2014a.


Q. TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation; 2015.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories.

Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives.C. Samples: Provide full size samples of each type of tile and color used in the project.D. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, and stain

removal methods.E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Tile: 10 square feet of each size, color, and surface finish combination.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Maintain one copy of and ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 and TCNA (HB) on site.B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products

specified in this section, with minimum five years of documented experience.C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of

five years of documented experience.1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install solvent-based products in an unventilated environment.B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar

materials.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 TILE

A. Manufacturers: All products by the same manufacturer.1. Basis of Design: Ceramic Technics: www.ceramictechnics.com.2. American Olean Corporation: www.americanolean.com.3. Dal-Tile Corporation: www.daltile.com.4. Emser Tile, LLC: www.emser.com.5. Terrazzo & Marble Supply Companies: www.tmsupply.com.6. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Porcelain Tile: ANSI A137.1, standard grade.1. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent as tested in accordance with ASTM C373.2. Size: 12 x 24 and 4 x 24 inch, nominal.3. Thickness: 3/8 inch.4. Color(s): As scheduled.5. Trim Units: Matching cove base shapes in sizes indicated.6. Products:

a. Ceramic Technics- 12 x 24Canyon Studio Concord Limestone; 12 x 24 Desert StudioConcord Limestone; 12 x 24 Bronzo Studio Metal Linear; and 4 x 24 Silicon StudioPadawa Metal Linear..

b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.2.02 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES

A. Non-Ceramic Trim: Brushed stainless steel, style and dimensions to suit application, for settingusing tile mortar or adhesive.1. Applications:


a. Open edges of wall tile.b. Open edges of floor tile.c. Transition between floor finishes of different heights.

2. Manufacturers:a. Schluter-Systems: www.schluter.com.b. Genesis APS International: www.genesis-aps.com.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.03 SETTING MATERIALSA. Manufacturers:

1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.2. Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com.3. LATICRETE International, Inc: www.laticrete.com.4. ProSpec, an Oldcastle brand: www.prospec.com.

B. Epoxy Adhesive and Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.3.2.04 GROUTS

A. Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3 chemical resistant and water-cleanable epoxy grout.1. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.


A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type ofwork and are ready to receive tile.

B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile.

C. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding ofsetting materials to sub-floor surfaces.

D. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moistureemission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommendedby tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Protect surrounding work from damage.B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable

flatness tolerances.3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install tile and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1a thru A108.13,manufacturer's instructions, and TCNA (HB) recommendations.

B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases

neatly. Align floor joints.D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make grout

joints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout.E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed.F. Install non-ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.G. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.H. Keep control and expansion joints free of mortar, grout, and adhesive.I. Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours.


J. Grout tile joints unless otherwise indicated. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated.K. At changes in plane and tile-to-tile control joints, use tile sealant instead of grout, with either

bond breaker tape or backer rod as appropriate to prevent three-sided bonding.3.04 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN-SET METHODS

A. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F131 for epoxybond coat and grout, with standard grout.

3.05 INSTALLATION - WALL TILEA. Over gypsum wallboard on wood or metal studs install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method

W243, thin-set with dry-set or latex-Portland cement bond coat.B. Over interior concrete and masonry install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method W202,

thin-set with dry-set or latex-Portland cement bond coat.3.06 CLEANING

A. Clean tile and grout surfaces.3.07 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation.END OF SECTION 09 3000

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 09 5100 - 11515 08.29.2016 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

SECTION 09 5100SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS


A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system.B. Acoustical units.C. Supplementary acoustical insulation above ceiling.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C635/C635M - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of

Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 2013a.B. ASTM C636/C636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for

Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels; 2013.C. ASTM E580/E580M - Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for

Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions; 2014.D. ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 2014.

1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed,

sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work iscompleted, tested, and approved.

B. Do not install acoustical units until after interior wet work is dry.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components and acoustical units.C. Samples: Submit two samples 6 by 6 inch in size illustrating material and finish of acoustical

units.D. Samples: Submit two samples each, 12 inches long, of suspension system main runner.E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Acoustical Units: Quantity equal to 5 percent of total installed.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the

products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.B. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the

products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percentprior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation.


A. Acoustic Panels:1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com.2. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.3. USG: www.usg.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Suspension Systems:


1. Same as for acoustical units.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 ACOUSTICAL UNITSA. Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E1264, Class A.B. Acoustical Panels Type ACT-1: Painted mineral fiber, ASTM E1264 Type III, with the following

characteristics:1. Size: 24 by 24 inches and plank style.2. Thickness: 3/4 inches.3. Light Reflectance: 90 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264.4. NRC: 0.75.5. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 35, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264.6. Edge: Angled tegular.7. Surface Color: White.8. Surface Pattern: Non-directional fissured.9. Suspension System: Exposed grid.

C. Acoustical Panels: Vinyl faced mineral fiber, ASTM E1264 Type IV, with the followingcharacteristics:1. Size: 24 by 24 inches.2. Thickness: 5/8 inches.3. Light Reflectance: 80 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264.4. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 40, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264.5. Edge: Square.6. Surface Color: White.7. Suspension System: Exposed grid.

D. Acoustical Panels: Washable and Scrubbable faced glass fiber, ASTM E1264 Type XII, withthe following characteristics:1. Size: 24 by 96 inches.2. Light Reflectance: 90 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264.3. NRC Range: 0.90 to 0.95, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264.4. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 20, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264.5. Edge: Reveal edge.6. Surface Color: White.7. Suspension System: Exposed grid.

E. Composite Acoustical Panels Type ACT-2:1. Size: 24 by 24 inches.2. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 49-51, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264.3. Panel Edge: Square.4. Surface Pattern: Non-directional Fissured.5. Surface Color: White.6. Suspension System: Exposed grid.7. Composite: This panel on ACT-1.8. Products:

a. Kinetics Noise Control: QuietTile Acoustical Ceiling System; www.kineticsnoise.com.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.03 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S)A. Suspension Systems - General: Complying with ASTM C635/C635M; die cut and interlocking

components, with stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips asrequired.

B. Exposed Steel Suspension System for use with Type A ACT Ceilings: Formed steel,commercial quality cold rolled; heavy-duty.1. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch wide face.


2. Construction: Double web.3. Finish: White painted.

C. Exposed Aluminum Suspension System for use with Type C ACT Ceilings: Extruded aluminum;heavy-duty.1. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch wide face.2. Finish: Painted white.

2.04 ACCESSORIESA. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application and ceiling

system flatness requirement specified.B. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid.

1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face ofgrid.

C. Acoustical Insulation: Specified in Section 07 2100.1. Thickness: 2 inch.2. Size: To fit acoustical suspension system.

D. Acoustical Sealant For Perimeter Moldings: Non-hardening, non-skinning, for use inconjunction with suspended ceiling system.

E. Gasket For Perimeter Moldings: Closed cell rubber sponge tape.F. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.

3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEMA. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C636/C636M, ASTM E580/E580M, and

manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section.B. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum

deflection of 1:360.C. Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan.D. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other

work.E. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where

carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.F. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest

affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.G. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load

to exceed deflection capability.H. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or

support components independently.I. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners.J. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with

other interruptions.1. Install in bed of acoustical sealant.2. Use longest practical lengths.3. Overlap and rivet corners.

3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITSA. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental toappearance and function.

C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.D. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete.E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents.F. Cutting Acoustical Units:

1. Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim.2. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges.3. Double cut and field paint exposed reveal edges.

G. Where round obstructions occur, provide preformed closures to match perimeter molding.H. Lay acoustical insulation for a distance of 48 inches either side of acoustical partitions .

3.04 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.


J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 09 5416 - 11515 08.29.2016 TRANSLUCENT CEILING FABRICATIONS

SECTION 09 5416TRANSLUCENT CEILING FABRICATIONS


A. Ceiling elements and supports.1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM C636/C636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems forAcoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels; 2013.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of acrylic panels, support locations and details for ceiling

suspension.C. Product Data: Provide data showing ceiling component construction and finishes.D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use

stipulated by product testing agency specified under Quality Assurance. Include instructions forstorage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

E. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and replacement.1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified inthis section with minimum three years documented experience.


A. Ceiling Fabrications:1. Studio by 3form, inc.; Edge Ceiling: www.studioby3form.com.2. Armstrong Ceiling Solutions: Infusions Blades- Concepts; www.armstrong.com.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 CEILING COMPONENTSA. Support Grid: Exposed heavy duty, double wall steel, lock joint, with aluminum cap, 3/4 inch

wide and support cables.1. Finish: White, painted.

B. Panels: Flat polyester/acrylic panel, 0.25 inch thick, color as noted on drawings, with finish asnoted on drawings.1. Size: As noted on drawings.2. Fin design: As noted on drawings.

C. Accessories: As required by manufacturer.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PREPARATION

A. Lay out system on room axis as indicated.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C636/C636M and manufacturer'sinstructions and as supplemented in this section.

B. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Wherecarrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.

C. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearestaffected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 09 5416 - 21515 08.29.2016 TRANSLUCENT CEILING FABRICATIONS

D. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners.E. Coordinate installation of ceiling elements and supports with other Work in the vicinity.

3.03 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Deflection: 1/360 of span, maximum.B. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Clean ceiling elements in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 09 6500 - 11515 08.29.2016 RESILIENT FLOORING

SECTION 09 6500RESILIENT FLOORING


A. Resilient tile flooring.B. Resilient base.C. Installation accessories.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using

a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2014c.B. ASTM F1066 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile; 2004 (Reapproved

2014).C. ASTM F1700 - Standard Specification for Solid Vinyl Tile; 2013a.D. ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2008 (Reapproved 2012).E. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using

a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2015.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance

characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.C. Verification Samples: Submit two samples, 12 by 12 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for

each resilient flooring product specified.D. Certification: Prior to installation of flooring, submit written certification by flooring manufacturer

and adhesive manufacturer that condition of sub-floor is acceptable.E. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials,

and suggested schedule for cleaning.F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Flooring Material: 100 square feet of each type and color.3. Extra Wall Base: 100 linear feet of each type and color.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Upon receipt, immediately remove any shrink-wrap and check materials for damage and the

correct style, color, quantity and run numbers.B. Store all materials off of the floor in an acclimatized, weather-tight space.C. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F.D. Do not double stack pallets.

1.05 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a

temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditionsabove 55 degrees F.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 TILE FLOORING

A. Vinyl Composition Tile: Homogeneous, with color extending throughout thickness.1. Manufacturers:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com.


b. Johnsonite, a Tarkett Company: www.johnsonite.com.c. Mannington Mills, Inc: www.mannington.com.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1066, of Class corresponding to typespecified.

3. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested inaccordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253.

4. Size: 12 by 12 inch.5. Thickness: 0.125 inch.6. Pattern: Marbleized.

B. Vinyl Tile (LVT Plank Flooring): Printed film type, with transparent or translucent wear layer.1. Manufacturers:

a. Armstrong: www.armstrong.com/flooring.b. Johnsonite, a Tarkett Company: www.johnsonite.com.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1700, of Class corresponding to typespecified.

3. Plank Size: 4 by 36 inch.4. Wear Layer Thickness: 0.020 inch.5. Total Thickness: 0.125 inch.6. Pattern: Embossed surface.

2.02 RESILIENT BASEA. Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B, Cove:

1. Manufacturers:a. Burke Flooring: www.burkemercer.com.b. Johnsonite, a Tarkett Company: www.johnsonite.com.c. Roppe Corp: www.roppe.com.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2. Height: 4 1/4 inch.3. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick.4. Finish: Satin.5. Length: Roll.6. Color: Color as selected from manufacturer's standards.

2.03 ACCESSORIESA. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer.B. Primers, Adhesives, and Seam Sealer: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring

manufacturer.C. Moisture Barrier coating: For use on all floors to receive resilient flooring.

1. Basis of Design Product: Wakol GmbH: Wakol PU 280 Moisture Barrier:www.wakol-usa.com.

2. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.D. Filler for Coved Base: Plastic.


A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks thatmight telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners,and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate.

B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base.


C. Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for resilientflooring installation by testing for moisture and pH.1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring

manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers.B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other

defects with sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface.C. Prohibit traffic until filler is fully cured.D. Clean substrate.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.D. Fit joints and butt seams tightly.E. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.F. Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door, terminate

flooring under centerline of door.G. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where

indicated.H. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce

tight joints.I. Install feature strips where indicated.

3.04 TILE FLOORINGA. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed, unless

otherwise indicated in manufacturer's installation instructions.B. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern.C. Install tile to brick pattern. Allow minimum 1/2 full size tile width at room or area perimeter.

3.05 RESILIENT BASEA. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints.B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, 'V' cut back of base strip to 2/3 of its thickness and

fold. At exposed ends, use premolded units.C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.

3.06 CLEANINGA. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

3.07 PROTECTIONA. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation.


......

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 09 6813 - 11515 08.29.2016 TILE CARPETING

SECTION 09 6813TILE CARPETING


A. Carpet tile, fully adhered.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 6116 - VOC Content Restrictions.B. Section 09 6800 - Carpeting: Broadloom carpet.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using

a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2014c.B. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring;

2011.C. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using

a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2015.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of joints.C. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance

characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation.D. Samples: Submit two carpet tiles illustrating color and pattern design for each carpet color

selected.E. Submit two, 12 inch long samples of edge strip.F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.G. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials,

and suggested schedule for cleaning.H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Carpet Tiles: Quantity equal to 5 percent of total installed of each color and pattern

installed.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet tile withminimum three years documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet tile with minimum three yearsdocumented experience and approved by carpet tile manufacturer.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation.


A. Manufacturers:1. Tandus: www.tandus.com.2. Interface, Inc: www.interfaceinc.com.3. Mohawk Flooring: www.mohawkflooring.com.4. Shaw Industries Group, Inc: www.shawfloors.com.5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.


2.02 MATERIALSA. Tile Carpeting: Tufted, manufactured in one color dye lot.

1. Tile Size: 24 by 24 inch, nominal.2. Thickness: 0.120 inch, nominal.3. Color: See Drawings.4. Pattern: See Drawings.5. Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.22 watts/sq cm, when tested in accordance with

ASTM E648 or NFPA 253.6. Dye Method: 100% Solution Dyed Nylon.7. Tufted Face Weight: 14 oz.8. Gage: 1/12 inch.9. Primary Backing Material: Vinyl.

2.03 ACCESSORIESA. Sub-Floor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by flooring material manufacturer.B. Edge Strips: Rubber, color as selected by Architect.C. Moisture Barrier coating: For use on all floors to receive carpet tile.

1. Basis of Design Product: Wakol GmbH: Wakol PU 280 Moisture Barrier:www.wakol-usa.com.

2. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.D. Adhesives:

1. Compatible with materials being adhered; maximum VOC content as specified in Section01 6116.

E. Carpet Tile Adhesive: Recommended by carpet tile manufacturer; releasable type.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified for that type ofwork and are ready to receive carpet tile.

B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding ofadhesive materials to sub-floor surfaces.

C. Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for flooringinstallation by testing for moisture and pH.1. Test in accordance with ASTM F710.2. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by flooring material

manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.D. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers.B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and

other defects with sub-floor filler.C. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is

cured.D. Vacuum clean substrate.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.B. Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match.D. Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps.










































E. Lay carpet tile in quarter turn pattern, with pile direction alternating to next unit, set parallel tobuilding lines.

F. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline.G. Fully adhere carpet tile to substrate.H. Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions.I. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Remove excess adhesive without damage, from floor, base, and wall surfaces.B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.














......

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 09 8100 - 11515 08.29.2016 ACOUSTICAL SPACE UNITS: BAFFLES &CLOUDS

SECTION 09 8100ACOUSTICAL SPACE UNITS: BAFFLES & CLOUDS


A. Custom fabricated acoustical baffles and clouds.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures, project meetings,progress schedules and documentation, reports, coordination.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C423 Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by

the Reverberation Room Method.B. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.C. ASTM E795 Standard Practices for Mounting Test Specimens During Sound Absorption Tests.

1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONA. Performance Requirements:

1. Surface Burning Characteristics (ASTM E84):a. Flame spread: 25, maximum.b. Smoke developed: 450, maximum.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1

Submittal Procedures Section.C. Product Data: Submit product data sheet, for specified products.D. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, edge profiles and baffle / cloud

components, including suspension method, accessories, finish colors and textures.E. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples of finishes, colors and textures.F. Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance

requirements.1. Standard Systems: Submit certified copies of previous test reports substantiating

performance of system in lieu of retesting.1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirements Section.B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with

identification labels intact.C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental

conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions. Environmental conditions required forstorage are the same as for installation, see 1.07 - A, Field Conditions.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Environmental Requirements: Do not install baffles or clouds until wet work, such as concrete

and plastering, is complete; the building is enclosed; and the temperature and relative humidityare stabilized at 60 - 80 degrees F and 40% to 50%, respectively.


A. Armstrong: www.armstrong.com.

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 09 8100 - 21515 08.29.2016 ACOUSTICAL SPACE UNITS: BAFFLES &CLOUDS

B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Basis of Design: Armstrong Soundscapes Basics Acoustical Canopies.1. Material: Mineral Fiber pre-formed panels in wave pattern as shown on drawings.2. Surface Finish: Scrim on all sides with finished square edges.3. Fire Performance: TASTM E84 Class A per IBC.4. Light Reflectance: 0.90.5. Layout/Design: See drawings.6. Color: See drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer’s product data, including product technical bulletins,product catalog installation instructions and product carton instructions for installation.

3.02 EXAMINATIONA. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify that the supporting structure for suspension of acoustical

baffles or clouds previously installed under other sections, is acceptable for product installationin accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.1. Do not install baffles or clouds until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.03 CLEANINGA. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning baffles or clouds soiled during installation.

Replace baffles or clouds that cannot be cleaned to as new condition.B. Keep site free from accumulation of waste and debris.


J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 09 8415 - 11515 08.29.2016 ACOUSTIC STRETCHED-FABRIC WALL PANELS

SECTION 09 8415ACOUSTIC STRETCHED-FABRIC WALL PANELS


A. Acoustic stretched-fabric wall system.B. Accessories as required for complete installation.


1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C423 - Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients

by the Reverberation Room Method; 2009a.B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.C. ASTM E2573 - Standard Practice for Specimen Preparation and Mounting of Site-Fabricated

Stretch Systems to Assess Surface Burning Characteristics; 2012.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.3. Installation methods.4. Specimen warranty.

C. Selection Samples: Fabric swatches representing manufacturer's full range of available colors,textures, and patterns.

D. Verification Samples:1. For each fabric specified, minimum size 12 inch square, representing actual product in

color, texture, and pattern.E. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been

completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. Supply an additional 5 (five) percent of fabric installed for Owner's use in maintenance ofproject.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company with not less than 5 years of experience in

manufacturing acoustical products similar to those specified.B. Installer Qualifications: Firm specializing in acoustic stretched-fabric systems, with not less than

5 years of documented experience in installing systems of the type specified, and approved bythe manufacturer.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Protect fabric, acoustical backing, and track from excessive moisture in shipment, storage, and

handling.B. Do not deliver materials to project until wet work such as concrete and plaster has been

completed.C. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.D. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials,

in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.


1.07 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not begin installation until interior conditions have reached temperature and humidity that will

be maintained during occupancy. Do not install products under environmental conditionsoutside manufacturer's absolute limits.

1.08 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.


A. Acoustic Stretched-Fabric Wall Panels:1. Basis of Design: Acoustical Solutions; Studio 54 Cleanable Acoustic Panels:

www.acousticalsolutions.com.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 ACOUSTIC STRETCHED-FABRIC WALL PANELSA. Acoustic Stretched-Fabric Wall System: Factory installed, fabric is stretched and set into

framework and laid over acoustic material anchored to substrate. Framework consists ofcontinuous perimeter and intermediate mounting frames anchored to substrate, and designed topermit removal and replacement of fabric within framed areas without affecting adjacent areas.1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame Spread Index of 25, maximum; Smoke Developed

Index of 450, maximum; when whole system is tested in accordance with ASTM E84 usingmounting specified in ASTM E2573 for stretched systems.

2. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): 0.80, minimum, when tested in accordance withASTM C423, Type A mounting.

3. Fabric should be fully wrapped on panel including rear of panel.4. Edges: Square5. Color: To be selected from manufacturer's full line6. Seams in fabric are not permitted; adjust frame layouts to accommodate width of fabric;

obtain written approval of frame layouts from Architect.2.03 MATERIALS

A. Frame: Hardened edge framing system..1. Wall Frame Size: 1 inch height from wall substrate with minimum 1 inch wide base.

a. Wall Frame Shape: As indicated on drawings at perimeter, and square atintermediate abutting joints.

b. Application: Mount acoustical panels to wall locations as indicated on the drawings.B. Acoustic Material:

1. Multi-Density Fiberglass Board: Consisting of 1/8 inch thick facing sheet of 18 to 22 lbs/cuft density laminated over compressed fiberglass board, Class A fire rated in accordancewith ASTM E84, with square edge in 48 inch by 48 inch panels.a. Overall Thickness: 1 inch.

2. Compressed Fiberglass Board: Class A fire rated in accordance with ASTM E84, 6 lbs/cuft density, with square edge in 48 inch by 48 inch panels.a. Overall Thickness: 1 inch.

C. Fabric: Heavy-duty fire-retardant commercial fabric, as provided by manufacturer of acousticpanel system; color, pattern, and texture as selected from system manufacturer's fabricsupplier's standard line of fabric.

D. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer of acoustic wall panel system in accordance withproject requirements.

E. Adhesives: Low VOC or water-based, approved by acoustic wall panel system manufacturer,and complying with requirements of Section 01 6116.






























A. Begin installation only after substrates have been properly prepared.B. Verify that casework, markerboards, door and window jambs, finished ceiling, and other finished

items adjacent or abutting the acoustic wall panel system have been properly installed.C. When preparation of substrate is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of

unsatisfactory preparation prior to proceeding with this work.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install acoustic wall panel system at locations indicated in accordance with approved shopdrawings and manufacturer's instructions.

3.03 CLEANINGA. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustic wall panel system in compliance with manufacturers

instructions for cleaning and repair of minor damage to exposed surfaces.B. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently

eliminate evidence of any damage to panels.3.04 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed materials upon completion of this work, using methods that will ensure that thefinished work is without damage or deterioration upon Date of Substantial Completion.























......

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 09 9123 - 11515 08.29.2016 INTERIOR PAINTING

SECTION 09 9123INTERIOR PAINTING


A. Surface preparation.B. Field application of paints.C. Scope: Finish interior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless

otherwise indicated.1. Both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telecom equipment before

installing equipment.2. Prime surfaces to receive wall coverings.3. Mechanical and Electrical:

a. In finished areas, paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated andexposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, andelectrical equipment, unless otherwise indicated.

b. In finished areas, paint shop-primed items.c. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that

are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visiblesurfaces.

d. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboardcabinets to match face panels.

D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:1. Items factory-finished unless otherwise indicated; materials and products having

factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished.2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, bar code labels, and

operating parts of equipment.5. Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne coated stainless steel, and lead items.6. Marble, granite, slate, and other natural stones.7. Floors, unless specifically indicated.8. Ceramic and other tiles.9. Brick, architectural concrete, cast stone, integrally colored plaster and stucco.10. Glass.11. Concrete masonry units in utility, mechanical, and electrical spaces.12. Acoustical materials, unless specifically indicated.13. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.


1.03 DEFINITIONSA. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications;

2014.B. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and

Wood-Base Materials; 2007.C. MPI (APL) - Master Painters Institute Approved Products List; Master Painters and Decorators

Association; current edition, www.paintinfo.com.


D. MPI (APSM) - Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual; CurrentEdition, www.paintinfo.com.

E. SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning; 2015.F. SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning; 2007.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide complete list of products to be used, with the following information for

each:1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category

(e.g. "alkyd enamel").2. MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47).3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of

each system.4. Manufacturer's installation instructions.5. If proposal of substitutions is allowed under submittal procedures, explanation of

substitutions proposed.C. Samples: Submit two painted samples, illustrating selected colors and textures for each color

and system selected. Submit on card stock, 6 by 8 inch in size.D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures.E. Maintenance Data: Submit data including finish schedule showing where each

product/color/finish was used, product technical data sheets, material safety data sheets(MSDS), care and cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, repair of painted and finishedsurfaces, and color samples of each color and finish used.

F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Paint and Finish Materials: 1 gallon of each color; from the same product run, store

where directed.3. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified,

with minimum three years documented experience.B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with

minimum three years experience and approved by manufacturer.1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand

code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, andinstructions for mixing and reducing.

C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature

ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of

substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.C. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.



A. Provide paints and finishes used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; noexceptions.

B. Paints:1. Benjamin Moore & Co: www.benjaminmoore.com.2. PPG Paints: www.ppgpaints.com.3. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com.

C. Stains:1.2. PPG Paints: www.ppgpaints.com.3. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com.

D. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.2.02 PAINTS AND FINISHES - GENERAL

A. Paints and Finishes: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed paint.1. Where MPI paint numbers are specified, provide products listed in Master Painters

Institute Approved Product List, current edition available at www.paintinfo.com, forspecified MPI categories, except as otherwise indicated.

2. Provide paints and finishes of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily anduniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties,and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

3. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated underconditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testingand field experience.

4. For opaque finishes, tint each coat including primer coat and intermediate coats, one-halfshade lighter than succeeding coat, with final finish coat as base color.

5. Supply each paint material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from asingle production run.

6. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute paint or finishes or add materials unless such procedure isspecifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.

B. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: Comply with Section 01 6116.C. Flammability: Comply with applicable code for surface burning characteristics.D. Sheens: Provide the sheens specified; where sheen is not specified, sheen will be selected

later by Architect from the manufacturer's full line.E. Colors: As indicated on drawings.

1. Allow for minimum of three colors for each system, unless otherwise indicated, withoutadditional cost to Owner.

2. Extend colors to surface edges; colors may change at any edge as directed by Architect.3. In finished areas, finish pipes, ducts, conduit, and equipment the same color as the

wall/ceiling they are mounted on/under.2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR

A. Interior Surfaces to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including gypsum board.1. Two top coats and one coat primer.2. Top Coat(s): Interior Latex; MPI #43, 44, 52, 53, 54, or 114.3. Top Coat Sheen:

a. Flat: MPI gloss level 1; use this sheen at all locations, unless otherwise noted.B. Medium Duty Door/Trim: For surfaces subject to frequent contact by occupants, including

metals:1. Medium duty applications include door frames.2. Two top coats and one coat primer.


3. Top Coat(s): Interior Epoxy-Modified Latex; MPI #115 or 215.4. Top Coat Sheen:

a. Semi-Gloss: MPI gloss level 5; use this sheen at all locations.C. Transparent Finish on Wood.

1. 2 top coats over stain.2. Stain: Semi-Transparent Stain for Wood; MPI #90.3. Top Coat(s): Polyurethane Varnish, High Build.4. Top Coat Sheen:

a. Semi-Gloss: MPI gloss level 5; use this sheen at all locations.2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Accessory Materials: Provide primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sandingmaterials, and clean-up materials as required for final completion of painted surfaces.

B. Patching Material: Latex filler.C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.


A. Do not begin application of paints and finishes until substrates have been properly prepared.B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any

condition that may potentially effect proper application.D. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.E. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes

unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.2. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to application.B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best

result for the substrate under the project conditions.C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,

escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.E. Gypsum Board: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair.F. Ferrous Metal:

1. Solvent clean according to SSPC-SP1.2. Shop-Primed Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges

to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steelsurfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.

3. Remove rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances using using methodsrecommended in writing by paint manufacturer and blast cleaning according to SSPC-SP 6"Commercial Blast Cleaning". Protect from corrosion until coated.

G. Wood Surfaces to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, sealknots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer hasdried; sand lightly between coats. Prime concealed surfaces with gloss varnish reduced 25percent with thinner.

3.03 APPLICATIONA. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical

components and paint separately.


B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in"MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual".

C. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied.D. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is

applied.E. Apply each coat to uniform appearance in thicknesses specified by manufacturer.F. Dark Colors and Deep Clear Colors: Regardless of number of coats specified, apply as many

coats as necessary for complete hide.G. Sand metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.H. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior

to applying next coat.I. Wood to Receive Transparent Finishes: Tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain

before set. Wipe excess from surface.J. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed

prior to finishing.3.04 CLEANING

A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, andremove daily from site.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Protect finishes until completion of project.


......

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 10 1400 - 11515 08.29.2016 SIGNAGE

SECTION 10 1400SIGNAGE


A. Room and door signs.B. Interior directional and informational signs.C. Emergency evacuation maps.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and

Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines; current edition.B. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.C. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2009.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product literature for each type of sign, indicating sign

styles, font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign.C. Signage Schedule: Provide information sufficient to completely define each sign for fabrication,

including room number, room name, other text to be applied, sign and letter sizes, fonts, andcolors.1. When room numbers to appear on signs differ from those on the drawings, include the

drawing room number on schedule.2. When content of signs is indicated to be determined later, request such information from

Owner through Architect at least 2 months prior to start of fabrication; upon request,submit preliminary schedule.

3. Submit for approval by Owner through Architect prior to fabrication.D. Verification Samples: Submit samples showing colors specified.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum three years of documented experience.1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation.B. Package room and door signs in sequential order of installation, labeled by floor or building.C. Store tape adhesive at normal room temperature.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS

A. Accessibility Compliance: Signs are required to comply with ADA Standards and ICC A117.1and applicable building codes, unless otherwise indicated; in the event of conflictingrequirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specific requirements.

B. Room and Door Signs: Provide a sign for every doorway, whether it has a door or not, notincluding corridors, lobbies, and similar open areas.1. Sign Type: To match Darton State College standard.2. Provide "tactile" signage, with letters raised minimum 1/32 inch and Grade II braille.

C. Interior Directional and Informational Signs: 1. Sign Type: Same as room and door signs.

D. Emergency Evacuation Maps: 1. Allow for three map locations.

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 10 1400 - 21515 08.29.2016 SIGNAGE

2. Map content to be provided by Owner. 2.02 SIGN TYPES

A. Color and Font: Unless otherwise indicated:1. Character Font: To match Darton State College standard.2. Character Case: To match Darton State College standard.3. Background Color: To match Darton State College standard.4. Character Color: To match Darton State College standard.

2.03 ACCESSORIESA. Concealed Screws: Stainless steel, galvanized steel, chrome plated, or other non-corroding

metal.B. Tape Adhesive: Double sided tape, permanent adhesive.


A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install neatly, with horizontal edges level.C. Locate signs where indicated:

1. Room and Door Signs: Locate on wall at latch side of door with centerline of sign at 60inches above finished floor.

2. If no location is indicated obtain Owner's instructions.D. Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damage items.


J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 10 2800 - 11515 08.29.2016 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

SECTION 10 2800TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES


A. Accessories for toilet rooms and utility rooms.B. Grab bars.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel

Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.B. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011.C. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass;

2012.1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement to receive anchorattachments.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Submit data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, and

attachment methods.C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring

special attention.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design: See Drawings.B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. AJW Architectural Products: www.ajw.com.2. ASI - American Specialties, Inc: www.americanspecialties.com.3. Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com.4. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.: www.bobrick.com.5. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 MATERIALSA. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete

with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.1. Grind welded joints smooth.2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces.

B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304.C. Mirror Glass: Tempered safety glass, ASTM C1048; and ASTM C1036 Type I, Class 1, Quality

Q2, with silvering as required.D. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for

component and substrate.2.03 FINISHES

A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 Brushed finish, unless otherwise noted.2.04 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES- SEE DRAWINGS

A. Grab Bars: Stainless steel, nonslip grasping surface finish.1. Standard Duty Grab Bars:

a. Push/Pull Point Load: 250 pound-force, minimum.

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 10 2800 - 21515 08.29.2016 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

b. Dimensions: 1-1/4 inch outside diameter, minimum 0.05 inch wall thickness, exposedflange mounting, 1-1/2 inch clearance between wall and inside of grab bar.

c. Length and Configuration: As indicated on drawings.2.05 UTILITY ROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Combination Utility Shelf/Mop and Broom Holder: 0.05 inch thick stainless steel, Type 304, with1/2 inch returned edges, 0.06 inch steel wall brackets.1. Hooks: 3, 0.06 inch stainless steel rag hooks at shelf front.2. Mop/broom holders: 3 spring-loaded rubber cam holders at shelf front.3. Length: 36 inches.4. Length: Manufacturer's standard length for number of holders/hooks.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation.B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions in locations indicated on the

drawings.B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.C. Mounting Heights: As required by accessibility regulations, unless otherwise indicated.

3.04 PROTECTIONA. Protect installed accessories from damage due to subsequent construction operations.


J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 10 4400 - 11515 08.29.2016 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

SECTION 10 4400FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES


A. Fire extinguishers.B. Fire extinguisher cabinets.C. Accessories.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2013.B. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features, color and finish, and anchorage

details.C. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements.

1.04 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher

ingredients.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Fire Extinguishers:1. JL Industries, Inc.: www.jlindustries.com2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co: www.larsensmfg.com.3. Poetter-Roemer: www.potterroemer.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and Accessories:1. JL Industries, Inc: www.jlindustries.com.2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co: www.larsensmfg.com.3. Potter-Roemer: www.potterroemer.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERSA. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable

codes, whichever is more stringent.1. Provide extinguishers labeled by UL (DIR) for the purpose specified and indicated.

B. Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguishers: Carbon steel tank, with pressure gage.1. Class: 4A:60B:C.2. Size: 10 pound.3. Finish: Baked polyester powder coat, red color.

2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETSA. Metal: Formed stainless steel sheet; 0.036 inch thick base metal.B. Cabinet Configuration: Semi-recessed type.

1. Sized to accommodate accessories.2. Trim: Returned to wall surface, with 2 inch projection, 2 inch wide face.

C. Door: 0.036 inch thick, reinforced for flatness and rigidity; latch. Hinge doors for 180 degreeopening with continuous piano hinge. Provide nylon catch.

D. Door Glazing: Glass, clear, 1/8 inch thick float. Set in resilient channel gasket glazing.

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 10 4400 - 21515 08.29.2016 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

E. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. Pre-drill for anchors.F. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth.G. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Stainless Steel.H. Finish of Cabinet Interior: White enamel.

2.04 ACCESSORIESA. Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, galvanized and enamel finished.


A. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, 24 inches from finished floor to inside bottom

of cabinet.C. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings.D. Secure rigidly in place.E. Place extinguishers on wall brackets.


J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 11 3100 - 11515 08.29.2016 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES

SECTION 11 3100RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES


A. Kitchen appliances.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical connections for appliances.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data indicating dimensions, capacity, and operating features of

each piece of residential equipment specified.C. Copies of Warranties: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been

completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in thissection, with not less than three years of documented experience.

B. Electric Appliances: Listed and labeled by UL (DIR) and complying with NEMA standards.1.06 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide five (5) year manufacturer warranty on refrigeration system of refrigerators.C. Provide ten (10) year manufacturer warranty on magnetron tube of microwave ovens.D. Provide ten (10) year manufacturer warranty on tub and door liner of dishwashers.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 KITCHEN APPLIANCES

A. Provide Equipment Eligible for Energy Star Rating: Energy Star Rated.B. Refrigerator: Free-standing, top-mounted freezer, and frost-free.

1. Capacity: Total minimum storage of 20 cubic ft; minimum 15 percent freezer capacity.2. Energy Usage: Minimum 20 percent more energy efficient than energy efficiency

standards set by DOE.3. Features: Include automatic icemaker.4. Exterior Finish: Stainless steel, color as indicated.5. Manufacturers:

a. Frigidaire Home Products: www.frigidaire.com.b. GE Appliances: www.geappliances.com.c. Whirlpool Corp: www.whirlpool.com.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Microwave: Countertop.1. Capacity: 2 cubic ft.2. Power: 1200 watts.3. Features: Include turntable, cooktop light, night light, and 2-speed exhaust fan.4. Exterior Finish: Stainless Steel.5. Manufacturers:

a. Frigidaire Home Products: www.frigidaire.com.b. GE Appliances: www.geappliances.com.

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 11 3100 - 21515 08.29.2016 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES

c. Whirlpool Corp: www.whirlpool.com.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

D. Dishwasher: Undercounter.1. Controls: Solid state electronic.2. Wash Levels: Three (3).3. Cycles: Six (6), including normal, rinse and hold, short, china/crystal, and pot and pan.4. Features: Include rinse aid dispenser, optional no-heat dry, optional water temperature

boost, adjustable upper rack, and adjustable lower rack.5. Finish: Stainless steel, color as indicated.6. Manufacturers:

a. Frigidaire Home Products: www.frigidaire.com.b. GE Appliances: www.geappliances.com.c. Whirlpool Corp: www.whirlpool.com.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.


A. Verify utility rough-ins are provided and correctly located.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Anchor built-in equipment in place.

3.03 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust equipment to provide efficient operation.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Remove packing materials from equipment and properly discard.B. Wash and clean equipment.


J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 12 3600 - 11515 08.29.2016 COUNTERTOPS

SECTION 12 3600COUNTERTOPS


A. Countertops for architectural cabinet work.B. Wall-hung counters and vanity tops.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.B. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014.C. ISFA 2-01 - Classification and Standards for Solid Surfacing Material; 2013.D. ISFA 3-01 - Classification and Standards for Quartz Surfacing Material; 2013.E. MIA (DSDM) - Dimensional Stone Design Manual; VII, 2007.F. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005.G. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used.C. Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation; combine with shop drawings of

cabinets and casework specified in other sections.D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, minimum size 6 inches square,

representing actual product, color, and patterns.E. Test Reports: Chemical resistance testing, showing compliance with specified requirements.F. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for maintenance and

repair of countertop surfaces.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: Same fabricator as for cabinets on which tops are to be installed.1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials,

in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limitsrecommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products underenvironmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 COUNTERTOPS

A. Quality Standard: See Section 06 4100.B. Plastic Laminate Countertops: High-pressure decorative laminate (HPDL) sheet bonded to

substrate.1. Laminate Sheet: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS, 0.048 inch nominal thickness.

a. Manufacturers:


1) Formica Corporation: www.formica.com.2) Lamin-Art, Inc: www.laminart.com.3) Panolam Industries International, Inc.\Nevamar: www.nevamar.com.4) Panolam Industries International, Inc.\Pionite: www.pionitelaminates.com.5) Wilsonart: www.wilsonart.com.6) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

b. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25, maximum; smokedeveloped index of 450, maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

c. Finish: Matte or suede, gloss rating of 5 to 20.d. Surface Color and Pattern: As indicated on drawings.e. Locations: Breakroom and work rooms.

2. Exposed Edge Treatment: Square, substrate built up to minimum 1-1/4 inch thick;covered with matching laminate.

3. Back and End Splashes: Same material, same construction.C. Solid Surfacing Countertops: Solid surfacing sheet or plastic resin casting over continuous

substrate.1. Flat Sheet Thickness: 1/4 inch, minimum.2. Solid Surfacing Sheet and Plastic Resin Castings: Complying with ISFA 2-01and NEMA

LD 3; acrylic or polyester resin, mineral filler, and pigments; homogenous, non-porous andcapable of being worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools; no surfacecoating; color and pattern consistent throughout thickness.a. Manufacturers:

1) Avonite Surfaces: www.avonitesurfaces.com.2) Dupont: www.corian.com.3) Formica Corporation: www.formica.com.4) Wilsonart: www.wilsonart.com.5) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

b. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25, maximum; smokedeveloped index of 450, maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

c. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Matte, gloss rating of 5 to 20.d. Color and Pattern: As indicated on drawings.

3. Other Components Thickness: 1/2 inch, minimum.4. Exposed Edge Treatment: Built up to minimum 1-1/4 inch thick; edge profile as indicated

on drawings; use marine edge at sinks.5. Back and End Splashes: Same sheet material, square top; minimum 4 inches high.6. Fabricate in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS), Section 11 - Countertops, Custom

Grade.D. Natural Quartz/Recycled Glass and Resin Composite Countertops: Sheet or slab of natural

quartz and plastic resin over continuous substrate.1. Flat Sheet Thickness: 1-1/4 inch, minimum.2. Natural Quartz/Recycled Glass and Resin Composite Sheets, Slabs and Castings:

Complying with ISFA 3-01 and NEMA LD 3; orthophthalic polyester resin, mineral filler,and pigments; homogenous, non-porous and capable of being worked and repaired usingstandard woodworking tools; no surface coating; color and pattern consistent throughoutthickness.a. Manufacturers:

1) Basis of Design: EOS Solid Surfaces: GEOS Recycled Glass Surfaces:www.eos-surfaces.com.

2) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.b. Factory fabricate components to the greatest extent practical in sizes and shapes

indicated; comply with the MIA Dimension Stone Design Manual.c. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25, maximum; smoke

developed index of 450, maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.d. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Polished.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NEMA%20LD%203





































e. Color and Pattern: As indicated on drawings.3. Other Components Thickness: 3/4 inch, minimum.4. Exposed Edge Treatment: Built up to minimum 1-1/4 inch thick; bullnosed edge; use

marine edge at sinks.5. Back and End Splashes: Same sheet material, square top; minimum 4 inches high.6. Location: Transaction counter and kiosks.

2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALSA. Plywood for Supporting Substrate: PS 1 Exterior Grade, A-C veneer grade, minimum 5-ply;

minimum 3/4 inch thick; join lengths using metal splines.B. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of

materials being joined.C. Joint Sealant: Mildew-resistant silicone sealant, white.

2.03 FABRICATIONA. Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints flush.

1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer.2. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch except where top butts against

cabinet or wall.3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or

unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes.B. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise

indicated.1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof

glue.2. Height: 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solid Surfacing: Fabricate tops up to 144 inches long in one piece; join pieces with adhesivesealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.

D. Wall-Mounted Counters: Provide skirts, aprons, brackets, and braces as indicated on drawings,finished to match.


A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding.C. Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets

are installed in proper locations.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best

result for the substrate under the project conditions.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level;shim where required.

B. Attach plastic laminate countertops using screws with minimum penetration into substrate boardof 5/8 inch.

C. Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces.3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Variation From Horizontal: 1/8 inch in 10 feet, maximum.



















































B. Offset From Wall, Countertops: 1/8 inch maximum; 1/16 inch minimum.C. Field Joints: 1/8 inch wide, maximum.

3.05 CLEANINGA. Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly.

3.06 PROTECTIONA. Protect installed products until completion of project.B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.













1515 08.29.2016 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM

SECTION 21 0000

AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Modify the existing automatic fire sprinkler system as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.

B. The existing system is the wet-pipe type.

C. Provide sprinkler branches and new sprinkler heads in all spaces where indicated in accordance with codes, space available, specifications, and ceiling finish. Sprinklers shall be relocated in all spaces included in this project except where noted otherwise.

D. Plans are diagrammatic and show generally the location of heads and are not to be scaled for construction measurements. All dimensions shall be verified at the building site.

1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. All work shall comply with the specifications and noted codes and standards. Where the requirements of these specifications exceed specified codes and ordinances, conform to these specifications.

B. The latest edition of the following standards, and as published by the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), govern work in this Section.

NFPA 13: Sprinkler Systems. NFPA 101: Life Safety Code. State and Local Codes. IRI: Industrial Risk Insurers.

C. All products and components installed in the system shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and approved by Factory Mutual Engineering (FM).

1.03 GUARANTEE

A. In addition to other warranties or guarantees required by the contract documents, guarantee all piping, devices and related materials and workmanship for a period of one year from date of the Owner's final acceptance of the project. All defects shall be promptly corrected at no cost to the Owner.

B. Be responsible for providing a sprinkler system that has been coordinated with the contract documents and approved by all agencies listed in this section.

C. Correct all deficiencies pointed out by field inspectors representing these agencies, at no cost to the Owner.

1.04 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS

A. The Contractor shall possess a certificate of competency and have at least 4 years of current experience in the installation of fire protection and detection systems similar in size and design for this particular project. A written record of this qualification shall be submitted to the Owner.

1.05 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Become familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions in the field, and advise the Owner of any discrepancy before performing the work.

B. All piping, fittings and sprinkler system components shall be rated for system pressure.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Materials and equipment shall conform to NFPA 13 and other requirements specified herein.

B. Unless noted otherwise, all materials shall be new and free from defects.

C. Materials and equipment used for similar application shall be the products of one manufacturer unless noted otherwise.



D. All pipe shall be stamped on each length with its ASTM, ANSI, or AWWA number. Bundles of steel pipes shall have a metal tag attached showing the ASTM number and pipe schedule.

2.02 SPRINKLERS

A. Sprinklers below finished ceilings shall be pendant 1/2-inch orifice, UL listed types having a chrome finish. Temperature rating shall be 165 deg F. K value shall be approximately 5.6. Provide chrome plated recessed escutcheons where recessed light fixtures are furnished. Provide standard escutcheons where surface mounted light fixtures are provided. Star, Viking, Central, or approved equal.

B. Sprinklers in areas having no finished ceilings shall be standard upright, 1/2-inch UL listed 165 deg F temperature rated types having brass finish, except near heaters or duct outlets where sprinklers having an intermediate temperature rating shall be used. K value shall be approximately 5.6. Star, Viking, Central, or approved equal.

C. Release element of each head shall be of the ordinary temperature rating 160-165 deg F or higher as suitable for the individual location where the head is installed. Sprinkler heads subject to high temperature caused by unit heaters, hot pipes, radiant ceilings, or other heat sources shall be of high temperature rating or higher.

2.03 PIPE

A. Sprinkler pipe and fittings shall be per NFPA 13, except as modified herein.

B. Pipe shall be ASTM A 795 steel pipe and shall be Schedule 40 for sizes less than 2 inches and Schedule 10 ASTM A 135 steel pipe or ASTM A 795 Schedule 40 steel pipe for sizes 2 inches and larger.

C. Rubber gasketed grooved-end pipe and fittings with mechanical couplings shall only be permitted in pipe sizes 2 inches or larger.

D. Steel piping with wall thickness less than Schedule 30 shall not be welded, cut grooved or threaded. Threadable thinwall piping will be accepted if UL listed and FM approved.

E. The following are acceptable options: Black steel, Schedule 40, to meet ASTM A 795. Black steel thinwall, Schedule 10 wall thickness, 0.134 min. wall thickness, 300 psi max.

operating pressure to meet ASTM A 135 Standard. Galvanized steel, Schedule 40, to meet ASTM A 795. Galvanized steel thinwall, Schedule 10, 300 psi max. operating pressure to meet ASTM A

135 Standard.

2.04 PIPE FITTINGS

A. Fittings into which sprinkler heads, sprinkler head riser nipples or drop nipples are threaded, shall be threaded or grooved-end type. Black malleable iron threaded fittings shall be Class 150. Fittings shall be manufactured per ANSI B16.3 standards.

B. Use of plain-end fittings with mechanical couplings which utilize steel gripping devices to bite into the pipe when pressure is applied, will not be permitted.

C. Fittings shall be UL listed and/or FM approved for use in wet-pipe sprinkler systems. Fittings, mechanical couplings and rubber gaskets shall be supplied by the same manufacturer.

D. Grooved couplings with minimum pressure rating for expected working pressure. Acceptable manufacturers: For use with Schedule 40 pipe with cut grooves. Gustin-Bacon

100, 500 PSI max. working pressure, or equal by Pipeco or Victaulic. Acceptable manufacturers: For use with light wall pipe with rolled grooves conforming to

NFPA 13. Gustin-Bacon 100, 300 PSI max. working pressure, or equal by Pipeco or Victaulic.

Acceptable manufacturers: For use with light wall pipe with rolled grooves conforming to NFPA 13. Victaulic 75, 500 PSI max. working pressure, or equal by Pipeco or Victaulic. Grooved fittings for connection to cut or rolled grooved pipe with minimum pressure rating to exceed expected working pressure. Couplings joining fittings and pipe shall be of the same manufacturer as fittings.



2.05 RETURN BENDS

A. Return bends shall be provided on all drops to pendant sprinkler heads. Sprinkler branch lines supplying pendant sprinkler heads shall be connected to the top of the supply main.

2.06 PIPE HANGERS

A. Pipe hangers, braces and supports shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 13.

B. Hanger rings shall be band type. Acceptable manufacturers: Elcen 89, ITT Grinnell 97, Michigan 100, Fee and Mason 400, PHD Manufacturing 141 and 151, Globe 304.

C. Clevis hangers. Acceptable manufacturers: Elcen 12, Michigan 400, Fee and Mason 239, ITT Grinnell 260, PHD Manufacturing 450, Globe 400 and 400N.

D. Upper hanger attachments shall be C-clamp with set screw and lock nut. Acceptable manufacturers: Elcen 29A, UL listed, Elcen 231 UL listed; Michigan 300L; ITT Grinnell 86 UL listed, FM approved, Fee and Mason 250L, 255L Globe 250, 254, 259, 354, 103N, 107N and 203; PHD 250, 270, 340, 350, 360, 370; Tolco 67 and 68.

E. Top beam clamp with set screw and locknut. Acceptable manufacturers: Michigan 300L and 310; Fee and Mason 269 and 270; ITT Grinnell 227 UL listed; FM approved.

F. Provide pipe sleeves where piping passes entirely through walls. Secure sleeves in position and location during construction. Provide sleeves of sufficient length to pass through entire thickness of walls. Provide one inch minimum clearance between exterior of piping and interior of sleeve or core-drilled hole. Firmly pack space with mineral wool insulation. Seal space at both ends of the sleeve or core-drilled hole with plastic waterproof cement which will dry to a firm but pliable mass, or provide a mechanically adjustable segmented elastomeric seal. In fire walls, seal both ends of pipe sleeves or core-drilled holes with UL listed fill, void, or cavity material.

G. Sleeves in masonry and concrete walls shall be hot-dip galvanized steel, ductile-iron, or cast-iron sleeves. Core drilling of masonry and concrete may be provided in lieu of pipe sleeves when cavities in the core-drilled hole are completely grouted smooth.

H. Provide split hinge metal escutcheon plates for piping entering walls and ceilings in exposed spaces. Provide polished stainless steel plates or chromium-plated finish on copper alloy plates in finished spaces. Provide paint finish on metal plates in unfinished spaces.

2.07 FLEXIBLE SPRINKLER HOSE FITTINGS FOR FIRE PROTECTION SERVICE

A. Manufacturer: FlexHead Industries, Inc. or approved equal.

B. Description: Flexible Sprinkler Hose Fittings for use in commercial suspended ceilings. Regulatory Requirements: Provide flexible stainless steel hose fittings that comply with the

following requirements: In accordance with General Requirements contained in Division 01 of specification. In accordance with NFPA 13.

C. Performance Criteria: Comply with the following to suit project requirements: FM Approved for its intended use pursuant to FM 1637 Approval Standard for Flexible

Sprinkler Hose with Threaded End Fittings. UL Listed for its intended use pursuant to UL 2443 Standard for Flexible Sprinkler Hose

with Fittings for Fire Protection Service.

D. Materials: FlexHead Commercial Sprinkler Connections. FlexHead flexible stainless steel hose assemblies:

Straight Hose Assembly Lengths: 2ft length, Model #2024, 3ft length, Model #2036, 4ft length, Model #2048, 5ft length, Model #2060, 6ft length, Model #2072.

1/2 inch outlet. 175 psi maximum rated pressure. Fully welded non-mechanical fittings, braided, leak-tested with minimum 1 inch

True-bore internal corrugated hose diameter made of 100% 304 stainless steel including end fittings.



Elbow Hose Assembly Lengths (For use in confined spaces): 2ft length, Model #2024E, 3ft length, Model #2036E, 4ft length, Model #2048E, 5ft length, Model #2060E, 6ft length, Model #2072E

1/2 inch outlet. 175 psi maximum rated pressure. Fully welded non-mechanical fittings, braided, leak-tested with minimum 1 inch

True-bore internal corrugated hose diameter made of 100% 304 stainless steel including end fittings.

FlexHead Ceiling Bracket: Direct attachment type having integrated snap-on clip ends positively attached to the ceiling using tamper-resistant screws and removable attachment hub with set screw for attaching and adjusting flexible hose.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Installation, workmanship, fabrication, assembly, erection, examination, inspection and testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 13, except as modified herein. Install piping straight and true to bear evenly on hangers and supports. Do not hang piping from plaster ceilings. Keep the interior and ends of new piping and existing piping affected by Contractor's operations thoroughly cleaned of water and foreign matter.

B. Keep piping systems clean during installation by means of plugs or other approved methods. When work is not in progress, securely close open ends of piping to prevent entry of water and foreign matter. Inspect piping before placing into position. Provide piping compound or Teflon tape applied to male threads only.

3.02 COORDINATION AND SYSTEMS LAYOUT

A. Sprinkler systems shall be compatible with the building layout and shall avoid interference with structural, electrical, mechanical and plumbing work in the building. Final layout in special finish areas shall be approved by the Owner.

B. Install systems to keep all piping concealed in all areas with ceilings. All piping and equipment shall be located as out-of-the-way as possible, holding all piping and equipment close in corners and to walls.

C. Sprinkler heads shall be symmetrically located as required to provide proper coverage and to avoid interference with lights, diffusers, grilles or other ceiling mounted equipment. Where sprinkler heads are located in a ceiling, use symmetrical head pattern in proper relationship with the general ceiling pattern, including ceiling tile where applicable and lights throughout each area. Center sprinkler head in all ceiling tiles.

D. Provide sprinkler coverage for all areas of the project unless specifically noted otherwise on drawings.

3.03 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. The installation of all hangers and supports shall comply with NFPA 13.

B. All sprinkler piping shall be independently supported from other piping and duct systems. All piping shall be rigidly supported.

C. Where grooved couplings and/or other systems of mechanical fittings and couplings are utilized for fastening, sufficient number of hangers shall be provided to prevent any sagging or misalignment of piping.

3.04 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Prior to connecting sprinkler piping for flushing, flush water feed mains, lead-in connections and control portions of sprinkler piping. After fire sprinkler piping installation has been completed and before piping is placed in service, flush entire sprinkler system as required to remove foreign substances.



B. Continue flushing until water is clear, and check to ensure that debris has not clogged sprinklers. Provide test connections on sprinkler mains, cross-mains and large branch piping to permit flushing.

3.05 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Furnish all labor and equipment required to conduct all specified tests.

B. All tests and inspections of the system and its components shall be witnessed by representatives of the Owner, the Contractor, the local fire department (at their discretion) and the Insurance and Regulatory Agencies at a time coordinated between all parties. A minimum of 5 working days’ notice shall be given that the system is ready for tests.

3.06 CERTIFICATE OF APPROVAL

A. On completion of installation, obtain and deliver to the Owner certificates of final inspection and approval. Test certificates shall be signed by a Certificate of Competency holder.


......


1515 08.29.2016 PLUMBING

SECTION 22 0000

PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The requirements of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and Section 23 0000, Mechanical General, apply to all work specified in this section.

1.02 DESCRIPTION

A. Include all necessary apparatus, excavating, controls, valves and fittings required for a complete sanitary plumbing system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPING

A. Domestic hot and cold water piping: Hard copper tube: ASTM B88, Type "L", water tube, hard drawn temper, with soldered joints and wrought copper socket fittings.

B. Building soil, drain, waste and vent piping: Interior above grade: Hubless cast iron pipe and fittings shall be manufactured from gray

cast iron and shall conform to ASTM A 888 and CISPI Standard 301. All pipe shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute and listed by NSF International. Only piping products made in the USA will be acceptable. Shall be manufactured by Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company, Tyler Pipe or AB&I Foundry.

Below grade: Hub and spigot cast iron pipe shall be manufactured from gray cast iron and shall conform to ASTM A 74. All pipe shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute and listed by NSF International. Pipe to be service weight (SV), pipe and fittings shall coated in accordance with the ASTM and CISPI standards for pipe and fittings. Only piping products made in the USA will be acceptable. Shall be manufactured by Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company, Tyler Pipe or AB&I Foundry.

2.02 PIPE FITTINGS

A. Domestic hot and cold water piping: Wrought copper, solder-joint pressure fittings, ASME B16.22. Provide reducing fittings to reduce pipe size. Bushings will not be acceptable.

B. Hubless Cast iron piping fittings: Shall be manufactured from gray cast iron and shall conform to ASTM A 888 and CISPI Standard 301. All fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute and listed by NSF International. Only pipe fittings made in the USA will be acceptable. Shall be manufactured by Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company, Tyler Pipe or AB&I Foundry.

C. Hub and Spigot Cast Iron Soil pipe fittings: Hub and Spigot Cast Iron fittings shall be service weight (SV) and shall be manufactured from gray cast iron and shall conform to ASTM A 74. All pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute and listed by NSF International. Below grade fittings shall be tar coated. Only pipe fittings made in the USA will be acceptable. Shall be manufactured by Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company, Tyler Pipe or AB&I Foundry.

2.03 PIPE JOINTS

A. Solder joints in Type L copper tubing and on all copper waste piping: Wire solder, 95/5 lead free, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Joints in cast iron piping: Joints for hub and spigot piping shall be per ASTM C1563 for one piece elastomeric

compression-type gaskets made of neoprene. Gaskets shall be marked with ASTM C564 and the "CI" symbol of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. Gaskets shall completely fill the hub.

Joints for no-hub soil piping shall be per ASTM C1540 for heavy duty no-hub couplings constructed of type 304 stainless steel shield with a minimum shield thickness of 0.015 inches, neoprene gasket conforming to ASTM C564, type 304 stainless steel band clamps


1515 08.29.2016 PLUMBING

and stainless steel screws. Couplings shall have a minimum of 4 band clamps for pipe sizes 4 inch and smaller and 6 band clamps for pipe sizes 5 inch and larger. No-hub couplings shall be manufactured by Husky SD 4000, Charlotte Super Duty 4000 or Mission Heavy Weight.

Joints for no-hub cast iron pipe below grade shall be cast iron clamps (ASTM A48/A48M) with neoprene gaskets (ASTM C564) and stainless steel bolts (ANSI B18.2.1) and nuts (ANSI B18.2.2). Couplings shall be approved and certified to ASTM A-1056 and CISPI 310.

2.04 GRADES

A. Horizontal drainage piping less than 3 inch diameter shall be installed with fall of not less than 1/4 inch per ft. Drainage piping 3 inch diameter and larger shall be installed with fall of not less than 1/8 inch per foot unless otherwise shown on the drawings.

2.05 VALVES AND SPECIALTY ITEMS

A. Refer to Section 23 0523, Valves, for requirements.

2.06 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Refer to Section 23 0529, Pipe Hangers and Supports, for requirements.

2.07 PIPING INSULATION

A. Refer to Section 23 0700, Thermal Insulation for Mechanical Systems, for requirements.

2.08 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Drains shall be manufactured by J.R. Smith Manufacturing Company or equal by Zurn Industries, Inc., Wade Manufacturing Company, Josam, Mifab or Watts. All drains shall be of the same manufacturer.

2.09 TRAP GUARD

A. Sewer Gas and Sewage Backup Protection floor drain inserts shall be manufactured by Trap Guard® or equal by Wade or J.R. smith.

B. Description: Material: Smooth, soft, flexible, elastomeric PVC material molded into shape of duck’s bill,

open on top with curl closure at bottom. Allows wastewater to open and adequately discharge floor drain through its interior. Closes and returns to original molded shape after wastewater discharge is complete.

C. Compliance: ASME A112.6.3. NSF/ANSI 14.

2.10 CLEANOUTS

A. Cleanouts shall consist of cast iron ferrule and heavy brass cleanout plug with square head.

B. Cleanouts in floors shall be J.R. Smith Series 4000 or equal by Zurn, Wade, Watts, Mifab or Josam. Floor cleanouts shall have inside caulk outlet, coated cast iron internal cleanout with lead seal, brass rim, and Nickel Bronze cover plate for light traffic, secured to plug by countersunk screw for installation flush with finished floor. Cleanouts in walls shall be J.R. Smith Series 4422 or equal by Zurn, Wade, Josam, Mifab or Watts.

C. Where piping is concealed in walls install cleanouts with counter-sunk plugs and chrome plated or stainless steel covers on the surface of the wall. For cleanouts in floors with vinyl composition tile (VCT) provide cover plate with depression for inset in the VCT. Provide carpet marker in carpeted areas

2.11 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS

A. Field fabricated air chambers will not be acceptable.

B. Select and size water hammer arrestors in strict accordance with Standard PDI - WH201.


1515 08.29.2016 PLUMBING

C. Arrestors shall be manufactured by Precision Plumbing Products SC-500, SC-750 or SC-1000, or equal by Zurn, J.R. Smith, Wade, Josam or Watts.

2.12 PLUMBING FIXTURES

A. Provide plumbing fixtures complete with trim. All fixtures, trimmings and stops shall be Grade "A" and shall be of one manufacturer. Trim shall be chrome plated brass. Plastic trim will not be acceptable. Refer to the plumbing fixture schedule on the drawings.

B. Plumbing fixtures for use by handicapped persons shall be in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and/or local accessibility codes.

C. Plumbing fixtures shall be low water consumption type with a maximum of 1.28 gal/flush for water closets, 0.5 gal/flush for urinals, 0.5 gpm for lavatories and 2 gpm for showers unless specified otherwise.

D. All wall hung plumbing fixtures shall be provided with floor mounted fixture carriers.

E. Manufacturers: Fixtures: American Standard, Sloan, Zurn, Mansfield or Kohler. Lavatory/sink faucets: Moen Commercial, Chicago Faucets, Delta, Symmons, Speakman,

American Standard or Kohler. Trim: Jameco, Brasscraft or McGuire. Flush valves: Moen Commercial, Sloan, Delaney or Zurn. Toilet seats: Bemis, Beneke, Church or Olsenite. ADA insulation: Truebro # 103.

2.13 TANKLESS WATER HEATER

A. Tankless Water Heater shall have ABS-UL 94Vo rated cover. Element shall be replaceable cartridge insert. Unit shall have a replaceable filter in the inlet connector and a flow regulator in the outlet connector. Element shall be iron free, nickel chrome material. Heater shall be fitted with 3/8” compression nuts and sleeves to eliminate need for soldering. Heater shall be installed upright with water connections on top only. Hot water storage tanks prohibited. Unit shall be Eemax, Chronomite, Bosch or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Make connections to all fixtures, traps and similar items. Place into operation all equipment.

B. Refer to the architectural drawings for the exact location of fixtures and drains. Determine roughing dimensions from the manufacturer of the equipment furnished.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Remove stems and washers from solder end valves and other item subject to damage by heat during installation and reassemble valve after soldering.

B. Provide dielectric union connectors at all connections between non-ferrous and ferrous metal piping materials.

C. Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. Tightly cover fixtures and equipment and protect against dirt, water, chemicals and mechanical injury. Upon completion of the work, thoroughly clean, adjust and operate the fixtures, materials and equipment.

D. Cut pipe accurately and work into place without springing or forcing. Run above ground piping parallel with the lines of the building unless otherwise indicated. Do not bury water pipe in or under floors unless specifically indicated on the drawings. Make changes in pipe sizes with reducing fittings. Use of bushings will not be acceptable, make changes in direction with fittings.

E. Securely anchor water piping to urinal and water closet flush valves within the wall structure during the plumbing rough-in phase to prevent movement. Use only non-ferrous materials for anchor straps or pipe clamps.


1515 08.29.2016 PLUMBING

3.03 HANGERS

A. Hang pipe from substantial building structure. Do not hang pipe from other piping, ductwork, ceilings or steel decking.

B. Support each horizontal length of no-hub cast iron pipe within 18" of each joint and a maximum of 10'-0" on centers, and as required to maintain alignment and to prevent sagging. Support and anchor pipe in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.

C. Horizontal no-hub cast iron pipe 4" and larger shall be suitably braced to prevent horizontal movement in accordance with CISIPI 310.

D. Horizontal no-hub cast iron pipe 5” and larger shall be braced at every change of direction or change in diameter greater than two pipe sizes by use of braces, blocks, rodding or other suitable method, to prevent movement.

E. Provide a hanger within one foot of each elbow.

F. Support vertical piping at every floor using riser clamps. Secure vertical piping drops along columns or walls at the top and bottom of the drop and every 10'-0" on center.

G. Provide a hanger within one foot of each riser in addition to the riser clamp support at every floor.

H. Isolate copper tubing from steel supports, anchors and metal studs to prevent electrolysis. Isolate piping with neoprene pads, sheet lead strips or plastic inserts. Duct tape shall not be used to isolate piping.

3.04 DRAINS

A. Set floor drains with tops flush with the finished floor. Route water line from trap primer connection to floor drain concealed inside walls, partitions and the floor system.

3.05 CLEANOUTS

A. Provide cleanouts where indicated and where required by the applicable plumbing code.

B. Cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe in line sizes 4 inches and smaller. Pipe lines larger than 4 inches shall have 4 inch cleanouts.

3.06 PLUMBING FIXTURES

A. Grout between plumbing fixtures and walls and/or floors.

B. For connection of floor outlet water closets, use brass floor flanges. Make the joints between closet trap and flange tight with gaskets.

C. Make the connection of fixture traps from lavatories etc. to cast iron with D.W.V. type copper.

D. Seal, using sealant meeting the requirements of Federal Specification TT-S-230, for the joint between urinals and wall and between water closets and floor.

3.07 WATER HEATER

A. The water heater piping detail on the drawings is diagrammatic only. Install water heater and accessories in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

3.08 TESTS

A. Test the plumbing system as required by the applicable plumbing code.

B. Test domestic hot and cold water piping for a continuous period of not less than four hours at a hydrostatic pressure of not less than 125 psig and make free from leaks. Completely remake leaky joints with piping dry. Retest system after leaks are corrected.

C. Plug all necessary openings in the drainage and vent piping systems and fill the entire system with water to the level of the highest vent stack above the roof. Hold this water for 30 minutes without showing a drop in water level greater than 4 inches. Subject to approval of the Architect, the drainage system may be tested in sections.


1515 08.29.2016 PLUMBING

3.09 ADJUSTING

A. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of piping during installation.

B. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.

C. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for application where used and are clean and ready for use.

D. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.10 STERILIZATION

A. Disinfect the potable water system in accordance with the applicable plumbing code. After disinfection, send water samples to the local Health Department for testing. Obtain approval of the local Health Department before the system is placed into service.

B. Unless the local Health Department requires otherwise, disinfect potable water piping upon completion of installation by a mixture containing not less than 0.6 pounds of high test calcium hypochlorite, or 2 pounds of chlorinated lime to each 1000 gallons of water to provide not less than 50 ppm of available chlorine. Inject the mixture into the system and retain for not less than 24 hours, at which time the chlorine level shall be at 10 ppm or greater. Then drain the system and flush with potable water until only a normal chlorine residual remains (0.2 ppm).


......


1515 08.29.2016 MECHANICAL GENERAL

SECTION 23 0000

MECHANICAL GENERAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. This division and the accompanying drawings cover furnishing of all labor, equipment, appliances and materials and performing all operations in connection with the installation of complete air conditioning, ventilating, heating, plumbing and fire protection systems as specified herein and as shown on the drawings.

B. The general provisions of the Contract including the conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions) and other divisions as appropriate, apply to all work specified in this division.

1.02 CODES AND REGULATIONS

A. Comply with the following codes and standards as applicable, including all Georgia amendments, for all heating, ventilating and air conditioning materials and workmanship:

The International Energy Conservation Code, 2009 Edition. The International Mechanical Code, 2012 Edition. The National Electrical Code, 2014 Edition.

B. Comply with the following codes and standards as applicable, including all Georgia amendments, for all plumbing materials and workmanship:

The International Plumbing Code, 2012 Edition. The International Fuel Gas Code, 2012 Edition. The National Electrical Code, 2014 Edition.

C. Comply with the following codes and standards as applicable, including all Georgia amendments, for all fire protection material and workmanship:

The International Fire Code, 2012 Edition. The National Electrical Code, 2014 Edition.

D. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced and are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute Standards (ARI). American National Standards Institute, Inc. Standards (ANSI). American Society for Testing and Materials Publications (ASTM). American Society of Mechanical Engineers Code (ASME). Factory Mutual Underwriters (FM). National Fire Protection Association Standards (NFPA). Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc. (SMACNA). Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

E. Comply with all state and local codes having jurisdiction. Make all modifications required by these codes without additional charges. Immediately bring to the attention of the Architect any conflict between these documents and the governing codes. Follow the drawings and specifications where code requirements are less stringent than those shown on the drawings or in the specifications.

F. Obtain all permits, inspections and approvals as required by all authorities having jurisdiction and deliver certificates of approval to the Architect. Assume and pay all fees and costs of any nature whatsoever incidental to these permits.

G. Comply with all applicable provisions of the William-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 COORDINATION

A. The products of particular manufacturers have been used as the basis of design in preparation of these documents. Coordinate with all other trades for any modifications to the mechanical



systems and their components, the electrical systems, the building structure and architecture or any other portion of the building that result from the use of any other than the basis of design equipment.

B. Such coordination shall occur before delivery of products from the manufacturer and shall be clearly indicated on the shop drawings. Perform all related modifications without any additional cost to the Contract.

2.02 DESCRIPTION

A. All products shall be new and shall bear the Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) label unless specifically indicated otherwise.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. The mechanical/plumbing/fire protection drawings do not give exact elevations or location of lines, nor do they show all the offsets, control lines or installation details. Carefully lay out the work at the site to conform to the structural conditions, to provide proper grading of lines, to avoid all obstructions, to conform to details of the installation supplied by the manufacturers of the equipment to be installed, and to thereby provide an integrated and coordinated installation operating at optimum performance.

B. If equipment, piping and ductwork requires space conditions other than those shown, or if the equipment is rearranged, assume full responsibility for the rearrangement of the space and have the Architect review the change before proceeding with the work. Perform all related costs incurred without any additional cost to the Contract.

C. Properly locate and size of all slots and openings in the building structure pertaining to the work and correctly locate sleeves, inserts and cores.

D. Coordinate the work of several various trades so that it may be installed in the most direct and workmanlike manner without hindering or handicapping the other trades. Handle piping interferences by giving precedence to pipe lines which require a stated grade for proper operation. For example, sewer lines and condensate piping shall take precedence over water lines in determination of elevations. Where there is interference between sewer lines and condensate lines, the sewer lines shall have precedence and provisions shall be made in the condensate lines for looping them around the sewer lines. In all cases, lines requiring a stated grade for their proper operation shall have precedence over electrical conduit and ductwork.

E. Install all piping and ductwork in finished areas in chases, furred spaces or above ceilings. Install pipes and ducts as high as possible. Offset valves in piping systems down to within one foot of the access point. Group runs of piping whenever it is feasible to do so.

F. Do not install piping, equipment or ductwork in electrical rooms, elevator machine rooms or electronic data rooms except as serving only those rooms. Do not run piping or ductwork or locate equipment with respect to switchboards, panelboards, power panels, motor control centers or dry type transformers. Clearances apply vertically from floor to structure:

Within 42" in front (and rear if free standing) of electrical equipment. Within 36" of sides of electrical equipment.

G. Provide access to equipment and apparatus requiring operation, service or maintenance within the life of the system. Devices include but are not limited to motors, valves, filters, dampers and shock absorbers. Equipment located above lay-in type ceilings is considered accessible.

H. Locate required terminal boxes, valves and dampers in areas accessible for maintenance.

3.02 ELECTRICAL WORK

A. Comply with the electrical system characteristics indicated on the electrical drawings and specified in Division 26 all electrical equipment provided under this Division.

B. All components shall be in conformance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code and Division 26. Furnish motor starters for all equipment under Section 23 0513, Starters and Disconnect Switches, unless specifically indicated to be furnished under Division 26.



C. Provide all power wiring and final power connections to the systems under Division 26.

D. Provide control wiring (120 volt and less) under Division 23 and extend from the 120 volt power circuits indicated on the electrical drawings. All wiring for voltages higher than 30 volts shall be done by a licensed electrician.

E. Take all electrical characteristics from the electrical drawings and coordinate with the electrical drawings before equipment is ordered or shop drawings submitted.

F. Electrical power wiring to HVAC control panels may not be indicated on the drawings. Determine final control panel locations and quantity prior to bidding and include 115 volt power circuits to each control panel location.

3.03 MOTORS

A. Unless specifically noted otherwise in other sections of these specifications, all motors and motor controllers shall meet the requirements specified in this Section. All motors shall be built in accordance with the current applicable IEEE and NEMA standards and shall have voltage, phase, frequency and service as scheduled.

B. Each motor shall be of the premium efficiency type, Century E-Plus or equal. They shall be suitable for the brake horsepower of the driven unit, rated with 1.15 minimum service factor, and shall be NEMA design B. The motor temperature rise shall not exceed 40 degrees C for drip proof motors, 50 degrees C for splash-proof motors and 55 degrees C for totally enclosed motors. The motors shall be capable of operating continuously at such temperatures and shall be capable of withstanding momentary overloads of 25 percent without injurious overheating.

C. Motors shall be ball bearing type selected for quiet operation and shall be manufactured for general purpose duty unless otherwise indicated. Each bearing shall be accessible for lubrication and designed for the load imposed by the V-belt drive or the driven apparatus. Direct drive motors shall be designed for the specific application with all necessary thrust bearings and shaft capacities.

D. Motors larger than 1/2 horsepower shall have bearings with pressure grease lubrication fittings.

E. Furnish motors connected to drive equipment by belt with adjustable slide rail bases except for fractional horsepower motors which shall have slotted bases. Motor leads shall be permanently identified and supplied with connectors.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, motors smaller than 1/2 horsepower shall be capacitor start or split phase type designed for 120 volt, single phase, 60 cycle alternating current. Shaded pole motors will not be acceptable except 35 watts and smaller. Motors 1/2 horsepower and larger shall be squirrel cage induction type, 3 phase, 60 cycle alternating current.

G. Motors controlled by variable frequency speed controllers shall, except as noted, be consequent pole, variable torque, single winding. When the speed ratios or the load characteristics dictate, variable speed motors operating over an adjustable range of speeds shall be motors specifically designed and rated for this duty, shall have Class F insulation or better and shall have a minimum 1.15 service factor.

H. If motors are furnished varying in horsepower and/or characteristics from those specified, first inform the Architect of the change by clearly identifying it on the shop drawings or submittal, and then coordinate the change with all associated parties. Bear all additional charges in connection with the change.

3.04 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT

A. Store all equipment, including pipe and valves, off the ground and under cover. For storage outdoors, securely fit minimum 4 mil thick plastic to withstand splattering, ground water, precipitation and wind.

B. Protect air handling unit coils by use of protective sheet metal panels or plywood.

C. Plug ends of pipe and close ends of ducts when work is stopped with 4 mil thick plastic taped in place until work resumes. Duct tape is not an acceptable substitute.

D. Repair or replace damaged equipment at the option of the Architect.



3.05 PAINTING

A. Repaint factory painted equipment that has been scratched or marred to match original factory color.

B. Clean and paint all un-insulated black ferrous metal items exposed to sight inside the building such as fire sprinkler standpipes and exposed sprinkler piping, equipment hangers and supports with one coat of zinc chromate primer. In addition, paint such items in finished spaces with two coats of finish paint in a color to match adjacent surfaces or as otherwise directed by the Architect.

C. In lieu of painting hanger rods, cadmium plated or galvanized steel rods may be furnished.

D. Do not paint nameplates on equipment and afford suitable protection to the plates to prevent their being rendered illegible during the painting operation.

E. Re-coat galvanizing broken during construction with cold galvanizing compound.

F. Paint all ductwork, piping, insulation, conduit, structural members or other appurtenances visible through ceiling grilles flat black.

3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Assume all cost of, and be responsible for, all cutting and patching required to complete the installation of the work. All cutting shall be carefully and neatly done so as not to damage or cut away more than is necessary of any portions of the structure.

B. Reinstate all surfaces to the condition of the adjacent surfaces.

C. Make suitable provisions for adequately water-proofing at the penetrations of exterior walls, floors and roofs. This shall include, but not be limited to, floor drains, floor sinks, open sight drains, hub drains, cleanouts and sleeves for the various piping systems.

3.07 SLEEVES AND FRAMES

A. Install in concrete, carpentry or masonry construction, all necessary sleeves, frames, hangers, expansion bolts, inserts and other fixtures and appurtenances necessary for the support of all pipe, duct, equipment and devices furnished under this Division.

B. Cut openings and install sleeves or frames through walls and surfaces in a neat workmanlike manner. Cut openings only as large as required for the installation. Install sleeves and/or frames flush with finished surfaces and grout in place unless otherwise indicated. Leave surfaces around openings smooth and finish to match surrounding surface.

C. Where pipes pass through floor slabs, sleeves shall be standard weight black steel pipe with top of sleeve 3" above finished floor. Where pipes pass through walls, sleeves shall be standard weight black steel pipe or 20-gauge galvanized sheet metal with ends flush with both surfaces.

D. Provide each pipe or duct passing through walls, floors, ceilings or partitions with sleeves having an internal diameter 1 inch larger that the outside dimensions of the insulated pipe or duct.

E. Build all pipe sleeves through floors, roofs and masonry walls in place as the affected walls, floors and roofs are built.

F. Pack all penetrations through rated walls and floors with mineral wool and cap off with a silicon caulk. As an alternate use an approved, fire rated sealant as manufactured by Hilti, 3M or Dow. Materials shall meet or exceed UL 1479 or ASTM E814 requirements.

3.08 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Install escutcheons on all pipes where they pass through floors, ceilings, walls or partitions in finished areas.

B. Escutcheons shall be split, hinged, stamped brass type designed to fit the pipe and to cover the terminating pipe sleeve. Escutcheons shall be chrome plated finish unless otherwise specified with a securing device to hold them tight to the pipe.



C. Allow sufficient spacing between parallel pipe runs to ensure installation of escutcheons without modification. Do not alter the escutcheons in any manner to allow for installation.

3.09 CLEANING

A. Flush new water piping systems until water runs clean. Mild chemical cleaning may be required. If so, flush all cleaning chemicals out of the piping system before recharging with water.

B. Remove all stickers, rust, stains, labels and temporary covers before final acceptance.

C. Clean the exterior surfaces of all mechanical equipment, plumbing fixtures, piping and ducts of all grease, oil, paint, dust and other construction debris.

D. Clean the interior of all ducts, plenums and casings of all debris and blow free all particles of rubbish and dust before installing outlet faces.

E. Lubricate bearings that require lubrication in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Provide two copies of certification of lubrication.

F. Leave equipment rooms broom clean.

G. Provide temporary filters for any fans operated during construction. Change temporary filters regularly to prevent contamination of the equipment and duct systems. Install new and unused permanent filters one week prior to final inspection.

H. Cover ends of open ducts and pipes during construction except when working on such end prohibits covering. Cover with minimum 4 mil thick polyethylene taped, tied or wired in place.

I. Clean and polish identification plates.

J. Sterilize the domestic water supply and distribution system in accordance with Section 22 0000, Plumbing, and the local codes having jurisdiction. Furnish three copies of a certificate of performance of complete sterilization to the Architect before final inspection of the work. All work shall be certified by a state approved testing laboratory.

3.10 COOPERATION WITH TEST AND BALANCE

A. Provide the Test and Balance agency a complete set of contract documents, change orders and approved submittals.

B. Coordinate with the building automation system contractor to provide all required hardware, software, personnel and assistance to the Test and Balance agency as needed to balance the systems.

C. In preparation for the testing and balancing ensure that the HVAC systems are complete and at operational readiness. As a minimum verify the following:

Airside systems: All ductwork is complete with all air distribution terminals installed. All volume dampers and fire dampers are open and functional. Clean filters are installed. All fans are operating, free of vibration and rotating in the correct direction. Variable frequency drives have been started up and all safeties have been verified.

Hydronic systems: Piping is complete and pressure tested. Systems are flushed, filled and air purged. Strainers are pulled and cleaned. Control valves are functioning per the sequence of operation. All shut-off and balance valves have been verified to be 100% open. Existing pumps are started and proper rotation verified.

D. Provide additional belts or sheaves as required by the Test and Balance agency.

E. Promptly correct deficiencies identified during Test and Balance.

F. Repair pipe and duct insulation and vapor barrier at the completion of testing and balancing.

G. Maintain a construction schedule that allows the Test and Balance agency to complete testing and balancing prior to building occupancy.



3.11 EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS AND BID BASIS

A. It is the intent of these Specifications to indicate a standard of quality for all materials incorporated into the work. Manufacturer's names are used to designate the item of equipment or material as a means of establishing grade and quality.

B. Substituted manufacturers of similar quality products will be considered unless these specifications state otherwise. Such manufacturer's products may be considered as substitutions but shall not be used as a basis for bidding. In the event substitutions are submitted to the Architect for review prior to bid, furnish descriptive catalog material, test data and samples, as well as any other pertinent data necessary to demonstrate that the proposed substitutions are acceptable equals to the specified product. No substitutions shall be made without the written consent of the Architect.

C. The use of one named manufacturer in the schedules on the drawings is for guide purposes. The provisions of the previous paragraph shall govern in the selection of products to be used.

3.12 WARRANTY

A. Provide all systems and components with a one year warranty from the date of final acceptance unless otherwise noted in the contract documents. The warranty shall cover all materials and workmanship. During this warranty period correct all defects in materials and workmanship by repair or replacement without incurring any additional cost to the Contract.

B. Warrant all air conditioning compressors for an additional four years beyond the initial one year warranty. This additional warranty shall include parts only.

3.13 FOUNDATIONS

A. Concrete foundations are required for equipment furnished under Division 23. Unless otherwise noted, foundations shall be 4" high. Perform all concrete work conforming to the requirements of Division 03. Neatly chamfer all corners of the foundations.

B. After removal of the forms, rub the surface of the foundation.

3.14 RECORDS AND INSTRUCTIONS FOR OWNER

A. Accumulate during the job's progress the following data in triplicate prepared in neat brochures or packet folders and turn over to the Architect for check and subsequent delivery to the Owner:

All warranties, guarantees and manufacturer's directions on equipment and materials. Approved fixture brochures, wiring diagrams and control diagrams. Copies of approved shop drawings. Operating instructions for the HVAC and other mechanical systems. Include

recommended periodic maintenance and seasonal changeover procedures, and suggested procedures in operation of all systems to promote energy conservation. Write these instructions expressly for this project and refer to equipment, valves and devices by mark number from the drawing schedules. Submit operating instructions and procedures in draft form for approval, prior to final issue of complete brochures. Manufacturer's advertising literature or catalogs will not be acceptable for operating and maintenance instructions.

Repair parts lists of all major items of equipment including name, address and telephone number of the local supplier or agent.

B. Submit all of the above data to the Architect for approval at such time as the last inspection is requested prior to the final inspection, but in no case less than two weeks before final inspection.

C. Give not less than two days of operating instruction, during the adjustment and testing period, to the Owner's operating personnel in order to familiarize them with the proper care and operation of the equipment. Break the 16 hours into a series of 4 hour sessions. Use the written operating instructions referred to above as the basis for this instruction.

D. A competent technician employed by the Building Automation System subcontractor shall be required to instruct the Owner in proper operating procedures and shall explain the significance



of the controls literature filed in the maintenance manual over a period of two days while the system is in continuous operation.

3.15 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Maintain on a daily basis at the project site a complete set of "Record Drawings" reflecting an accurate dimensional record of all buried or concealed work. Mark the "Record Drawings" to show the precise location of concealed work and equipment, including concealed or embedded piping and valves and all changes and deviations in the work from that shown on the Contract Documents. This requirement shall not be construed as authorization to make changes in the layout of the work without definitive instructions from the Architect.

B. The "Record Drawings" shall consist of bond prints, scanned PDFs or autocad drawings for this Division with the Engineer's seal and Engineer's firm name removed from the drawings.

C. Record dimensions shall clearly and accurately delineate the work as installed. Locations shall be suitably identified by at least two dimensions to a permanent structure.

D. Mark all "Record Drawings" on the front lower right hand corner with a rubber stamp impression that states the following: "RECORD DRAWINGS. To be used for recording field deviations and dimensional data only"

3.16 INSTALLATION

A. Install all equipment in strict conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations, as specified herein and as shown. If any conflict arises between these instructions notify the Architect immediately for guidance.

3.17 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Permanently label each item of equipment with a nameplate of sufficient size to clearly indicate the identification designation (i.e. mark number) appearing in the Contract documents.

B. Nameplates shall be 1/16" thick Bakelite laminate engraved with white letters through black, or aluminum with black enameled surface and engraved letters. Handwritten marker identifications will not be acceptable.

3.18 ACCESS DOORS

A. Furnish and install access doors at each point required to provide access to concealed valves, cleanouts, fire dampers and other devices requiring operation, adjustment or maintenance. Access doors shall be 16 gauge steel, prime coat finish with mounting straps, concealed hinges and screwdriver locks, designed for the door to open 180 degrees.

B. Access doors installed in fire rated walls or partitions shall be UL labeled to maintain the fire rating of the wall or partition.

C. Coordinate access panels in ceilings with the architectural reflected ceiling plans. Obtain approval from the Architect before installing any ceiling access panels.

3.19 FLAME SPREAD AND SMOKE DEVELOPED RATINGS OF MATERIALS

A. Materials and adhesives used throughout the mechanical systems for insulation, jackets or coverings of any kind, or for piping or conduit systems or components, shall have a flame spread rating not over 25 without evidence of continued combustion, and with a smoke developed rating not to exceed 50. If such materials are to be applied with adhesives, test them as applied with such adhesives, or the adhesives used shall have a flame spread rating not over 25 and a smoke developed rating not to exceed 50.

B. Determine flame spread rating and smoke developed rating by the Method of Testing of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials, NFPA 255, ASTM E84, and Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. standards. Such materials are listed in the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., Building Materials List, under the heading Hazard Classification (Fire).



3.20 BELT DRIVES

A. Provide guards for all belt drives not enclosed within equipment housings. Belt guards for fans shall be expanded metal with heavy gauge sheet metal sides. Provide openings in guards at driving and driven sheaves for use of tachometer for revolution measurement.

3.21 FREEZE PROTECTION

A. During construction ensure that no portion of the work is subjected to freeze damage. Take all steps necessary such as temporary heat, draining of systems, heat tape or other means to prevent damage. Do not use anti-freeze solution in potable water systems. Repair any damages as a result of freezing at no additional cost to the Contract.

B. Prior to startup of any air handling unit supplied with water coils, when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F, make certain the intake of outside air is not low enough to drive the mixed air temperature below 35 degrees F.



1515 08.29.2016 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTAL DATA

SECTION 23 0140

SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTAL DATA

- GENERAL


A. The requirements of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and Section 23 0000, Mechanical General, apply to all work herein.

1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Submit shop drawings or fully descriptive catalog data for all items of material and equipment furnished and installed under this Division. Submit to the Architect six copies of all such shop drawings or catalog data.

B. Before submitting shop drawings to the Architect for review, examine them and ensure that they correctly represent the material and equipment to which they pertain. The Contractor's review of the shop drawings is not intended to take the place of the official review by the Architect, and shop drawings which have not been reviewed and accepted by the Architect shall not be used in fabricating or installing any work.

C. The review of shop drawings or catalog data by the Architect shall not relieve the Contractor from his responsibility for deviations from the drawings or specifications unless he has specifically called attention to such deviations, in writing, at the time of submission and has obtained the permission of the Architect thereon, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors of any kind in the shop drawings. When attention is called to deviations, state in the letter whether or not such deviations involve any additional cost. If no additional costs are noted, it will be assumed that no extra cost is involved for making the change.

D. Verifications and assignment of dimensions, quantities and construction means, methods, sequences and procedures are the sole responsibility of the Contractor and will not be a part of the Architect's review.

E. Reproduction of design documents in any portion for use in a submittal is not acceptable and shop drawings submitted in this manner will be returned without review.

F. The Architect reserves the right to require a sample of any equipment or material to be submitted for approval.

G. If resubmittals are necessary, make them exactly as specified herein for submittals. Highlight resubmittals to indicate all revisions made to the original submittal and include the applicable phrase "RESUBMITTAL NO.____".

- PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. All product samples shall be new and shall bear all labels as identified by the applicable specification section or drawing.

- EXECUTION

3.01 SUBMITTAL DATA

A. Comply with these specifications and with the drawings in their entirety the submittal data to be furnished for this project. The submittals scheduled herein are a minimum and shall not be construed to limit the submittal data required to adequately describe all materials and equipment to be incorporated into the work.

B. Shop drawings will be returned without review unless the following information as applicable is included: 1. References to all pertinent data in these specifications or on the drawings such as sound

power levels, performance curves, etc. 2. Electrical characteristics and horsepower ratings. 3. Capacities of all equipment including capacity curves for fans. 4. Construction materials.



5. UL labels and ASME stamps where required. 6. Accessories specified. 7. Manufacturer, make and model number. 8. Weights and dimensional data of all major items of equipment. 9. Motor starters where required by Division 23. 10. A space large enough to accept a submittal stamp.

C. The data submitted shall reflect the actual equipment performance under the specified conditions and shall not simply be a copy of the scheduled data on the drawings. Identify all submitted equipment on the shop drawings with the same mark numbers as indicated on the drawings or in these specifications. Clearly highlight any deviation from any part of the Contract Documents.

D. Paper copy HVAC and Plumbing submittal data shall be bound into separate HVAC and Plumbing volumes, with each volume containing one copy of all required shop drawings. Each volume shall be assembled into 3-ring binders and each binder shall be provided with an identification tab for each specification section that requires submittals and an index sheet shall be included listing each tabbed section. Identify each item in each tabbed section with the paragraph number relating to the item. In the event that all required submittal items are not included with the first submittal, the 3-ring binders shall be large enough to accept all subsequent submittal data. Shop drawings not submitted in accordance with this paragraph will be returned without review.

E. As an alternative, submittals may be submitted to the Architect electronically. Electronic submittals shall be PDF images of the items to be submitted, shall be properly collated and shall include a cover sheet with index. Identify each item in the index with the paragraph number relating to the submitted item. Electronically submitted shop drawings not submitted in accordance with this paragraph will be returned without review.

F. Submit the bound paper submittals or electronic submittals for review no later than 30 days after award of Contract. No submittal will be checked until all required submittals have been received by the Architect.

G. Submit shop drawings for the following: 1. Plumbing Submittals

Drains, cleanouts and drainage accessories Plumbing fixtures, carriers and trim Water heaters Piping identification markers Valves Thermal insulation Cast iron no-hub couplings Pipe hangers and supports

2. HVAC Submittals Starters and disconnect switches Piping identification markers Test, adjusting and balancing report forms Pipe hangers and supports Valves Thermal insulation Vibration isolators Test wells Automatic air vents Refrigerant and condensate drain piping materials Variable air volume terminal units Air handling unit including fan, coil and sound data Ductless split systems Fans including sound data and performance curves Preformed spiral round ductwork



Double wall spiral round ductwork Flexible round ductwork Dampers Fire dampers and fire/smoke dampers Intake and relief hoods Roof curbs Louvers Grilles, registers and diffusers Variable frequency speed controller Building automation system

H. Submit 1/8 inch scale reproducible vellum or Mylar layout drawings of the fire protection sprinkler pipe and fittings in accordance with NFPA 13, Item 6-1.1.1, including but not necessarily limited to, hydraulic calculations, pipe and tubing sizes, locations, elevations and slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations and connections. See Section 21 0000, Automatic Sprinkler System.

3.02 OTHER SUBMITTALS

A. In addition to the above provide the following prior to final acceptance of the building by the Owner: 1. As-built drawings for the HVAC and plumbing installations specified in Section 23 0000,

Mechanical General. 2. All warranties as specified in Section 23 0000, Mechanical General, and in other sections

of these specifications. 3. Operation and maintenance instructions as specified in Section 23 0000, Mechanical

General. 4. Test, adjusting and balancing reports as specified in Section 23 0593, Test and Balance. 5. A combination pressure and temperature test kit as specified in Section 23 2120, Piping

Accessories. 6. Two copies of welders’ certificates as specified in Section 23 2113, Chilled and Hot Water

Piping Systems. 7. Two copies of the domestic water system disinfection certification as specified in Section

22 0000, Plumbing. 8. Keys for control cabinets.


......


1515 08.29.2016 STARTES AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES

SECTION 23 0513

STARTERS AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish and install all motor starters and disconnect switches required by this section. Where starters and/or disconnect switches are furnished by equipment manufacturers, comply with all requirements of this section. Refer to Division 26 for disconnect switches provided therein.

B. All items required for a complete installation shall be provided.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Furnish all starters and disconnect switches to be installed under this section of these specifications to be the product of one manufacturer.

B. Starters and disconnect switches manufactured by Asea Brown Boveri (ABB), Allen-Bradley, Eaton, General Electric, Schneider or Siemens will be acceptable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 STARTERS AND CONTACTORS

A. Furnish starters for all motors unless indicated to be equipment furnished with mechanical equipment, or as a part of Division 26 motor control centers.

B. Each starter shall incorporate overload elements of proper size to protect motors.

C. Coordinate starter holding coils with Section 23 0923, Building Automation System. Holding coils shall be 120 volt or less.

D. Provide 480V/120V control transformer with each 480 volt magnetic starter or control panel.

E. Provide 208V/120V control transformer with each 208 magnetic starter or control panel.

F. Provide one set of spare auxiliary contacts (1 normally open set and 1 normally closed set) in each starter for the future, in addition to sealed contact.

G. Starters for 3 phase motors shall be magnetic type and unless otherwise indicated shall be as follows:

NEMA 1 enclosure, combination line starter with disconnect (non fused) and thermal overload protection on all 3 phases.

24V coil or 120V coil (to agree with control circuit - not to exceed 120V) and control transformer built-in, with fuses in primary leads and in hot secondary lead, other secondary grounded.

Furnish HAND-OFF-AUTO control for all automatically controlled starters and remotely controlled starters. Furnish ON-OFF selector switch where there is no automatic, remote or interlock control.

H. Starters for single phase motors shall be manual type motor rated switches with thermal overload device (except omit overload device from switches for motors with built-in overload protection) and NEMA type 1 enclosure except for installation in public spaces or when noted for flush mounting. In such locations, provide jumbo stainless steel flush plate and pull box. Provide pilot lights in starters when noted.

2.02 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. Furnish and install a disconnect switch for all equipment requiring electrical power, unless provided under Division 26.


1515 08.29.2016 STARTES AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES

B. When equipment manufacturer recommends over-current protection by HARC circuit breaker or

fuses, the disconnect switch for that piece of equipment shall be fused at the maximum recommended fuse size. Otherwise, the disconnect shall be non-fused.

C. All disconnect switches and switch installation shall meet the requirements of NFPA 70.

D. Coordinate switch size and configuration with the equipment manufacturer’s recommended maximum fuse size or other applicable data.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment complete with all components connecting services and adjustments for its safe operation and in compliance with requirements of the Contract.



1515 08.29.2016 VARIABLE FREQUENCY SPEED CONTROLLER

SECTION 23 0515

VARIABLE FREQUENCY SPEED CONTROLLER

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 COORDINATION

A. The speed controller of one manufacturer has been used as the basis of design. Any modifications that result from the use of any other units shall be coordinated with all trades. Any modifications shall be performed without incurring any additional cost to the contract.

1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Variable frequency speed controller manufactured by ASEA-Brown-Bovari (ABB), Eaton, Johnson Controls, Inc (JCI), Allen Bradley, Yaskawa, Graham or Toshiba will be acceptable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The variable frequency speed controller shall be provided in a NEMA 1 enclosure for individual partition or fabricated support installation.

B. The speed controller shall be of the variable voltage input type or pulse width modulation type.

C. If fabricated supports are used to mount speed controller, they shall be designed to support the full weight of the controller plus any additional force anticipated to be applied during installation, maintenance or incidental contact. If controllers are partition mounted, structural supports shall be incorporated in the partition framing to comply with the same criteria.

D. Fused input shall utilize standard I squared T type fuses.

E. Inverter shall have UL or ETL approval.

F. The variable frequency power and logic unit shall be solid state. The unit shall transform input power into frequency and voltage controlled 3 phase output power suitable to provide positive speed and torque control to air handling unit motor. The speed control shall be step-less throughout the speed range under variable torque load on a continuous basis. The adjustable frequency control/motor combination shall have a power factor of 0.95 or better.

G. The variable frequency speed controller shall superimpose no electrical line noise on the line side of the electrical service to the controller. Electrical isolation fitters on the line side of the controller are to be included to achieve this result, if required by the characteristics of the speed controller.

H. The speed controller and the speed controller/controlled motor combination shall be certified to be compatible in writing by both the controller manufacturer and the motor manufacturer.

I. The controller/controlled motor combination shall cause no airborne or structure-borne noise to be produced which could cause the occupied areas below the equipment room to experience noise levels exceeding NC40.

J. A factory installed disconnecting means shall be provided on the power to the controller.

K. Variable Frequency Drive shall be provided with communication card for full integration with the Building Automation System.

2.02 SELF PROTECTION AND RELIABILITY FEATURES

A. The controller shall limit output current to 110% of the inverter rating.

B. The controller shall safely limit the output current in under 50 micro-seconds due to phase short circuits or severe overload conditions.

C. To protect the controller due to non-momentary power or phase loss, under-voltage trip shall activate automatically when line voltage drops 15% below rated input voltage.


1515 08.29.2016 VARIABLE FREQUENCY SPEED CONTROLLER

D. To protect the inverter due to voltage levels in excess of its rating, over-voltage trip shall activate

automatically when the DC bus in the controller exceeds 1000 VDC.

E. Over-temperature trip shall be required to protect the inverter from elevated temperatures in excess of its rating.

F. The controller shall automatically restart from a trip condition resulting from over-current, under-voltage, over-voltage or over-temperature upon removal or correction of the causative condition.

G. For indications of conditions described in items A through E above, and to show power on, zero speed and enabled, shall be provided in the front panel of the unit.

H. Current and voltage signals shall be isolated from the logic circuitry.

I. Drive logic shall be microprocessor based.

J. In the event of a power loss, the controller shall shut down without component failure. Upon return of power the system shall be designed to automatically return to normal operation if the unit is enabled.

K. In the event of a phase short circuit, the controller shall be designed to shut down safely without component failure.

L. In the event that an input or output power contractor is opened or closed while the controller is activated, no damage to the controller shall result.

M. The controller shall operate without a motor or any other equipment connected to the inverter.

2.03 OTHER FEATURES

A. The controller shall be capable of tolerating the following ambient temperatures:

1. Operating: 0 to 40 degrees C.

2. Storage: -20 to 60 degrees C.

B. The output frequency shall not vary with load nor with any input frequency variations. Output frequency shall not vary with +10% input voltage changes.

C. Provide a zero to five volt DC signal for speed indicator meter. Provide a 0-100% speed meter compatible with the inverter reference signal mounted on the front panel of the controller.

D. The controller shall be started or stopped by a contact closure.

E. Power supply (115 volt ac) shall be available on the customer connection board when power has been applied.

F. The controller shall accelerate or decelerate in response to a 4-20 mA signal from the Building Automation System.

G. A full unit bypass and accelerate-stop-decelerate switch shall be mounted on the door of unit. The switch shall accelerate, decelerate or stop the controller independently of the control panel. Full bypass operation shall disable the controller and allow air handling unit operation.

H. Provide a 0-100% speed meter compatible with the inverter reference signal to be mounted in the door of the control panel provided under Division 23.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION AND START UP

A. The controller manufacturer shall provide start-up supervision, in conjunction with the control contractor, as required to place the inverter and control system in proper operation and instruct the Owner.

B. Provide a spare parts kit for the inverter as recommended by the manufacturer.



1515 08.29.2016 VALVES

SECTION 23 0523

VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Codes and regulations referred to herein are minimum standards. Where the requirements of these specifications or the drawings exceed those of the codes and regulations, the drawings and specifications shall govern.

B. All valves shall be designed and manufactured with back-seating features to allow them to be re-packed under pressure when in full open position.

C. Valve marking and identification shall conform to the Manufacturer's Standardization Society for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and Unions, MSS Publication SP-25, and shall have the name or trademark of the manufacturer and working pressure cast or stamped on the valve body and the manufacturer's figure number securely attached to the stem.

D. Provide valves of one manufacturer for each trade application wherever practical to achieve maximum uniformity and to facilitate maintenance.

E. Figure numbers of various manufacturers are designated as conforming to these specifications. Valves of like characteristics may be furnished provided they meet or exceed these specifications in every respect.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Numbers indicated after manufacturer's name is the manufacturer's figure or series number.

1.04 GENERAL

A. All valves requiring packing shall be designed and constructed to allow re-packing under pressure when wide open. Deep stuffing box and packing nut shall be provided to ensure firm thread attachment when fully packed.

B. All valve hand-wheels shall be non-slip, malleable or modular iron unless indicated otherwise under the individual type valve specification.

C. All valves installed in horizontal piping shall have the stems at or above the centerline of the pipe. Valve hand-wheels shall be oriented to provide maximum accessibility.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CHILLED WATER SERVICE

A. Globe valves - 2" and smaller: Class 125 - 200 lb WOG, body and screw-in bonnet of ASTM B-62 cast bronze composition, threaded ends, tapered renewable disc/seat closure, copper silicon alloy stem, brass packing gland with hexagonal head, Teflon-impregnated packing and non-slip malleable hand-wheel. Stockham B-16 Powell 650 Milwaukee 502

B. Globe valves - 2-1/2" and larger: Class 125 - 200 lb WOG iron body, bronze mounted (IBBM) with body and bolted bonnet conforming to ASTM A-126 Class B cast iron, regrindable bronze seats, renewable solid disc, flanged ends, with Teflon-impregnated packing and two-piece packing gland assembly. Stockham G-512 Powell 241 Milwaukee F-2981-M


1515 08.29.2016 VALVES

C. Butterfly valves - 2-1/2" and larger: Lug-body type, 200 lb CWP conforming to ASTM A-126

Class B cast iron drilled and tapped to ANSI 125-150 flange standard, field replaceable Buna-N sleeve, with 316 type stainless steel stem, Buna-N O-ring, lever handles with memory stops. Any butterfly valve used as a balancing valve shall have memory stops and a means for measuring pressure drop across the valve such as Pete's plugs. Butterfly valves shall be rated for dead-end service. Stockham LD-712 Centerline LT Grinnell LC-8281-3 Milwaukee Series CL224B

D. Ball valves - 2" and smaller: 720 lb CWP, ASTM B-16 brass body composition, threaded ends, replaceable reinforced Teflon seats. Full port opening in type 316 stainless steel ball, stainless steel stem, reinforced Teflon seal and thrust washer and cadmium plated steel nut and handle. Stockham S-217 BR-R-T Milwaukee 100S

E. Drain valves: Threaded end, bronze body renewable composition disc, wheel handle, 3/4 NPT inlet, 3/4" house outlet. Watts Regulator BD-1 Woodford 24

2.02 HEATING HOT WATER SERVICE

A. Gate valves - 2-1/2" and larger: Class 125 - 200 lb WOG iron body, bronze mounted with body and bolted bonnet conforming to ASTM A-126 Class B cast iron, outside screw and yoke type, solid wedge disc, rising stem, plain face, smooth finished flanged ends with Teflon-impregnated packing and two-piece packing gland assembly. Seats shall be heavily constructed, renewable and rectangular in section. Stockham G-623 Powell 1793 Milwaukee F-2885

B. Globe valves - 2" and smaller: Class 125 - 200 lb WOG, body and screw-in bonnet of ASTM B-62 cast bronze composition, threaded ends, tapered renewable disc/seat closure, copper silicon alloy stem, brass packing gland with hexagonal head, Teflon-impregnated packing and non-slip malleable hand-wheel. Stockham B-16 Powell 650 Milwaukee 502

C. Globe valves - 2-1/2" and larger: Class 125 - 200 lb WOG, iron body, bronze mounted with body and bolted bonnet conforming to ASTM A-126 Class, cast iron, regrindable bronze seats, renewable solid guided disc, flanged ends, with Teflon-impregnated packing and two-piece packing gland assembly. Stockham G-512 Powell 241 Milwaukee F-2981-M

D. Ball valves - 2" and smaller: 720 lb CWP. Body shall be of ASTM B-16 brass composition, threaded ends, replaceable reinforced Teflon seats. Full port opening in stainless steel ball, stainless steel stem, reinforced Teflon seal and thrust washer and cadmium plated steel nut and handle. Stockham S-217 BR-R-T Milwaukee 100S

E. Drain valves: Threaded end, bronze body, renewable composition disc, wheel handle, 3/4" NPT inlet, 3/4" house outlet. Watts Regulator BD-1 Woodford 24


1515 08.29.2016 VALVES

2.03 DOMESTIC HOT AND COLD WATER SERVICE

A. Ball valves - 2" and smaller: 600 lb CWP, have cast brass body, replaceable reinforced Teflon seat, conventional port, blowout proof stem, chrome-plated brass ball, solder ends with extended solder cups. Provide stem extension to ensure handle clears insulation where provided on insulated pipes. Stockham S-216-BR-R-T Apollo 70-200 Milwaukee "Butterball" BB2-350

B. Hose bibbs: Hose bibbs shall be threaded ends, bronze body renewable composition disc, integral

vacuum breaker, 1/2 NPT inlet, 3/4" hose outlet. Chicago Faucet 5-T Royal Brass 5105 Watts Regulator SC-6

Hose bibbs in mechanical rooms and building service areas shall be rough bronze body, lock shield, integral vacuum breaker, wall flange and threaded inlet, angle sillcock. Watts Regulator SC-4 Woodford 21-P

Hose bibbs in finished areas shall be chrome plated bronze body, lock shield, integral vacuum breaker, wall flange, loose key. Chicago Faucet 387 Woodford 24-P

C. Drain valves: Threaded ends, bronze body renewable composition disc, wheel handle, 3/4" NPT inlet, 3/4" hose outlet. Watts Regulator BD-1 Woodford 24

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Provide gate, globe and check valves throughout the piping systems where shown and where necessary to properly regulate and control the systems. Valves shall be the full size of the lines in which they are installed and shall be designed for low pressure drop.


......


1515 08.29.2016 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

SECTION 23 0529

PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Furnish hangers to support the required loads. Where necessary, design supports to permit movement due to expansion and contraction. Where the drawings show details of supports and anchors, conform to details shown. Where details are not shown, conform to general requirements specified herein.

B. Do not use "C" clamps to support pipe hangers from the structure.

C. Do not pierce waterproofing or insulation vapor barrier with supports or support bolts.

D. All ferrous metal hangers, supports and rods shall be cadmium plated or galvanized.


A. All hangers, support, anchors and guides shall be in accordance with the American National Standard Code for Pressure Piping, ANSI/B31.1 with Addenda 31.1 OA-69 and Federal Specification WW-H-17.

B. Provide an adequate piping suspension system using standard commercially available pipe hangers and accessories.

C. Hang horizontal suspended pipes using adjustable pipe hangers with bolted hinged loops or turnbuckles. Do not use chains, wire, perforated strap iron, flat steel straps or similar construction.

D. Submit fastening methods to the Architect for approval by the structural engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CHILLED WATER SERVICE

A. Suspended insulated pipe: Upper attachments:

Support piping in concrete construction with cadmium plated, malleable iron expansion case anchor. Grinnell Figure 117 B-Line Series LA Elcen Figure 212

Where hangers are required between structural concrete beams provide side beam brackets attached to the upper 1/3 of the beam, and all auxiliary steel for the installation of the pipe hangers. Supports shall be designed in accordance with the AISC Steel Handbook. Grinnell Figure 202 B-Line Figure B3062 Elcen Figure 27

Support piping in steel construction with adjustable beam clamps and tie rods. Grinnell Figure 218 B-Line Figure B3054 Elcen Figure 95 and 76

Where hangers are required between structural steel beams or joists provide a welded steel bracket sized to meet the constraints of the structural installation. The bracket shall be attached with a continuous weld between the support and the structural member. Supports shall be designed in accordance with the AISC Steel Handbook. Grinnell Figure 195



B-Line Figure B3066 Elcen Figure 57

Intermediate attachments: Supports for horizontal piping shall be all threaded carbon steel, ASTM A-107 of the

following sizes:

Pipe Size Hanger Rod Diameter

2" and smaller 3/8" 2-1/2" 1/2" 3" and larger 1/2"

Pipe attachments: Hangers for horizontal piping shall be clevis type with vertical adjustment. Hangers

for insulated pipes shall be selected to bear on a pipe shield outside of the insulation. Grinnell Figure 260 B-Line Figure B3100 Elcen Figure 12

Hangers for multiple horizontal piping shall be trapeze type. Grinnell Figure 46 B-Line Figure B22 Unistrut Model P3200 Michigan Hanger Figure 380

Provide an insulation protection shield between the hangers and the pipe insulation. Grinnell Figure 167 B-Line Figure B3151 Elcen Figure 400

B. Wall supports: Where piping is run adjacent to walls or steel columns welded steel brackets may be used.

The bracket shall either be bolted to the wall with a back plate or welded to a mounting flange then attached to the wall or column. The back plate or flange shall be of such size and thickness as to distribute the weight properly. Grinnell Figure 195 B-Line Figure B3066 Elcen Figure 57

Insulated pipes shall be provided with a protection shield between the hanger and the pipe insulation. Grinnell Figure 167 B-Line Figure B3151 Elcen Figure 400

C. Floor supports: Where pipe runs are located next to the floor the pipe shall be supported with an

adjustable pipe saddle support and floor flange. Grinnell Figure 264 B-Line Figure B3092 Elcen Figure 50

Vertical piping shall be supported at every floor using riser clamps. Provide a steel plate and neoprene sandwich type pad at each riser clamp for support. Grinnell Figure 261 B-Line Figure B3373 Elcen Figure 1



2.02 HOT WATER SERVICE

A. Suspended insulated pipe: Upper attachments:

Support piping in existing concrete construction with cadmium plated, malleable iron expansion case anchor. Grinnell Figure 117 B-Line Series LA Elcen Figure 212

Where hangers are required between structural concrete beams provide side beam brackets attached to the upper 1/3 of the beam and all auxiliary steel for the installation of the pipe hangers. Supports shall be designed and installed in accordance with the AISC Steel Handbook. Grinnell Figure 202 B-Line Figure B3062 Elcen Figure 27

Support piping in steel construction with adjustable beam clamps and tie rods. Grinnell Figure 218 B-Line Figure B3054 Elcen Figures 95 and 76

Where hangers are required between steel structural beams or joists provide a welded steel bracket sized to meet the constraints of the structural installation. The bracket shall be attached with a continuous weld between the support and the structural member. Supports shall be designed in accordance with the AISC Steel Handbook. Grinnell Figure 195 B-Line Figure B3066 Elcen Figure 57

Intermediate attachments: Supports for horizontal piping shall be all threaded carbon steel, ASTM A-107 of the

following sizes: Pipe Size Hanger Rod Diameter 2" and smaller 3/8" 2-1/2" 1/2" 3" and larger 1/2"

Pipe attachments: Hangers for horizontal piping shall be adjustable steel yoke pipe roll selected to bear

on the outside of the insulation. Grinnell Figure 181 B-Line Figure Elcen Figure

Provide a pipe covering protection saddle between the hanger and the pipe insulation. Saddle shall be selected to match the insulation thickness such that the lip of the saddle rests on the pipe not the insulation. Grinnell Figures 160, 161 and 162 B-Line Figures B3161, B3162 and B3163 Elcen Figures 252, 253 and 254

B. Wall supports: Where piping is run adjacent to walls or steel columns welded steel brackets may be used.

The bracket shall be either bolted to the wall with a back plate or welded to a mounting flange then attached to the wall or column. The back plate or flange shall be of such size and thickness as to distribute the weight properly. Grinnell Figure 195 B-Line Figure B3066 Elcen Figure 57



Pipe shall be supported with a pipe roll and plate welded to the wall bracket.

Grinnell Figure 277 B-Line Figure B311951 Elcen Figure 22

Provide a pipe covering protection saddle between the roll support and the pipe insulation. Saddle shall be selected to match the insulation thickness such that the lip of the saddle rests on the pipe not the insulation. Grinnell Figures 160, 161 and 162 B-Line Figures B3160, B3162 and B3163 Elcen Figures 252, 253 and 254


adjustable pipe roll stand with base plate. Grinnell Figure 274 B-Line Figure B3118SL Elcen Figure 20


Provide a pipe covering protection saddle between roll support and the pipe insulation. Saddle shall be selected to match the insulation thickness such that the lip of the saddle rests on the pipe not the insulation. Grinnell Figures 160, 161 and 162 B-Line Figures B3160, B3162 and B3163 Elcen Figures 252, 253 and 254

2.03 PLUMBING SERVICE

A. Suspended domestic cold, hot, hot water return, waste and vent piping: Upper attachments:

Support piping in concrete construction with cadmium plated, malleable iron expansion case anchor. Grinnell Figure 117 B-Line Series LA Elcen Figure 212

Where hangers are required between structural concrete beams provide side beam brackets attached to the upper 1/3 of the beam, and all auxiliary steel for the installation of the pipe hangers. Supports shall be designed in accordance with the AISC Steel Handbook. Grinnell Figure 202 B-Line Figure B3062 Elcen Figure 27

Support piping in steel construction with adjustable beam clamps and tie rods. Grinnell Figure 218 B-Line Figure B3054 Elcen Figure 95 and 76

Where hangers are required between structural steel beams or joists provide a welded steel bracket sized to meet the constraints of the structural installation. The bracket shall be attached with a continuous weld between the support and the structural member. Supports shall be designed in accordance with the AISC Steel Handbook. Grinnell Figure 195 B-Line Figure B3066 Elcen Figure 57



Intermediate attachments:

Supports for horizontal piping shall be all threaded carbon steel, ASTM A-107 of the following sizes:

Pipe Size Hanger Rod Diameter 2" and smaller 3/8" 2-1/2" 1/2" 3" 1/2" 4" 5/8"

Pipe attachments: Hangers for horizontal piping shall be clevis type with vertical adjustment. Hangers

for insulated pipes shall be selected to bear on the outside of the insulation. Grinnell Figure 260 B-Line Figure B3100 Elcen Figure 12

Hangers for multiple horizontal piping systems shall be trapeze type. Grinnell Figure 46 B-Line Figure B22 Unistrut Model P3200 Michigan Hanger Figure 380

Provide an insulation protection shield between all hangers and the pipe insulation. Grinnell Figure 167 B-Line Figure B3151 Elcen Figure 400

B. Wall supports: Where piping is run adjacent to masonry walls or steel columns welded steel brackets may

be used. The bracket shall be either bolted to the wall with a back plate or welded to a mounting flange then attached to the wall or column. The back plate or flange shall be of such size thickness as to distribute the weight properly. Grinnell Figure 195 B-Line Figure B3066 Elcen Figure 57

Insulated pipe shall be provided with a protection shield between the hanger and the pipe insulation. Grinnell Figure 167 B-Line Figure B3151 Elcen Figure 400


adjustable pipe saddle support and floor flange. Grinnell Figure 264 B-Line Figure B3092 Elcen Figure 50


D. Chase supports: Support piping in wall spaces behind plumbing fixtures with manufactured brackets and

plastic grip clamps systems. B-Line Ruff-in Series Sioux Chief Hold Rite Hubbard



E. Cast Iron No Hub Pipe and Fitting Restraint:

Description: CISPI Designation 310-11, CISPI Designation 301-09 , large diameter no-hub cast iron fittings, over 4 inch in size, shall be provided with supplemental support to minimize the risk of joints separation under high thrust conditions. Auxiliary restraint products used shall be manufactured assemblies with thrust pressure rating adequate for the specific installation. Field devised methods and materials shall not be used to accomplish this application solution.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pipe and fitting restraints of sufficient strength and durability to withstand thrust forces equivalent to 50 feet head pressure. Restraints shall be designed and manufactured for the specific purpose of restraining hubless cast iron pipe and fittings against separation under thrust forces equivalent to 50 feet head pressure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Hang pipe from substantial building structure. Do not hang pipe from other piping, ductwork, ceilings or steel decking.

B. Support each horizontal length of no-hub cast iron pipe within 18" of each joint and a maximum of 10'-0" on centers, and as required to maintain alignment and to prevent sagging. Support and anchor pipe in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.

C. Horizontal no-hub cast iron pipe 5" and larger shall be suitably braced to prevent horizontal movement in accordance with CISIPI 310. This shall be done at every branch opening or change of direction by use of braces, blocks, rodding or other suitable method, to prevent movement.

D. Provide a hanger within one foot of each elbow.

E. Support vertical piping at every floor using riser clamps. Secure vertical piping drops along columns or walls at the top and bottom of the drop and every 10'-0" on center.

F. Provide a hanger within one foot of each riser in addition to the riser clamp support at every floor.

G. Support all fire protection piping independently of all other piping. Refer to Section 21 0000, Automatic Sprinkler System.

H. Isolate copper tubing from steel supports, anchors and metal studs to prevent electrolysis. Isolate piping with neoprene pads, sheet lead strips or plastic inserts. Duct tape shall not be used to isolate piping.

I. Spacing of hangers and supports for above-ground horizontal piping shall be as follows:

Maximum Spacing of Nominal Pipe Size Supports

Steel pipe 1-1/4" and smaller 7'-0" 1-1/2" 9'-0" 2" 10'-0" 2-1/2" 11'-0" 3" 12'-0"

Copper tubing 1/2" 5'-0" 3/4" 5'-0" 1" 6'-0" 1-1/4" 7'-0" 1-1/2" 8'-0" 2" 8'-0"

PVC pipe 2" and smaller 5'-0" 2" thru 6" 8'-0"



Cast iron pipe

2" and larger 10'-0"


......


1515 08.29.2016 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

SECTION 23 0548

VIBRATION ISOLATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The requirements of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, and Section 23 0000, Mechanical General, apply to all work specified in this section.

1.02 COORDINATION

A. All isolation devices and bases shall be the products of a single vibration manufacturer. Submittal data shall include size, type, load and deflection of each isolator selected. Submittal data shall also include clearly outlined procedures for setting and adjusting all isolation devices.

B. Coordinate the vibration isolation supports with the manufacturer of the equipment to be isolated. Prior to submitting shop drawings to the Architect, the equipment manufacturer shall review and approve the vibration isolator shop drawings in writing.


A. Vibration isolation devices manufactured by Amber Booth, Consolidated Kinetics Corp., Korfund Dynamics Corp., Vibro-Acoustics, or Vibration Eliminator Co. will be acceptable.

B. Where a specific type of vibration isolation equipment is not shown on the drawings or specified, furnish isolators as recommended by the isolation manufacturer, compatible with the equipment arrangements shown.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ISOLATION HANGERS

A. Type "D" Isolation Hangers: Vibration hangers shall contain a spring and a double deflection neoprene element in series. Neoprene elements shall have a minimum deflection of 0.30". Spring diameters shall be not less than 50% of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Spring diameter and hanger box lower hole shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30 degree arc before contacting the hole and short circuiting the spring.

2.02 PADS

A. Pads shall be the neoprene waffle type with identical rubber grids molded back to back. The interconnections shall form suction pockets for gripping smooth steel as well as rough surfaces regardless of how the pad is cut. The square waffle pattern shall be laid out on 1/2" centers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Furnish the mounting types with the minimum static deflections as listed below. Mounting Min. Equipment Type Defl. Floor Mounted Air Handling Units Pad -- Suspended Fans D 0.50" Condensing Units Pad --

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Provide vibration isolators for the indicated mechanical equipment to prevent the transmission of vibration and mechanically transmitted sound to the building structure. Vibration isolators shall be selected by the isolator manufacturer in accordance with the weight distribution of the actual equipment provided so as to produce a uniform deflection.

B. Special care shall be taken when selecting vibration isolators and housekeeping pad thickness to ensure sufficient height to the drain pan outlet of air handling equipment to allow installation of the water seal and sufficient slope to the drain.


1515 08.29.2016 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

C. There shall be no direct contact of isolated equipment with partitions, conduits, floor slabs or

walls.



1515 08.29.2016 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS

SECTION 23 0553

IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE MARKINGS

A. Pipe markings shall be manufactured, pre-printed markers in accordance with the following: No taped or self-adhering markers will be acceptable. Markers shall be strapped in place using nylon fasteners. Markers shall be non-corrosive, non-conducting, mildew resistant and impervious to

moisture. Direction of flow arrows shall be placed adjacent to color bands. Band, letter sizes and

colors shall be as indicated below. Piping identification markings manufactured by W.H. Brady Co., Seton, Grainger or

approved equal will be acceptable.

2.02 PIPE BAND AND LETTER SIZE

A. Pipe band and letter sizes shall conform to ASHRAE standards and the following table:

O.D. of Pipe or Width of Size of Letters Pipe Covering Color Band and Numbers 1-1/4" and smaller 8" 1/2" 1-1/2" to 2" 8" 3/4" 2-1/2" and larger 12" 1-1/4"

2.03 IDENTIFICATION

A. Band legend and letter color shall conform to the following table:

Piping Band Legend Letters Band Color Chilled Water Supply CHWS White Green Chilled Water Return CHWR White Green Domestic Cold Water CW White Green Domestic Hot Water HW Black Yellow Domestic Hot Water Circulation HWC Black Yellow Hot Water Supply HWS Black Yellow Hot Water Return HWR Black Yellow Refrigerant Liquid RL Black Yellow Refrigerant Suction RS Black Yellow Drain D Black Green

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Locate piping identification at the following areas: At each riser. At each valve. Where pipes pass through walls and floors (one each side). At or near each change in direction or height. Every 40 feet along continuous runs. Within 4 feet of the entrance or exit to a vessel, tank or piece of equipment.

B. Indicate flow direction with arrows of matching style and color and placed so that the arrow points away from the legend.


1515 08.29.2016 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS

C. A copy of the pipe identification legend shall be included in the Operation and Maintenance manual.

D. In addition to the above, identify fire protection piping and accessories as outlined in Section 21 0000, Automatic Sprinkler System, and in NFPA 13.



1515 08.29.2016 TEST AND BALANCE

SECTION 23 0593

TEST AND BALANCE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Procure the services of an independent Test and Balance agency that is independent of any contractor or manufacturer to perform the testing and balancing and to prepare reports to the Architect. The Test and Balance agency shall be a certified member of the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB).

B. Perform testing and balancing in accordance with the latest edition of the AABC National Standards for Total System Balance, and in accordance with the scope of work defined herein.

C. The Test and Balance agency, as part of its contract, shall act as an authorized inspection agency, responsible to the Owner and shall, during the test and balance, list all systems that require correction or that have not been installed in accordance with the drawings and specifications.

D. A single agency shall be responsible for all phases of testing and balancing.

E. Do not begin testing and balancing until all systems have been completed and are in full working order. Put all heating, ventilating and air conditioning equipment into full operation and continue the operation of same during each working day of testing and balancing.

F. Upon the completion of the test and balance work the agency shall compile the test data and submit four copies of the complete report to the Architect for his evaluation and approval.

G. After testing, adjusting and balancing is complete the agency shall visit the job two additional times: once during the heating season, and once during the cooling season, to make adjustments to provide uniform temperatures throughout the building. Schedule the adjustments trips during the months of December through February for the heating season, or June through August for the cooling season. Obtain a signed statement from the Owner acknowledging the trips and subsequent adjustments. Submit a statement to the Architect.

1.03 LEAKAGE TESTS, MEDIUM PRESSURE DUCTS

A. Medium pressure duct leakage tests shall be witnessed and certified by the Test and Balance agency. The agency shall furnish test instruments, confirm the readings, make the calculation for percentage of leakage in accordance with AABC standard methods and Section 23 3100, Ductwork and Accessories, and shall submit test reports to the Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Provide all required instrumentation, equipment, tools, devices and utility services to perform the operations as specified herein.

B. Calibrate instruments used for testing and balancing of systems within six months preceding the tests and check them for accuracy prior to start of work.

C. Instruments shall be of a type normally recognized as adequate and accurate for the test contemplated. List the types of instruments, including manufacturer, serial number and latest calibration date as a part of the submitted test data.

2.02 PATCHING MATERIALS

A. Unless indicated otherwise, use same products as used in the work for patching holes in insulation, ductwork and housings which have been cut or drilled for test purposes, including access for test instruments, attaching jigs and similar purposes.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 REQUIRED DOCUMENTS

A. Provide the following, in a timely fashion, to the Test and Balance agency: Contract drawings (complete set). Applicable specifications (Division 23 and 26 as a minimum). Related addenda, change orders, reviewed shop drawings, reviewed equipment

manufacturer's submittal data and reviewed temperature control drawings.

3.02 COOPERATION

A. Refer to Section 23 0000, Mechanical General, for requirements in preparation for Test and Balance.

3.03 BELT DRIVES

A. Adjustable sheave drives shall be adjusted by the Test and Balance agency. In cases where the specified capacities cannot be obtained with the original adjustable sheave or original fixed drive sheave the agency shall report the sheave size required to obtain the specified capacity.

B. Where larger or smaller sheave sizes are required provide new sheaves and, if required, new belts.

3.04 TERMINAL UNIT TESTING AND ADJUSTING

A. When terminal units are specified to be factory set they shall be checked by the Test and Balance agency and a performance report shall be furnished. It is not the responsibility of the Test and Balance agency to adjust factory set units.

B. Correct all deficiencies in the operation of factory set terminal units.

C. List final operation of all terminal units in the test and balance reports.

3.05 OPERATING TEST

A. Make a complete system operating test for a period of eight hours with controls set in their various positions to ensure proper operation under the design conditions. Make all tests and final adjustments to the complete satisfaction of the Owner and the Architect.

B. Schedule the operating test four weeks prior to scheduled completion date.

3.06 CONTROL PERFORMANCE CHECK

A. The results produced by the operation of automatic controls shall be checked by the Test and Balance agency. List and report controls requiring adjustment. The agency shall be responsible only for final settings.

3.07 SETTINGS

A. Permanently mark the settings of all valves, dampers and other adjustment devices in a manner that will allow the settings to be restored. If a balancing device is provided with a memory stop it shall be set and locked.

3.08 AIR BALANCING PROCEDURE

A. Prepare the air side systems for balancing as specified in Section 23 0000, Mechanical General.

3.09 AIR BALANCING REQUIREMENTS

A. Test, record and incorporate in the test and balance report the following items. The report shall not be limited to these items, but shall include as minimum the following requirements. Make all tests with supply, return and exhaust systems operating, and with all doors, windows or other openings closed or in their normal operating condition.

B. Central station air handling unit: 1. Record unit equipment manufacturer, model number and serial number. 2. Record installed supply fan drive assembly, fan sheave, motor sheave and belts.



3. Record installed motor manufacturer, motor horsepower, motor name plate and measured voltage and motor name plate and measured full load amperage (one reading for each phase leg on three phase motors).

4. Test, adjust and record supply fan RPM. 5. Test and record dry and wet bulb air temperature entering and leaving the cooling coil and

the capacity of coil in BTU per hour. 6. Test and record dry bulb air temperature entering and leaving the heating coil and the

capacity of coil in BTU per hour. 7. Test, adjust and record required and measured total CFM for the supply fan by duct traverse.

Test and record quantity of supply, return and outside air in CFM. 8. Test and record required and measured system static pressure, filter pressure differential,

each coil pressure differential and fan total static pressure.

C. Exhaust fans: 1. Record each unit equipment manufacturer, model number and serial number. 2. Record fan drive assembly, fan sheave, motor sheave and belts. 3. Record motor manufacturer, motor horsepower, motor name plate and measured voltage,

and motor name plate and measured full load amperage (one reading for each phase leg on three phase motors).

4. Test, adjust and record fan RPM. 5. Test, adjust and record required and measured total CFM by duct traverse. Test and record

quantity of exhaust air in CFM. 6. Test and record required and measured system static pressure and fan total static pressure.

D. Supply diffusers, supply registers and exhaust registers: Test and adjust the CFM delivery of each supply diffuser, supply register and exhaust

register. Identify the location of each diffuser and register. Record the size and type of each diffuser and register. Include required FPM velocity and test resultant velocity, required CFM and test resultant

CFM after adjustment for each diffuser and register. Adjust all supply diffusers and registers to minimize drafts.

B. Building pressurization testing: The final balanced condition of each area shall include the testing and adjusting of

pressure conditions. Check front doors, exits, elevator shafts or other openings for air flow so that exterior conditions do not cause excessive or abnormal pressure conditions.

Test and adjust fan systems, dampers and other balancing devices as necessary so as to produce a slight overall positive building pressurization with respect to the outdoors.

Record measured building positive pressurization in inches water gauge.

3.10 WATER BALANCING PROCEDURE

A. Do not begin balancing of the hydronic systems until air balance is complete.

B. Prepare the hydronic systems for balancing as specified in Section 23 0000, Mechanical General.

C. After completion of the preliminary work, follow the following balancing procedure: Set existing pumps to the specified GPM delivery. Upon completion of flow readings and adjustments at coils re-check settings at the pumps

and readjust if necessary. Balance each end device to its proportionate share of the pump total GPM based on the

ratio of the pump total GPM as compared to the sum of GPM for all end devices.

3.11 WATER BALANCING REQUIREMENTS

A. Water coils: Clean exterior surface of coil tubes and fins. Flush interior of tubes with water until water runs clear. Straighten fins. Furnish data tabulating the following:

Entering and leaving water temperature. Quantity of air in CFM. Face velocity in FPM.



Dry and wet bulb air temperature entering and leaving coil. Capacity of coil in BTU per hour. Quantity of water circulated through coil in GPM.



1515 08.29.2016 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 23 0700

THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS


DESCRIPTION

A. All insulation products shall meet NFPA requirements for a Flame Spread Rating not to exceed 25, a Smoke Developed Rating not to exceed 50 and a Fuel Contributed Rating not to exceed 50.

B. Do not use staples for securing insulation.

C. Insulation and vapor barrier shall be continuous through wall and floor sleeves, ceilings and roofs except at fire and fire/smoke dampers.

D. Supports for insulated piping shall be outside the insulation. For pipe sizes 2-1/2 inch and larger provide inserts and pipe shields at pipe hangers. For pipe sizes 2 inch and smaller provide pipe shields only at pipe hangers. Inserts shall be foam glass or calcium silicate insulation and shall be 2" longer than the pipe shields.

E. Do not store insulation materials in the building until it is enclosed and dry. Do not install wet insulation.

F. Do not apply insulation products with self-sealing type lap jackets at ambient temperatures below 40 degrees F.

G. Do not insulate the following items: Chromium plated brass connections to plumbing fixtures. Factory pre-insulated ducts.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Codes and regulations referred to in these specifications are minimum standards, however if the requirements of these specifications exceed those of the codes and regulations, the specifications shall govern.

B. Any methods of application of insulation products or finishes not specifically detailed herein shall be applied in accordance with the insulation manufacturer's published recommendations. Apply insulation by experienced workers regularly employed in this type of work.

C. Insulation products manufactured by Owens-Corning, Johns-Manville, CertainTeed, Knauf or Armstrong will be acceptable.

D. Adhesives, mastics and coatings manufactured by Foster, Childers, Insul-Coustic or Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Co. (3M) will be acceptable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PRE-MOLDED GLASS FIBER PIPE INSULATION

A. Pipe insulation shall be 4 pcf density fibrous glass wool accurately molded to conform to the outside diameter of the pipe. Insulation shall be the one piece snap-on or self-sealing lap type with white all-service jacket and vapor barrier. Insulation shall be suitable for use on hot or cold pipes with a temperature range of 35 to 400 degrees F. Thermal conductivity shall not exceed 0.26 at 75 degrees F mean temperature.



PRE-MOLDED GLASS FIBER INSULATION THICKNESS IN INCHES

Up to 1-1/4" to 2-1/2" to 4" and Service 1" 2" 3-1/2" Over

Heating systems Hot water 1" 1-1/2" 1-1/2" 2" Plumbing systems Hot water and hot water circulating 1/2" 1" 1" 1-1/2" Cold water 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2"

CELLULAR GLASS PIPE INSULATION

A. Pre-molded pipe insulation shall be 7.5 pcf minimum density rigid cellular glass and vapor barrier with a thermal conductivity not to exceed 0.29 at 75 degrees F mean temperature.

CELLULAR GLASS INSULATION THICKNESS IN INCHES

Up to 1-1/4" to 2-1/2" to 4" and Service 1" 2" 3-1/2" Over

Cooling systems Chilled water 1" 1-1/2" 2" 2"

GLASS FIBER WRAP PIPE INSULATION

A. Pipe insulation shall be 1 pcf density fibrous glass wool wrapping with factory applied all-service jacket. Insulation shall be sealed with vapor barrier tape.

B. Insulate the following with 1-1/2" thick glass fiber wrap pipe insulation: The P-trap body and the first 10 feet of the horizontal portion of sanitary drain piping

whenever a floor drain is used for condensate drain collection and when the floor drain is located on an elevated slab.

FOAMED PLASTIC SHEET AND TUBING

A. Foamed plastic sheet and tubing shall have a minimum density of 4.5 pcf. Thermal conductivity shall not exceed 0.28 at 75 degrees F mean temperature.

B. Apply and secure insulation and seal all joints with Armaflex 520, Foster 85-75, or Childers CP-82 adhesive so as to maintain a continuous vapor barrier. On piping, do not split the insulation longitudinally except at branch fittings where it cannot be avoided.

C. Insulate the following with 1/2" thick foamed plastic tubing insulation: Condensate drain piping.

D. Insulate the following with 3/4" thick foamed plastic tubing insulation: Refrigerant suction piping. Coat piping outside the building with two coats of white, ultra-

violet resistant Armaflex vinyl lacquer or Foster 30-64 coating.

FIBERGLASS WRAP DUCT INSULATION

A. Insulation shall be 1 pcf minimum density having a thermal conductivity of 0.27 at 75 degrees F mean temperature. Insulation shall have a factory applied vapor barrier of foil-faced flame resistant kraft paper.

B. Insulate the following with 2" thick fiberglass wrap duct insulation: All supply ductwork outside mechanical rooms. All return ductwork outside mechanical rooms except ductwork run in return air plenums

and internally lined return ducts need not be insulated. All outdoor air ductwork outside mechanical rooms.

FIBERGLASS BOARD DUCT INSULATION

A. Insulation shall be 3 pcf semi-rigid board material having a thermal conductivity not to exceed 0.25 at 75 degrees F mean temperature.

B. Insulate the following with 2" thick fiberglass board duct insulation:



All supply ductwork inside mechanical rooms. All return and outdoor air ductwork inside mechanical rooms whether internally lined or

not.

ACOUSTICAL DUCT LINER

A. Acoustical duct liner shall be a flexible type having long glass fibers with a smooth, firmly bonded fire-resistant surface specifically designed to prevent erosion of the fibers. Thermal conductivity shall not exceed 0.26 at 75 degrees F mean temperature and the noise reduction coefficient shall be not less than 0.60 when based on the Acoustical Materials Test, Mounting No. 6.

B. Completely coat all duct surfaces with Foster 85-60 or Childers CP-127 adhesive. Join sections of liner by coating the edges with Foster 30-36 or Childers CP-50AMV1. Impale the liner on self-adhering pins, secured with self-locking washers, spacing the pins not more than 4" from the edges and not more than 16" on centers.

C. Duct liner shall meet the National Board of Fire Underwriters' Standards for Internal Duct Application and shall have a minimum density of 3 pcf. Air friction correction factor shall not exceed 1.40 at 2000 fpm and 1.50 at 4000 fpm.

D. Provide 1" thick acoustical duct liner on the following ductwork: Return ductwork where indicated on the drawings. Transfer ducts where indicated on the drawings.

ADHESIVES, MASTICS, COATINGS AND VAPOR BARRIERS

A. The treatment of pipe insulation jackets and duct insulation facings to impart flame spread and smoke developed ratings shall be permanent. The use of water-soluble treatments is prohibited.

B. Vapor barriers shall be installed on all pipe and duct insulation which shall have a perm rating of not more than 0.05 perms. Adhesives, coatings and mastics shall have a perm rating of not less than 0.25 perms.

C. Vapor Barrier Coatings shall have a perm rating of 0.03 perms or less at 45 mils dry as tested by ASTM E 96. Foster 30-65 or Childers CP-34.

D. Weather Barrier Mastics shall be water based. Foster 46-50 or Childers CP-10/11.

E. Adhesives for fiberglass shall meet ASTM C 916, Type II. Foster 85-60 or Childers CP-127. Water based.

F. Insulation Joint Sealant (cellular glass) shall be used on all chilled water pipe insulation butt and longitudinal joints wherever cellular glass insulation is used. Foster 95-50 or Childers CP-76

G. Metal Jacketing Sealant shall be non-hardening elastomeric sealant. Foster 95-44 or Childers CP-76 shall be used.

H. Elastomeric Insulation Adhesive shall be Foster 85-75, Childers CP-82 or Armaflex 520

I. Elastomeric Outer Coating shall be white polyacrylate copolymer emulsion. Foster 30-64 or Armacell WB coating.

J. Lagging Adhesive shall be Foster 30-36 or Childers CP-50AMV1.

TAPE

A. Whenever tape is used for sealing purposes, it shall be of the type and shall be applied as recommended by the covering manufacturer. If there is no such recommendation, the tape used shall be 3M Adhesive EC-1329.

INSULATING CEMENT

A. Insulating cement shall be Ramco Thermokote. Where insulating cement is applied to pipe fittings in concealed locations it shall be "one-coat" cement.



GLASS CLOTH JACKET

A. Glass cloth jacket on pipe, duct and equipment insulation shall be open weave, standard weight. Foster Mast a Fab or Childers Chil Glas #10.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

GENERAL

A. Clean all surfaces to be insulated of all loose scale, dirt, rust, oil and other foreign matter and thoroughly dry before applying insulation.

B. Perform pressure tests required by other sections before insulation is applied.

C. Where existing insulation is damaged due to demolition or construction operations, remove and replace it with new insulation to match the existing work or as specified herein for new insulation.

D. Insulate completely all metal surfaces of piping and ductwork other than hangers.

E. Insulation surface finishes shall present a tight, smooth appearance and the surface finish shall be extended to protect all raw ends and edges of the insulation.

INSULATION FOR PIPING

A. Insulate all valves including valve bonnets on chilled water piping, strainers, flanges and fittings. Use pre-molded material where available.

B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces, with jackets drawn tight and cemented down smoothly at longitudinal seams and end laps. Do not use scrap pieces of insulation where a full length of insulation will fit.

C. Install insulation, jackets and coatings continuous through wall and floor openings and through pipe sleeves.

D. Insulate chilled water valves, strainers, fittings, and flanges with field fabricated, multiple mitered segments of molded pipe insulation of the same thickness and material as the adjoining pipe insulation. Secure segments with 20 gauge galvanized steel wire and apply a smoothing coat of insulating cement. Use white fabric and vapor barrier mastic on all cold fittings, elbows, strainers, valves flanges exposed to view such as in mechanical rooms.

E. For foam plastic insulation, butt all joints together and seal with joint straps furnished with the insulation. Secure all jacket laps with lap adhesive.

F. Insulate all chilled water piping appurtenances such as thermometer wells, gauge cocks, valve stems and the like with foamed plastic sheet and tubing. Seal all joints with flexible joint sealer and finish with white vapor barrier mastic.

INSULATION FOR DUCTWORK

A. Cover all standing ribs and seams with insulation. Secure insulation to the duct with specified adhesive applied in 4" strips around the duct on 18" centers. Use nylon cord ties at 18" intervals to secure the insulation on round ductwork. On rectangular ductwork 36" wide or more in either dimension, secure the insulation to the bottom of the duct using self-adhering pins and self-locking washers spaced not more than 18" on center. Overlap factory applied insulation, where applicable, a minimum of 2". Seal the vapor barrier at all butt joints, laps and breaks using 4" wide foil-reinforced tape.

B. Provide insulation, jackets and coatings continuous through wall and floor openings except do not insulate fire and fire/smoke dampers.

CLEANING

A. Prior to final acceptance, clean the finished surfaces of all exposed insulation of all stains and blemishes. If necessary to obtain a new appearance, coat any discolored insulation with off-white latex based semi-gloss paint or lagging adhesive.



1515 08.29.2016 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM

SECTION 23 0923

BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 230000, Mechanical General, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the modifications to the existing Building Management System (BMS) control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including open protocol control components for terminal units.

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ETHERNET (IEEE 802.3), PEER-TO-PEER CSMA/CD

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and service necessary for a complete and operating temperature control system, utilizing a high speed peer to peer network of interoperable Direct Digital Controls (DDC), Graphical User Interface (GUI) with color graphic displays available on at least 64 client computers, and electronic interfaces and actuation devices, as shown on the drawings and as described herein.

B. The Local Area Network (LAN) shall be either a 10 or 100 Mpbs Ethernet Network supporting BACnet, Java, XML, HTTP, and CORBA IIOP for maximum flexibility for integration of building data with enterprise information systems and providing support for multiple Universal Network Controllers (UNCs), user workstations and a local host computer system.

C. The Enterprise Ethernet (IEEE 802.3) LAN shall utilize Carrier Sense Multiple/Access/ Collision Detect (CSMA/CD), Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) and User Datagram Protocol (UDP) operating at 10 or 100 Mbps.

D. The system shall consist of an open architecture that utilizes EIA standard 709.1, the LonTalk™ protocol, as the common communication protocol between all controllers and integral ANSI / ASHRAE™ Standard 135-1995, BACnet functionality to assure interoperability between all system components. Both the LonTalk™ protocol and the ANSI / ASHRAE™ Standard 135-1995, BACnet protocol are required to assure that the project is fully supported by the two leading HVAC open protocols to reduce future building maintenance, upgrade, and expansion costs.

E. Where necessary or desired, LonTalk™ packets may be encapsulated into TCP/IP messages to take advantage of existing infrastructure or to increase network bandwidth. 1. Any such encapsulation of the LonTalk™ protocol into IP datagram’s shall conform to

existing LonMark™ guide-lines for such encapsulation and shall be based on industry standard protocols.

2. The products used in constructing the BMS shall be LonMark™ compliant. 3. In those instances in which Lon-Mark™ devices are not available, the BMS contractor

shall provide LonWorks™ devices with application source code, device resource files, and external interface definitions.

F. The software tools required to network manage both, the LonTalk™ protocol and the ANSI/ ASHRAE™ Standard 135-1995, BACnet protocol shall be provided with the system. Drawings are diagrammatic only. Equipment and labor not specifically referred to herein or on the plans, that is required to meet the functional intent, shall be provided without additional cost to the Owner. Minimum BACnet compliance is Level 3; with the ability to support data read and write functionality. Physical connection of BACnet devices shall be via Ethernet/Ethernet IP.

G. Complete temperature control system to be DDC with electronic sensors and electronic/electric actuation of Mechanical Equipment Room (MER) valves and dampers and electronic actuation of terminal equipment valves and actuators as specified herein. The BMS is intended to seamlessly connect devices throughout the building regardless of subsystem type, i.e. variable



frequency drives, low voltage lighting systems, electrical circuit breakers, power metering and card access should easily coexist on the same network channel. 1. The supplied system shall incorporate the ability to access all data using Java enabled

browsers without requiring proprietary operator interface and configuration programs. 2. An Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) or Structured Query Language (SQL) compliant

server database is required for all system database parameter storage. a. This data shall reside on a supplier-installed server for all database access. b. Systems requiring proprietary database and user interface programs will not be

acceptable. c. A hierarchical topology is required to assure reasonable system response times and

to manage the flow and sharing of data without unduly burdening the customer’s internal Intranet network.

d. Systems employing a “flat” single tiered architecture will not be acceptable.

H. All work described in this section shall be installed, wired, circuit tested and calibrated by factory certified technicians qualified for this work and in the regular employment of Invensys Factory Office. Invensys Factory Office shall have a minimum of 5 years of installation experience with the manufacturer and shall provide documentation in the bid and submittal package verifying longevity of the installing company's relationship with the manufacturer. Supervision, calibration and checkout of the system shall be by the employees of Invensys Factory office. Supplier shall have an in place support facility within 50 miles of the site with technical staff, spare parts inventory and all necessary test and diagnostic equipment.

I. Provide a Portable Operator’s Terminal (POT) color display personnel computer, software, and interfaces to provide uploading/downloading of Custom Application Controller and Application Specific Controllers databases, monitoring of all LonMark™ Standard Network Variables Types (SNVTs) including display of all bound SNVTs, monitoring and overrides of all controller physical input/output points and editing of controller resident time schedules. POT connectivity shall be via digital wall sensor connected to controller.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for materials and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated. 1. Each control device labeled with setting or adjustable range of control.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components and location and size of each field connection. 1. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves and control

devices. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-

installed and field-installed wiring. 3. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments and labeling. 4. Written description of sequence of operation. 5. Schedule of dampers including size, leakage and flow characteristics. 6. Schedule of valves including close-off and flow characteristics. 7. Trunk cable schematic showing programmable control unit locations and trunk data

conductors. 8. Listing of connected data points, including connected control unit and input device. 9. System graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated) point

addresses and operator notations. 10. System configuration showing peripheral devices, batteries, power supplies, diagrams,

modems, and interconnections.

C. External Interface Files: XIF files or object diagrams for each DDC system component (Custom Application Controller and Application Specific Controller) proposed.



D. ANSI/ASHRAE™ Standard 135-1995, BACnet PIC Statement: Proof of Compliance Level 3 or

higher is required to protect building owner by reducing future maintenance and expansion costs.

E. Samples: For each color required, of each type of thermostat cover.

F. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include the following: 1. Engineering, Installation, Operation and Maintenance manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with data

files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens. 5. Licenses, guarantee and warranty documents for all equipment and systems.

G. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.

H. Maintenance Data: Include the following: 1. Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device. 2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and

devices. 3. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function. 4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration

tolerances. 5. Calibration records and list of set points.

I. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

J. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including control units, thermostats, and sensors. Revise Shop Drawings to reflect actual installation and operating sequences.


A. Bids by wholesalers and non-franchised contractors will not be acceptable.

B. The system manufacturer shall, as a minimum, manufacture and supply the Custom Application Controller, Application Specific Controller, damper actuators and valve actuator assemblies.

C. All work described in this section shall be installed, wired, circuit tested and calibrated by factory certified technicians qualified for this work and in the direct employment of the temperature control system manufacturer.

D. The Building Management System contractor shall have a full service facility within 25 miles of the project that is staffed with engineers trained in Integrating Interoperable Systems and technicians fully capable of providing LonWorks instructions and routine emergency maintenance service on all system components.

E. Mechanical equipment manufacturers desiring to provide DDC type controls as factory mounted equipment shall provide a separate bid for their products less all controls, actuators, valve assemblies and sensors, which are specified to be provided by the BMS contractor.

F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

G. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems".

H. Comply with National Electric Code, UL-916 Energy Management Systems, LonMark™, ULC, FCC Part 15, subpart J, Class B Computing Devices.

I. Comply with EIA Standard 709.1 LonTalk ™ protocol for DDC system control components.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to unit manufacturer.



1.07 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate location of thermostats, humidistats and other exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation.

B. Coordinate equipment from other divisions including "Intrusion Detection," "Lighting Controls,” "Motor-Control Centers," "Panel boards," and "Fire Alarm" to achieve compatibility with equipment that interfaces with those systems.

C. Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical circuits for control units and operator workstation.

D. Coordinate with the Owner's IT department on locations for UNC's, Ethernet Communication Cabling and TCP/IP addresses.

1.08 WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE

A. All components, system software and parts furnished and installed by the BMS contractor shall be guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for 1 years of substantial completion. Labor to repair, reprogram or replace these components shall be furnished by the BMS contractor at no charge during normal working hours during the warranty period. Materials furnished but not installed by the BMS contractor shall be covered to the extent of the product only. Installation labor shall be the responsibility of the trade contractor performing the installation. All corrective software modifications made during warranty periods shall be updated on all user documentation and on user and manufacturer archived software disks. The Contractor shall respond to the owner's request for warranty service within 24 hours standard working hours.

1.09 OWNERSHIP OF PROPRIETARY MATERIAL

A. The owner shall sign a copy of the manufacturer’s standard software and firmware licensing agreement as a condition of this contract. Such license shall grant use of all programs and application software to owner as defined by the manufacturer’s license agreement, but shall protect manufacturer’s rights to disclosure of trade secrets contained within such software. All project developed software and documentation shall become the property of the owner. These include, but are not limited to project graphic images, record drawings, project database, project specific application programming code and all other associated documentation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Electric, Electronic, and DDC Systems: Schneider Electric Lonworks IA Series Building

Automation System by a Factory Authorized - IFO (Independent Field Office).

2.02 DDC EQUIPMENT

A. Control Units General: Provide an adequate number of control units to achieve monitoring and control of all data points specified and necessary to satisfy the sequence of operation for all mechanical systems shown on the plans. Provide a minimum of one separate controller for each AHU or other HVAC system. Multiple DDC controllers may control one system provided that all points associated with individual control loops are assigned to the same DDC controller. Points used for control loop reset such as outside air or space temperature are exempt from this requirement. Each of the following panel types shall meet the following requirements. 1. Controllers shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions. 2. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient conditions shall be mounted within

waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at -40°F to 140°F and 5 to 95% RH, non condensing.

3. Controllers used in conditioned ambient space shall be mounted in dustproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at 32°F to 122°F and 5 to 95% RH, non condensing.

4. Serviceability: Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor. All wiring connections shall be made to field-removable, modular terminal strips or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable.



5. Memory: The Control Units shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in the

event of a power loss for at least 72 hours. 6. Diagnostics: The Building Controller shall continually check the status of its processor and

memory circuits. If an abnormal operation is detected, the controller shall assume a predetermined failure mode and generate an alarm notification.

7. Immunity to power and noise: Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80% nominal voltage. Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios up to 5 W at 3 ft.

8. Automatic staggered restart of field equipment after restoration of power and short cycle protection.

B. ASC Room Sensor: 1. The ASC Sensor shall provide room temperature value and humidity to the ASC. 2. The ASC Sensor shall connect directly to the ASC and shall not utilize any of the I/O

points of the controller. 3. The ASC Sensor shall provide a two-wire connection to the controller that is polarity and

wire type insensitive. 4. There shall be one ASC Sensor per floor wired so that the communication jack will provide

for a connection to the LON communication trunk to which the ASC controller is connected.

5. By connecting to this ASC Sensor, the connected controller, and all other devices on the LON bus shall be accessible by the Portable Engineering Station.

6. The ASC Sensor shall be provided in a modular configuration that allows for the rough in of all wiring without the presence of the electronics or esthetic covering.

7. The ASC Sensor shall allow for the customization of the color on the esthetic covering as a standard offering.

8. The ASC Sensor shall be supplied in the following manner: a. LCD display for viewing up to four possible displays, each showing a current value in

the ASC or on the network. b. Tenant override to allow timed override of unoccupied to occupied mode of

operation. c. LED indication of override state. d. Icons shall be utilized to represent sensor and controller function status, affording

independence from a single language for use interface. e. User interface with the ASC Sensor shall be provided as a configurable function, and

shall offer password protection for access to network variable editing. f. Six buttons to provide the following functions:

1) Selection and adjustment of up to four set points (Set point Key) 2) Selection of up to two HVAC modes (Mode Key) 3) Selection of up to two fan modes (Fan Key)

g. ASHRAE 95 compliance (LCD display and sub-base functionality) h. The room sensor shall provide access to additional diagnostic data from a sensor-

user keypad request. This Diagnostic mode is displayed on the LCD screens and includes separate displays for the controllers: 1) Subnet and Node Address. 2) Errors. 3) Alarms. 4) Temperature Offset.

C. ASC – VAV Controller Functionality. Controls shall be microprocessor based Pressure Independent Variable Air Volume Digital Controllers, as shown in the drawings. The VAV ASC shall be a single integrated package consisting of a microprocessor, power supply, damper actuator, differential pressure transducer, field terminations, and application software. An alternate model shall be offered that allows for direct connectivity to an external actuator for those applications that employ a non-butterfly style damper configuration. All input/output signals shall be directly hardwired to the VAV ASC controller. The internal actuator shall employ



a manual override that allows for powered or non-powered adjustment of the damper position. In all cases, the controller shall automatically resume proper operation following the return of power to, or control by the ASC. Programming, configuring and/or troubleshooting of input/output signals shall be easily executed through the ASC sensor or GP tool connected at the wall sensor location. 1. LonMark™ VAV profiles for including support for all mandatory and optional LonMark™

Standard Network Variable Types (SNVTs) as documented by the LonMark™ Interoperability Association

2. The VAV ASC control algorithms shall be designed to limit the frequency of damper repositioning, to assure a minimum 10-year life from all components. The VAV ASC shall provide internal differential pressure transducer for pressure independent applications with an accuracy of ± 5 %. Flow through transducers requiring filter maintenance are not acceptable. The VAV ASC shall provide zone control accuracy equal to or better than +/- 1 degree F. Systems providing control accuracies greater than +/- 1 degree F are not acceptable. With the submittal package, contractor shall provide performance data that verifies control accuracy of the VAV ASC.

3. All input/output signals shall be directly hardwired to the VAV ASC. A minimum of one input point of the VAV ASC shall employ a universal configuration that allows for flexibility in application ranging from dry contact, resistive, to voltage/current sourced inputs. If a universal point is not available, a minimum of one input point (each) of the dry contact, resistive and analog voltage/current types must be provided on every controller. The outputs of the ASC shall be of the relay and universal analog form. All digital outputs shall be relay type. ASC devices utilizing non-relay outputs shall provide an interface relay for all points. All analog outputs shall be programmable for their start points and span to accommodate the control devices. Configuration of all I/O points shall be accomplished without physical hardware jumpers, switches or settings. Troubleshooting of input/output signals shall be easily executed with the Graphical Programming tool or a volt-ohm meter (VOM). All I/O points shall be utilized by the local ASC or shall be available as I/O points for other controllers throughout the network.

4. The FMCS contractor shall provide VAV ASC to the VAV box manufacturer, for factory mounting. The VAV terminal unit supplier shall include in its price all costs for mounting of VAV ASC controller, connection of actuator to damper shaft, wiring of device power, wiring of VAV ASC to fan (fan powered terminal) and wiring to electric reheat coils or reheat valve actuator as specified on drawing.

5. The VAV terminal manufacturer shall provide a multi-point, averaging, differential pressure sensor mounted on the inlet to each VAV box. The VAV terminal unit manufacturer shall supply a line to low voltage transformer, of sufficient capacity, to power the VAV ASC plus all reheat valves and/or contactors and fan circuits associated with the VAV terminal and actuator assemblies. The FMCS contractor shall provide all reheat control valves to the mechanical contractor for mounting and piping. The FMCS contractor shall provide and install all wiring between the valve and VAV ASC controller and between the room sensor and the VAV ASC controller.

6. A minimum of two input points of the VAV ASC shall employ a universal configuration that allows for flexibility in application ranging from dry contact, resistive, to voltage/current sourced inputs. If these universal points are not available, a minimum of two input point (each) of the dry contact, resistive and analog voltage/current types must be provided on every controller.

D. VAV Box Room Sensor: 1. The VAV Box Room Sensor shall provide room temperature value and humidity to the

controller. 2. The VAV Box Room Sensor shall connect directly to the controller Box and shall not utilize

any of the I/O points of the controller. 3. The VAV Box Room Sensor shall provide a two-wire connection to the controller that is

polarity and wire type insensitive.



4. There shall be one VAV Box Room Sensor per floor wired so that the communication jack

will provide for a connection to the LON communication trunk to which the VAV controller is connected.

5. By connecting to this VAV Box Room Sensor, the connected controller, and all other devices on the LON bus shall be accessible by the Portable Engineering Station.

6. The VAV Box Room Sensor shall be provided in a modular configuration that allows for the rough in of all wiring without the presence of the electronics or esthetic covering.

7. The VAV Box Room Sensor shall allow for the customization of the color on the esthetic covering as a standard offering.

8. The VAV Box Room Sensor shall be supplied in the following manner: a. LCD display for viewing up to four possible displays, each showing a current value in

the VAV Box or on the network. b. Tenant override to allow timed override of unoccupied to occupied mode of

operation. c. LED indication of override state. d. Icons shall be utilized to represent sensor and controller function status, affording

independence from a single language for use interface. e. User interface with the VAV Box Room Sensor shall be provided as a configurable

function, and shall offer password protection for access to network variable editing. f. Six buttons to provide the following functions:

1) Selection and adjustment of up to four set points (Set point Key). 2) Selection of up to two HVAC modes (Mode Key). 3) Selection of up to two fan modes (Fan Key).

g. ASHRAE 95 compliance (LCD display and sub-base functionality). h. The VAV Box Room Sensor shall provide access to additional diagnostic data from a

sensor-user keypad request. This Diagnostic mode is displayed on the LCD screens and includes separate displays for the controllers: 1) Subnet and Node Address. 2) Errors. 3) Alarms. 4) Temperature Offset.

E. ASC VAV –Air Balancing. 1. Through the Portable Engineering Station, the VAV ASC shall support a fully prompted Air

Balance sequence. The Portable Engineering Station shall, when connected through the wall sensor, access the connected VAV ASC unit. The air balance sequence shall step the balancing contractor through the checkout and calibration of the VAV ASC. Upon completion of the balancing sequence, the flow values presented by the VAV ASC shall match those observed by the balancing contractor's measurement equipment. Additionally, upon completion of the air balance, the balance settings shall be archived for future use if the controller were to require replacement. Systems not able to provide a formatted air balance Graphical Programming Tool shall provide an individual full time during the Air-balancing process to assure full balance compliance.

F. LANs: 1. Capacity for a minimum of 64 client workstations connected to multi-user, multitasking

environment with concurrent capability to access DDC network or control units. 2. Enterprise Network LAN:

a. Media: Ethernet (IEEE 802.3), peer-to-peer CSMA/CD, operating at 10 or 100 Mbps, cable 10 Base-T, UTP-8 wire, category 5

3. Primary Controller Network LAN: a. Media: LonTalk™ (EIA 709.1), peer-to-peer, FTT-10 operating at 78.8K.

4. Secondary Network LAN ( If Required): a. Media: LonTalk™ (EIA 709.1), peer-to-peer, FTT-10 operating at 78.8K

5. Remote Connection: a. ISDN, ADSL, T1 or dial-up connection, monthly charges paid by building owner



G. Software:

1. Controller and System HVAC Applications a. Update to latest version of software at Project completion. Include and implement

the following capabilities from the control units if documented by the specified sequence of operations: 1) Load Control Programs: Demand limiting, duty cycling, automatic time

scheduling, start/stop time optimization, occupied/unoccupied setback/setup, DDC with PID, and trend logging.

2) HVAC Control Programs: Optimal run time, supply-air reset, and enthalpy/economizer switchover.

3) Chiller Control Programs: Chilled water plant optimization with condenser water reset, chilled-water reset, chiller and pump equipment selection and sequencing.

4) Programming Application Features: Include trend point, alarm reporting, alarm lockout, weekly scheduling, staggered start, sequencing, anti-short cycling and calculated point.

2. Controller and Network Setup Software a. Network management Tools for LonTalk™ protocol and the ANSI / ASHRAE™

Standard 135-1995, BACnet protocol shall be provided including a network learn function, LonMark bindings, service pins, winks, and diagnostics.

2.03 CONTROL PANELS

A. Local Control Panels: Unitized NEMA 1 cabinet with suitable brackets for wall or floor mounting, located adjacent to each system under automatic control. Provide common keying for all panels. 1. Fabricate panels of 0.06-inch thick, furniture-quality steel, or extruded-aluminum alloy,

totally enclosed, with hinged doors and keyed lock and with manufacturer's standard shop-painted finish.

2. Interconnections between internal and face-mounted devices pre-wired with color-coded stranded conductors neatly installed in plastic troughs and/or tie-wrapped. Terminals for field connections shall be UL Listed for 600 volt service, individually identified per control/interlock drawings, with adequate clearance for field wiring. Control terminations for field connection shall be individually identified per control drawings.

3. Door-Mounted Equipment: Flush-mount (on hinged door) manual switches, including damper-positioning switches, changeover switches, thermometers, and gages.

4. Provide ON/OFF power switch with over-current protection for control power sources to each local panel.

2.04 SENSORS

A. Electronic Temperature Sensors: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as required. 1. Resistance Temperature Detectors: Platinum, thermistor, or balco.

a. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.2 percent at calibration point; thermistors shall have a maximum 5 year drift of no more than .225°F maximum error of no more than 0.36°F.

b. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable. c. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 6 inches long; use where not affected by

temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 4 sq. ft. d. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 60 inches, long, flexible for use where prone to

temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 4 sq. ft.; 264 inches long, flexible for use where prone to temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 16 sq. ft; length as required.

e. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass socket with minimum insertion length of 2-1/2 inches.

f. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight. g. Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and security

screws.



2. Humidity Sensors: Bulk polymer sensor element.

a. Accuracy: 2 percent at 10-90% RH with linear output. b. Room Sensors: Range of 0 to 100 percent relative humidity c. Duct and Outside-Air Sensors: With element guard and mounting plate, range of 0 to

100 percent relative humidity. 3. Static-Pressure Transmitter: Non-directional sensor with suitable range for expected input,

and temperature compensated. a. Accuracy: +/- 1 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent. b. Output: 4 to 20 mA, 0-5 vDC, 0-10 vDC. c. Building Static-Pressure Range: -.1 to .1, -0.25 to 0.25, -.5 to .5, -1.0 to 1.0 IN WC.

jumper selectable. d. Duct Static-Pressure Range: 0 to 1, 0 to 2.5, 0 to 5, 0 to 10 IN WC., jumper

adjustable 4. Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas, liquid, or steam service; range suitable for

system; proportional output 4 to 20 mA.

B. Equipment operation sensors as follows: 1. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential-pressure switch with adjustable range of 0 to 5 IN WC. 2. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Current-sensing relay with current transformers,

adjustable and set to 175 percent of rated motor current.

C. Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indication: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2- to 10-V dc, feedback signal.

D. Water-Flow Switches: Pressure-flow switches of bellows-actuated mercury or snap-acting type, with appropriate scale range and differential adjustment, with stainless-steel or bronze paddle. For chilled-water applications, provide vapor proof type.

E. Carbon-Monoxide Detectors: Single or multi-channel, dual-level detectors, using solid-state sensors with 3-year minimum life, maximum 15-minute sensor replacement, suitable over a temperature range of 23°F to 130°F, calibrated for 50 and 100 ppm, with maximum 120-second response time to 100-ppm carbon monoxide.

F. Carbon-Dioxide Sensor and Transmitter: Single detectors, using solid-state infrared sensors, suitable over a temperature range of 23°F to 130°F, calibrated for 0 to 2 percent, with continuous or averaged reading, 4 to 20 mA output, and wall mounted.

G. Occupancy Sensor: Passive infrared, with time delay, daylight sensor lockout, sensitivity control, and 180-degree field of view with vertical sensing adjustment, for flush mounting.

2.05 THERMOSTATS

A. Remote-Bulb Thermostats: On-off or modulating type, liquid filled to compensate for changes in ambient temperature, with copper capillary and bulb, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Bulbs in water lines with separate wells of same material as bulb. 2. Bulbs in air ducts with flanges and shields. 3. Averaging Elements: Copper tubing with either single- or multiple-unit elements, extended

to cover full width of duct or unit, adequately supported. 4. Scale settings and differential settings are clearly visible and adjustable from front of

instrument. 5. On-Off Thermostat: With precision snap switches, with electrical ratings required by

application. 6. Modulating Thermostats: Construct so complete potentiometer coil and wiper assembly is

removable for inspection or replacement without disturbing calibration of instrument.

B. Fire-Protection Thermostats: UL listed with fixed or adjustable settings to operate at not less than 75°F above normal maximum operating temperature, with the following: 1. Reset: Manual with control circuit arranged to directly shutdown appropriate equipment

and provide remote annunciation at the GUI

C. Room Thermostat Cover Construction: 1. Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed or exposed



2. Set-Point Indication: Concealed or exposed 3. Thermometer: Optional 4. Color: Neutral 5. Orientation: Vertical or horizontal

D. Room thermostat accessories include the following: 1. Insulating Bases: For thermostats located on exterior walls. 2. Thermostat Guards: As specified in tamper prone areas 3. Adjusting Key: As required for calibration and cover screws. 4. Set-Point Adjustment: 1/2-inch diameter, adjustment knob.

E. Electric Low-Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap-acting, single-pole, single-throw, manual- or automatic-reset switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches of bulb length is equal to or below set point. 1. Bulb Length: Minimum 20 feet 2. Quantity: One thermostat for every 20 sq. ft. of coil surface.

F. Electric High-Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap-acting, single-pole, single-throw, manual- or automatic-reset switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches of bulb length is equal to or above set point. 1. Bulb Length: Minimum 20 feet. 2. Quantity: One thermostat for every 20 sq. ft. of coil surface.

G. Heating/Cooling Valve-Top Thermostats: Proportional acting for proportional flow, molded-rubber diaphragm, remote-bulb liquid-filled element, direct and reverse acting at minimum shutoff pressure of 25 psig and cast housing with position indicator and adjusting knob.

2.06 ACTUATORS

A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action under all environmental conditions (temperature, low power voltage fluctuations, tight seal damper design, maximum air and water flow forces). 1. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed and

sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer.

2. Nonspring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2”: Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.

3. Spring-Return Motors for Valves Larger than NPS 2-1/2”: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf.

4. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.

5. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf.

B. Electronic Damper and Valve Actuators: Direct-coupled type non hydraulic designed for minimum 100,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque. The actuator shall have rating of not less than twice the thrust needed for actual operation of the damper or valve 1. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle. 2. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry. 3. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external, manual

gear release on non-spring-return actuators. 4. Actuators shall have the ability to be tandem mounted. 5. All spring-return actuators shall have a manual override. Complete manual override shall

take no more than 10 turns. 6. Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): 24V ac or dc, Maximum 10VA. 7. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 15 VA at 24V ac. 8. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback

signal. 9. Temperature Rating: -22°F to 140ºF.



10. Run Time: 200 seconds open, 40 seconds closed. 11. All actuators shall have a 5 year warranty 12. Valves:

a. Size for torque required for valve close-off at maximum pump differential pressure (regardless of water loop system pressures).

b. Valve and Actuators shall come from the factory fully assembled. c. Spring Return Manual Override shall come with a 10 Degree Valve Preload to assure

tight close off. 13. Dampers:

a. Size for running torque calculated as follows: 1) Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-pounds/sq. ft. of damper. 2) Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-pounds/sq. ft. of damper. 3) Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-pounds/sq. ft. damper. 4) Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-pounds/sq. ft. of damper. 5) Dampers with 2 to 3 Inches wg. Of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to

2500 FPM multiply the minimum full-stroke cycles above by 1.5. 6) Dampers with 3 to 4 Inches wg. Of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to

3000 FPM: Multiply the minimum full-stroke cycles above by 2.0. b. Spring Return Manual Override actuators shall a factory set 5 Degree Damper

Preload.

2.07 CONTROL CABLE

A. Electronic and Fiber-Optic Cable for Control Wiring: As specified in Division 26 Section "Control/Signal Transmission Media."

2.08 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that conditioned power supply is available to control units and operator workstation.

B. Verify that duct, pipe, and equipment mounted devices and wiring is installed before proceeding with installation.

2.09 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment level and plumb.

B. Install software in control units and operator workstation. Implement all features of programs to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation.

C. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified.

D. Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation. Locate all 48 inches above the floor. 1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.

E. Install guards or tamper proof enclosures on thermostats in the following locations: 1. Entrances. 2. Public areas. 3. Where indicated.

2.10 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 26.

B. Install building wire and cable according to Division 26.

C. Install signal and communication cable according to Division 26. 1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are

exposed. 2. Install exposed cable in raceway. 3. Install concealed cable in raceway. 4. Bundle and harness multi-conductor instrument cable in place of single cables where

several cables follow a common path. 5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against

abrasion. Tie and support conductors.



6. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control

system, except local individual room control cables.

D. Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions. Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers.

E. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in hand position.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SEQUENCES OF OPERATION

A. Air Handling Unit AHU-2 & AHU-3: 1. The BMS shall start and stop air handling unit AHU-3 fan and during the occupied periods

the fan shall run continuously. During the unoccupied periods the fan shall remain off except that the fan shall run anytime any override interval timer or any night set up or set back sensor in the system is activated.

2. When the fan starts the outdoor air control damper shall open to its minimum position and when the fan stops the damper shall close.

3. The air handling unit fan variable frequency speed controller shall be under the control of a supply duct static pressure sensor to maintain a duct static pressure of 1.0" water gauge (adjustable). Upon fan start the fan speed shall gradually increase to the speed controlled by the static pressure sensor for a soft start. The location of the supply duct static pressure sensor shall be determined in the field by experimentation to ensure that a reliable signal is achieved.

4. A duct static over-pressure sensor located downstream of the air handling unit and upstream of the first fire damper in the duct system, and set at 3.0" water gauge (adjustable), shall shut down the fan and alarm the central site computer if the duct static pressure exceeds the set-point.

5. During fan speed modulation, the outdoor air damper shall be modulated to maintain the minimum outdoor air volume as scheduled on the drawings throughout the entire range of fan speed. The damper shall modulate in response to a velocity sensor located behind the outdoor air damper to maintain a predetermined velocity set-point to ensure that the minimum outdoor air volume is maintained.

6. The outdoor air, return air and relief dampers shall be under the control of a dry bulb economizer during the occupied periods. When there is a call for cooling and the outdoor air temperature drops below 55 deg. F (adjustable) the outdoor air damper shall begin to open beyond its minimum position, the return air damper shall begin to close and the building relief damper shall begin to open as required to satisfy a discharge air temperature sensor set at 55 deg. F (adjustable). When all demand for cooling has ended the dampers shall return to their normal positions as described above.

7. A firestat, set at 125 deg. F and located in the return air duct, and a smoke detector located in the supply air duct shall shut down fan operation, alarm the central site computer and the smoke detector shall alarm the building fire alarm system should temperature exceed set-point or smoke is detected. The smoke detector shall be provided and wired into the building fire alarm system under Division 26, and shall be installed in the ductwork under Division 23.

8. A freezestat, set at 35 deg. F and located just upstream of the chilled water coil shall shut down fan operation and close the outdoor air damper should the temperature drop below the set-point.

9. During fan operation the preheat coil three-way hot water control valve shall modulate open to the coil as required to maintain an air temperature leaving the coil of 54 deg. F (adjustable).

10. Upon system start up and at outdoor temperatures of 50 deg. F and below (adjustable) the system shall be placed in morning warm-up mode. During the morning warm-up mode the outdoor and relief dampers shall close, the return damper shall open 100%, all VAV terminal box dampers shall open to their minimum position and the preheat coil hot water control valve shall modulate open to the coil as required to raise the temperature of a



temperature sensor in the return duct to 70 deg. F (adjustable). Upon the return air temperature reaching 70 deg. F the morning warm-up mode shall end and the normal occupied mode shall begin.

11. During fan operation the chilled water coil two-way control valve shall modulate open as required to maintain an air temperature in the discharge duct of 52 deg. F (adjustable).

12. Variable air volume terminal units VAV 2-1 through VAV 2-19 are associated with system AHU-2 and VAV 3-1 through VAV 3-13 are associated with system AHU-3 and they shall all operate the same as follows. Their respective space temperature sensor shall modulate the primary air damper and activate the electric heating coil under the control of its SCR controller to maintain set-point temperature. On a rise in space temperature above 74 deg. F (adjustable) the primary air damper shall modulate open. On a drop in space temperature below 73 deg. F (adjustable) the primary air damper shall modulate closed to its minimum position. Upon a continued drop in space temperature below 72 deg. F (adjustable) the electric heating coil shall activate to maintain set-point temperature.

13. During fan operation and only at outdoor air temperatures above 50 deg. F (adjustable) the system shall be under the control of the respective space humidity sensor. Anytime space relative humidity, as measured by any space humidity sensor in the system, rises above the set-point of 55% RH (adjustable) the chilled water coil three-way control valve shall open 100% to the coil and when space relative humidity drops below 50% the system shall revert to its normal space temperature control. During dehumidification the electric heating element in each VAV terminal box shall be activated under the control of its SCR controller as required to maintain the space cooling set-point temperature in the respective zone.

14. During air handling unit fan operation the BMS shall continually monitor the following: a. At each variable air volume terminal unit the following status and alarm points:

1) Primary air damper position. 2) Electric heat status. 3) Leaving air temperature.

b. Air handling unit fan status. c. Air handling unit fan speed. d. Chilled water coil supply water temperature. e. Chilled water coil return water temperature. f. Hot water preheat coil supply water temperature. g. Hot water preheat coil return water temperature. h. Filter differential pressure. i. Return air temperature. j. Supply air temperature. k. Mixed air temperature. l. Percent open on chilled water control valve. m. Outdoor quantity. n. Outdoor air control damper position.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections. Report results in writing. 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper

unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment, and retest. 3. Calibration and test electric/electronic thermostats by disconnecting input sensors and

stimulating operation with compatible signal generator.

B. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. 1. Start, test, and adjust control systems. 2. Demonstrate compliance with requirements, including calibration and testing, and control

sequences.



3. Adjust, calibrate and fine tune circuits and equipment to achieve sequence of operation

specified.

C. Verify DDC as follows: 1. Verify software including automatic restart, control sequences, scheduling, reset controls,

and occupied/unoccupied cycles. 2. Verify operation of operator workstation. 3. Verify local control units including self-diagnostics.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain control systems and components. 1. Train Owner’s maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and

stopping, troubleshooting, servicing and maintaining equipment and schedules. 2. Provide operator training on data display, alarm and status descriptors, requesting data,

executing commands, calibrating and adjusting devices, resetting default values and requesting logs. Include a minimum of 10 hours’ dedicated instructor time on-site.

3. Review data in maintenance manuals. 4. Review data in maintenance manuals. 5. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days’ advance notice.

3.4 ON-SITE ASSISTANCE

A. Occupancy Adjustments: Within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide up to three Project site visits, when requested by Owner, to adjust and calibrate components and to assist Owner’s personnel in making program changes and in adjusting sensors and controls to suit actual conditions.

3.5 TRAINING

A. Provide a minimum of 20 hours of on-site or classroom training throughout the contract period for personnel designated by the Owner. Each session shall be a minimum of four hours in length and must be coordinated with the building Owner. Train the designated staff of Owners Representative and Owner to enable them to: 1. Proficiently operate the system. 2. Understand control system architecture and configuration. 3. Understand DDC system components. 4. Understand system operation, including DDC system control and optimizing routines

(algorithms). 5. Operate the workstation and peripherals. 6. Log on and off the system. 7. Access graphics, point reports, and logs. 8. Adjust and change system set points, time schedules, and holiday schedules. 9. Recognize malfunctions of the system by observation of the printed copy and graphical

visual signals. 10. Understand system drawings, and Operation and Maintenance manual. 11. Understand the job layout and location of control components. 12. Access data from DDC controllers. 13. Operate portable operator’s terminals.



1515 08.29.2016 CHILLED AND HOT WATER PIPING SYSTEMS

SECTION 23 2113

CHILLED AND HOT WATER PIPING SYSTEMS

- GENERAL




A. Codes and standards referred to herein are minimum standards. Where the requirements of the drawings or these specifications exceed those of the codes and standards, the drawings and specifications shall govern.

B. Only those firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of piping products of the types, materials and sizes specified herein, and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five years will be approved.

C. Certify all welders by the ANSI B31.1.0-1967 "Standard Qualification Welding Procedures, Welders and Welding Operators" or by the "Qualification Tests" in Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Make welder performance qualification tests for positions 2G and 5G in strict compliance with the above standards. Certify welders for the type of pipe materials specified herein. Bear all costs incident to procedures and welder qualification tests.

D. Deliver two copies of the qualification test report and certification with each welder's identification number and letter to the Architect before any welding commences. Each weld shall bear the welder's identification mark permanently indented in the weld. No welding shall be done when the ambient temperature is below 0 degrees F.

- PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Pipe sizes 2" and smaller: Type: Black steel pipe. Class: Schedule 40, ASTM B53. Fittings: Standard weight black malleable iron. Joints: Threaded.

B. Pipe sizes 2-1/2" and larger: Type: Black steel pipe. Class: Schedule 40, ASTM A53. Fittings: Schedule 40 steel. Joints: Butt welded.

2.02 FLANGES

A. Provide flanges for connections to valves and equipment for above ground pipe sizes 2-1/2" and larger, as dictated by the equipment or where indicated on the drawings. Flanges shall have a working pressure equal to or greater than the pressure classification of the piping system in which they are installed.

B. Flanges shall be forged steel, raised face, screwed type for pipe sizes 2" and smaller welding-neck type for pipe sizes 2-1/2" and larger, conforming to ANSI B-16.5.

C. Gaskets shall be the asbestos-free, compressed fiber ring type for use between raised face flanges. Gaskets shall be minimum 1/16" thick. Apply a non-stick lubricant coating to both sides of the gasket before installation.

D. All flanges shall be mated with properly sized bolts, nuts and washers. All-thread bolts or rods are not acceptable.



- EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Where copper tubing crosses any ferrous metal piping or materials maintain a separation sufficient to prevent di-electric corrosion.

B. Cut pipe accurately to field measurements and work into place without springing or forcing. Ream cut ends free of burrs and cutting spatter. Carefully install pipes plumb and parallel to building lines, columns and walls unless indicated otherwise on the drawings and make allowances for expansion and contraction. Make changes in direction with fittings, pipe bending will not be acceptable. Protect open ends of pipes with temporary covers to prevent the ingress of trash and debris. Clean all dirt and cutting spatter from the inside of pipes before joining the next pipe section. Do not use pieces where a full pipe length will fit.

C. Install piping so as to preserve access to valves, air vents and other equipment. Provide offsets, whether indicated on the drawings or not, to allow for the ceiling heights indicated, to provide the maximum head room possible in mechanical rooms and to avoid conflicts with other trades. Coordinate with the plumbing, fire protection, ductwork and electrical work before installing any piping.

D. Cut threaded pipe square and thread with cleaned out tapered threads, reamed after cutting. Make all threaded connections with pipe thread compound or Teflon tape applied to the male threads, and make up so that no more than two threads will be exposed.

E. Do not run piping through any transformer vault, electric switchgear room, electrical closet, telephone room, elevator machine room or electronic equipment space except to connect to equipment serving only that room. In any event do not locate piping with respect to switchboards, panelboards, power panels, motor control centers or transformers within 42" of the front or rear nor within 36" of the sides of such equipment. These clearances apply vertically from the floor to the overhead structure.

3.02 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT

A. Provide unions in pipe sizes 2" and smaller and flanges in pipe sizes 2-1/2" and larger to connect piping to equipment. Install the unions and flanges so that the equipment may be removed for servicing.

B. Install shut-off valves on the supply and return piping connections to equipment and provide drain valves installed so that the equipment can be completely drained.

C. Provide di-electric unions at all locations where ferrous and non-ferrous or other dissimilar metals join.

3.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Install thermometer wells installed in vertical piping at a 45 degree angle and in horizontal piping shall be installed vertically. Fill thermometer wells with oil. Install thermometers and pressure gauges so that they can be conveniently read.

B. Install brass unions between each gauge cock and pressure gauge.

3.04 TESTING

A. Leak-test every piping system at 1.5 times its operating pressure but in no case less than 125 psi. Isolate vital equipment or temporarily remove from the piping prior to testing if the pipe test pressure is above the equipment rating.

B. Test the piping systems and repair as required before the installation of any insulation or pipe covering, or before the application of paint on piping installed outdoors.

C. The test medium shall be water under hydrostatic pressure with all air removed from the system. If there is a danger of freezing temperatures leak testing may be performed using compressed air, in which case all joints and welds shall be inspected for leaks using soapy water. Hold test pressure for a minimum of 4 hours with no drop in pressure except that due to variations in temperature. Hold compressed air tests for 8 hours.



D. The Architect reserves the right to observe all pressure testing and he shall be notified at least

48 hours in advance of any test.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean every piping system to remove all trash, debris, mill scale, cutting oil and welding spatter before being placed into operation and in any event before any control device or other sensitive items of equipment are installed. If such debris has collected at valves, disassemble the valves and clean prior to closing them for the first time.

B. After 24 hours of operation and thereafter as necessary blow down all strainers until a clean discharge is produced. Prior to turning the systems over to the Owner remove all start-up strainers, install all final strainers and clean all strainer baskets.


......


1515 08.29.2016 PIPING ACCESSORIES

SECTION 23 2120

PIPING ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS


QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Codes and standards referred to herein are minimum standards. Where the requirements of the drawings or these specifications exceed those of the codes and standards, the drawings and specifications shall govern.

B. Only those firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of piping accessories of the types, materials and sizes specified herein and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five years will be acceptable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS

A. Automatic air vents shall be 3/4" size and they shall be designed to automatically eliminate air from the piping system without allowing the passage of water.

B. Automatic air vents shall have a semi-steel or cast iron body, bolted cover, stainless steel float, valve head and seat and 3/8" or 1/2" discharge tapping. The float, valve and seat shall be accessible for service.

C. Automatic air vents manufactured by Spirax-Sarco, APCO, Hoffman or Taco will be acceptable.

MANUAL AIR VENTS

A. Manual air vents shall be made of brass or stainless steel and shall have a quarter turn lever handle.

COMBINATION PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE TEST PLUGS

A. Test plugs shall have a working pressure equal to or greater than the working pressure of the piping system in which they are installed.

B. Test plugs shall be 1/2" in size, designed to be screwed into a 1/2" NPT pipe tee or threadolet. Test plugs shall be constructed of brass with two self-closing Nordel plug cores. Each test plug shall have a knurled brass cap with "O" ring gasket, attached to the plug with a brass chain.

C. Combination pressure/temperature test plugs manufactured by Peterson Equipment Co. ("Pete's Plug") or Universal Lancaster Corp. will be acceptable.

UNIONS

A. Unions shall be of the same material as the pipe in which they are installed and shall have a temperature and pressure rating equal to or greater than the working temperature and pressure of the piping system.

DIELECTRIC ADAPTERS

A. Dielectric adapters shall be the union type for pipe sizes 2" and less and flanged type for pipe sizes 2-1/2" and larger. Flange type adapters shall be complete with gasket and two isolators at each bolt. Dielectric adapters shall limit the galvanic corrosion to a maximum of 1% of the short circuit current.

B. Dielectric adapters manufactured by Ebco, Crane or Capital will be acceptable.


1515 08.29.2016 PIPING ACCESSORIES

PART 3 - EXECUTION

AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS

A. Provide automatic air vents in accessible locations whether indicated or not, at all high points in the piping system, at the top of each riser, at any local high points in the piping system subject to the trapping of air pockets and at other locations indicated on the drawings.

B. Pipe the discharge, using copper tubing, to the nearest floor drain, janitor sink, plumbing vent stack (indirect connection) or to the outside where it shall terminate 18" above grade. Discharges from multiple air vents may be grouped together but the discharge piping shall be increased one pipe size.

C. Provide a ball or gate valve at the inlet of each automatic air vent.

MANUAL AIR VENTS

A. Provide manual air vents on the vent connection of each coil and at other locations indicated on the drawings.

COMBINATION PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE TEST PLUGS

A. Install combination pressure/temperature test plugs on the inlet and outlet piping of each cooling and heating coil and at other locations indicated on the drawings.

B. Furnish to the Owner a complete pressure and temperature test kit comprising pressure gauge, temperature gauge, gauge fittings and probes and any other equipment necessary to take accurate temperature and pressure readings from the test plugs, all assembled in a carrying case.

UNIONS

A. Install unions at all locations in piping 2" and smaller necessary for the removal or maintenance of valves, control devices, steam traps, tube bundles, coils and other equipment.

DIELECTRIC ADAPTERS

A. Install dielectric adapters between any ferrous and copper connection or between any dissimilar metals subject to galvanic action including pipe connections and connections between piping and equipment.

B. Install dielectric adapters in locations accessible for service.



1515 08.29.2016 REFRIGERANT AND CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING SYSTEMS

SECTION 23 2300

REFRIGERANT AND CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING SYSTEMS

- GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS


QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Codes and regulations referred to are minimum standards. Where the requirements of the specifications or drawings exceed those of the codes and regulations the drawings and specifications shall govern.

B. Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of piping products of the types, materials and sizes required and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years will be acceptable.

C. Size refrigerant piping by the compressor manufacturer. Submit a piping diagram showing valves, pipe sizes, line resistance, elbows and traps, approved by the compressor manufacturer.

D. Refrigerant piping accessories manufactured by Sporlan or approved equal will be acceptable.

- PRODUCTS

REFRIGERANT PIPING

A. Type: Copper tubing of the pipe sizes listed.

B. Class: Type "ACR" hard drawn copper tubing, ASTM B-88.

C. Fittings: Sweat type wrought copper.

D. Joints: Socket brazed with 15% silver, phosphor-copper brazing alloy.

CONDENSATE DRAIN LINES

A. Located above ceilings and in finished areas: Type: Copper tubing. Class: Type "L" hard drawn. Fittings: Sweat type wrought copper. Joints: Socket brazed using 95-5 tin-antimony.

B. Located in mechanical rooms: Type: Galvanized steel pipe. Class: Schedule 40, ASTM A53. Fittings: Standard weight galvanized steel. Joints: Threaded.

PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Upper attachments: Support piping in concrete construction with expansion anchors. Where hangers are required between structural concrete beams provide side beam

brackets attached to the upper 1/3 of the beam, and all auxiliary steel for the installation of the pipe hangers.

Support piping in steel construction with adjustable beam clamps and tie rods. Where hangers are required between structural steel beams or joists provide a welded

steel bracket sized to meet the constraints of the structural installation.

B. Intermediate attachments: Supports for horizontal piping shall be all threaded carbon steel of the following sizes:



Pipe Size Hanger Rod Diameter 2" and smaller 3/8" 2-1/2" 1/2" 3" and larger 1/2"

C. Pipe attachments: Hangers for horizontal piping shall be clevis type with vertical adjustment. Hangers shall

be selected to bear on the outside of the insulation. Hangers for multiple horizontal piping systems shall be trapeze type. Provide an insulation protection shield between all hangers and the pipe insulation.

D. Wall supports: Where piping is run adjacent to masonry walls or steel columns welded steel brackets may

be used. The bracket shall be either bolted to the wall with a back plate or welded to a mounting flange then attached to the wall or column.

Provide an insulation shield between the supports and the pipe insulation.

E. Spacing of hangers and supports for horizontal copper refrigerant piping shall be as follows:

Maximum Spacing of Nominal Pipe Size Supports 3/4" and smaller 5'-0" 1" 6'-0" 1-1/2" 8'-0" 2" 8'-0" 3" and larger 10'-0"

F. Spacing of hangers and supports for horizontal PVC condensate drain piping shall be as follows: Maximum Spacing of Nominal Pipe Size Supports 2" and smaller 5'-0" 2-1/2" and larger 8'-0"

FILTER DRIER

A. For systems 5 tons and over provide a replaceable molded porous-core filter drier in the suction line near the compressor but upstream of the service valves. For systems less than 5 tons provide a sealed type filter drier.

B. For heat pump systems, provide a reversible flow filter drier with replaceable core and check valves at either end.

MOISTURE AND LIQUID INDICATOR

A. Provide a moisture and liquid indicator with reversible color change for wet and dry conditions and large full view sight glass with cap in the liquid line ahead of each expansion valve.

CONDENSATE PUMPS

A. Provide where indicated on the drawings a pump designed to lift and remove condensate. The pump shall be suitable for use with equipment rated up to 5 tons.

B. Each pump shall contain a reservoir, float switch, electric pump and LED signal light. Unit shall be mounted on the side of the air handling unit or mounted on the wall or floor adjacent to the air handling unit. The LED signal light shall give visual verification that the unit is operating correctly.

C. Provide an electrical interlock to shut down the air handling unit fan in the event of the condensate pump malfunctioning.

D. Condensate pumps shall be manufactured by Hartzell Pumps or approved equal.



- EXECUTION

GENERAL PIPING SYSTEM

A. Where nonferrous metallic pipe such as copper tubing crosses any ferrous piping material maintain a separation between pipes.

B. Cut pipe accurately to field measurements and ream free of burrs and cutting splatter. Carefully align and grade pipe and work accurately into place without springing or forcing. Fittings shall be used for changes in direction. Protect open pipe ends to prevent trash being placed in the lines during installation. Clean all dirt and cutting debris from pipes before making the next joint.

C. Isolate copper tubing from steel supports, anchors and metal studs to prevent electrolysis. Isolate piping with neoprene pads, sheet lead strips or plastic inserts. Duct tape shall not be used to isolate piping.

D. Install piping so as to preserve access to all valves, air vents and other equipment and to provide the maximum headroom possible.

E. Make joints in refrigerant lines with nitrogen gas in the pipes to prevent oxidation. Install all piping parallel to or at right angles to building walls, columns and partitions.

F. Clean inside of refrigerant lines with methyl alcohol before assembly and tape thereafter to prevent foreign matter from entering and being sealed in. Cut pipe ends square and deburr. Clean pipe and fitting with #00 steel wool before joining. Make joints without burning.

TESTS

A. Test refrigerant piping at a pressure of 445 psig by introducing nitrogen throughout the refrigerant circuit. Use electronic pressure gauges capable of measuring pressure to a tenth of a pound, and test for at least one hour. Bubble test joints with soap lather, clean joints of soap and leak-test with an electronic type leak detector. Pump out the system, place the entire circuit under 27 inches of vacuum and allow to stand sealed off for a period of one hour without any loss of vacuum

B. Submit an affidavit signed by the Contractor's representative stating they have witnessed and approved the dehydration test.


......


1515 08.29.2016 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES

SECTION 23 3100

DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. The requirements of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and Section 23 00 00, Mechanical General, apply to all work specified in this section.

PRESSURE CLASSIFICATIONS

A. SMACNA standards referred to herein shall mean standards published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association, Inc. Ductwork shall be constructed in complete conformance with the latest edition of the SMACNA manual.

B. Pressure classifications shall be as follows: Ductwork from variable volume air handling units to variable volume terminal units:

medium pressure, 4" wg static pressure, Class A seals. Ductwork downstream of variable volume terminal units to diffusers, miscellaneous

ductwork and toilet exhaust ductwork: low pressure, 2" wg static pressure, Class A seals. Ductwork for constant volume air handling systems: low pressure, 2" wg static pressure,

Class A seals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

LOW PRESSURE DUCT CONSTRUCTION

A. Construct low pressure rectangular ductwork from lock forming quality galvanized steel sheets having a galvanized coating of 1-1/4 ounces total for both sides per one square foot of sheet. Metal stamp shall be visible after installation. Inside of unlined ducts visible through sidewall grilles and registers shall be paint flat black.

B. Construction methods, metal gauges and stiffening shall be in accordance with the latest edition of SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible. All duct dimensions indicated are clear inside dimensions.

C. As an alternative to the duct fabrication methods specified above, the low pressure rectangular ductwork may be manufactured by Ductmate Industries, Inc. or approved equal. When using this system construction of the ductwork such as gauge, reinforcing etc. shall be as indicated in the installation manual provided by the manufacturer. The system shall consist of 20 gauge galvanized steel roll-formed angles, corner pieces, 20 gauge galvanized steel cleats, extruded butyl gasket material between mating flanges and 16 gauge galvanized steel corner clips. On duct sizes greater than 48" longest side, 3/8" x 1" nuts and bolts shall be substituted for corner clips at all four corners. Installation of this system shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed assembly and installation instructions.

D. Low pressure round ductwork up to and including 12" in diameter shall be longitudinal lock seam construction. Round ducts larger than 12" shall be spiral lock seam construction.

Girth joints in ducts up to and including 12" shall be beaded-crimp type and each joint shall be fastened with sheet metal screws, equally spaced, not more than 8" on centers and with a minimum of three screws in each joint. The beaded-crimp joint shall provide at least a 1" lap to accommodate the sheet metal screws.

Girth joints in ducts larger than 12" shall be the beaded sleeve type. The beaded sleeve joints shall be fabricated of the same gauge galvanized sheet steel as the duct and shall be a minimum of 4" in length. Each section of duct shall be fastened to the sleeve with sheet metal screws, equally spaced, not more than 8" on centers and with a minimum of three screws in each joint.

E. Conduct duct leakage tests and have them witnessed by the Test and Balance agent in accordance with Section 23 05 93, Test and Balance. Tests shall be the orifice plate type and leakage shall not exceed 5% of the design CFM of the system.



F. Install turning vanes in all 90 degree square or rectangular elbows and at other locations shown. The turning vanes shall be large size, double thickness airfoil style with vanes secured to the runners and runners secured to the duct. Elbows in round ductwork and other radiused elbows shall have an inside radius equal to the depth of the duct.

MEDIUM PRESSURE DUCT CONSTRUCTION

A. Medium pressure round ductwork shall be the preformed spiral seam type. Transverse joints shall be the slip type and connection to flexible round ducts shall be made with draw bands. Assembly and installation shall be as recommended in the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible. Seal all duct joints with the recommended liquid or mastic sealants.

B. Make all branch takeoffs in medium pressure ductwork with pre-manufactured conical, bell mouth or conical lateral fittings. Shop fabricated or saddle taps will not be acceptable.

C. The medium pressure ductwork system has been sized according to a particular static regain duct design program. Should any ductwork layout be submitted different from that which is designed, submit an approved computerized static regain duct design prior to the approval of any duct layout.

D. Conduct duct leakage tests and have them witnessed by the Test and Balance agent in accordance with Section 23 05 93, Test and Balance. Tests shall be the orifice plate type and leakage shall not exceed 5% of the design CFM of the system.

E. Preformed medium pressure ductwork and fittings manufactured by United Sheet Metal, Semco, Silver Sheet Enterprises or Dixie Sheet Metal will be acceptable.

EXPOSED ROUND DUCT CONSTRUCTION

A. All round ductwork outside of the mechanical rooms exposed to view shall conform to the following specifications. Refer to the detail on the drawings for additional fabrication and installation notes.

B. Ductwork shall be double wall spiral formed round insulated sheet metal duct, fabricated from galvanized, mill finish "Paint-Grip" steel. The internal insulation shall be nominal one inch thick having a minimum thermal conductivity value (K) of 0.27 BTU/hr/sq. ft./degree F. Metal gauges for ductwork and fittings shall conform to SMACNA SM-95 (medium pressure) standards to reduce the possibility of damage during shipment and installation.

C. The entire ductwork installation shall be painted after installation, covered under another section of these specifications. Finishes of all ductwork and fittings furnished herein shall be suitable for painting, without peeling, flaking or "bleed-through".

D. Fabricate hangers from center-hung one inch wide minimum 16 gauge straps maximum 10 feet on center. Fabricate hanger rods from 1/4" diameter metal rod. Neatly install take-off boots with pop rivets, and seal the joint with a bead of elastomeric seal. All take-offs shall be centered on the duct center-line unless noted otherwise. Where the internally insulated round duct connects to conventional sheet metal ductwork cover the exposed end of the internal insulation with a sheet metal ring flashing.

E. The entire finished exposed ductwork installation shall present a neat, uniform appearance with no visible blemishes, nicks or dents. Neatly install all connections, couplings, branch take-offs and grille collars without visible gaps. Workmanship shall be of the highest standard and shall be subject to the scrutiny of the Architect. Remove and replace with new materials any exposed ductwork installation that, in the opinion of the Architect, does not conform to this high standard.

F. Exposed sheet metal ductwork and fittings manufactured by United Sheet Metal, Dixie Sheet Metal or Semco will be acceptable.

EXPOSED RECTANGULAR DUCT CONSTRUCTION

A. On all rectangular ductwork outside of the mechanical rooms exposed to view, give special attention to its appearance including the duct construction, reinforcing and hanging. Insulate exposed ductwork on the inside only and fabricate from "Paint-Grip" steel sheets or similarly etched galvanized sheet metal ready to receive painting under another section of these



specifications. Finishes of all ductwork and fittings furnished herein shall be suitable for painting without peeling, flaking or "bleed-through".

B. Ductwork shall not be stiffened by cross-breaking, but stiffening shall be accomplished by transverse and/or lateral ribbing. Hangers shall be neatly installed. Pop rivets are prohibited, cadmium-plated sheet metal screws shall be used.

C. The entire finished exposed ductwork installation shall present a neat, uniform appearance with no visible blemishes, nicks or dents. Neatly install all duct joints and grille collars without visible gaps. Workmanship shall be of the highest standard and shall be subject to the scrutiny of the Architect. Remove and replace with new materials any exposed ductwork installation that, in the opinion of the Architect, does not conform to this high standard.

DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Duct hangers and supports shall be in accordance with the Hangers and Supports section of the referenced SMACNA standards, except:

Do not space hangers over 8'-0" on centers. For rectangular ductwork with the longest dimensions up through 60", hangers shall be the

galvanized steel strap type. For rectangular ductwork with the longest dimension 61" and larger, hangers shall be trapeze type constructed of galvanized steel angles with round hanger rods. Sizes for strap hangers and trapeze angles and rods shall be based on duct size as scheduled in the SMACNA standard for strap hangers and for trapeze hangers.

For round ductwork, hangers shall be galvanized steel strap hangers. Sizes and number of strap hangers shall be based on the duct size as scheduled in the SMACNA standard.

B. Support duct in existing concrete construction with cadmium plated, malleable iron, expansion anchors, Grinnell Fig. 117 or equal. Powder actuated fasteners shall not be used in lightweight aggregate concrete without written approval of the Architect.

C. Support ductwork in steel construction with side beam brackets bolted or welded to the side of the beam, Grinnell Fig. 202, or equal.

D. Support duct in wood construction with side beam bracket, Grinnell Fig. 202 or equal, or with hanger flange, Grinnell Fig 128R or equal using lag screws.

E. Lower attachment fasteners which penetrate the duct shall be sheet metal screws, blind rivets or self tapping metal screws. Cover all ductwork penetrations with mastic to provide air tight closures.

MANUAL DAMPERS AND DAMPER HARDWARE

A. Construct splitter dampers of not less than 20 gauge galvanized steel sheet. The length of the damper blade shall be the same as the width of the widest duct section at the split, but in no case shall blade length be less than 12".

B. Volume control dampers shall be low leakage single blade butterfly type in ducts up to and including 18" x 12" size. For ducts larger than 18" x 12", in either or both dimensions, the dampers shall be the low leakage multi-blade type. All dampers in outdoor air intake ductwork shall shut tightly and have vinyl blade edge and end seals.

Single blade butterfly dampers shall be constructed of not less than 16 gauge galvanized steel mounted in a steel frame. For rectangular dampers, the top and bottom edges of the blade shall be crimped to stiffen the blade. Dampers shall be provided with an extended rod to permit installation of a quadrant or actuator on the exterior of the insulation.

Multi-blade dampers and shall be the opposed blade type, constructed of not less than 16 gauge galvanized steel blades mounted in a galvanized steel channel frame. Blade spacing shall not exceed 6" and the top and bottom edges of the blade shall be crimped to stiffen the blades. Damper blades shall be interconnected by rods and linkages to provide simultaneous operation of all blades. Dampers shall be provided with an extended rod to permit installation of a quadrant or actuator on the exterior of the insulation.

Dampers manufactured by Ruskin, Cesco, Carnes, Nailor or Louvers and Dampers, Inc. will be acceptable.

C. Hardware for manual dampers:



When neither dimension of the splitter damper exceeds 18" the damper shall be provided with a ball joint bracket attached to the outside of the duct. The bracket shall have a set screw for securing the damper rod in position. The damper operating rod shall be not less than 1/4" diameter steel rod and shall be secured to the damper blade with a clip. When either dimension of the damper exceeds 18" the damper shall be provided with two ball joint brackets and rods. The rods shall be located at quarter points on the damper.

Duct mounted regulators with operating handle and locking quadrant shall be provided on all manual volume control dampers.

Damper hardware manufactured by Ventfabrics, Young Regulator or Duro-Dyne will be acceptable.

FLEXIBLE ROUND DUCTWORK

A. Flexible round ductwork shall be Class 1, UL 181 air duct with an aluminized mylar or polyester inner liner laminated to a corrosion resistant steel wire helix. Aluminum helix is not acceptable.

B. A 1" thick, one pound density fiberglass insulation and vinyl outer jacket shall cover the wire helix.

C. Low pressure flexible ductwork shall be designed for pressures up to 4" wg. The maximum allowable length of low pressure flexible ductwork shall be 5'-0" and shall be limited to short run-outs connected to round neck ceiling supply diffusers. Provide a spin-in fitting with integral volume damper at all flexible run-out connections.

D. Flexible ductwork manufactured by Genflex, Flexmaster, Atco or Royal will be acceptable.

FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTORS

A. Flexible duct connectors shall be non-combustible, installed at the intake and discharge connections of all belt-driven equipment and where shown. Material shall be glass fabric double coated with neoprene (30oz. per square yard minimum). Provide duct supports on each side of flexible connectors.

B. Flexible duct connectors manufactured by Vent Fabrics, Duro-Dyne or Young Regulator will be acceptable.

FIRE DAMPERS

A. Provide fire dampers at all penetrations through fire rated walls, floors and partitions. Fire dampers shall comply with the requirements of UL 555, 6th Edition, and damper type shall be as follows:

Type ‘A’ with blades and blade channels in the air stream for use behind sidewall registers and grilles.

Type ‘B’ with blades out of the air stream for rectangular ductwork passing completely through walls, floors and partitions.

Type ‘C’ with blades and blade channels out of the air stream for round and flat oval ductwork passing completely through walls, floors and partitions.

B. Fire dampers shall be rated as either static (for use in HVAC systems that are automatically shut down in the event of a fire), or dynamic (for use in HVAC systems that are operational in the event of a fire), as appropriate for the application.

C. Fire dampers manufactured by Prefco, Nailor, Greenheck, Ruskin or Air Balance will be acceptable.

SMOKE DAMPERS AND FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS:

A. Smoke dampers and fire/smoke dampers shall comply with the requirements of UL 555S, 4th Edition. Dampers shall close when a signal from the smoke detection system is received and fire/smoke dampers shall also close when excessive heat is detected.

B. Dampers shall be rated as either smoke dampers (for use in HVAC systems where ducts pass through smoke barriers), or fire/smoke dampers (for use in HVAC systems where a fire damper and smoke damper are required at a single location), as appropriate for the application.



C. Dampers shall meet UL 555S Class 2A for low leakage rating. Smoke dampers and fire/smoke dampers shall be of non-heat degradable design with friction free metal-to-metal seals incorporating integral resettable and reusable UL listed electric-ambient temperature link and UL listed releasing device and mechanical lock assembly.

D. Damper frames shall be 16 gauge galvanized steel formed channel with pre-punched slotted mounting holes a minimum of 7" on center. Blades shall be 16 gauge galvanized steel, maximum width of 8". Blades 36" and longer and driven blades shall be furnished with reinforcing cones.

E. The link shall be activated by either an electric signal from the fire alarm circuit or by the associated air system's smoke detector to permit the damper to close and lock independently of the motor actuator position. Upon cessation of the alarm condition or normalization of the air system’s smoke detector, the link shall return to its reset position enabling the damper to be fully recycled automatically by the actuator.

F. Electric motor actuators shall be 24 volt, UL listed and furnished with all necessary mounting hardware from the factory for installation on the outside of the ductwork. The actuators shall be power open/spring closed operation. Dampers shall be furnished with connecting shafts and linkages utilizing not more than one actuator for single and multiple sections assembly sized up to 23 sq. ft. Power for motors shall come from the nearest 24 volt fire alarm circuit.

G. Smoke dampers and fire/smoke dampers manufactured by Prefco, Nailor, Greenheck, Ruskin or Air Balance will be acceptable.

MOTOR OPERATED DAMPERS

A. Motor operated dampers shall have blades not over 6" wide and 36" long with heavy galvanized steel channel frames and non-corrosive sleeve type bearings, and shall be furnished by the Building Automation System manufacturer except for dampers furnished with air handling equipment. All dampers opening to the outside shall have air tight blade edge and end seals.

B. Dampers specified for modulating service shall be opposed-blade type, while dampers for two position service shall be parallel-blade type, with double-thickness extruded aluminum blades with an approximate airflow cross-section. Linkage shall be outside of airstream and blades shall seat against continuous resilient seals. When fully closed, leakage shall not exceed 6 CFM per square foot, as measured inside damper frame at a pressure differential of 2 inches wg.

C. Damper actuators shall position the controlled device positively and accurately. Actuators shall provide not less than 7.5 inch-pounds torque per square foot of damper area to the damper drive shaft.

D. Damper actuators shall be of the push-pull or rotary type for modulating, 3-point floating, or 2-position control as required by the application. The actuators shall use overload-proof synchronous motors or electric motors with end switches to de-energize the motor at the end of the stroke limits. Control voltage shall be 24 VAC, 0-20 VDC or 4-20 mA as required.

ROOF MOUNTED INTAKE AND RELIEF HOODS

A. Non-powered roof intake and relief hoods shall be constructed of heavy-duty aluminum sheets with rolled interlocking seams for reinforcement. The hoods shall have galvanized steel internal support members for rigidity.

B. The hoods shall be furnished with a 1/2" x 1/2" galvanized birdscreen and a five-inch high heavy gauge aluminum base.

C. Roof hoods manufactured by Greenheck, Penn or ILG will be acceptable.

DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A. Provide a duct access door at each fire damper at the upstream and downstream sides of each duct mounted coil, at each air measuring station and elsewhere as indicated on the drawings. Access doors shall be a minimum 18" x 18", duct size allowing, and shall have a continuous hinge on one side with latch on the other side. Access door shall be designed for five times the



pressure of the duct in which it is mounted. Access doors shall be of sufficient size to provide access to the dampers for resetting or replacing thermal links.

B. Do not locate duct access doors above inaccessible ceilings unless approved by the Architect prior to installation.

ROOF CURBS

A. Provide a factory fabricated roof curb at every ductwork penetration of the roof.

B. Factory fabricated roof curbs shall be constructed of aluminum and shall be 12" high. Curbs shall be canted, insulated type and shall be field-flashed to make watertight. Extend field flashing up the sides of the curb with washers and sheet metal screws placed not more than 12" on centers but in no case using less than two screws per side. Curbs shall have 2" thick rigid insulation with a smoke developed rating not to exceed 25 and a flame spread rating not to exceed 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Wood nailer strips shall be provided. Coordinate the installation of the roof curbs with the roof installer.

C. Roof curbs manufactured by Pate, Thy Curb or Roof Products and Systems will be acceptable.

ACOUSTICAL TURNING VANES

A. Provide where indicated on the drawings acoustical turning vanes in the ductwork. The vanes shall be air-foil shaped, double thickness, constructed of perforated 22 gauge galvanized steel with glass fiber absorptive acoustical filler. Provide for each installation mounting rails with retaining slots.

B. Acoustical turning vanes manufactured by Dynasonics, Gale Corporation or equal will be acceptable.

ROOF EQUIPMENT SUPPORT RAILS

A. Factory fabricated roof equipment support rails shall be constructed of 18 gauge galvanized steel and shall be 12" high. Support rails shall be canted and shall be field-flashed to make watertight. Field-flashing shall extend up the sides of the support rails with washers and sheet metal screws placed not more than 12" on centers. Wood nailer strips shall be provided. Coordinate the installation of the roof equipment support rails with the roof installer and with the manufacturer of the equipment to be supported.

B. Provide equipment support rails under each roof mounted condensing unit, minimum two rails per unit.

C. Roof equipment support rails manufactured by Pate, Thy Curb or Roof Products and Systems will be acceptable.

PIPE CURB ASSEMBLIES

A. Factory fabricated pipe curb assemblies shall be 18 gauge galvanized steel, unitized construction with integral base plate and all seams welded. Provide 1-1/2" thick, 3 lb density rigid fiberglass insulation on the interior surfaces and a wood nailer strip around the top perimeter. Counter flashing cap shall be acrylic clad ABS thermoplastic with graduated step PVC boots and adjustable stainless steel clamps. Boot size option shall be selected to suit the refrigerant pipe sizes applicable to the project. Pipe curbs shall have integral cants.

B. Provide pipe curb assemblies at each refrigerant piping penetration of the roof.

C. Pipe curb assemblies manufactured by Pate, Thy Curb or Roof Products and Systems will be acceptable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

INSTALLATION

A. Install all ductwork and accessories as shown and in accordance with applicable SMACNA standards.

B. Seal all joints in ductwork with a fire retardant sealant. Tape is not acceptable.



C. Provide sound proof construction for duct penetrations through openings between the ductwork and following construction:

Equipment room walls. Floors, except in shafts.

D. Sound proofing installation shall include: Fill openings with fibrous glass blanket for full depth of penetration. Caulk each side of opening with non-hardening, non-aging caulking compound equal to

Johns-Manville "Duxeal".


......

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 23 3315 - 1 1515 08.29.2016 LOUVERS

SECTION 23 3315

LOUVERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 COORDINATION

A. The louvers of one manufacturer have been used as the basis of design. Any modifications to ductwork or building structure that result from the use of any other manufacturer's louvers shall be coordinated with all trades. Any modifications shall be performed without incurring any additional cost to the Contract.

1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:

A. Louvers manufactured by Greenheck, Cesco, Dowco, Arrow, Carnes or Ruskin will be acceptable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 FIXED LOUVERS

A. Fixed louvers shall be 4 inch deep, all-welded construction and fabricated from 0.125 inch thick extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T5. Blades shall be slanted at approximately 45 degrees and shall feature an integral rain water baffle. If required due to blade length, concealed intermediate blade supports shall be provided. Louver frame shall be channel style unless otherwise indicated. Louvers shall be fitted with a 1/2" mesh 16 gauge aluminum bird screen in a detachable aluminum frame.

B. Finish shall be Duranar Kynar 500 in a color selected by the Architect. The pressure drop and water entrainment performance ratings shall be certified by the manufacturer in accordance with the AMCA Certified Ratings Program and each louver shall bear the AMCA Seal.

C. Performance ratings shall be as follows:

1. Maximum static pressure drop at 600 FPM velocity through free area - 0.07" wg.

2. Zero water penetration at up to 700 FPM velocity through the free area.

3. Minimum free area in relation to gross overall area - 47%.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Louvers shall be installed as indicated and in conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Field verify the actual dimensions of the openings for louvers and bring any discrepancies from that shown on the drawings to the attention of the Architect prior to ordering the louvers.



1515 08.29.2016 TERMINAL UNITS

SECTION 23 3600

TERMINAL UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS


COORDINATION

A. The variable air volume units of one manufacturer have been used as the basis of design. Any modifications to controls, ductwork or structural supports that result from the use of equipment by any other manufacturer shall be coordinated with all other trades. Any modifications shall be performed without incurring additional cost to the Contract.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Terminal units manufactured by Titus, Trane, E.H. Price, Environmental Technologies, Johnson Controls, Carnes, Nailor Industries or Carrier will be acceptable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

VARIABLE AIR VOLUME (VAV) UNITS

A. Variable air volume units shall consist of a primary air damper, attenuator section and noise shroud, damper actuator, pressure independent primary air controller and any other items required to perform as specified. The only field connections required shall be the thermostat wiring and the duct connections.

B. The maximum acceptable NC at the VAV unit discharge shall be 30 at 1.0" wg. inlet static pressure. The maximum acceptable radiated NC shall be 30 at 1.0" wg. inlet static pressure. The maximum static pressure drop through the unit shall be 0.75" wg. The maximum inlet velocity shall be 2400 FPM. The NC levels shall be rated assuming an NC30 total ceiling and room effect and 5 feet of lined ductwork downstream of the unit.

C. Unit housing shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheets, reinforced to eliminate excessive flexing. Housing shall be internally lined with 1" thick acoustical fibrous glass liner conforming to NFPA requirements for Class 1 air ducts. Service to internal parts shall be through an access door in the bottom of the housing.

D. Controls shall be factory mounted direct digital controls, Lonworks protocol and shall be compatible with the room temperature sensors provided under Section 23 09 23, Building Automation System.

E. A pressure independent primary air volume controller shall control the supply air quantity to within 5% of the air volume required to satisfy the thermostat, regardless of changes in system static pressure. Each box shall then be factory set for maximum and minimum CFM.

F. Units shall be provided with a method of field adjusting minimum and maximum air flows.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

INSTALLATION

A. Terminal units shall be installed in complete conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. The manufacturer's designated representative shall be present for testing of the units who shall verify in writing that the units are installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

ADJUSTMENT

A. The VAV units shall be tested and adjusted to provide the scheduled capacities in accordance with Section 23 05 93, Test and Balance.


......


1515 08.29.2016 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS

SECTION 23 3700

GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS


COORDINATION

A. The grilles, registers and diffusers of one manufacturer have been used as the basis of design. Any modifications to the ductwork or building structure that result from the use of any other manufacturer's units shall be coordinated with all trades, especially architecture. Any modifications shall be performed without incurring any additional cost to the Contract.

B. The color of all grilles, registers and diffusers shall match the surface in which they are installed or shall be as selected by the Architect. Additionally, ceiling mounted devices shall be selected to be compatible with the ceiling types in which they are installed.

SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Provide air flow capacities, pressure drop and noise criteria data for grilles, registers and diffusers.

B. Provide dimensional data including frame styles for each unit provided.

C. Indicate type of finish and provide color chart for Architect's selection of colors as indicated.

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Grilles, registers and diffusers manufactured by Krueger, Carnes, Titus, Metal*Aire, Nailor, Hart & Cooley or E.H. Price will be acceptable.

B. All devices selected shall meet or exceed all the requirements of these contract documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

SUPPLY REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS

A. Ceiling supply diffusers shall be square or round neck as indicated, extruded aluminum square louver face type with mitered corners. Louver cores shall be removable and held in place with spring loaded pins. Stamped aluminum diffusers will not be acceptable. Provide a steel opposed blade damper for balancing. Radial ‘bow tie’ dampers will not be acceptable. Provide a factory applied enamel finish of a color as selected by the Architect.

B. Linear supply diffusers shall be extruded aluminum with equally spaced slots of the indicated width, concealed mounting and baked enamel finish of color approved by the Architect. Integral pattern adjuster bars shall be adjustable to discharge air from horizontal to vertical. The pattern adjuster bars shall also act as air balancing devices by the ability to move the pattern adjuster bars closer to, or further from, the discharge slot openings. Number of slots, approximate length, and total air flow shall be as indicated on the drawings. Each component of adjacent sections of linear diffusers shall be in perfect alignment and flush with adjacent ceiling material. Diffusers shall be provided with alignment strips for insertion in extruded alignment slots in each section. Junction between supply plenum and ends and sides of diffuser shall be sealed airtight. Supply plenum shall be constructed of 24 gauge galvanized steel, substantially reinforced and supported independently of the ceiling. Plenum shall be lined with 3/4" thick insulation.

RETURN AND EXHAUST REGISTERS AND GRILLES

A. Ceiling return and exhaust air registers and grilles shall be square neck, aluminum 1/2" x 1/2" x 1/2" egg-crate grid. Registers shall have a face operable steel opposed blade volume damper for balancing, or shall be panel only as indicated. Lay-in registers and grilles shall have a U-channel frame. Finish shall be factory applied enamel of a color as selected by the Architect.


1515 08.29.2016 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS

B. Linear return diffuser shall be identical in all respects to linear supply diffusers except pattern adjuster shall be omitted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

INSTALLATION

A. Grilles, registers and diffusers shall be installed as indicated and in conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Coordinate the actual units to be provided with all trades. Ceiling mounted units shall match the ceiling type provided to ensure proper installation.

B. Grille, register and diffuser locations shall be coordinated with the architectural reflected ceiling plans.

ADJUSTMENT

A. The registers and diffusers shall be balanced and adjusted in accordance with Section 23 05 93, Test and Balance, to provide the scheduled capacities.



1515 08.29.2016 CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNIT

SECTION 23 7313

MODULAR AIR HANDLING UNIT

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS


DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Modular air handling unit shall be provided to meet the minimum capacities scheduled and shall meet all constraints of construction. Air handling unit ratings shall be certified in accordance with ARI Standard 430-78.

B. The air handling unit of one manufacturer has been used as the basis of design. Any modification to the piping, controls, electric connections or structural supports that result from the use of equipment by other manufacturers shall be coordinated with all other trades. This coordination shall occur before delivery of this equipment from the manufacturer. Any modifications shall be performed without incurring any additional costs to the Contract.

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Modular air handling unit manufactured by Carrier Aero 39M, Trane Performance Climate Changer, York Solution or McQuay Vision Plus will be acceptable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

DESCRIPTION

A. Air handling unit shall be the modular, variable volume, horizontal draw through type as scheduled with discharge air configurations as indicated. The unit shall be completely factory assembled and shall include chilled water cooling coil, hot water preheat module, fan module with electric motor and associated drive equipment, 18” access modules, filter/mixing module and casing as specified herein.

B. Each module casing shall be insulated double wall construction with 2" thick, R-13 foam insulation sandwiched between two solid panels. Insulation shall have flame spread and smoke developed rating of 25 and 50, respectively.

C. The drain pan shall be double wall stainless steel construction with the manufacturer's standard insulation between the outer and inner walls and the insulation thickness shall not be less than 1/2 inch. The drain pan shall extend under the entire coil section and shall have a threaded outlet on one side of the unit.

D. Provide wall panels and access doors that deflect no more than L/240 when subjected to 1.5 times design static pressure up to a maximum of +8 inches w.g. in positive pressure sections and -8 inches w.g. in negative pressure sections. Each module in the variable volume air handling unit shall be designed for medium pressure operation, less than 6" wg. static pressure.

ACCESS DOORS AND PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Each filter module, access module and fan module shall be provided with a hinged access door to gain access to the internal components. Each access door shall be insulated double wall construction with 2" thick, R-13 foam insulation sandwiched between the outer panel and inner panel.

B. All access doors shall be located on the same side of each air handling unit and shall be left side or right side access as indicated on the drawings.

C. Piping connections to each coil module shall be same end connections and shall be located on the same side of each air handling unit as the access doors.

SUPPLY FAN

A. Provide double width double inlet (DWDI) housed fans or single width single inlet (SWSI) plenum fans as shown on equipment schedule and drawings.



B. Airfoil fans shall comply with AMCA standard 99-2408-69 and 99-2401-82. Provide an AMCA

Seal on airfoil fans. Airfoil fan performance shall be based on tests made in accordance with AMCA standards 210 and comply with the requirements of the AMCA certified ratings program for air performance.

C. Provide fan with true airfoil blades unless otherwise scheduled.

D. Provide fan with the following accessories: Fan inlet screens in the inlets of fan housing. (REQUIRED on SWSI plenum fans) Access door inlet screen (on AHU casing). OSHA-compliant belt guard enclosing the fan motor and drive.

E. Provide airfoil fan with blades formed of extruded aluminum, as scheduled. Bent sheet metal blades are not acceptable.

F. Provide fan with polished steel shafts with first critical shaft speed at least 125% of the maximum operating speed for the fan pressure class. Shaft shall have an anti-corrosion coating.

G. Provide fan motor on an adjustable base to allow adjustable and consistent belt tension. Fan and motor shall be mounted on a welded structural steel fan isolation base.

H. Mount the fan and motor assembly on a common adjustable base. This common base shall attach to vibration isolators, which mount to structural support channels. These channels shall span the AHU floor and mount directly to the AHU frame.

I. Provide vibration isolation springs with 1” or 2” static deflection, as scheduled.

J. Connect DWDI fans to the unit casing or bulkheads with canvas flexible connection.

K. Provide horizontal thrust restraints between AHU casing and fan housings with end discharge. This requirement applies to the following cases:

SWSI fans operating at greater than 3” of total static pressure. DWDI airfoil fans operating at greater than 6” of total static pressure.

COILS

A. All air handling unit coil ratings shall be certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410-87 and shall have a maximum face velocity and air friction loss as shown on the drawings. Air friction losses shall be for a 100% wet coil.

B. Coil modules shall be insulated double wall construction galvanized steel to match other unit component modules. The coil casing shall be fabricated of stainless steel.

C. Chilled water coil shall be extended surface fin and tube type, constructed of copper tubes with aluminum fins. Coil shall be drainable, installed with a slope of 1/8" per foot of tube length toward the piping connection end. Coil shall be factory tested at 250 psig air pressure under water with all leaks repaired the factory. Coil shall have threaded connections for sizes 2" and smaller and flanged connections for sizes 2-1/2" and larger.

D. Hot water preheat coil shall be extended surface fin and tube type constructed of copper tubes with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to the tubes. Coil shall be factory tested at 250 psig air pressure under water with all leaks repaired at the factory. Coil shall have threaded connections for sizes 2" and smaller and flanged connections for sizes 2-1/2" and larger.

E. All water coils shall be provided with a 1/8" threaded vent tap at the high point of the coil, at the top of the piping connections. Factory shall furnish plug.

AIR FILTRATION

A. The air handling unit shall be provided with a combination filter/mixing module as indicated. Combination filter/mixing module shall have the inlet arrangements indicated.

B. Filter module shall be insulated double wall construction galvanized steel to match other unit component modules.



C. Filter module shall include supporting racks for the type of filters specified herein. Filters shall

be held in place by spring type fasteners and shall be removable and replaceable without the use of tools.

D. Filters shall be UL Class II replaceable type 4" depth pleated media filters that meet the requirements of ASHRAE 52.2 atmospheric test method, MRV 11 efficiency. Filter media manufactured by Farr, American Air Filter, Continental or Cambridge will be acceptable.

E. Provide a complete initial set of filters in the air handling unit. Provide a second set for installation prior to testing and balancing and project completion. Air handling unit shall not be operated without the specified air filters in place.

F. Provide low leakage dampers in the inlet openings of the filter/mixing module. Dampers shall be opposed blade type with frames not less than formed 13 gauge galvanized steel. Damper blades shall be not less than formed 16 gauge galvanized steel with a maximum blade width of 8 inches. Blade end and edge seals shall be replaceable rubber seals rated for a leakage less than 4 CFM per square foot of damper area at a differential pressure of 1" wg and shall comply with ASHRAE 90.1. Dampers shall be tested in accordance with AMC 500.

AIR FILTER GAUGES

A. Provide an air flow resistance gauge at the air handling unit filter housing with pressure tap connectors and tubing.

B. Gauge shall be dial type, diaphragm actuated differential pressure gauge, 0 to 2" wg. range, with adjustable red signal flag, Dwyer #2002 Magnehelic with two static pressure tips, two #A313 vent valves and 1/4" aluminum tubing or Hays-Republic Model N211 gauge with tips, valves and tubing.

C. Install the static pressure tips a minimum of 13" upstream and downstream of the filters in a zone of minimum turbulence and connect to gauge as recommended by the manufacturer. Locate the gauge 5 ft. above the floor adjacent to the filter access door. Set the signal flags at the recommended filter replacement differential pressure. Instruct the Owner's maintenance personnel in the procedure for zero adjusting the gauges.

VIBRATION ISOLATION

A. For air handling units provided with internal isolation of the fan/motor assembly the entire air handling unit shall be mounted on neoprene acoustical friction pads.

AIR VOLUME CONTROL

A. Variable frequency motor speed controllers shall be as specified in Section 23 0515, Variable Frequency Speed Controllers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

INSTALLATION

A. Air handling unit shall be installed as indicated and in conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The actual unit to be installed shall be coordinated with the building structure and all other trades.

CONDENSATE DRAINS

A. A drain line from the air handling unit drain pan shall be piped full size to the nearest floor drain unless otherwise indicated. A water seal shall be provided in the drain line at the unit outlet as indicated. Drain line shall be installed with a slope of not less than 1/8" per foot down in the direct of flow.

B. Special care shall be taken when selecting vibration isolators and housekeeping pad thickness to ensure sufficient height to the drain pan outlet to allow installation of the water seal, insulation and sufficient slope to drain.



ADJUSTMENT

A. The air handling unit shall be adjusted after installation in accordance with Section 23 0593, Test and Balance, to provide the scheduled capacities.



1515 08.29.2016 DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEMS

SECTION 23 8133

DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Materials and equipment furnished under this specification shall be standard cataloged products of manufacturers regularly engaged in production of such materials or equipment and shall be the manufacturer's latest design that complies with these specifications.

B. Each component shall be factory tested, dehydrated and charged. All equipment capacities shall be certified in accordance with ARI 240 and sound levels shall comply with the requirements of ARI 270 and ARI 350. All components shall be UL listed. Each outdoor condensing unit and indoor fan coil unit shall be factory rated for use together to provide the heating and cooling capacities and operating efficiencies within 5% of that indicated on the drawings.


A. Ductless split systems manufactured by Daikin, Mitsubishi, Johnson Controls, Lennox or Samsung will be acceptable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 OUTDOOR CONDENSING UNITS

A. Outdoor air cooled condensing units shall be completely packaged, factory assembled, electrically operated units consisting of hermetic reciprocating or rotary compressor with crankcase heater, high and low pressure safeties, operating controls, air-cooled condenser coil with direct drive propeller fan, suction and liquid line service valves, service gauge connection port, liquid line accumulator, filter drier and wiring.

B. Each entire condensing unit shall be completely factory charged with the amount of refrigerant and lubricating oil as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Condensing units shall have isolation mountings under the compressor and shall be enclosed in a weatherproof cabinet constructed of galvanized steel, bonderized and coated with a baked-on enamel finish. Condenser coil shall be constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes which have been cleaned, dehydrated and sealed.

D. Motor shall be NEMA rated class F suitable for operation in a refrigerant atmosphere. Provide each motor with thermal overload protection. Provide overload protective devices either integral to motor or controller or mounted in separate enclosure.

E. Operating and safety controls shall include time delay restart, automatic restart on power failure, high pressure and liquid line low pressure switches, start capacitor and relay, compressor motor current and temperature overload protection and outdoor fan failure protection.

2.02 HIGH WALL INDOOR FAN COIL UNITS

A. Indoor fan coil units shall be the high wall mounted type complete with blower, cooling coil, piping connectors, microprocessor control system and remote wall mounted hard wired controller. Unit cabinet shall allow replacement or removal of all items of equipment.

B. Direct drive fan shall have capacity for distributing and conditioning air over evaporator coil to provide cooling allowance not exceeding 10% above or below specified capacities. A user adjustable horizontal and vertical air sweep shall be provided.


1515 08.29.2016 DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEMS

C. Each unit shall consist of a reinforced sheet metal enclosure with baked-on enamel finish and with high impact polystyrene discharge and inlet grilles. Furnish each unit with wall mounting bracket and mounting hardware.

D. Ship coil after dehydration with a holding charge of refrigerant provided by the manufacturer. Evaporator coil shall be constructed of seamless copper or galvanized steel tubes with aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to tubes.

E. Provide evaporator coil with a drip pan of nonferrous material or with steel pan completely waterproofed with a non-hardening type mastic on water side and with thermal insulation to prevent casing condensation.

2.03 FILTER

A. Provide cleanable type air filter 1" thick. Filters shall be Class 2, conforming to the requirements of UL.

B. Filter shall be easily removable for cleaning without use of special tools.

2.04 CONTROLS

A. Furnish microprocessor-based controls for each ductless split system.

B. System controls shall have the following characteristics: Automatic restart after power failure at the same conditions as at failure. Return air temperature sensor and indoor high discharge temperature shutdown. Remote hard-wired controller to enter set points and operating conditions. Dehumidification mode to provide increased latent removal capability by modulating fan

speed and temperature set point. Diagnostics to provide continuous checks of all unit operations with error messages

displayed at the unit and remote controller. Fan speed controls for high, medium and low modes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Ductless split systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.



1515 08.29.2016 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 26 0000

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL

A. Provide complete and functioning electrical systems as required by the Contract Documents.

B. Applicable provisions of this Section apply to all Sections of Division 26, Electrical.

C. Demolition.

1. Unless otherwise noted, remove all electrical materials and equipment from areas indicated for demolition.

2. Remove unused conduit to the extent necessary to accommodate new work and where conduit is visible above the floor line. Unused conduit which is concealed, or which does not interfere with the work, may remain in place. Seal abandoned conduit that remains in place behind walls or in floor slabs. Remove wiring from abandoned conduit.

3. Materials and equipment to be removed, except items specifically listed to be relocated or delivered to the Owner, become the property of the Contractor and must be immediately removed from the project site.

4. Electrical services and controls to items being removed must be disconnected and removed as a requirement of this section.

5. Removal of any equipment must not interfere with existing operations.


A. An acceptable Contractor for the work under this Division must have personnel with experience, training and skill to provide a practical working system. The Contractor may be required to furnish acceptable evidence of having installed not less than three systems of size and type comparable to this project. The systems must have served satisfactorily for not less than 3 years. The superintendent must have had experience in installing not less than three such systems.

1.03 REGULATIONS AND PERMITS

A. Regulations. Work, materials and equipment shall comply with the latest rules and regulations of the following:

1. National Electrical Code (NEC).

2. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC).

3. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).

4. American Disabilities Act (ADA).

5. City of Albany.

6. Georgia Board of Regents.

7. Darton State College.

B. Discrepancies. The drawings and specifications are intended to comply with listed codes, ordinances, regulations and standards. Where discrepancies occur, immediately notify the Architect/Engineer in writing and ask for an interpretation. Should installed materials or workmanship fail to comply, the Contractor is responsible for correcting the improper installation. Additionally, where sizes, capacities, or other such features are required in excess of minimum code or standards requirements, provide those specified or shown.

C. Permits. Obtain and pay for all permits and inspections.

1.04 CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. Intent. The intent of the drawings and specifications is to establish the types of systems and functions, but not to set forth each item essential to the functioning of the system. The drawings and specifications are complementary, and work or materials called for in one and not mentioned in the other shall be provided. Electrical drawings are generally diagrammatic and show approximate location and extent of work. Install the work complete, including minor details necessary to perform the function indicated. In case of doubt as to work intended, or if amplification or clarification is needed, request instructions from the Architect/Engineer.



B. Discrepancies. Review pertinent drawings and adjust the work to conditions shown. Where discrepancies occur between drawings, specifications, and actual field conditions, immediately notify the Architect/Engineer for his interpretation.

C. Outlet and Equipment Locations. Coordinate the actual locations of electrical outlets and equipment with building features and equipment as indicated on architectural, structural, mechanical and plumbing drawings. Review with the Architect/Engineer any proposed changes in outlet or equipment location. Relocation of outlets before installation, of up to 5 feet from the position indicated, may be directed without additional cost. Remove and relocate outlets placed in an unsuitable location, when so requested by the Architect/Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Condition. Provide new products of manufacturers regularly engaged in production of such equipment. Provide the manufacturer’s latest standard design for the type of product specified. The manufacturer of the equipment/product shall have a minimum 5 years’ experience in producing similar product. If requested by the Architect/Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement.

B. NEC and UL. Products shall conform to requirements of the National Electrical Code. Where Underwriters’ Laboratories have set standards, listed products and issued labels, products used must be listed and labeled by UL.

C. Space Limitations. Equipment selected shall conform to the building features and be coordinated with them. Do not provide equipment which will not suit arrangement and space limitations.

D. Enclosure. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure for indoor installation and NEMA 3R for outdoor enclosure, unless noted otherwise. The enclosure shall be suitable for the environment per NEC, NEMA and ANSI standards.

E. Factory Finish. Equipment must be delivered with a hard surface, factory-applied finish so that no additional field painting is required except for touch-up as required.

F. Interrupting Ratings. The electrical system shall be a fully rated system. Series ratings of overcurrent devices is unacceptable.

G. Furnish documentation from equipment manufacturer for the startup and test procedures for all the equipment installed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT

A. Moisture. During construction, protect switchgear, transformers, motors, control equipment, and other items from insulation moisture absorption and metallic component corrosion by appropriate use of strip heaters, lamps or other suitable means. Apply protection immediately upon receiving the products and maintain continually.

B. Cleanliness. Keep products clean by elevating above ground or floor and by using suitable coverings.

C. Damage. Take such precautions as are necessary to protect apparatus and materials from damage. Failure to protect materials is sufficient cause for rejection of the apparatus or material in question.

D. Finish. Protect factory finish from damage during construction operations and until acceptance of the project. Satisfactorily restore any finishes that become stained or damaged.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Cooperation with Other Trades. Cooperation with trades of adjacent, related or affected materials or operations, and with trades performing continuations of this work under subsequent contracts, is considered a part of this work in order to effect timely and accurate placing of work and to bring together, in proper and correct sequence, the work of such trades. Provide other trades, as required, all necessary templates, patterns, setting plans and shop details for the proper installation of the work and for the purpose of coordinating adjacent work.



Electrical power connections for mechanical and plumbing equipment are in this Division unless noted otherwise. Verify electrical characteristics of all equipment with Divisions 21-23 before roughing in the electrical connections.

B. Workmanship. Work must be performed by workmen skilled in their trade. The installation must be complete.

C. Concrete Equipment Pads. Install 3-1/2-inch-thick concrete foundation pads for indoor floor-mounted equipment, except where direct floor mounting is required. Pour pads on roughened floor slabs, sized so that outer edges extend a minimum of 3 inches beyond equipment. Trowel pads smooth and chamfer edges to a 1-inch bevel. Secure equipment to pads as recommended by the manufacturer.

D. Setting of Equipment. Equipment must be leveled and set plumb. Sheet metal enclosures mounted against a wall must be separated from the wall not less than 1/4 inch by means of corrosion-resistant spacers or by 3 inches of air for freestanding units. Use corrosion-resistant bolts, nuts and washers to anchor equipment. In sufficient time to be coordinated with work under other divisions, provide drawings and layout work showing exact size and location of sleeves, openings or inserts for electrical equipment in slabs, walls, partitions and chases.

E. Sealing of Equipment.

1. Voids between sleeves or core-drilled holes and pipe passing through fire-rated assemblies shall be firestopped to meet the requirements of ASTM E 814, in accordance with Section 07 8400, Firestopping. Contractors shall provide proper sizing when providing sleeves or core-drilled holes to accommodate their through-penetrating items.

2. Seal openings into equipment to prevent entrance of animals, birds and insects.

F. Motors.

1. Motors are specified under other sections of Division 26.

2. Electrical work includes the electrical connection of all motors, except those which are wired as a part of equipment.

G. Concealed Work. Conceal all electrical work in walls, floors, chases, under floors, underground and above ceilings except:

1. Where shown or specified to be exposed. Exposed is understood to mean open to view.

2. Where exposure is necessary for the proper function.

3. Where size of materials and equipment preclude concealment.

H. Application. Unless otherwise indicated, power will be utilized as follows:

1. 480 volts, three phase: motors 3/4 horsepower and larger.

2. 120 volts, single phase: motors 1/2 horsepower and smaller.

3. 277 volts, single phase: fluorescent and LED lighting.

4. 120 volts, single phase: convenience outlets.

I. Transformers. Use transformers to change the service to the required utilization voltages.

J. Accessories. All offsets, fittings, expansion joints, anchors and accessories that are required for a complete system shall be provided even if not specifically indicated on the drawings or mentioned in the specifications. Offsets, transitions and changes in direction of conduit, cable trays, raceways and busways shall be made to maintain proper headroom. Provide all necessary pullboxes, fittings, etc., required as a result of these transitions and changes in direction.

K. Sleeves, Cutting and Patching. Provide for the timely placing of sleeves for all raceway, exposed cabling and busway passing through walls, partitions, beams, floors and roof while same are under construction. If holes and sleeves are not properly installed and cutting and patching becomes necessary, it shall be done at no expense to the Owner. Secure permission from the Architect/Engineer before cutting or patching a constructed or existing wall. Where floors or walls are fire rated, penetrations shall be completely sealed using UL-listed materials and procedures sufficient to preserve the fire rating as specified in Section 07 840. Comply with any special requirements of local authorities.



L. Escutcheons. Provide heavy chrome-plated or nickel-plated plates on conduit passing through walls and ceilings in finished areas. Escutcheons shall be B&C No. 10, or approved substitution, chrome-plated steel plates with concealed hinges.

3.03 EQUIPMENT AND DEVICE MARKING

A. Designations. Identify all equipment, devices, feeders, branch circuits and similar items with the same designations as indicated on the contract documents.

B. Nameplates. Externally mark all electrical equipment with nameplates identifying each and the equipment served. Nameplates shall be black laminated rigid phenolic with white core. Nameplate minimum size shall be 1 inch high by 3 inches long with 3/16-inch-high engraved white letters. Supply blank nameplates for spare units and spaces.

C. Nameplate Fasteners. Fasten nameplates to the front of equipment only by means of stainless steel self-taping screws. Stick-ons or adhesives will not be allowed unless the NEMA enclosure rating is compromised, then only epoxy adhesive shall be used to attach nameplates.

D. Nameplate Information. In general, the following information is to be provided for the types of electrical equipment as listed.

1. Switchboards and Motor Control Centers. On the mains identify the piece of equipment, the source and voltage characteristics (i.e., 480/277V 3PH 4W). For each branch circuit protective device, identify the load served.

2. Transformers, Individual Starters, Contactors, Disconnect Switches, Transfer Switches and similar equipment. Identify the device designation, source and load served.

3. Panelboards. Identify the source, panelboard designation and voltage characteristics.

E. Panelboards. Prepare a neatly typed circuit directory behind clear heat-resistant plastic in a metal frame attached to the inside of the door for each panelboard. Identify circuits by equipment served and by room numbers where room numbers exist, based on as-built conditions. Indicate spares and spaces with light, erasable pencil marking. Adhesive mounted directory pocket is not acceptable.

F. Pull, Junction and Outlet Boxes. With 1/2-inch-high lettering, identify conduits connected to pull, junction and outlet boxes with the complete circuit number of the conductors contained therein. Where multiple circuits are contained in a box, identify the circuit conductors with permanent tags which indicate circuit designation.

G. Equipment and Raceways Over 600 Volts. Provide “WARNING - HIGH VOLTAGE - KEEP OUT” signs on all equipment. With 2-inch-high lettering, mark all exposed raceways containing conductors operating in excess of 600 volts every 100 feet with the words “WARNING - HIGH VOLTAGE.”

H. Power Receptacles.

1. Use nameplate or engrave device plate to identify power receptacles with circuit number, voltage and phases, where:

a. The nominal voltage between any pair of contacts is greater than 150 volts.

b. Dedicated receptacles are provided.

2. If nameplates are used, attach to wall directly above device plate.

I. Wall Switches. Provide an engraved switch plate or attach a nameplate to the wall directly above the switch:

1. Where the equipment served is not in sight of the wall switch.

2. Where the wall switch controls dedicated outlets or special equipment.

3.04 TESTING

A. Test Conditions. Place circuits and equipment into service under normal conditions, collectively and separately, as may be necessary to determine satisfactory operation. Perform specified tests in the presence of the Architect/Engineer. Furnish all instruments, wiring, equipment and personnel required for conducting tests. Demonstrate that the equipment operates in accordance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. Special tests on certain items



are specified hereinafter. Where specified that the testing be performed by an independent testing company, an Owner approved NETA certified testing company shall be used.

B. Test Dates. Schedule final acceptance tests sufficiently in advance of the contract date to permit completion of any necessary adjustment or alterations within the number of days allotted for completion of the contract.

C. Retests. Conduct retests as directed by the Architect/Engineer of such time duration as may be necessary to assure proper functioning of adjusted or altered parts or items of equipment. Any resultant delay as a result of such necessary retests does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility under this contract.


......


1515 08.29.2016 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

SECTION 26 0519

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Copper building wire rated 600 V or less.

2. Metal-clad cable, Type MC, rated 600 V or less.

3. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. VFC: Variable-frequency controller.

1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Product Schedule: Indicate type, use, location, and termination locations.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member Company of NETA.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 COPPER BUILDING WIRE

A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn copper current-carrying conductor with an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less.

B. Standards:

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.

2. RoHS compliant.

3. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's "Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide."

C. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B 8 for stranded conductors.

D. Conductor Insulation:

1. Type THHN and Type THWN-2: Comply with UL 83.

2. Type THW and Type THW-2: Comply with NEMA WC-70/ICEA S-95-658 and UL 83.

3. Type UF: Comply with UL 83 and UL 493.

4. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44.

2.02 METAL-CLAD CABLE, TYPE MC

A. Description: A factory assembly of one or more current-carrying insulated conductors in an overall metallic sheath.

B. Standards:

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.

2. Comply with UL 1569.

3. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's "Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide."

C. Circuits:

1. Single circuit.

D. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B 8 for stranded conductors.

E. Ground Conductor: Bare or Insulated.

F. Conductor Insulation:



1. Type TFN/THHN/THWN-2: Comply with UL 83.

2. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44.

G. Armor: Steel, interlocked.

H. Jacket: PVC applied over armor.

2.03 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper; solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Feeders: Copper for feeders smaller than No. 4 AWG; copper or aluminum for feeders No. 4 AWG and larger. Conductors shall be solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

C. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

D. Power-Limited Fire Alarm and Control: Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller.

3.02 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING

METHODS

A. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway or Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway exposed to heat.

B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

D. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

E. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

G. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 26 0533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips that will not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

F. Support cables according to Section 26 0529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

3.04 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.



B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than un-spliced conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.

3.05 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor.

3.06 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 26 0544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

3.07 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping."


A. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each of the following visual and electrical tests:

a. Inspect exposed sections of conductor and cable for physical damage and correct connection according to the single-line diagram.

b. Test bolted connections for high resistance using one of the following:

1) A low-resistance ohmmeter.

2) Calibrated torque wrench.

3) Thermographic survey.

c. Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and indentation.

d. Inspect for correct identification.

e. Inspect cable jacket and condition.

f. Insulation-resistance test on each conductor for ground and adjacent conductors. Apply a potential of 500-V dc for 300-V rated cable and 1000-V dc for 600-V rated cable for a one-minute duration.

g. Continuity test on each conductor and cable.

h. Uniform resistance of parallel conductors.

B. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports to record the following:

1. Procedures used.

2. Results that comply with requirements.

3. Results that do not comply with requirements, and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements.


......


1515 08.29.2016 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 26 0526

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.

1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Plans showing dimensioned locations of grounding features specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:

1. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Certified by NETA.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

2.02 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 6 mm in diameter. 4. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 5. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 41

mm wide and 1.6 mm thick.

C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 6.3 by 100 mm in cross section, with 7.14-mm holes spaced 28 mm apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.

2.03 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

C. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless exothermic-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

D. Beam Clamps: Mechanical type, terminal, ground wire access from four directions, with dual, tin-plated or silicon bronze bolts.

E. Cable-to-Cable Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy.

F. Cable Tray Ground Clamp: Mechanical type, zinc-plated malleable iron.

G. Conduit Hubs: Mechanical type, terminal with threaded hub.



H. Lay-in Lug Connector: Mechanical type, copper rated for direct burial terminal with set screw.

I. Straps: Solid copper, copper lugs. Rated for 600 A.

J. Tower Ground Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal one-piece clamp.

K. U-Bolt Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal listed for direct burial.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Install bus horizontally, on insulated spacers 50 mm minimum from wall, 150 mm above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, and down; connect to horizontal bus.

C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.02 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70:

1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.

C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

C. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.



D. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 18 m apart.


......


1515 08.29.2016 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 26 0529

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Steel slotted support systems. 2. Conduit and cable support devices. 3. Support for conductors in vertical conduit. 4. Structural steel for fabricated supports and restraints. 5. Mounting, anchoring, and attachment components, including powder-actuated fasteners,

mechanical expansion anchors, concrete inserts, clamps, through bolts, toggle bolts, and hanger rods.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, and finishes for the following: a. Slotted support systems, hardware, and accessories. b. Clamps. c. Hangers. d. Anchors. e. Saddles. f. Brackets.

2. Include rated capacities and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For hangers and supports for electrical systems. 1. Include design calculations and details of hangers.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Ductwork, piping, fittings, and supports. 3. Structural members to which hangers and supports will be attached. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:

a. Luminaires. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. f. Projectors.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Preformed steel channels and angles with minimum 13/32-inch-diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c. in at least one surface. 1. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 2. Material for Channel, Fittings, and Accessories: Galvanized steel. 3. Channel Width: Selected for applicable load criteria.

4. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.

B. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.



C. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be made of malleable iron.

D. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened Portland cement

concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units are similar to MSS Type 18 units and comply with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58 units are suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 APPLICATION

A. Comply with the following standards for application and installation requirements of hangers and supports, except where requirements on Drawings or in this Section are stricter: 1. NECA 1. 2. NECA 101 3. NECA 102.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping materials and installation for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.

C. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 26 0533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

D. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceways: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings that are less than those stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.

E. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

3.02 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this article.

B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.

C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:



1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS SP-58, Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27), complying with MSS SP-69.

7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.

D. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid the need for reinforcing bars.

3.03 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 3 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.

B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base as follows: 1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting

drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.04 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Section 09 9113 "Exterior Painting" and

Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting". Insert painting Sections for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.


......


1515 08.29.2016 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 26 0533

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.

2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings.

3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.

4. Surface raceways.

5. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 27 0528 "Pathways for Communications Systems" for conduits, wireways, surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, faceplate adapters, enclosures, cabinets, and handholes serving communications systems.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.


A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.


A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:

1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports.

2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with common supports.

B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

C. Source quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

C. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

D. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.

1. Comply with NEMA RN 1.

2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.

E. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

F. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.

G. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

H. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel or die cast.

b. Type: Setscrew or compression.

2. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.

3. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.



I. Joint Compound for IMC, or GRC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.02 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS

A. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Fiberglass:

1. Comply with NEMA TC 14.

2. Comply with UL 2515 for aboveground raceways.

3. Comply with UL 2420 for belowground raceways.

C. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653.

D. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.

E. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660.

F. Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A.

G. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651A.

H. Coilable HDPE: Preassembled with conductors or cables, and complying with ASTM D 3485.

I. RTRC: Comply with UL 2515A and NEMA TC 14.

J. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

K. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B.

L. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer.

2.03 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. B-line, an Eaton business.

2. Square D.

B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.

1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type unless otherwise indicated.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.04 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways and tele-power poles shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect or Prime coated, ready for field painting, as required by architect. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.

b. Panduit Corp.

c. Wiremold / Legrand.

C. Tele-Power Poles:



1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. b. Panduit Corp.

c. Wiremold / Legrand.

2. Material: Aluminum with clear anodized finish.

3. Fittings and Accessories: Dividers, end caps, covers, cutouts, wiring harnesses, devices, mounting materials, and other fittings shall match and mate with tele-power pole as required for complete system.

2.05 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.

E. Metal Floor Boxes:

1. Material: Cast metal.

2. Type: Fully adjustable.

3. Shape: Rectangular.

4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

F. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb. Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.

G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

H. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.

I. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

J. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.

K. Gangable boxes are prohibited.

L. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

M. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.

3. Key latch to match panelboards.

4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.

5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical or Severe Physical Damage: EMT.



2. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Raceway locations include the following:

a. Areas subject to student access.

b. Mechanical rooms.

3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.

4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

5. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC.

6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.

B. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size.

C. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

3. EMT: Use setscrew or compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20.

D. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

E. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.

F. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 26 0529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

H. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.

I. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-footintervals.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.

3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in all directions.

4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for each specific location.

5. Change from ENT to GRC before rising above floor.



J. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways.

2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure.

K. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

L. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly.

M. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

N. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

O. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

P. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

Q. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.

R. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

S. Surface Raceways:

1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points.

2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.

T. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

U. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations.

2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.

3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

V. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.

W. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet.

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations:

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 100 deg F temperature change.

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change.



c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F temperature change.

d. Attics and unconditioned mezzanines: 135 deg F temperature change.

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits.

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints.

5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

X. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semi-recessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.

2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

Y. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to bottom of box unless otherwise indicated.

Z. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a rain-tight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

AA. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.

BB. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

CC. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

DD. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

EE. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

3.03 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS


3.04 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.



1515 08.29.2016 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 26 0553

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Color and legend requirements for raceways, conductors, and warning labels and signs. 2. Labels. 3. Bands and tubes. 4. Tapes and stencils. 5. Tags. 6. Signs. 7. Cable ties. 8. Paint for identification. 9. Fasteners for labels and signs.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, and finishes for electrical identification products.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For arc-flash hazard study, as required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with ASME A13.1.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Comply with NFPA 70E and Section 26 0574 "Overcurrent Protective Device Arc-Flash Study" requirements for arc-flash warning labels.

F. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

G. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.02 COLOR AND LEGEND REQUIREMENTS

A. Raceways and Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on a white field, unless otherwise required by BOR or College. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system.

B. Color-Coding for Phase- and Voltage-Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service feeder and branch-circuit conductors. 1. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG if authorities

having jurisdiction permit. 2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue.

3. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits: a. Phase A: Brown. b. Phase B: Orange. c. Phase C: Yellow.

4. Color for Neutral: gray.



5. Color for Equipment Grounds: Green. C. Warning Label Colors:

1. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. D. Warning labels and signs shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."

2.03 LABELS

A. Vinyl Wraparound Labels: Preprinted, flexible labels laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing label ends.

B. Snap-around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeves, with diameters sized to suit diameters and that stay in place by gripping action.

C. Self-Adhesive Wraparound Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil-thick, vinyl flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive. 1. Self-Lamination: Clear; UV-, weather- and chemical-resistant; self-laminating, protective

shield over the legend. Labels sized such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend.

2. Marker for Labels: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink recommended by printer manufacturer.

2.04 BANDS AND TUBES

A. Snap-around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeves, 2 inches long, with diameters sized to suit diameters and that stay in place by gripping action.

B. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tubes with machine-printed identification labels, sized to suit diameter and shrunk to fit firmly. Full shrink recovery occurs at a maximum of 200 deg F. Comply with UL 224.

2.05 TAPES AND STENCILS

A. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide; compounded for outdoor use.

C. Tape and Stencil: 4-inch-wide black stripes on 10-inch centers placed diagonally over orange background and is 12 inches wide. Stop stripes at legends.

D. Floor Marking Tape: 2-inch-wide, 5-mil pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with yellow and black stripes and clear vinyl overlay.

E. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1 inch.

2.06 TAGS

A. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.

B. Nonmetallic Preprinted Tags: Polyethylene tags, 0.015 inch thick, color-coded for phase and voltage level, with factory printed permanent designations; punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.

2.07 SIGNS

A. Baked-Enamel Signs: 1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size

required for application. 2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal Size: 7 by 10 inches.

B. Metal-Backed Butyrate Signs:



1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs, with 0.0396-inch galvanized-steel backing, punched and drilled for fasteners, and with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal Size: 10 by 14 inches.

C. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs: 1. Engraved legend. 2. Thickness:

a. For signs up to 20 sq. in., minimum 1/16 inch. b. For signs larger than 20 sq. in., 1/8 inch thick. c. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. d. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners with 1/4-inch grommets in corners for

mounting. e. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable

equipment.

2.08 CABLE TIES

A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, and Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 Deg F according to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding.

B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, and Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 Deg F according to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black.

C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self-extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, and self-locking. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 Deg F according to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi. 3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F. 5. Color: Black.

2.09 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Retain paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Before applying electrical identification products, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification product.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Verify and coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.



C. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

D. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual.

E. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

F. Install signs with approved legend to facilitate proper identification, operation, and maintenance of electrical systems and connected items.

G. System Identification for Raceways and Cables under 600 V: Identification shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place identification of two-color markings in contact, side by side.

1. Secure tight to surface of conductor, cable, or raceway.

H. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.

I. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels, signs, and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor.

J. Vinyl Wraparound Labels: 1. Secure tight to surface of raceway or cable at a location with high visibility and

accessibility. 2. Attach labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl tape, with adhesive

appropriate to the location and substrate.

K. Snap-around Labels: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

L. Self-Adhesive Wraparound Labels: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

M. Snap-around Color-Coding Bands: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

N. Heat-Shrink, Preprinted Tubes: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

O. Marker Tapes: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

P. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

1. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding.

Q. Tape and Stencil: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.

R. Floor Marking Tape: Apply stripes to finished surfaces following manufacturer's written instructions.

S. Metal Tags: 1. Place in a location with high visibility and accessibility. 2. Secure using cable ties rated for the location.

T. Nonmetallic Preprinted Tags: 1. Place in a location with high visibility and accessibility. 2. Secure using cable ties rated for the location.

U. Baked-Enamel Signs: 1. Attach signs that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the

location and substrate. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on

minimum 1-1/2-inch-high sign; where two lines of text are required, use signs minimum 2 inches high.

V. Metal-Backed Butyrate Signs:



1. Attach signs that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on 1-1/2-inch-high sign; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.

W. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs: 1. Attach signs that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the

location and substrate. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on 1-1/2-

inch-high sign; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.

X. Cable Ties: General purpose, for attaching tags, except as listed below: 1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon. 2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Install access doors or panels to provide view of identifying devices.

B. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, pull points, and locations of high visibility. Identify by system and circuit designation.

C. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits, More Than 30 A and 120 V to Ground: Identify with self-adhesive raceway labels.

1. Locate identification at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.

D. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use vinyl wraparound labels self-adhesive wraparound labels snap-around labels snap-around color-coding bands self-adhesive vinyl tape to identify the phase.

1. Locate identification at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.

E. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More Than 600 V: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use nonmetallic preprinted tags colored and marked to indicate phase, and a separate tag with the circuit designation.

F. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use self-adhesive labels with the conductor or cable designation, origin, and destination.

G. Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations, provide heat-shrink preprinted tubes with the conductor designation.

H. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source.

I. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Self-adhesive vinyl tape that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

J. Concealed Raceways and Duct Banks, More Than 600 V, within Buildings: Apply floor marking tape to the following finished surfaces: 1. Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches of a floor that

is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space. 2. Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall. 3. Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts, exposed in

the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.

K. Workspace Indication: Apply floor marking tape or tape and stencil to finished surfaces. Show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall comply with



NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

L. Instructional Signs: Self-adhesive labels, including the color code for grounded and ungrounded conductors.

M. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Baked-enamel warning signs. 1. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 2. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of

equipment, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Power-transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections.

N. Arc Flash Warning Labeling: Self-adhesive labels.

O. Operating Instruction Signs: Self-adhesive labels.

P. Equipment Identification Labels: 1. Indoor Equipment: Baked-enamel signs, Metal-backed butyrate signs, or Laminated

acrylic or melamine plastic sign. 2. Outdoor Equipment: Laminated acrylic or melamine sign or Stenciled legend 4 inches

high. 3. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be in the form of an engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation indicated on Drawings for the

transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. e. Enclosed switches. f. Enclosed circuit breakers. g. Enclosed controllers. h. Variable-speed controllers. i. Push-button stations. j. Contactors. k. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. l. Monitoring and control equipment.



1515 08.29.2016 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

SECTION 26 0923

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY


1. Time switches.

2. Photoelectric switches.

3. Indoor occupancy and vacancy sensors.

4. Switchbox-mounted occupancy sensors.

5. Digital timer light switches.

6. Lighting contactors.

7. Emergency shunt relays.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 26 2726 "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, non-networkable wall-switch occupancy sensors, and manual light switches.



B. Shop Drawings:

1. Show installation details for the following:

a. Occupancy sensors.

b. Vacancy sensors.

2. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring.

3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and elevations, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Suspended ceiling components.

2. Structural members to which equipment will be attached.

3. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:

a. Luminaires.

b. Air outlets and inlets.

c. Speakers.

d. Sprinklers.

e. Access panels.

f. Control modules.

B. Field quality-control reports.

C. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranties.



1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of lighting control device to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.

2. Program Software Backup: On manufacturer's website. Provide names, versions, and website addresses for locations of installed software.

3. Device address list.

4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace lighting control devices that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Faulty operation of lighting control software.

b. Faulty operation of lighting control devices.

2. Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 TIME SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Cooper Industries, Inc.

2. Intermatic, Inc.

3. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.

B. Electronic Time Switches: Solid state, programmable, with alphanumeric display; complying with UL 917.

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 and marked for intended location and application.

2. Contact Configuration: as required based on manufacturer’s recommendations.

3. Contact Rating: 20-A ballast load, 120-/240-V ac.

4. Programs: 8 channels; each channel is individually programmable with two on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule, allowing different set points for each day of the week.

5. Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay as substitute for on-off function of a program on selected channels.

6. Astronomic Time: Selected channels.

7. Automatic daylight savings time changeover.

8. Battery Backup: Not less than seven days reserve, to maintain schedules and time clock.

2.02 INDOOR OCCUPANCYAND VACANCY SENSORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:


2. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc.

3. Intermatic, Inc.




5. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.

6. Philips Lighting Controls.

7. WattStopper; a Legrand® Group brand.

B. General Requirements for Sensors:

1. Wall or Ceiling-mounted, as indicated, solid-state indoor occupancy and vacancy sensors.

2. Dual technology, unless specifically noted otherwise.

3. Separate power pack.

4. Hardwired connection to switch; and BAS and existing and new lighting control system.

5. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

6. Operation:

a. Occupancy Sensor: Unless otherwise indicated, for multiple occupancy areas, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

b. Vacancy Sensor: Unless otherwise indicated, for all single occupancy areas, lights are manually turned on and sensor turns lights off when the room is unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

7. Sensor Output: Sensor is powered from the power pack.

8. Power: Line voltage.

9. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast or LED load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70.

10. Mounting:

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.

b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical enclosure.

c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door.

11. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal operation of sensor.

12. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure.

13. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; turn lights off when selected lighting level is present.

C. PIR Type: Wall or Ceiling mounted, as indicated; detect occupants in coverage area by their heat and movement.

1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch-minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in..

2. Detection Coverage (Room, Ceiling Mounted): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling.

3. Detection Coverage (Corridor, Ceiling Mounted): Detect occupancy within 90 feet when mounted on a 10-foot-high ceiling.

4. Detection Coverage (Room, Wall Mounted): Detect occupancy anywhere within a 180-degree pattern centered on the sensor over an area of 2000 square feet when mounted 48 inches above finished floor.



D. Ultrasonic Type: Wall or Ceiling mounted, as indicated; detect occupants in coverage area through pattern changes of reflected ultrasonic energy.

1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s.

2. Detection Coverage (Small Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 600 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling.

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling.

4. Detection Coverage (Large Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 2000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling.

5. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy anywhere within 90 feet when mounted on a 10-foot-high ceiling in a corridor not wider than 14 feet.


E. Dual-Technology Type: Wall or Ceiling mounted, as indicated; detect occupants in coverage area using PIR and ultrasonic detection methods. The particular technology or combination of technologies that control on-off functions is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit.

1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.

2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch-minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s.

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling.


2.03 SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS



2. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc.

3. Intermatic, Inc.


5. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.

6. Philips Lighting Controls.

7. Square D.


B. General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor with manual on-off switch, suitable for mounting in a single gang switchbox, with provisions for connection to BAS using hardwired connection.

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. Occupancy Sensor Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and turn lights off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.



3. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F.

4. Switch Rating: Not less than 800-VA ballast or LED load at 120 V, 1200-VA ballast or LED load at 277 V, and 800-W incandescent.

C. Wall-Switch Sensor:

1. Standard Range: 180-degree field of view, field adjustable from 180 to 40 degrees; with a minimum coverage area of 2100 sq. ft.

2. Sensing Technology: Dual technology - PIR and ultrasonic.

3. Switch Type: SP, manual "on," automatic "off."

4. Capable of controlling load in three-way application.

5. Voltage: Match the circuit voltage.

6. Ambient-Light Override: Concealed, field-adjustable, light-level sensor from 10 to 150 fc. The switch prevents the lights from turning on when the light level is higher than the set point of the sensor.

7. Concealed, field-adjustable, "off" time-delay selector at up to 30 minutes.

8. Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry detects and memorizes usage patterns of the space and helps eliminate false "off" switching.

9. Color: as specified by architect or user.

10. Faceplate: Color matched to switch.

2.04 DIGITAL TIMER LIGHT SWITCH



2. Intermatic, Inc.


B. Description: Combination digital timer and conventional switch lighting control unit. Switchbox-mounted, backlit LCD display, with selectable time interval in 20 minute increments.

1. Rated 960 W at 120-V ac for tungsten lighting, 10 A at 120-V ac or 10 amps at 277-V ac for ballast or LED, and 1/4 horsepower at 120-V ac.

2. Integral relay for connection to BAS.

3. Voltage: Match the circuit voltage.

4. Color: color as specified by architect or as selected by owner.

5. Faceplate: Color matched to switch.

2.05 LIGHTING CONTACTORS


1. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation.

2. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; a business of Emerson Network Power.

3. Eaton.

4. General Electric Company.

5. Square D.

B. Description: Electrically operated and mechanically held, combination-type lighting contactors with fusible switch, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.



1. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served, including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or less THD of normal load current).

2. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the point of installation.

3. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250.

4. Provide with control and pilot devices as scheduled, matching the NEMA type specified for the enclosure.

2.06 EMERGENCY SHUNT RELAY


1. Lighting Control and Design.


B. Description: NC, electrically held relay, arranged for wiring in parallel with manual or automatic switching contacts; complying with UL 924.

1. Coil Rating: 120 or 277 V, as required.

2.07 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 26 0519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 26 0519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 26 0519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine lighting control devices before installation. Reject lighting control devices that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

B. Examine walls and ceilings for suitable conditions where lighting control devices will be installed.


3.02 SENSOR INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies.

C. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90-percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.

3.03 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION


B. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads to eliminate structure-borne vibration unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration isolators.



3.04 WIRING INSTALLATION


B. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 26 0519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size is 1/2 inch.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

E. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

3.05 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors.

2. Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each sensor.

B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate lighting control devices and perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.07 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting lighting control devices to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set time delay to suit Owner's operations.

2. For daylighting controls, adjust set points and dead-band controls to suit Owner's operations.

3.08 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Technical Support: Beginning at Substantial Completion, service agreement shall include software support for two years.

B. Upgrade Service: At Substantial Completion, update software to latest version. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system and new or revised licenses for using software.



1. Upgrade Notice: At least 30 days to allow Owner to schedule and access the system and to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

3.09 DEMONSTRATION

A. Coordinate demonstration of products specified in this Section with demonstration requirements for low-voltage, programmable lighting control systems specified in Section 26 0943.16 "Addressable-Luminaire Lighting Controls" and Section 26 0943.23 "Relay-Based Lighting Controls."

B. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices.


J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 26 2200 - 1 1515 08.29.2016 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

SECTION 26 2200

LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Distribution, dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1500 kVA.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type and size of transformer.

2. Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.



A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Source quality-control reports.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by NETA.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS


1. Eaton.

2. General Electric Company.

3. SIEMENS Industry, Inc.; Energy Management Division.

4. Square D; by Schneider Electric.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type from single source from single manufacturer.

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 26 2200 - 2 1515 08.29.2016 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 2.02 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger: Comply with NEMA TP 1 energy-efficiency levels as verified by testing according to NEMA TP 2.

D. Cores: Electrical grade, non-aging silicon steel with high permeability and low hysteresis losses.

E. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.

1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type.

2. Coil Material: Aluminum or Copper.

F. Encapsulation: Transformers smaller than 30 kVA shall have core and coils completely resin encapsulated.

G. Shipping Restraints: Paint or otherwise color code bolts, wedges, blocks, and other restraints that are to be removed after installation and before energizing. Use fluorescent colors that are easily identifiable inside the transformer enclosure.

2.03 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

A. Comply with NFPA 70, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.

B. Cores: One leg per phase.

C. Enclosure: Totally enclosed, non-ventilated.

1. NEMA 250, Type 2: Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound to seal out moisture and air.

2. KVA Ratings: Based on convection cooling only and not relying on auxiliary fans.

D. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.

1. Finish Color: Gray.

E. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity.

F. Insulation Class, Smaller than 30 kVA: 185 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 115-deg C rise above 40-deg C ambient temperature.

G. Insulation Class, 30 kVA and Larger: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 115-deg C rise above 40-deg C ambient temperature.

H. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets.

I. Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Maximum sound levels when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91, as follows:

1. 9 kVA and Less: 40 dBA.

2. 30 to 50 kVA: 45 dBA.

3. 51 to 150 kVA: 50 dBA.

2.04 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each distribution transformer, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.01 and IEEE C57.12.91.

1. Resistance measurements of all windings at the rated voltage connections and at all tap connections.

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 26 2200 - 3 1515 08.29.2016 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

2. Ratio tests at the rated voltage connections and at all tap connections.

3. Phase relation and polarity tests at the rated voltage connections.

4. No load losses, and excitation current and rated voltage at the rated voltage connections.

5. Impedance and load losses at rated current and rated frequency at the rated voltage connections.

6. Applied and induced tensile tests.

7. Regulation and efficiency at rated load and voltage.

8. Insulation Resistance Tests:

a. High-voltage to ground.

b. Low-voltage to ground.

c. High-voltage to low-voltage.

9. Temperature tests.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for each transformer.

B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed.

D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Section 26 0526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer.

E. Environment: Enclosures shall be rated for the environment in which they are located. Covers for NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosures shall not cause accessibility problems.

F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall-mounted transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer manufacturer.

1. Coordinate installation of wall-mounted and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer provided.

B. Install transformers level and plumb on a concrete base with vibration-dampening supports. Locate transformers away from corners and not parallel to adjacent wall surface.

C. Construct concrete bases according to Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and anchor floor-mounted transformers according to manufacturer's written instructions and requirements in Section 26 0529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

1. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.

D. Secure transformer to concrete base according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Secure covers to enclosure and tighten all bolts to manufacturer-recommended torques to reduce noise generation.

F. Remove shipping bolts, blocking, and wedges.

J-284 DARTON STUDENT SERVICES II 26 2200 - 4 1515 08.29.2016 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 3.03 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Section 26 0526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Section 26 0519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

D. Provide flexible connections at all conduit and conductor terminations and supports to eliminate sound and vibration transmission to the building structure.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS for dry-type, air-cooled, low-voltage transformers. Certify compliance with test parameters.

D. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.

E. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.

3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals. Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 5 percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap settings as test results.

B. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.



1515 08.29.2016 PANELBOARDS

SECTION 26 2416

PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY


1. Distribution panelboards.

2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. ATS: Acceptance testing specification.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. GFEP: Ground-fault equipment protection.

D. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

E. SPD: Surge protective device.

F. VPR: Voltage protection rating.


A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard.

1. Include materials, switching and overcurrent protective devices, SPDs, accessories, and components indicated.

2. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details.

2. Show tabulations of installed devices with nameplates, conductor termination sizes, equipment features, and ratings.

3. Detail enclosure types including mounting and anchorage, environmental protection, knockouts, corner treatments, covers and doors, gaskets, hinges, and locks.

4. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.

5. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.

6. Include evidence of NRTL listing for SPD as installed in panelboard.

7. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.

8. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

9. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations.

10. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Include an Internet link for electronic access to downloadable PDF of the coordination curves.


A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.



B. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01 7823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments.

1.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.

2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and GFEP Types: Two spares for each panelboard.

3. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

4. Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: ISO 9001 or 9002 certified.


A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NECA 407.

1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F to plus 104 deg F.

b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.

2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.

C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect and Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner’s written permission.

3. Comply with NFPA 70E.



1.11 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace panelboards that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Panelboard Warranty Period: 36 months from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace SPD that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. SPD Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PANELBOARDS COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. Enclosures: Surface-mounted, dead-front cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

2. Height: 84 inches maximum.

3. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. Trims shall cover all live parts and shall have no exposed hardware.

4. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor.

5. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.

6. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: Steel and galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Same finish as panels and trim.

F. Incoming Mains:

1. Location: Top or Bottom, as scheduled.

2. Main Breaker: Main lug interiors up to 400 amperes shall be field convertible to main breaker.

G. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

a. Plating shall run entire length of bus.

b. Bus shall be fully rated the entire length.

2. Interiors shall be factory assembled into a unit. Replacing switching and protective devices shall not disturb adjacent units or require removing the main bus connectors.

3. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box.



4. Full-Sized Neutral: Equipped with full-capacity bonding strap for service entrance applications. Mount electrically isolated from enclosure. Do not mount neutral bus in gutter.

5. Split Bus: Vertical buses divided into individual vertical sections.

H. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

2. Terminations shall allow use of 75 deg C rated conductors without derating.

3. Size: Lugs suitable for indicated conductor sizes, with additional gutter space, if required, for larger conductors.

4. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type, with a lug on the neutral bar for each pole in the panelboard.

5. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type, with a lug on the bar for each pole in the panelboard.

6. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.

7. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.

8. Gutter-Tap Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material and with matching insulating covers. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.

I. Future Devices: Panelboards or load centers shall have mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

1. Percentage of Future Space Capacity: Fifteen percent.

J. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. Assembly listed by an NRTL for 100 percent interrupting capacity.

1. Panelboards and overcurrent protective devices rated 240 V or less shall have short-circuit ratings as shown on Drawings, but not less than 10,000 A rms symmetrical.

2. Panelboards and overcurrent protective devices rated above 240 V and less than 600 V shall have short-circuit ratings as shown on Drawings, but not less than 14,000 A rms symmetrical.


A. Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of indicated panelboards, complying with UL 1449 SPD Type 2.

2.03 POWER PANELBOARDS


1. Eaton.

2. General Electric Company; GE Energy Management - Electrical Distribution.



B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, distribution type.

C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.

D. Mains: Circuit breaker or Lugs only, as scheduled.



E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breakers: Bolt-on circuit breakers or Plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal.

F. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, mechanically held, general-purpose controller, with same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard.

1. Internal Control-Power Source: Control-power transformer, with fused primary and secondary terminals, connected to main bus ahead of contactor connection.

2.04 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS


1. Eaton.




B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only, as scheduled.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

E. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, electrically held, general-purpose controller, with same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard.

1. Internal Control-Power Source: Control-power transformer, with fused primary and secondary terminals, connected to main bus ahead of contactor connection.

F. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

G. Doors: Door-in-door construction with concealed hinges; secured with multipoint latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. Outer door shall permit full access to the panel interior. Inner door shall permit access to breaker operating handles and labeling, but current carrying terminals and bus shall remain concealed.

2.05 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES


1. Eaton.




B. MCCB: Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers:

a. Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads.

b. Instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.

c. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers:

a. RMS sensing.

b. Field-replaceable rating plug or electronic trip.



c. Digital display of settings, trip targets, and indicated metering displays.

d. Multi-button keypad to access programmable functions and monitored data.

e. Ten-event, trip-history log. Each trip event shall be recorded with type, phase, and magnitude of fault that caused the trip.

f. Integral test jack for connection to portable test set or laptop computer.

g. Field-Adjustable Settings:

1) Instantaneous trip.

2) Long- and short-time pickup levels.

3) Long and short time adjustments.

4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and double-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).

6. Subfeed Circuit Breakers: Vertically mounted.

7. MCCB Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.

b. Breaker handle indicates tripped status.

c. UL listed for reverse connection without restrictive line or load ratings.

d. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials.

e. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and HID lighting circuits.

f. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in on or off position.

g. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position.

2.06 IDENTIFICATION

A. Panelboard Label: Manufacturer's name and trademark, voltage, amperage, number of phases, and number of poles shall be located on the interior of the panelboard door.

B. Breaker Labels: Faceplate shall list current rating, UL and IEC certification standards, and AIC rating.

C. Circuit Directory: Computer-generated circuit directory mounted inside panelboard door with transparent plastic protective cover.

1. Circuit directory shall identify specific purpose with detail sufficient to distinguish it from all other circuits.

2.07 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify actual conditions with field measurements prior to ordering panelboards to verify that equipment fits in allocated space in, and complies with minimum required clearances specified in NFPA 70.

B. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NECA 407.

C. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged, rusted, or have been subjected to water saturation.



D. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Comply with NECA 1.

C. Install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407.

D. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install panelboards on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s). Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

2. Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the panelboard.

E. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

F. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box.

G. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

2. Tighten bolted connections and circuit breaker connections using calibrated torque wrench or torque screwdriver per manufacturer's written instructions.

H. Make grounding connections and bond neutral for services and separately derived systems to ground. Make connections to grounding electrodes, separate grounds for isolated ground bars, and connections to separate ground bars.

I. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

J. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.

K. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; install warning signs complying with requirements in Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Handwritten directories are not acceptable. Install directory inside panelboard door.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in power panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

E. Install warning signs complying with requirements in Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" identifying source of remote circuit.


A. Perform tests and inspections.



1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test for low-voltage air circuit breakers and low-voltage surge arrestors stated in NETA ATS, Paragraph 7.6 Circuit Breakers and Paragraph 7.19.1 Surge Arrestors, Low-Voltage. Do not perform optional tests. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results, with comparisons of the two scans. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Section 26 0573 "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Prior to energizing panelboards, apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.



1515 08.29.2016 WIRING DEVICES

SECTION 26 2726

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY


1. Straight-blade convenience receptacles.

2. GFCI receptacles.

3. Cord and plug sets.

4. Toggle switches.

5. Wall-box dimmers.

6. Wall plates.

7. Floor service outlets.

8. Poke-through assemblies.

9. Service poles.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Abbreviations of Manufacturers' Names:

1. Cooper: Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc.

2. Hubbell: Hubbell Incorporated: Wiring Devices-Kellems.

3. Leviton: Leviton Mfg. Company, Inc.

4. Pass & Seymour: Pass& Seymour/Legrand.

B. BAS: Building automation system.

C. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

D. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

E. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

F. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

G. SPD: Surge protective device.

H. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.



B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.


A. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing-label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.



1. Service/Power Poles: One for every 10, but no fewer than one.

2. Floor Service-Outlet Assemblies: One for every 10, but no fewer than one.

3. Poke-Through, Fire-Rated Closure Plugs: One for every five floor service outlets installed, but no fewer than two.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions:

1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire.

2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.

D. Devices for Owner-Furnished Equipment:

1. Receptacles: Match plug configurations.

2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.

E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer.

2.02 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Duplex Convenience Receptacles: 125 V, 20 A; comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Eaton (Arrow Hart).

b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.

c. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.

d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).

2.03 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description:

1. 125 V, 20 A, straight blade, feed-through type.

2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596.

3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer provides proper GFCI protection.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles:






2.04 CORD AND PLUG SETS

A. Description:



1. Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected.

2. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with green-insulated grounding conductor and ampacity of at least 130 percent of the equipment rating.

3. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection.

2.05 TOGGLE SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:






C. Pilot-Light Switches: 120/277 V, 20 A.

1. Description: Single pole, with LED-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is off.

D. Key-Operated Switches: 120/277 V, 20 A.

1. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.

E. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary-Contact, Center-off Switches: 120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors.

F. Key-Operated, Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary-Contact, Center-off Switches: 120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.

2.06 WALL-BOX DIMMERS

A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.

B. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with UL 1472.

C. LED Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with LED lamps; trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness.

2.07 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.

2. Material for Finished Spaces: Steel with white baked enamel, suitable for field painting.

3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic.

4. Material for Damp Locations: Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in wet and damp locations.

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.

2.08 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Type: Modular, flush-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.

B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.



C. Service Plate: Round, die-cast aluminum with satin finish.

D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Data Communication Outlet: Blank cover with bushed cable opening.

2.09 POKE-THROUGH ASSEMBLIES


1. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.

2. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).


4. Wiremold / Legrand.

B. Description:

1. Factory-fabricated and -wired assembly of below-floor junction box with multichanneled, through-floor raceway/firestop unit and detachable matching floor service-outlet assembly.

2. Comply with UL 514 scrub water exclusion requirements.

3. Service-Outlet Assembly: Flush type with two simplex receptacles and space for two RJ-45 jacks complying with requirements in Section 27 1513 "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling."

4. Size: Selected to fit nominal 3-inch cored holes in floor and matched to floor thickness.

5. Fire Rating: Unit is listed and labeled for fire rating of floor-ceiling assembly.

6. Closure Plug: Arranged to close unused 3-inch cored openings and reestablish fire rating of floor.

7. Wiring Raceways and Compartments: For a minimum of four No. 12 AWG conductors and a minimum of four, four-pair cables that comply with requirements in Section 27 1513 "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling."

2.10 SERVICE POLES

A. Description:

1. Factory-assembled and -wired units to extend power and voice and data communication from distribution wiring concealed in ceiling to devices or outlets in pole near floor.

2. Poles: Nominal 2.5-inch-square cross section, with height adequate to extend from floor to at least 6 inches above ceiling, and with separate channels for power wiring and voice and data communication cabling.

3. Mounting: Ceiling trim flange with concealed bracing arranged for positive connection to ceiling supports; with pole foot and carpet pad attachment.

4. Finishes: Satin-anodized aluminum.

5. Wiring: Sized for minimum of five No. 12 AWG power and ground conductors and a minimum of four, four-pair, Category 3 or Category 5 voice and data communication cables.

6. Power Receptacles: Two duplex, 20-A, straight-blade receptacles complying with requirements in this Section.

7. Data Communication Outlets: Blank insert with bushed cable opening complying with requirements in Section 27 1513 "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling."

2.11 FINISHES

A. Device Color:

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.



B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.

b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.

c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.

5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer.

7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.

8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.

9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right.



F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Dimmers:

1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing.

2. Verify that dimmers used for fan-speed control are listed for that application.

3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.

H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

I. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.

3.02 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.


A. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.

B. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.

2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.

D. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.

2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable.

3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.

4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.

5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.

6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.

E. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.



1515 08.29.2016 LED INTERIOR LIGHTING

SECTION 26 5119

LED INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following types of LED luminaires: 1. Cylinder. 2. Downlight. 3. Linear industrial. 4. Recessed linear. 5. Strip light. 6. Surface mount, linear. 7. Surface mount, nonlinear. 8. Suspended, linear. 9. Suspended, nonlinear. 10. Materials. 11. Finishes. 12. Luminaire support.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 26 0923"Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time

switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.

C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."

D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.

E. LED: Light-emitting diode.

F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

G. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation. 2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. 3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaires. 4. Include emergency lighting units, including batteries and chargers. 5. Include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy efficiency data.

a. Manufacturers' Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

b. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires, photometric data certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer.

B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details.



2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.


C. Product Schedule: For luminaires and lamps. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Luminaires. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Partitions and millwork that penetrate the ceiling or extend to within 12 inches of the plane

of the luminaires. 4. Structural members to which equipment and or luminaires will be attached. 5. Initial access modules for acoustical tile, including size and locations. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:

a. Other luminaires. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. f. Ceiling-mounted projectors. g. Acoustical material.

7. Moldings.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of luminaire.

C. Product Test Reports: For each luminaire, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

D. Sample warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Lamps: Ten for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each

type. 2. Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at

least one of each type. 3. Globes and Guards: One for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least

one of each type.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products, and complying with the applicable IES testing standards.

B. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.

C. Each luminaire type shall be binned within a three-step MacAdam Ellipse to ensure color consistency among luminaires.




A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

B. Warranty Period: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS


B. Standards: 1. ENERGY STAR certified. 2. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for

indicated class and division of hazard by an NRTL. 3. UL Listing: Listed for damp location. 4. Recessed luminaires shall comply with NEMA LE 4. 5. User Replaceable Lamps:

a. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C78.79. b. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61 or IEC 60061-1.

C. CRI of minimum 80. CCT of 3000 K.

D. Rated lamp life of 50,000 hours to L70.

E. Lamps dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output.

F. Internal driver.

G. Nominal Operating Voltage: 120 V ac or 277 V ac, as scheduled. 1. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.

H. Housings: 1. Extruded-aluminum housing and heat sink. 2. Clear finish.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Metal Parts: 1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated. 3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

C. Diffusers and Globes: 1. Tempered Fresnel glass, unless otherwise scheduled 2. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to

yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 3. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated. 4. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.

D. Housings: 1. Extruded-aluminum housing and heat sink. 2. Clear finish.



E. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps. Locate labels where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place. 1. Label shall include the following lamp characteristics:

a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b. Lamp diameter, shape, size, wattage, and coating. c. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

2.03 METAL FINISHES

A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and if they can be and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.04 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT

A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 0529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as luminaire.

C. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.

D. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

E. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire, line voltage, and equipment with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical connections before luminaire installation. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 TEMPORARY LIGHTING

A. If approved by the Architect, use selected permanent luminaires for temporary lighting. When construction is sufficiently complete, clean luminaires used for temporary lighting and install new lamps.

3.03 INSTALLATION


B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install lamps in each luminaire.

D. Supports: 1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping. 3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling or wall. 4. Luminaire mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100

percent of luminaire weight and vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.

E. Flush-Mounted Luminaire Support: 1. Secured to outlet box. 2. Attached to ceiling structural members at four points equally spaced around

circumference of luminaire. 3. Trim ring flush with finished surface.

F. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support: 1. Attached to structural members in walls. 2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board.



G. Ceiling-Mounted Luminaire Support: 1. Ceiling mount with two 5/32-inch- diameter aircraft cable supports adjustable to 120

inches in length.

H. Suspended Luminaire Support: 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with

approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices.

3. Continuous Rows of Luminaires: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and wire support for suspension for each unit length of luminaire chassis, including one at each end.

4. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure.

I. Ceiling-Grid-Mounted Luminaires: 1. Secure to any required outlet box. 2. Secure luminaire to the luminaire opening using approved fasteners in a minimum of four

locations, spaced near corners of luminaire. 3. Use approved devices and support components to connect luminaire to ceiling grid and

building structure in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire.

J. Comply with requirements in Section 26 0519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for wiring connections.

3.04 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after

electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation. 2. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation.

Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.

B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.


......


1515 08.29.2016 EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING

SECTION 26 5219

EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Emergency lighting units. 2. Exit signs. 3. Luminaire supports.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.

C. Emergency Lighting Unit: A lighting unit with internal or external emergency battery powered supply and the means for controlling and charging the battery and unit operation.

D. Fixture: See "Luminaire" Paragraph.

E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

F. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.


A. Product Data: For each type of emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and emergency lighting support.

1. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. 2. Include physical description of the unit and dimensions. 3. Battery and charger for light units. 4. Include life, output of luminaire (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data. 5. Include photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying

with IES LM-45, for each luminaire type. a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires and signs, photometric data

certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining luminaires and signs shall be certified by manufacturer.

B. Product Schedule: 1. For emergency lighting units. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 2. For exit signs. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Lamps: 5 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each

type. 2. Luminaire-mounted, emergency battery pack: One for every 50 emergency lighting units.

Furnish at least one of each type. 3. Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at

least one of each type.



4. Globes and Guards: One for every 50 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products, and complying with the applicable IES testing standards.


A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

1.09 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING


B. NRTL Compliance: Fabricate and label emergency lighting units, exit signs, and batteries to comply with UL 924.

C. Comply with NFPA 70 and NFPA 101.

D. Comply with NEMA LE 4 for recessed luminaires.

E. Comply with UL 1598 for fluorescent luminaires.

F. Lamp Base: Comply with ANSI C81.61 or IEC 60061-1.

G. Bulb Shape: Complying with ANSI C79.1.

H. Internal Type Emergency Power Unit: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within luminaire body and compatible with ballast. 1. Emergency Connection: Operate two lamp(s) continuously at an output of 1100 lumens

each upon loss of normal power. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to luminaire ballast. In no case may a single lamp be the only emergency source for a room.

2. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

3. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: a. Ambient Temperature: Less than 0 deg F or exceeding 104 deg F, with an average

value exceeding 95 deg F over a 24-hour period. b. Ambient Storage Temperature: Not less than minus 4 deg F and not exceeding 140

deg F. c. Humidity: More than 95 percent (condensing). d. Altitude: Exceeding 3300 feet.

4. Test Push-Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening luminaire or entering ceiling space. a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and

demonstrates unit operability.



b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

5. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 6. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer

relay. 7. Remote Test: Switch in handheld remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates

coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response.

8. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

I. External Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, suitable for powering one or more lamps, remote mounted from luminaire. 1. Emergency Connection: Operate two LED lamp continuously. Connect unswitched circuit

to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to luminaire ballast. 2. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to

80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

3. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 4. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type. 5. Housing: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure listed for installation inside, on top of, or remote

from luminaire. Remote assembly shall be located no less than half the distance recommended by the emergency power unit manufacturer, whichever is less.

6. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

7. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

8. Remote Test: Switch in handheld remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response.

9. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

2.03 EMERGENCY LIGHTING

A. General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units: Self-contained units.

B. Emergency Luminaires: 1. Emergency Luminaires: as indicated on Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule, with the

following additional features: a. Operating at nominal voltage of 120 V ac and 277 V ac. b. Internal emergency power unit. c. Rated for installation in damp locations, and for sealed and gasketed luminaires in

wet locations. d. UL 94 flame rating as required by local codes and fire marshal.

C. Emergency Lighting Unit: 1. Emergency Lighting Unit: as indicated on Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule. 2. Operating at nominal voltage of 120 V or ac 277 V ac. 3. Wall with universal junction box adaptor. 4. UV stable thermoplastic housing. 5. Two LED lamp heads. 6. Internal emergency power unit.



2.04 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs: 1. Operating at nominal voltage as scheduled. 2. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs; 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 3. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Internal emergency power unit. 4. Master/Remote Sign Configurations:

a. Master Unit: Comply with requirements above for self-powered exit signs, and provide additional capacity in LED power supply for power connection to remote unit.

b. Remote Unit: Comply with requirements above for self-powered exit signs, except omit power supply, battery, and test features. Arrange to receive full power requirements from master unit. Connect for testing concurrently with master unit as a unified system.

2.05 MATERIALS

A. Metal Parts: 1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated. 3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: 1. Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions. 2. Designed to permit relamping without use of tools. 3. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling

accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

C. Diffusers and Globes: 1. Tempered Fresnel glass, unless otherwise scheduled. 2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated. 3. Acrylic: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and other

changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 4. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.

D. Housings: 1. Extruded aluminum housing and heat sink. 2. Clear finish.

E. Conduit: Electrical metallic tubing, minimum 1/2 inch in diameter.

2.06 METAL FINISHES

A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.07 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 0529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Support Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for conditions affecting performance of luminaires.

B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical connections before luminaire installation.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings for suitable conditions where emergency lighting luminaires will be installed.



D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION


B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install lamps in each luminaire.

D. Supports: 1. Sized and rated for luminaire and emergency power unit weight. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position when testing emergency power unit. 3. Provide support for luminaire and emergency power unit without causing deflection of

ceiling or wall. 4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100

percent of luminaire and emergency power unit weight and vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.

E. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support: 1. Attached to structural members in walls. 2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board.

F. Suspended Luminaire Support: 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with

approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices.

3. Continuous Rows of Luminaires: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and wire support for suspension for each unit length of luminaire chassis, including one at each end.

4. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure.

G. Ceiling Grid Mounted Luminaires: 1. Secure to any required outlet box. 2. Secure emergency power unit using approved fasteners in a minimum of four locations,

spaced near corners of emergency power unit. 3. Use approved devices and support components to connect luminaire to ceiling grid and

building structure in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION



A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation.

Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.

B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.05 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service: 1. Charge emergency power units and batteries minimum of one hour and depress switch to

conduct short-duration test. 2. Charge emergency power units and batteries minimum of 24 hours and conduct one-hour

discharge test.

3.06 ADJUSTING

A. Adjustments: Within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site visit to do the following:



1. Inspect all luminaires. Replace lamps, emergency power units, batteries, signs, or luminaires that are defective. a. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and

supplies. 2. Conduct short-duration tests on all emergency lighting.



1515 08.29.2016 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

SECTION 27 0528

PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits and fittings. 2. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings. 3. Optical-fiber-cable pathways and fittings. 4. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 5. Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters. 6. Metallic surface pathways. 7. Nonmetallic surface pathways. 8. Tele-power poles. 9. Hooks. 10. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.

B. GRC: Galvanized rigid conduit.

C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

D. RTRC: Reinforced thermosetting resin conduit.


A. Product data for the following: 1. Surface pathways 2. Wireways and fittings. 3. Tele-power poles. 4. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.


A. Coordination Drawings: Pathway routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved: 1. Structural members in paths of pathway groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with

common supports.

B. Source quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS

A. Description: Metal raceway of circular cross section with manufacturer-fabricated fittings.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International. 3. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. 4. Southwire Company. 5. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. 6. Wheatland Tube Company.

C. General Requirements for Metal Conduits and Fittings:



1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, and marked for intended location and application.

2. Comply with TIA-569-D.

D. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

E. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A.

F. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

G. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated IMC. 1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.

H. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

I. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 1. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel or die cast. b. Type: Set screw or compression.

2. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL-467, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.

3. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

J. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.02 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS

A. Description: Nonmetallic raceway of circular section with manufacturer-fabricated fittings.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International. 3. Carlon; a brand of Thomas & Betts Corporation. 4. RACO; Hubbell. 5. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.

C. General Requirements for Nonmetallic Conduits and Fittings: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location

and application. 2. Comply with TIA-569-D.

D. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.

E. RTRC: Comply with UL 2515A and NEMA TC 14.

F. Fittings: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

G. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer.

2.03 OPTICAL-FIBER-CABLE PATHWAYS AND FITTINGS

A. Description: Comply with UL 2024; flexible-type pathway with a circular cross section, approved for general-use installation unless otherwise indicated.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Alpha Wire. 2. Carlon; a brand of Thomas & Betts Corporation. 3. Dura-Line. 4. Endot Industries Inc.

C. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.



D. Comply with TIA-569-D.

2.04 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A. Description: Sheet metal trough of rectangular cross section fabricated to required size and shape, without holes or knockouts, and with hinged or removable covers.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. B-line, an Eaton business. 2. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection. 3. Square D; by Schneider Electric.

C. General Requirements for Metal Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters: 1. Comply with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated, and sized

according to NFPA 70. 2. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application. 3. Comply with TIA-569-D.

D. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

E. Wireway Covers: Hinged type unless otherwise indicated.

F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.05 SURFACE METAL PATHWAYS

A. Description: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers, complying with UL 5.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Panduit Corp. 2. Wiremold / Legrand.

C. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect.

D. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Comply with TIA-569-D.

2.06 HOOKS

A. Description: Prefabricated sheet metal cable supports for telecommunications cable.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Panduit Corp. 2. Wiremold / Legrand.

C. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with TIA-569-D.

E. Stainless steel.

F. J shape.

2.07 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. Description: Enclosures for communications.

B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: 1. Comply with TIA-569-D. 2. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed and labeled as

defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for use in wet locations.



3. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

4. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep. 5. Gangable boxes are prohibited.

C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

E. Metal Floor Boxes: 1. Material: Cast metal. 2. Type: Fully adjustable. 3. Shape: Rectangular. 4. Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing

agency, and marked for intended location and application.

F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

G. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.

H. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.

I. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated on drawings, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures:

a. Material: Fiberglass. 3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

J. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable

front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PATHWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: GRC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: EMT. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, concrete encased. 4. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Pathway locations include the

following: a. Loading dock. b. Corridors. c. Mechanical rooms.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT or innerduct. 5. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC. 6. Pathways for Optical-Fiber or Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental

Air: EMT. 7. Pathways for Optical-Fiber or Communications-Cable Risers in Vertical Shafts: EMT.



8. Pathways for Concealed General-Purpose Distribution of Optical-Fiber or Communications Cable: General-use, optical-fiber-cable pathway.

9. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel units in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Pathway Size: 3/4-inch trade size for copper and aluminum cables, and 1 inch for optical-fiber cables.

D. Pathway Fittings: Compatible with pathways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless

otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type

of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

3. EMT: Use set-screw or compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

F. Install surface pathways only where indicated on Drawings.

G. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with the following standards for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this Section are stricter: 1. NECA 1. 2. NECA/BICSI 568. 3. TIA-569-D. 4. NECA 101 5. NECA 102. 6. NECA 105. 7. NECA 111.

B. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of pathways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping materials and installation for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.

D. Keep pathways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal pathway runs above water and steam piping.

E. Complete pathway installation before starting conductor installation.

F. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

G. Install no more than the equivalent of two 90-degree bends in any pathway run. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction. Utilize long radius ells for all optical-fiber cables.

H. Conceal rigid conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

I. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.

J. Pathways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement.

Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure pathways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals.

2. Arrange pathways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. Comply with requirements for expansion joints specified in this article.

3. Arrange pathways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in all directions. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for

each specific location. 5. Change from nonmetallic conduit and fittings to GRC and fittings before rising above floor.



K. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: 1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for pathways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or

in an enclosure.

L. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of pathway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

M. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated pathway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly.

N. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install insulated bushings on conduits terminated with locknuts.

O. Install pathways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus one additional quarter-turn.

P. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure, to assure a continuous ground path.

Q. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits of 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to ensure cut is straight and perpendicular to the length.

R. Install pull wires in empty pathways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Secure pull wire, so it cannot fall into conduit. Cap pathways designated as spare alongside pathways in use.

S. Surface Pathways: 1. Install surface pathway for surface telecommunications outlet boxes only where indicated

on Drawings. 2. Install surface pathway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points. 3. Secure surface pathway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not

exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight pathway section. Support surface pathway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.

T. Pathways for Optical-Fiber and Communications Cable: Install pathways, metal and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows: 1. 3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 50 feet. 2. 1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 75 feet. 3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of pathway

unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements.

U. Install pathway-sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed pathways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install pathway-sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

V. Install devices to seal pathway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals, so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all pathways at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated

spaces. 2. Where an underground service pathway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

W. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding PVC conduit and fittings.

X. Expansion-Joint Fittings:



1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F, and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet.

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations: a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F

temperature change. 3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of

length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits.

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints.

5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

Y. Hooks: 1. Size to allow a minimum of 25 percent future capacity without exceeding design capacity

limits. 2. Shall be supported by dedicated support wires. Do not use ceiling grid support wire or

support rods. 3. Hook spacing shall allow no more than 6 inches of slack. The lowest point of the cables

shall be no less than 6 inches adjacent to ceilings, mechanical ductwork and fittings, luminaires, power conduits, power and telecommunications outlets, and other electrical and communications equipment.

4. Space hooks no more than 5 feet o.c. 5. Provide a hook at each change in direction.

Z. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.

AA. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surface to provide a flat surface for a rain-tight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

BB. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls, so they are not in the same vertical channel.

CC. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

DD. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

EE. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

3.03 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS PENETRATIONS


3.04 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping."



3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage or deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating

recommended by manufacturer.



1515 08.29.2016 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

SECTION 28 3111

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Manual fire-alarm boxes. 2. System smoke detectors. 3. Air-sampling smoke detectors. 4. Nonsystem smoke detectors. 5. Heat detectors. 6. Notification appliances. 7. Device guards. 8. Firefighters' smoke-control station. 9. Magnetic door holders. 10. Addressable interface device. 11. Network communications.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 28 0513 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" for cables

and conductors for fire-alarm systems.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing.

B. FACP: Fire Alarm Control Panel.

C. HLI: High Level Interface.

D. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.

E. PC: Personal computer.

F. VESDA: Very Early Smoke-Detection Apparatus.


A. Product Data: For each type of product, including furnished options and accessories. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions, profiles, and finishes. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and electrical characteristics.

B. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. 1. Comply with recommendations and requirements in the "Documentation" section of the

"Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72. 2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 3. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and locations. Indicate conductor sizes, indicate termination locations and requirements, and distinguish between factory and field wiring.

4. Detail assembly and support requirements. 5. Include voltage drop calculations for notification-appliance circuits. 6. Include battery-size calculations, include existing devices in calculations. 7. Include input/output matrix. 8. Include statement from manufacturer that all equipment and components have been

tested as a system and meet all requirements in this Specification and in NFPA 72. 9. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector.



10. Verify that each duct detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and

humidity possible when air-handling system is operating. 11. Provide program report showing that air-sampling detector pipe layout balances

pneumatically within the airflow range of the air-sampling detector. 12. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts,

drawn to scale; coordinate location of duct smoke detectors and access to them. a. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes,

detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. b. Show field wiring and equipment required for HVAC unit shutdown on alarm and

override by firefighters' smoke-evacuation system. c. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

13. Include voice/alarm signaling-service equipment rack or console layout, grounding schematic, amplifier power calculation, and single-line connection diagram.

C. General Submittal Requirements: 1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction, as required, prior to

submitting them to Architect. 2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design. b. NICET-certified, fire-alarm technician; Level III minimum.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For notification appliances and smoke and heat detectors, in addition to submittals listed above, indicate compliance with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Drawings showing the location of each notification appliance and smoke and heat detector, ratings of each, and installation details as needed to comply with listing conditions of the device.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of detection, complying with NFPA 72. Calculate spacing and intensities for strobe signals and sound-pressure levels for audible appliances.

3. Indicate audible appliances required to produce square wave signal per NFPA 72.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 01 7823 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"

include the following and deliver copies to authorities having jurisdiction: a. Comply with the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance"

chapter in NFPA 72. b. Provide "Fire Alarm and Emergency Communications System Record of Completion

Documents" according to the "Completion Documents" Article in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

c. Complete wiring diagrams showing connections between all devices and equipment. Each conductor shall be numbered at every junction point with indication of origination and termination points.

d. Riser diagram. e. Device addresses. f. Air-sampling system sample port locations and modeling program report showing

layout meets performance criteria. g. Record copy of site-specific software.



h. Provide "Inspection and Testing Form" according to the "Inspection, Testing and

Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72, and include the following: 1) Equipment tested. 2) Frequency of testing of installed components. 3) Frequency of inspection of installed components. 4) Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance. 5) Manufacturer's user training manuals.

i. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount

installed, but no fewer than one unit. 2. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer

than one unit. 3. Smoke Detectors, Fire Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type

installed, but no fewer than one unit of each type. 4. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to two percent of amount of each type installed, but no

fewer than one unit of each type. 5. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked or tamperproofed components. 6. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: One of each type installed. 7. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system. Provide in a box or cabinet with

compartments marked with fuse types and sizes. 8. Filters for Air-Sampling Detectors: Quantity equal to two percent of amount of each type

installed, but no fewer than one unit of each type.


A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level II technician.

C. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by an NRTL (nationally recognized testing laboratory).

1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Perform a full test of the existing system prior to starting work. Document any equipment or components not functioning as designed.

B. Interruption of Existing Fire-Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire-alarm service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of fire-alarm

service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of fire-alarm service without Owner's written permission.

C. Use of Devices during Construction: Protect devices during construction unless devices are placed in service to protect the facility during construction.

1.10 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Existing Fire-Alarm Equipment: Maintain existing equipment fully operational until new equipment has been tested and accepted. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOT IN SERVICE" until it is accepted. Remove labels from new equipment when put into service, and label existing fire-alarm equipment "NOT IN SERVICE" until removed from the building.

B. Equipment Removal: After acceptance of new fire-alarm system, remove existing disconnected fire-alarm equipment and wiring.



1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire-alarm system equipment and components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Extent: All equipment and components not covered in the Maintenance Service

Agreement. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Components shall be compatible with, and operate as an extension of, existing system. Provide system manufacturer's certification that all components provided have been tested as, and will operate as, a system.

B. Noncoded, UL-certified addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission and voice/strobe evacuation.

C. Automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors.

D. All components provided shall be listed for use with the selected system.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.02 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems: 1. Manual stations. 2. Heat detectors. 3. Smoke detectors. 4. Duct smoke detectors. 5. Air-sampling smoke-detection system (VESDA). 6. Carbon monoxide detectors. 7. Combustible gas detectors. 8. Automatic sprinkler system water flow. 9. Preaction system. 10. Fire-extinguishing system operation. 11. Fire standpipe system. 12. Dry system pressure flow switch.

B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions: 1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances, including voice evacuation notices. 2. Identify alarm and specific initiating device at fire-alarm control unit, connected network

control panels, off-premises network control panels, and remote annunciators. 3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station. 4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths. 5. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders. 6. Activate voice/alarm communication system. 7. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm mode. 8. Activate smoke-control system (smoke management) at firefighters' smoke-control system

panel. 9. Activate stairwell and elevator-shaft pressurization systems. 10. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems. 11. Provide control action for Won-Door system(s). 12. Record events in the system memory. 13. Indicate device in alarm on the graphic annunciator.

C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions: 1. Valve supervisory switch. 2. Alert and Action signals of air-sampling detector system. 3. Independent fire-detection and -suppression systems.



4. User disabling of zones or individual devices. 5. Loss of communication with any panel on the network.

D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions: 1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits. 2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating

devices. 3. Loss of communication with any addressable sensor, input module, relay, control module,

remote annunciator, printer interface, or Ethernet module. 4. Break in standby battery circuitry. 5. Failure of battery charging. 6. Voice signal amplifier failure.

E. System Supervisory Signal Actions: 1. Initiate notification appliances. 2. Identify specific device initiating the event at fire-alarm control unit, connected network

control panels, off-premises network control panels, and remote annunciators. 3. After a time delay of 200 seconds, transmit a trouble or supervisory signal to the remote

alarm receiving station. 4. Transmit system status to building management system. 5. Display system status on graphic annunciator.

2.03 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES

A. Manufacturer shall be fully compatible with existing fire alarm system

B. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be finished in white with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box. 1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type; with

integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch. 3. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated, clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to

permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an integral battery-powered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarm operation.

2.04 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS


B. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors: 1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Detectors shall be four-wire type. 3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or

trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. 4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a

twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type, indicating detector has operated and power-on status.

7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be digital-addressable type, individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire-alarm control unit. a. Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic of combination smoke- and heat-detection

units shall be selectable at fire-alarm control unit for 15 or 20 deg F per minute.



b. Fixed-temperature sensing characteristic of combination smoke- and heat-detection

units shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall be settable at fire-alarm control unit to operate at 135 or 155 deg F.

c. Multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor. d. Sensitivity levels based on time of day.

C. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: 1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to

identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting. 2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to

manually access the following for each detector: a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

D. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A. 1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to

identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting. 2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to

manually access the following for each detector: a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

3. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with the supplied detector for smoke detection in HVAC system ducts.

4. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity. 5. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific

duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.

6. Relay Fan Shutdown: Fully programmable relay rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.

2.05 MULTICRITERIA DETECTORS

A. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.

B. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

C. Automatically adjusts its sensitivity by means of drift compensation and smoothing algorithms. The detector shall send trouble alarm if it is incapable of compensating for existing conditions.

D. Test button tests all sensors in the detector.

E. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector: 1. Primary status. 2. Device type. 3. Present sensitivity selected. 4. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

F. Sensors: The detector shall be comprised of four sensing elements including a smoke sensor, a carbon monoxide sensor, an infrared sensor, and a heat sensor. 1. Smoke sensor shall be photoelectric type as described in "System Smoke Detectors"

Article. 2. Carbon monoxide sensor shall be as described in "Carbon Monoxide Detectors" Article. 3. Heat sensor shall be as described in "Heat Detectors" Article. 4. Each sensor shall be separately listed according to requirements for its detector type.



2.06 HEAT DETECTORS


B. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521. 1. Temperature sensors shall test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the device.

C. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F or a rate of rise that exceeds 15 deg F per minute unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or

trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2.07 AIR-SAMPLING SMOKE DETECTOR


B. General Description: 1. Air-sampling smoke detector shall be laser based using a piping system and a fan to

transport the particles of combustion to the detector. 2. Provide two levels of alarm from each zone covered by the detector and two supervisory

levels of alarm from each detector. 3. The air being sampled shall pass through filters to remove dust particulates greater than

20 microns before entering the detection chamber. 4. Detectors shall have the capability via RS 485 to connect up to 100 detectors in a

network. 5. Detectors shall communicate with the fire-alarm control unit via addressable, monitored

dry contact closures, RS 485, and interface modules. Provide a minimum of six relays, individually programmable remotely for any function.

6. Pipe airflow balancing calculations shall be performed using approved calculation software.

C. Detector: 1. Detector, Filter, Aspirator, and Relays: Housed in a mounting box and arranged in such a

way that air is drawn from the detection area and a sample passed through the dual-stage filter and detector by the aspirator.

2. Obscuration Sensitivity Range: 0.005 - 6 percent obs/ft. 3. Four independent, field-programmable, smoke-alarm thresholds per sensor pipe and a

programmable scan time delay. The threshold set points shall be programmable. a. The four alarm thresholds may be used as follows:

1) Alarm Level 1 (Alert): Activate a visual and an audible supervisory alarm. 2) Alarm Level 2 (Action): Activate shutdown of electrical/HVAC equipment and

activate a visual and an audible supervisory alarm. 3) Alarm Level 3 (Fire 1): Activate building alarm systems and initiate call to fire

response unit. 4) Alarm Level 4 (Fire 2): Activate suppression system or other countermeasures.

b. Final Detection System Settings: Approved by AHJ. c. Initial Detection Alarm Settings:

1) Alarm Level 1 (Alert): 0.08 percent obs/ft. 2) Alarm Level 2 (Action): 1.0 percent obs/ft. 3) Alarm Level 3 (Fire 1): 2.0 percent obs/ft. 4) Alarm Level 4 (Fire 2): 4.0 percent obs/ft.

4. Power Supply: a. Regulated 24-V dc, monitored by the fire-alarm control unit, with battery backup. b. Battery backup shall provide 24 hours' standby, followed by 30 minutes at maximum

connected load. 5. Detector shall also transmit the following faults:

a. Detector. b. Airflow. c. Filter.



d. System. e. Zone. f. Network. g. Power.

6. Provide four in-line sample pipe inlets that shall contain a flow sensor for each pipe inlet. The detector shall be capable of identifying the pipe from which smoke was detected.

7. Aspirator: Air pump capable of allowing for multiple sampling pipe runs up to 650 feet in total, (four pipe runs per detector) with a transport time of less than 120 seconds from the farthest sample port.

8. Air-Sampling Flow Rates Outside Manufacturer's Specified Range: Result in a trouble alarm.

9. Provide software-programmable relays rated at 2 A at 30-V dc for alarm and fault conditions.

10. Provide built-in event and smoke logging; store smoke levels, alarm conditions, operator actions, and faults with date and time of each event. Each detector (zone) shall be capable of storing up to 18,000 events.

11. Urgent and Minor Faults. Minor faults shall be designated as trouble alarms. Urgent faults, which indicate the unit may not be able to detect smoke, shall be designated as supervisory alarms.

D. Displays: 1. Include display module within each detector. 2. Each display shall provide the following features at a minimum:

a. A bar-graph display. b. Four independent, high-intensity alarm indicators (Alert, Action, Fire 1, and Fire 2),

corresponding to the four alarm thresholds of the indicated sector. c. Alarm threshold indicators for Alert, Action, and Fire 1. d. LED indication that the first alarm sector is established. e. Detector fault and airflow fault indicators. f. LED indicators shall be provided for faults originating in the particular zone (Zone

Fault), faults produced by the overall smoke-detection system, and faults resulting from network wiring errors (Network Fault).

g. Minor and urgent LED fault indicators.

E. Sampling Tubes: 1. Smooth bore with a nominal 1-inch OD and a 7/8-inch ID. Sampling pipe with between

5/8- and 1-inch ID can be used in specifically approved locations when recommended by manufacturer.

2. Pipe Material: CPVC and complying with UL 1887, "Safety Fire Test of Plastic Sprinkler Pipe for Visible Flame and Smoke Characteristics."

3. Joints in the sampling pipe shall be airtight. Use solvent cement approved by the pipe manufacturer on all joints except at entry to the detector.

4. Identify piping with labels reading: "Aspirating Smoke Detector Pipe - Do Not Paint or Disturb" along its entire length at regular intervals according to NFPA 72.

5. Support pipes at not more than 60-inch centers. 6. Fit end of each trunk or branch pipe with an end cap and drilled with a hole appropriately

sized to achieve the performance as specified and as calculated by the system design.

F. Sampling Holes: 1. Sampling holes of 5/64 inch, or other sized holes per manufacturer's written instructions,

shall be separated by not more than the maximum distance allowable for conventional smoke detectors. Intervals may vary according to calculations.

2. Follow manufacturer's written recommendations to determine the number and spacing of sampling points and the distance from sampling points to ceiling or roof structure and to forced ventilation systems.

3. Each sampling point shall be identified by an applied decal.



2.08 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES


B. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification-appliance signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections. 1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting

assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections.

C. Chimes, Low-Level Output: Vibrating type, 75-dBA minimum rated output.

D. Chimes, High-Level Output: Vibrating type, 81-dBA minimum rated output.

E. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol.

F. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights complying with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch-high letters on the lens.

1. Rated Light Output: a. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field.

2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated. 3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined

with guards in place. 4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units. 5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals. 6. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, red.

G. Voice/Tone Notification Appliances: 1. Comply with UL 1480. 2. Speakers for Voice Notification: Locate speakers for voice notification to provide the

intelligibility requirements of the "Notification Appliances" and "Emergency Communications Systems" chapters in NFPA 72.

3. High-Range Units: Rated 2 to 15 W. 4. Low-Range Units: Rated 1 to 2 W. 5. Mounting: Flush. 6. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to acoustical environment of speaker

location.

H. Exit Marking Audible Notification Appliance: 1. Exit marking audible notification appliances shall meet the audibility requirements in

NFPA 72. 2. Provide exit marking audible notification appliances at the entrance to all building exits.

2.09 FIREFIGHTERS' SMOKE-CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Initiate Smoke-Management Sequence of Operation: 1. Comply with sequence of operation as described in Section 23 0993.11 "Sequence of

Operations for HVAC DDC." 2. Fire-alarm system shall provide all interfaces and control points required to properly

activate smoke-management systems. 3. First fire-alarm system initiating device to go into alarm condition shall activate the smoke-

control functions. 4. Subsequent devices going into alarm condition shall have no effect on the smoke-control

mode.

B. Addressable Relay Modules:



1. Provide address-setting means on the module. Store an internal identifying code for

control panel use to identify the module type. 2. Allow the control panel to switch the relay contacts on command. 3. Have a minimum of two normally open and two normally closed contacts available for field

wiring. 4. Listed for controlling HVAC fan motor controllers.

2.10 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS

A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete with matching doorplate. 1. Electromagnets: Require no more than 3 W to develop 25-lbf holding force. 2. Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted unless otherwise indicated. 3. Rating: 24-V ac or dc. 4. Rating: 120-V ac.

B. Material and Finish: Match door hardware.

2.11 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A. General: 1. Include address-setting means on the module. 2. Store an internal identifying code for control panel use to identify the module type. 3. Listed for controlling HVAC fan motor controllers.

B. Monitor Module: Microelectronic module providing a system address for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.

C. Control Module: 1. Operate notification devices. 2. Operate solenoids for use in sprinkler service.

2.12 NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS

A. Provide network communications for fire-alarm system according to fire-alarm manufacturer's written requirements.

B. Provide network communications pathway per manufacturer's written requirements and requirements in NFPA 72 and NFPA 70.

C. Provide integration gateway using BACnet for connection to building automation system.

2.13 DEVICE GUARDS

A. Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for the manual station, smoke detector, gong, or other device requiring protection. 1. Factory fabricated and furnished by device manufacturer. 2. Finish: Paint of color to match the protected device.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for ventilation, temperature, humidity, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that manufacturer's written instructions for environmental conditions have been

permanently established in spaces where equipment and wiring are installed, before installation begins.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations of connections before installation.




3.02 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 72, NFPA 101, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for installation and testing of fire-alarm equipment. Install all electrical wiring to comply with requirements in NFPA 70 including, but not limited to, Article 760, "Fire Alarm Systems." 1. Devices placed in service before all other trades have completed cleanup shall be

replaced. 2. Devices installed but not yet placed in service shall be protected from construction dust,

debris, dirt, moisture, and damage according to manufacturer's written storage instructions.

B. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational before making changes or connections. 1. Connect new equipment to existing control panel in existing part of the building. 2. Connect new equipment to existing monitoring equipment at the supervising station. 3. Expand, modify, and supplement existing control and monitoring equipment as necessary

to extend existing control and monitoring functions to the new points. New components shall be capable of merging with existing configuration without degrading the performance of either system.

C. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 78 inches above the finished floor.

D. Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: 1. Install manual fire-alarm box in the normal path of egress within 60 inches of the exit

doorway. 2. Mount manual fire-alarm box on a background of a contrasting color. 3. The operable part of manual fire-alarm box shall be between 42 inches and 48 inches

above floor level. All devices shall be mounted at the same height unless otherwise indicated.

E. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing: 1. Comply with the "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating Devices"

chapter in NFPA 72, for smoke-detector spacing. 2. Comply with the "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating Devices" chapter

in NFPA 72, for heat-detector spacing. 3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet. 4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high

ceiling areas shall be determined according to Annex Ain NFPA 72. 5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 60 inches from air-supply diffuser or return-air

opening. 6. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of a lighting

fixture and not directly above pendant mounted or indirect lighting.

F. Install a cover on each smoke detector that is not placed in service during construction. Cover shall remain in place except during system testing. Remove cover prior to system turnover.

G. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of duct. Tubes more than 36 inches long shall be supported at both ends. 1. Do not install smoke detector in duct smoke-detector housing during construction. Install

detector only during system testing and prior to system turnover.

H. Air-Sampling Smoke Detectors: If using multiple pipe runs, the runs shall be pneumatically balanced.

I. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install in a visible location near each smoke detector, sprinkler water-flow switch, and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position.

J. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated.



K. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6

inches below the ceiling. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated.

L. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

3.03 PATHWAYS

A. Pathways above recessed ceilings and in non-accessible locations may be routed exposed. 1. Exposed pathways located less than 96 inches above the floor shall be installed in EMT.

B. Pathways shall be installed in EMT.

C. Exposed EMT shall be painted red enamel.

3.04 CONNECTIONS

A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware." Connect hardware and devices to fire-alarm system. 1. Verify that hardware and devices are listed for use with installed fire-alarm system before

making connections.

B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 36 inches from the device controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system being controlled. 1. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated HVAC duct systems. 2. Magnetically held-open doors. 3. Electronically locked doors and access gates. 4. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies. 5. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches. 6. Data communication circuits for connection to building management system. 7. Supervisory connections at fire-extinguisher locations.

3.05 IDENTIFICATION


B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.

3.06 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.

B. Ground shielded cables at the control panel location only. Insulate shield at device location.


A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.

a. Inspection shall be based on completed record Drawings and system documentation that is required by the "Completion Documents, Preparation" table in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

b. Comply with the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the "Inspection" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.

2. System Testing: Comply with the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.



3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4.

4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

D. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances.

E. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

G. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

H. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

3.08 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service organization. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 1. Include visual inspections according to the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the

"Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. 2. Perform tests in the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection,

Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. 3. Perform tests per the "Testing Frequencies" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the

"Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

3.09 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system.


......